JP7740459B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a lottery is held to determine whether a player will win a prize or not, based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and when a player wins, for example, a predetermined gaming value can be awarded to the player depending on the fulfillment of predetermined winning conditions.

This gaming machine is provided with presentation means such as a display unit that can change patterns visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light-emitting unit that can change to a single color or luminous color, and is configured to enhance the presentation effect during play by changing the display mode of the above presentation means according to the progress of the game, etc. (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-126296

In order to increase the interest in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effect of the presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in claim 1 comprises a presentation means for performing a predetermined presentation as the game progresses, the presentation means comprising: a light-emitting means having a light-emitting section that emits light; a light-guiding means that makes a predetermined aspect of the game visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident from a predetermined position; and a diffusion means that diffuses the light from the light-emitting means beyond the width of the light-emitting section, the diffusion means comprising a multi-directional illumination means that has at least a first-direction illumination section that illuminates light in a first direction when light emitted from one of the light-emitting means is incident from the predetermined position, and a second-direction illumination section that illuminates light in a second direction different from the first direction, the diffusion means being provided with two or more of the multi-directional illumination means for one of the light-emitting means, and the light-guiding means having a curved surface at least in part, at least the curved surface making the predetermined aspect visible .

According to a first aspect of the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine including a presentation means for producing a predetermined presentation as a game progresses, the presentation means including a light-emitting means having a light-emitting portion for emitting light, a light-guiding means for making a predetermined aspect of the game visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, and a diffusing means for diffusing the light from the light-emitting means beyond the width of the light-emitting portion, the diffusing means including a multi-directional illumination means having at least a first-directional illumination portion for irradiating the light emitted from one of the light-emitting means in a first direction when the light is incident from the predetermined portion and a second-directional illumination portion for irradiating the light in a second direction different from the first direction, the diffusing means including two or more of the multi-directional illumination means for one of the light-emitting means , and the light-guiding means having at least a curved surface at least in part that makes the predetermined aspect visible , thereby advantageously increasing attention to the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an arrangement of symbols arranged on each reel of a drum display device. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the light guide unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the front side of the light guide unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the rear side of the light guide unit. 8 is a diagram showing the positional relationship of the drum display device 81 and the positional relationship of the confirmation lamp and the display area forming member with respect to the schematic side cross-sectional view of the light guide unit 400 taken along line XX in FIG. 7. FIG. 2 is a schematic perspective view of a front light guide plate and a rear light guide plate. A schematic front view showing the positional relationship between the first decorative pattern group that can be lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate, the rear upper LEDs of the rear upper LED unit, and the rear lower LEDs of the lower LED unit. 13 is a schematic enlarged view of part A in FIG. 12, and is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the rear downward diffusion lens formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate and the rear downward LED of the lower LED unit. FIG. 14 is a schematic enlarged view of part B in FIG. 13, showing the optical path of light through the rear downward diffusion lens; Figures showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group displayed on the rear light guide plate, where (a) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the rear upper LEDs and rear lower LEDs corresponding to the right area of the rear light guide plate are lit, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the rear upper LEDs and rear lower LEDs corresponding to the central area of the rear light guide plate are additionally lit from the state of (a). 15A and 15B are diagrams showing the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group displayed on the rear light guide plate, where (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group when the rear upper LEDs and rear lower LEDs corresponding to the left region of the rear light guide plate are additionally turned on from the state of FIG. 15B, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group when the rear upper LEDs and rear lower LEDs corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate are turned off from the state of (a). Figures showing the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group that is lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate when the confirmation lamp is lit, where (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group when the confirmation lamp is not lit and the rear upper LED and rear lower LED corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate are lit, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group when, from the state of (a), the confirmation lamp is lit and the rear lower LED corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate is additionally lit, while the rear upper LED corresponding to the central region and right region of the rear light guide plate are turned off. 17(b) is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group that is lit on the rear light guide plate when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, and the rear lower LEDs corresponding to the left region of the rear light guide plate are additionally turned on, while the rear upper LEDs corresponding to the left region, central region, and right region of the rear light guide plate are turned off; and FIG. 17(b) is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the confirmation lamp is turned off, and the rear upper LEDs corresponding to the left region and central region of the rear light guide plate are additionally turned on, while the rear upper LEDs and rear lower LEDs corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate are turned off; and FIG. 17(b) is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group when the confirmation lamp is turned off, and the rear upper LEDs corresponding to the left region and central region of the rear light guide plate are additionally turned on, while the rear upper LEDs and rear lower LEDs corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate are turned off; A schematic front view showing the relationship between the second decorative pattern group, the third decorative pattern group and the fourth decorative pattern group that can be lit and displayed on the front light guide plate, and the front lower LED unit, the front right LED unit and the front left LED unit. FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically illustrating the optical path of light through each condenser lens. (a) is a diagram showing the uneven shape forming the second decorative pattern group of the front light guide plate and the direction of light in which the second decorative pattern group can be lit up and displayed, and (b) is a diagram showing the uneven shape forming the fourth decorative pattern group of the front light guide plate and the direction of light in which the fourth decorative pattern group can be lit up and displayed. Figures showing the lighting modes of the second decorative pattern group, the third decorative pattern, and the fourth decorative pattern group that are lit and displayed on the front light guide plate, where (a) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting mode of the fourth decorative pattern group when the front right LED and the front left LED are lit relative to the front light guide plate, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting mode of the second decorative pattern group when the front lower LEDs on the right and left ends of the front light guide plate are lit. Figures showing the lighting modes of the second decorative pattern group, the third decorative pattern, and the fourth decorative pattern group that are lit and displayed on the front light guide plate, where (a) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting mode of the third decorative pattern when the front lower LED in the center part of the front light guide plate is lit, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting mode of the second decorative pattern group and the third decorative pattern when all the front lower LEDs on the front light guide plate are lit. These figures show the effects produced by the front light guide plate, rear light guide plate and drum display device, where (a) is a schematic diagram showing the unlit state of the first decorative pattern group, the second decorative pattern group, the third decorative pattern and the fourth decorative pattern group, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the unlit state of the first decorative pattern group, the second decorative pattern group and the third decorative pattern while the fourth decorative pattern group is lit. These figures show the effects performed by the front light guide plate, rear light guide plate, and drum display device, where (a) is a schematic diagram showing the second decorative pattern group and the third decorative pattern in a lit state while the first decorative pattern group and the fourth decorative pattern group in a non-lit state, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the first decorative pattern group in a lit state while the second decorative pattern group, the third decorative pattern, and the fourth decorative pattern group in a non-lit state. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. This is a diagram showing the configuration of various counters, each reserved ball storage area, and reserved ball execution area. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot random number table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a reservation number table. 1A is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of table A of the stop pattern table, FIG. 1B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of table B of the stop pattern table, and FIG. 1C is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of table C of the stop pattern table. A diagram showing a schematic example of a variation pattern table for misses. This is a diagram showing a schematic example of a fluctuation pattern table for a jackpot. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a light guide plate lighting pattern table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a confirmation lamp lighting pattern table. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of each of the retained information storage areas and the execution information storage area. 10 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. This is a flowchart showing the start-up winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. This is a flowchart showing the special chart change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a startup process executed by an MPU in the voice and lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice and lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable performance process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a confirmation lamp lighting setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a light guide pattern setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 1 is a diagram schematically illustrating the optical path of light distributed by the rear-downward diffusion lens when the rear-downward LED of FIG. 1 is lit. 1A and 1B are schematic side cross-sectional views of a front light guide plate showing the light guide pattern of light guided within the front light guide plate when a front-down LED is lit, where FIG. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic view of the light guide pattern within the front light guide plate of light incident from a front-down LED into the front light guide plate at an upward angle of 45 degrees, FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a schematic view of the light guide pattern within the front light guide plate of light incident from a front-down LED into the front light guide plate at a downward angle of 45 degrees, and FIG. 1C is a diagram showing a schematic view of the light guide pattern within the front light guide plate of light incident from a front-down LED into the front light guide plate in a direction directly ahead. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the position of a switching point P in the front view of the front light guide plate shown in FIG. 19 . 10 is a perspective view schematically showing a light guide state within the front light guide plate of light incident on the front light guide plate at an upward angle of 45 degrees from a front right LED. FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic side cross-sectional view of a light guide unit according to a second embodiment, illustrating a positional relationship of a drum display device with respect to the light guide unit; A schematic front view showing the positional relationship between the third upper decorative pattern group and the third upward LED, the positional relationship between the third lower decorative pattern group and the third right LED of the third right LED unit, and the positional relationship between the third lower decorative pattern group and the third left LED of the third left LED unit, which can be lit and displayed on the third light guide plate in the third embodiment. An explanatory diagram showing the patterns of pseudo-stopping symbols that can be stopped in the variable element of the ``pseudo-variation'' in the variable performance of the third symbol in the fourth embodiment. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams showing the progression of variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" performed by the drum display device in the fourth embodiment, where (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the pseudo stop pattern as "pseudo stop 1" is stopped, (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the pseudo stop pattern as "pseudo stop 2" is stopped from the state of (a), (c) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the "reach forming pattern" is stopped from the state of (b), and (d) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the "reach display" is performed from the state of (c). FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the left reel unit in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram illustrating the operating principle of a stepping motor according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a connection diagram showing a drive system of a stepping motor according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between excitation data and excitation order pointers in the fifth embodiment. A figure showing an example of the driving characteristics of a stepping motor executed in a series of variable performances in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the driving characteristics of a stepping motor executed during the "full rotation" effect in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an excitation pattern of a normal acceleration process in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an excitation pattern of special acceleration processing in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the driving mode of each reel and the output mode of music during the "full rotation" effect in the fifth embodiment. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams showing the progression of the "full rotation" effect performed on the drum display device in the fifth embodiment, in which (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the provisional jackpot result based on the "1" symbol has stopped, (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the middle and right reels have started to rotate with normal acceleration processing from the state of (a), (c) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the middle and right reels are rotating at a high speed and a constant speed and the left reel has started to rotate with special acceleration processing from the state of (b), (d) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the left, middle and right reels are rotating at a high speed and a constant speed from the state of (c), (e) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the left, middle and right reels are rotating at a high speed and a constant speed, similar to the state of (d), and (f) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the provisional jackpot result based on the "2" symbol has stopped from the state of (e). 13 is a flowchart showing a motor control process executed by an MPU in a display control device according to a fifth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel spin start process executed by an MPU in a display control device according to a fifth embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the driving mode of each reel and the output mode of music during the "full rotation" effect in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the driving mode of each reel and the output mode of music during the "full rotation" effect in the seventh embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 46. Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, Figure 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 3 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed with roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be able to open and close relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be able to open and close towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided acting as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see Figure 3), which has numerous nails and winning holes 63, 64a, 64b, 65a, etc., is removably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. Attached to the inner frame 12 are a ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 26) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

The front side of the inner frame 12 is provided with a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1) to support the front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15, and the side where the hinges 19 are attached serves as the opening and closing axis, allowing the front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15 to be opened and closed toward the front. The inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation. The pachinko machine 10 is also provided with a door opening switch (not shown) that detects when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 has been unlocked and opened (the door has been opened).

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed as a roughly oval opening in its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls that juts out forward and is roughly box-shaped with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are dispensed into this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is sloped downward to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a. In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the top surface of the upper tray 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect executed by the drum display device 81 (see Figure 3), which will be described later. The frame button 22 is also used as an operation button that allows the player to select the effect content and execution timing, such as the type of so-called preview display, which is one form of variable effect.

The variable effect is an effect displayed on the drum display device 81, and as described below, is executed when a ball fired into the front area of the game board 13 enters a specific winning hole (first starting hole 64a or second starting hole 64b described below; see Figure 3) (starting winning). After the symbols (each of the third symbols printed on the drum display device 81 described below) are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the combination of symbols displayed in a static state indicates to the player the result of the lottery held for the starting winning (whether it is a jackpot or not).

A stage is a presentation mode that provides consistency to the various presentations displayed on the drum display device 81, and this pachinko machine 10 has three stages: "Town Stage," "Sky Stage," and "Island Stage." Various presentations, such as the above-mentioned variable presentations and reach presentations executed during variable presentations, are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme assigned to each stage.

The stage changes when the player presses the frame button 22 during a period when no change effects are being performed, or during a high-speed change in which the third symbol is displayed changing rapidly and invisible to the player. Each time the frame button 22 is pressed, the stage changes repeatedly in the following order: "City Stage" → "Empty Stage" → "Island Stage" → "City Stage" → ... Additionally, immediately after powering on, the "City Stage" is set as the initial stage.

In addition, when the "normal reach" presentation element, which will be described later, is initiated during the variable presentation performed on the drum display device 81, if the "normal reach" presentation element develops into the "super reach" presentation element, which will also be described later, a selection screen for the "super reach" presentation element may be displayed on the drum display device 81 during the "normal reach" presentation element.

The selection screen displays multiple candidate effect elements that can be selected as "Super Reach" effect elements, with one of the candidate effect elements being selected. If the player presses the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the selected candidate effect element will change. The content of the "Super Reach" effect element is then determined based on the candidate effect element that was selected when the "Super Reach" effect element was developed (i.e., when the selection screen ends), and the "Super Reach" effect element is executed on the drum display device 81 according to that content.

In this embodiment, the frame buttons 22 are configured as buttons to be pressed, but instead of the frame buttons 22, they may be configured as operating levers that can be tilted by the player in a predetermined direction relative to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, forward, backward, right, or left relative to the pachinko machine 10). Then, based on the direction in which the operating lever is tilted, the performance stage may be selected or a "super reach" performance element may be selected.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting devices such as lamps around its periphery (e.g., corners). These light-emitting devices change their light-emitting behavior by lighting up or flashing in response to changes in the game state, such as when a jackpot or a predetermined reach is reached, thereby enhancing the presentation effects during gameplay. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating light-emitting devices such as full-color light-emitting diodes ("Light Emitting Diodes"; hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "LEDs") capable of emitting light in seven colors (white, purple, blue, blue-green, green, yellow, and red). In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps. When a jackpot or reach is reached, the built-in LEDs light up or flash, causing each illumination unit 29-33 to light up or flash, indicating that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is just one step away from a jackpot. Additionally, an indicator lamp 34 is provided in the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front, which incorporates a light-emitting device such as an LED and can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed on the underside of the right-side illumination unit 32 by attaching transparent resin to the backside so that the backside of the front frame 14 can be seen, and stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 3) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, to create a more dazzling effect, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination units 29-33 on the pachinko machine 10.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is located below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is equipped with a power display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are loaned out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the power display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information on the card, etc. is displayed, and an internal LED lights up to display the remaining balance numerically as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated to request the return of a card, etc. inserted into the card unit.

In pachinko machines where balls are dispensed directly from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary. In such cases, a decorative sticker or the like can be added to the installation area of the ball dispensing operation unit 40, making the components common. This allows for commonality between pachinko machines that use card units and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in its center, which is roughly box-shaped and open at the top, for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. On the right side of the lower tray 50 is an operating handle 51 that is operated by the player to shoot balls into the front of the game board 13. Inside this operating handle 51 are a touch sensor 51a that allows the ball launching unit 112a to be activated, a push-button-type shooting stop switch 51b that stops the launch of balls while it is pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance.

When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes depending on the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. This causes the ball to be shot into the front of the game board 13 at a distance corresponding to the player's operation. The interval between ball launches from the ball launching unit 112a is set to approximately 0.6 seconds. Furthermore, when the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the shot stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front portion of the lower tray 50, which is operated to eject balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are ejected. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive balls ejected from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is located on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

Next, as shown in Figure 2, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is a unit equipped with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is a unit equipped with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. Furthermore, each control board is equipped with an MPU (a single-chip microcomputer) that controls each function, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, and other necessary components.

The main control device 110, audio and lamp control device 113, display control device 114, payout control device 111, launch control device 112, power supply device 115, and card unit connection board 116 are each housed in board boxes 100-104. Board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to house the various control devices and boards.

In addition, the box base and box cover of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected (connected by a crimping structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened. A sealing seal (not shown) is affixed to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if an attempt is made to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100, 102 or to forcibly open the substrate box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 comprises a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward; a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping downstream; a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131; and a payout device 133 located at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls using the specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 26). The tank 130 is continuously replenished with balls supplied from the arcade's island facilities, and the payout device 133 appropriately dispenses the required number of balls. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to apply vibrations to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, and the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to resolve a ball jam (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see Figure 26). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid.

The main board that makes up the main control device 110 is provided with a setting key 501, which is used by hall personnel to change or check the set probability setting value, a setting change switch 502, which is used to update the probability setting value by operating it while changing the setting, a RAM erase switch 503, which is used when initializing the pachinko machine 10 (main control device 110) or when confirming (determining) the probability setting value while changing the setting, and a probability display device 504 that can display the probability setting value.

The setting key 501, setting change switch 502, and RAM erase switch 503 protrude from the main board through holes in the board box 100, allowing them to be operated by hall personnel without opening the board box 100. On the other hand, the probability display device 504 is mounted on the main board covered by the board box 100.

The setting key 501 is configured to be rotatable between two positions, the off side indicated by "OFF" and the on side indicated by "ON," by inserting a dedicated key managed by hall personnel or the like into a keyhole provided in the setting key 501. The setting key 501 is in the off state when positioned on the off side, and in the on state when positioned on the on side. Once rotated to either state, the setting key is configured to maintain that state unless rotated again by a manager or the like.

The setting change switch 502 is a switch that is operated when changing the probability setting value (i.e., the "setting change mode" described below) to update the probability setting value. The setting change switch 502 normally outputs an OFF signal, and outputs an ON signal when pressed.

The RAM erase switch 503 is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to erase (return to the initial state) the backup data stored in the pachinko machine 10. This RAM erase switch 503 is also used when changing the probability setting value (i.e., the "setting change mode" described below) to end the update of the probability setting value (i.e., to end the "setting change mode").

In the first embodiment, if this RAM clear switch 503 is pressed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (i.e., when the power switch is turned on), a RAM clear signal is output to the main control unit 110 to clear the backup data, provided that the setting key 501 is in the OFF state. If the main control unit 110 inputs a RAM clear signal when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and also sends a payout initialization command to the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control unit 111 as well.

Furthermore, when the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed while the probability setting value is in an updatable state (i.e., the "setting change mode" described below), the MPU 201 recognizes that the update of the probability setting value is to be terminated, terminates the updatable state of the probability setting value, and transitions to the normal game state.

The probability display device 504 is configured to display the probability setting value when the probability setting value is being confirmed (i.e., the "setting confirmation mode" described below) or when the probability setting value is being changed (i.e., the "setting change mode" described below). This probability display device 504 is turned off in normal conditions (e.g., when play is possible or the power is off), and the probability setting value is not displayed, but in conditions where the probability setting value should be displayed (i.e., the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" described below), the current probability setting value is lit and displayed.

Here, we will explain the startup mode when the power is turned on in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to determine the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 depending on the states of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501 when the power is turned on.

The pachinko machine 10 has four startup modes: "RAM clear mode," "setting change mode," "setting check mode," and "normal mode."

"RAM clear mode" is a mode for erasing (clearing) data stored in RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

The "setting change mode" is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. When the pachinko machine 10 is started in this "setting change mode," the current probability setting value is displayed on the probability display device 504, and the probability setting value is updated each time the setting change switch 502 is operated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the setting change switch 502 is pressed during this "setting change mode," the probability setting value in the pachinko machine 10 is updated, and the display on the probability display device 504 is also changed in accordance with the update of the probability setting value.

The "setting confirmation mode" is a mode for checking the currently set probability value. When the pachinko machine 10 is started up in this "setting confirmation mode," the current probability setting value is displayed on the probability display device 504.

"Normal mode" is a startup mode other than "RAM clear mode," "setting change mode," and "setting check mode." Except when power outage information is not stored in RAM 203 or when data stored in RAM 203 is corrupted, "normal mode" retains the data stored in RAM 203 and executes various startup processes to resume play on the pachinko machine 10 from the state it was in before the power outage.

In the first embodiment, if the pachinko machine 10 is powered on without turning on the RAM clear switch 503 (i.e., leaving it in the OFF state) and with the setting key 501 in the OFF state, the pachinko machine 10 will start up in "normal mode." Also, if the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM clear switch 503 on and the setting key 501 in the OFF state, the pachinko machine 10 will start up in "RAM clear mode."

On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is turned on, the RAM clear switch 503 is turned on, and the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the pachinko machine 10 will start up in "setting change mode." Also, if the setting key 501 is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 503 is turned off, and the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the pachinko machine 10 will start up in "setting confirmation mode."

In addition, when data is erased in "RAM clear mode," when the update of the probability setting value is completed in "setting change mode" and the setting key 501 is turned off, or when the setting key 501 is turned off in "setting confirmation mode," each mode ends and the system transitions to "normal mode," allowing play on the pachinko machine 10 to begin.

In this way, if the setting key 501 is left in the OFF position when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, hall personnel can select whether the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is "RAM clear mode," which is a start-up mode unrelated to the probability setting value, or "normal mode," depending on whether or not the RAM clear switch 503 is turned on.

On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is left in the ON position when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, hall personnel can select whether the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is to be the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode," which are related to the probability setting value, depending on whether the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on or not.

In other words, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on, you can select between a startup mode that is unrelated to the probability setting value and a startup mode that is related to the probability setting value. When using a startup mode that is unrelated to the probability setting value, you can select whether the startup mode is "RAM clear mode" or "normal mode" depending on whether the RAM clear switch 503 is turned on, while when using a startup mode that is related to the probability setting value, you can select whether the startup mode is "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" depending on whether the RAM clear switch 503 is turned on.

If the probability setting value is changed, the jackpot probability for play will also change. Therefore, if play continues in the game state before the power outage, there is a risk that the pachinko machine 10 will not be able to perform as expected, for example, because there may be a discrepancy between the jackpot probability for the pending variable effect and the jackpot probability for the variable effect to be acquired, or the jackpots counted as the limit number of times described below may be accumulated with different jackpot probabilities. For this reason, when the probability setting value is changed in "setting change mode," the pachinko machine 10 erases (clears) the data stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, since "setting confirmation mode" is a startup mode that only checks the probability setting value, the data stored in RAM 203 is retained (not cleared) so that play can continue in the game state before the power outage.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in "setting change mode," in which the data in RAM 203 is cleared, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 503 is turned on before the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on; and when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in "setting confirmation mode," in which the data in RAM 203 is not cleared, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 503 is left off before the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

In this way, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" related to the probability setting value, the setting key 501 is turned on before powering on the pachinko machine 10. Then, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the "RAM clear mode" or "setting change mode" which clears the data stored in RAM 203, the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed (turned on) while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. In other words, if hall staff and others understand the meaning of each startup mode, they can easily understand what operations are required on the pachinko machine 10 for the startup mode they are about to start.

In addition, to start up the pachinko machine 10 in "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode," a dedicated key that can be inserted into the setting key 501 is required, and this key is managed by the hall. This prevents players from arbitrarily checking the probability setting value to search for a pachinko machine 10 with a high jackpot probability, or arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability (high setting). Furthermore, the RAM erase switch 503 is located in a position that is normally not easily touched by players, which also prevents players from arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability.

Furthermore, even when starting up in "setting change mode," there are only two switches that need to be operated simultaneously, and operation is easy with both hands. As a result, hall staff can easily and simply select the startup mode for the pachinko machine 10 by selectively turning the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501 on and off.

When starting up in "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode," a condition may be that the door open switch (not shown), which detects whether the inner frame 12 is open, is on when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, i.e., the inner frame 12 is open.

This is because, in order to change or confirm the probability setting value, hall personnel and others must visually confirm the probability setting value displayed on the probability display device 504 on the back of the pachinko machine 10, and therefore the inner frame 12 must be open. Therefore, if the setting key 501 is in the ON position but the inner frame 12 is not open when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 does not start up in "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode." Instead, as with the case when the setting key 501 is in the OFF position, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in "normal mode" if the RAM clear switch 503 is off, and in "RAM clear mode" if the RAM clear switch 503 is on. This prevents the pachinko machine 10 from being powered on and starting up in "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode," preventing game play from starting on the pachinko machine 10 even when the setting key 501 is in the ON position and the inner frame 12 is closed. Furthermore, a dedicated key managed by the hall is required to open the inner frame 12. This prevents players from arbitrarily opening the inner frame 12, checking the probability setting value, searching for a pachinko machine 10 with a high jackpot probability, or arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a higher probability.

Next, as shown in Figure 3, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of ball-guiding nails, windmills, and rails 61, 62, a general winning slot 63, a first starting slot 64a, a second starting slot 64b, a regular electric slot 64c, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, etc. to a resin base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front.

An outer rail 62, formed by bending a strip of metal plate into a roughly arcuate shape, is installed on the front of the gaming board 13, and an inner rail 61, also made of a strip of metal plate like the outer rail 62, is installed inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and outer rail 62 surround the front periphery of the gaming board 13, and the gaming board 13 and glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a gaming area on the front of the gaming board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The gaming area is a roughly circular area on the front of the gaming board 13, partitioned by the two rails 61, 62 and the arc member 70 (an area where prize slots and the like are located and where shot balls flow down).

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 26) to the top of the game board 13. A ball return prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in Figure 2), preventing a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in Figure 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight point of the ball. A ball launched with more than a predetermined force hits the return rubber 69, reducing its momentum and bouncing back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 is hammered into the base plate 60 and fixed, with an arc on the inner surface connecting the rails.

The general winning slot 63, first starting slot 64a, second starting slot 64b, normal electric slot 64c, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, and variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed to the front side of the gaming board 13 with wood screws or the like. In addition, the front center portion of the gaming board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game area of the game board 13 is provided with multiple general winning holes 63, through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins.

A variable display unit 80 is also provided in the center of the gaming area. The variable display unit 80 includes a drum display unit 81, which is a drum-type rotating device that, triggered by a ball entering the first starting hole 64a (starting win) or the second starting hole 64b (starting win), performs a variable effect on multiple reels (the left reel LR, center reel CR, and right reel RR (see Figure 4) described below) printed with a third symbol, in synchronization with the dynamic display of the first or second special symbol on the special symbol display device 37; and a normal symbol display unit 83, which is an LED that displays a variable normal symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the normal symbol is referred to as the "variable display"), triggered by a ball passing through the through gate 67. A center frame 86 is also provided on the variable display unit 80, surrounding the outer periphery of the drum display unit 81.

The drum display device 81 is assembled to the backboard unit 300 (see Figure 5), which will be described later, and has a drum unit 81a that integrally comprises a left reel unit 81a1 with a left reel LR, a center reel unit 81a2 with a center reel CR, and a right reel unit 81a3 with a right reel RR. The reels LR, CR, and RR are variably displayed by being variably driven by the display control device 114 (see Figure 26), which will be described later. The pay lines on the drum display device 81 are set as the range visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 (see Figure 10), which will be described later, of the light guide unit 400, on the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Multiple symbols are printed on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR, and these symbols scroll vertically for each reel LR, CR, and RR, causing the third symbol to be variably displayed on the drum display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, the game status displayed in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the special symbol display device 37, while decorative displays corresponding to the display on the special symbol display device 37 are displayed on the drum display device 81. Note that instead of a drum-type rotating device, the display device for the third symbol may be configured using, for example, an LCD display or the like.

Instead of a drum-type rotating device, a display device that variably displays the third symbol may be configured using, for example, a dot matrix display device or a seven-segment display.

Now, with reference to Figure 4, the symbol arrangement on each reel LR, CR, RR of the drum display device 81 will be described. Figure 4 is a schematic diagram showing the symbol arrangement on each reel LR, CR, RR of the drum display device 81. As shown in Figure 4, each reel LR, CR, RR has 16 symbol areas formed thereon, and with some exceptions (i.e., the "543" symbol on the center reel CR), the third symbol and blank (empty) areas are arranged alternately.

For example, the left reel LR has the following symbols arranged from top to bottom: "1" symbol, blank area, "2" symbol, blank area, "3" symbol, blank area, "5" symbol, blank area, "6" symbol, blank area, "7" symbol, blank area, "8" symbol, blank area, "chance" symbol, blank area. Therefore, when the left reel LR is spun downward, the symbols are displayed in descending numerical order: "8" symbol → "7" symbol → "6" symbol → ...

The right reel RR is also arranged with the following symbols, from top to bottom: "8" symbol, blank area, "7" symbol, blank area, "6" symbol, blank area, "5" symbol, blank area, "3" symbol, blank area, "2" symbol, blank area, "1" symbol, blank area, "chance" symbol, blank area. Therefore, when the right reel RR is spun downward, the symbols are displayed in ascending numerical order: "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → ...

Furthermore, the middle reel CR has the following symbols arranged from top to bottom: "8" symbol, blank area, "7" symbol, blank area, "6" symbol, blank area, "543" symbol, blank area, "2" symbol, blank area, "1" symbol, blank area, "chance" symbol, blank area. Therefore, when the middle reel CR is spun downward, the symbols are displayed in ascending numerical order, just like the right reel RR: "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → ...

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, three symbols on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR are visible through the central opening of the display area forming member 430 (see Figure 10), which will be described later. Therefore, when all of the reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the central opening of the display area forming member 430. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a total of five effective lines are set as the effective lines for the variable display of the third symbol: an upper parallel line formed by the symbol on the top of the left reel LR, the symbol on the top of the middle reel CR, and the symbol on the top of the right reel RR; a middle parallel line formed by the symbol on the middle part of the left reel LR, the symbol on the middle part of the middle reel CR, and the symbol on the middle part of the right reel RR; a lower parallel line formed by the symbol on the bottom of the left reel LR, the symbol on the bottom of the middle reel CR, and the symbol on the bottom of the right reel RR; a downward-sloping line formed by the symbol on the top of the left reel LR, the symbol on the middle part of the middle reel CR, and the symbol on the bottom of the right reel RR; and a upward-sloping line formed by the symbol on the bottom of the left reel LR, the symbol on the middle part of the middle reel CR, and the symbol on the top of the right reel RR.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, three number symbols (third symbols, hereinafter sometimes referred to as "main symbols") and blank areas are visible on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR through the central opening of the display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 10), which will be described later. Therefore, when all of the reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 number symbols and blank areas are visible through the central opening of the display area forming member 430. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the active lines for the variable display of the third symbol are the upper parallel lines formed by the number symbols or blank areas at the top of the left reel LR, the number symbols or blank areas at the top of the middle reel CR, and the number symbols or blank areas at the top of the right reel RR, the middle parallel lines formed by the number symbols or blank areas at the center of the left reel LR, the number symbols or blank areas at the center of the middle reel CR, and the number symbols or blank areas at the center of the right reel RR, the number symbols or blank areas at the bottom of the left reel LR, and the bottom of the middle reel CR. There are five active lines: a downward parallel line formed by the number symbols or blank areas at the bottom of the right reel RR, a downward line formed by the number symbols or blank areas at the top of the left reel LR, the number symbols or blank areas at the center of the middle reel CR, and the number symbols or blank areas at the bottom of the right reel RR, and a downward line formed by the number symbols or blank areas at the bottom of the left reel LR, the number symbols or blank areas at the center of the middle reel CR, and the number symbols or blank areas at the top of the right reel RR.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see Figure 26), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display (variable presentation) is displayed in which the same main symbols line up on one of the valid lines, and the jackpot occurs after the variable display ends. If a transition to a high probability state (probability variable state) occurs after a jackpot ends, a variable display is displayed in which main symbols with odd numbers (equivalent to "high probability symbols") line up on one of the valid lines. On the other hand, if a transition to a low probability state occurs after a jackpot ends, a variable display is displayed in which main symbols with even numbers (equivalent to "low probability symbols") line up on one of the valid lines.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, during each variable effect, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the following order: left reel LR → right reel RR → center reel CR. If a jackpot symbol combination (a combination of the same main symbols) lines up on any of the active lines when the third symbol stops, a jackpot effect (for example, a rainbow light display) is executed as a jackpot. Furthermore, because the symbol arrangement on the left reel LR and right reel RR is reversed (ascending and descending order), the same symbol can stop on one or two active lines when the left reel LR and right reel RR stop. In other words, a single reach, in which the same symbol stops and displays only on one active line, and a double reach, in which the same symbol stops and displays on two active lines, can occur.

Returning to Figure 3, we will continue the explanation. If a ball enters the first starting hole 64a while the drum display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is displaying a variable effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the number of times the ball enters (number of reserved balls) will be reserved up to four times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the special symbol display device 37, and is also displayed in the special symbol 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display units Db1a to Db1d of the first reserved symbol display unit Db1 corresponding to the first special symbol of the reserve display unit Db provided at the bottom when viewed from the front of the drum display device 81. Special chart 1's 1st to 4th reserved pattern display sections Db1a to Db1d each display one reserved pattern (a "○" pattern (white circle pattern) in the normal display mode) for each reserved ball of the first special pattern (one reserved ball count), and the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern variable effect is displayed according to the number of reserved patterns displayed on special chart 1's 1st to 4th reserved pattern display sections Db1a to Db1d.

In other words, in the first to fourth reserved pattern display sections Db1a to Db1d of Special Chart 1, if one reserved pattern is displayed in the first reserved pattern display section Db1a of Special Chart 1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is one; if two reserved patterns, one each, are displayed in the first and second reserved pattern display sections Db1a and Db1b of Special Chart 1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is two; if three reserved patterns, one each, are displayed in the first to third reserved pattern display sections Db1a to Db1c of Special Chart 1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is three; and if four reserved patterns, one each, are displayed in the first to fourth reserved pattern display sections Db1a to Db1d of Special Chart 1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is four. Additionally, if no reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of Special Chart 1, this indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is 0 and there are no reserved variable effects.

In addition, if a ball enters the second starting hole 64b while the drum display device 81 (special pattern display device 37) is displaying a dynamic display of the third pattern corresponding to the first or second special pattern, the number of times the ball enters (number of reserved balls) will be reserved up to a maximum of four. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the special pattern display device 37 and is also displayed in the special pattern 2 first to fourth reserved pattern display units Db2a to Db2d of the second reserved pattern display unit Db2 corresponding to the second special pattern of the reserve display unit Db located at the bottom when viewed from the front of the drum display device 81. Special chart 2's first to fourth reserved pattern display sections Db2a to Db2d each display one reserved pattern (a "○" pattern (white circle pattern) in the normal display mode) for each reserved ball of the second special pattern (one reserved ball count), and the number of reserved balls for the variable performance of the second special pattern is displayed according to the number of reserved patterns displayed on special chart 2's first to fourth reserved pattern display sections Db2a to Db2d.

In other words, in Special Chart 2's 1st to 4th reserved pattern display sections Db2a to Db2d, if one reserved pattern is displayed in Special Chart 2's 1st reserved pattern display section Db2a, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is 1; if two reserved patterns, one each, are displayed in Special Chart 2's 1st and 2nd reserved pattern display sections Db2a and Db2b, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is 2; if three reserved patterns, one each, are displayed in Special Chart 2's 1st to 3rd reserved pattern display sections Db2a to Db2c, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is 3; and if four reserved patterns, one each, are displayed in Special Chart 2's 1st to 4th reserved pattern display sections Db2a to Db2d, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is 4. Additionally, if no reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d of Special Chart 2, this indicates that the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is 0 and there are no reserved variable effects.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game for the first special symbol and the second lottery game for the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously, and only one of the lottery games is executed. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when one of the lottery games currently being executed ends and reserved balls for the first special symbol and reserved balls for the second special symbol are stored, the second lottery game for the second special symbol is executed with priority over the first lottery game for the first special symbol (so-called special symbol 2 priority variation). Note that the lottery games may be executed in the order in which the winning symbols are won (so-called winning order variation), or the first lottery game for the first special symbol and the second lottery game for the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously (so-called special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 simultaneous variation).

The central portion of the reserved display section Db is provided with an execution pattern display section Db0, which displays an execution pattern indicating that a variable effect is being executed on the drum display device 81. This execution pattern display section Db0 is located in the central portion of the reserved display section Db, i.e., to the right of the special chart 1 first reserved pattern display section Db1a and to the left of the special chart 2 first reserved pattern display section Db2a, and is configured to display an execution pattern larger than the reserved patterns displayed in each reserved pattern display section Db1a-Db1d, Db2a-Db2d. Furthermore, this execution pattern display section Db0 shifts the reserved pattern displayed in the special chart 1 first reserved pattern display section Db1a or the special chart 2 first reserved pattern display section Db2a and displays it as the execution pattern.

The execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display unit Db0 is erased when the variable effect ends, and as the execution pattern is erased, the displayed reserved pattern is shifted and displayed as the reserved pattern on the lower side (to the right for the first special pattern, or to the left for the second special pattern). Specifically, for example, in a situation where there are no reserved patterns for the second special pattern but four reserved patterns for the first special pattern exist, if the execution pattern displayed in the execution pattern display unit Db0 is erased as the variable effect of the first or second special pattern ends, the reserved pattern displayed in the special pattern 1 first reserved pattern display unit Db1a is shifted (displayed) as the execution pattern in the execution pattern display unit Db0. Furthermore, the reserved pattern displayed in the special pattern 1 second reserved pattern display unit Db1b is shifted (displayed) as the reserved pattern in the special pattern 1 first reserved pattern display unit Db1a. Furthermore, the reserved pattern displayed in the special chart 1 third reserved pattern display section Db1c is shifted and displayed as the reserved pattern in the special chart 1 second reserved pattern display section Db1b. Also, the reserved pattern displayed in the special chart 1 fourth reserved pattern display section Db1d is shifted and displayed as the reserved pattern in the special chart 1 third reserved pattern display section Db1c.

Furthermore, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the second special symbol, if the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display unit Db0 is erased upon completion of the variable presentation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the reserved symbol displayed in the special symbol 2 first reserved symbol display unit Db2a will be moved (shifted) and displayed as the execution symbol in the execution symbol display unit Db0. Furthermore, the reserved symbol displayed in the special symbol 2 second reserved symbol display unit Db2b will be moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special symbol 2 first reserved symbol display unit Db2a. Furthermore, the reserved symbol displayed in the special symbol 2 third reserved symbol display unit Db2c will be moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special symbol 2 second reserved symbol display unit Db2b. In addition, the reserved pattern displayed in the special chart 2 fourth reserved pattern display area Db2d is shifted and displayed as the reserved pattern in the special chart 2 third reserved pattern display area Db2c.

In the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variable effects based on balls entering the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b was set to a maximum of four for each. However, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four and may be set to three or fewer, or five or more (e.g., eight). Instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the reserved display section Db, the number of reserved balls may be displayed numerically on a display device (e.g., a liquid crystal display device) separate from the reserved display section Db, or in four separate areas with different patterns (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) corresponding to the number of reserved balls. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display section 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the reserved display section Db. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four reserved lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, one for each of the maximum number of reserved first and second special symbols, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of lit reserved lamps.

The normal symbol display device 83 provides a variable display that alternates between a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (normal symbols) each time a ball passes through the through gate 67. The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops on a predetermined symbol (a "circle" symbol in the first embodiment), the normal electric device 64c above the second starting hole 64b as viewed from the front is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The number of reserved balls in the through gate 67 can be reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the special symbol display device 37 described above, and is also indicated by the normal symbol reservation lamp 84. There are four normal symbol reservation lamps 84, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically above the drum display device 81. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the number of lit normal symbol reservation lamps 84.

In addition, the variable display of normal symbols can be performed by switching multiple lamps on and off in the normal symbol display device 83, as in the first embodiment, or it can be performed using a part of the special symbol display device 37 or the drum display device 81. Similarly, the normal symbol reserve lamp 84 can be lit by a part of the drum display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of reserved balls that can pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but can be set to three or fewer times, or five or more times (for example, eight times). Furthermore, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol reserve lamp 84 need not be lit.

More specifically, the variable display of the normal symbol may be performed using a part of the special symbol display device 37 or the drum display device 81 other than the third symbol execution part. Similarly, the normal symbol hold lamp 84 may be turned on using a part of the drum display device 81 other than the third symbol execution part.

On the front side of the variable display unit 80 as viewed from the front, there is provided a light guide unit 400, which is unitized and consists of, in order from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a display area forming member 430, a front light guide plate 410, and a rear light guide plate 420 (see Figure 8).

The display area forming member 430 is made of a transparent resin (e.g., polycarbonate) and is formed to conform to the outer periphery of the drum display device 81, which is located behind the light guide unit 400 in the pachinko machine 10, as well as the front light guide plate 410 and rear light guide plate 420 (described later) that are assembled to the light guide unit 400. The display area forming member 430 also has a central opening 431 that allows three symbols on each of the LR, CR, and RR reels of the drum display device 81 to be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. A predetermined lens cut 432 is formed around the periphery of the central opening 431, making it difficult or impossible to see behind the lens cut 432 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the lens cut 432 around the periphery of the central opening 431 clearly shows the display area and pay lines of the symbols on the drum display device 81 to the player. Details of the display area forming member 430 will be described later.

The front light guide plate 410 is made of a transparent resin material (e.g., acrylic) and, like the display area forming member 430, is formed in a shape that follows (corresponds to) the outer periphery of the drum display device 81, as well as in a shape that follows (corresponds to) the shapes of the display area forming member 430 and rear light guide plate 420 that are assembled to the light guide unit 400. Furthermore, the front light guide plate 410 is configured so that the drum display device 81 and a portion of the rear light guide plate 420, which are located on the rear side of the front light guide plate 410 on the pachinko machine 10, are visible through a central opening 431 in the display area forming member 430. Furthermore, the back side of the front light guide plate 410 (i.e., the back side of the pachinko machine 10) is provided with lens cuts of various concave and convex shapes, and by lighting up the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c of the lower LED unit 414, front right LED unit 415, and front left LED unit 416 (see Figures 8 and 9), which will be described later, a second decorative pattern group 411, which is a pattern imitating multiple cherry blossom petals (so-called cherry blossom storm patterns), a third decorative pattern 412, which is a pattern imitating a sunfish, and a fourth decorative pattern group 413, which is a pattern imitating multiple bubbles (so-called bubble group patterns) (see Figure 17), are each configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the front light guide plate 410 will be described later.

Like the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420 is made of a transparent resin material (e.g., acrylic), and like the display area forming member 430 and the front light guide plate 410, it is formed in a shape that follows (corresponds to) the outer periphery of the drum display device 81, and is also formed in a shape that follows (corresponds to) the shapes of the display area forming member 430 and front light guide plate 410 that are assembled to the light guide unit 400. Furthermore, like the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420 is configured so that the drum display device 81, which is located on the rear side of the rear light guide plate 420 on the pachinko machine 10, is visible through the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430. Furthermore, the rear side of the rear light guide plate 420 (i.e., the rear side of the pachinko machine 10) is provided with lens cuts of various concave and convex shapes, and by lighting up the LEDs 422c, 424 of the rear upper LED unit 422 and/or lower LED unit 414 (see Figures 8 and 9) described below, a first decorative pattern group 421 (see Figure 12), which are patterns imitating multiple types of fish (so-called school of fish patterns), are displayed so that they can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the rear light guide plate 420 will be described later.

In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412 and/or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are configured to be lit and displayed during the execution of the third pattern variable effect (for example, when a reach display is formed) depending on the lottery result of the third pattern variable effect. Specifically, when a jackpot result is displayed in the variable presentation, the order of likely lighting is first decorative symbol group 421, second decorative symbol group 411 & third decorative symbol 412, third decorative symbol 412 only, second decorative symbol group 411 only, and fourth decorative symbol group 413. On the other hand, when a losing result is displayed in the variable presentation, the order of likely lighting is fourth decorative symbol group 413, second decorative symbol group 411 only, third decorative symbol 412 only, second decorative symbol group 411 & third decorative symbol 412, and first decorative symbol group 421.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to light up and display one of the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412 or the fourth decorative pattern group 413, or a combination of at least two or more of the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412 or the fourth decorative pattern group 413, depending on the lottery result of the third pattern variable effect during execution of the variable effect (for example, when a reach display is formed). Specifically, when a jackpot result is displayed in the variable presentation, the order of likely lighting is first decorative symbol group 421, second decorative symbol group 411 & third decorative symbol 412, third decorative symbol 412 only, second decorative symbol group 411 only, and fourth decorative symbol group 413. On the other hand, when a losing result is displayed in the variable presentation, the order of likely lighting is fourth decorative symbol group 413, second decorative symbol group 411 only, third decorative symbol 412 only, second decorative symbol group 411 & third decorative symbol 412, and first decorative symbol group 421.

In other words, based on the appearance rates associated with the results of the variable effects, the jackpot reliability (expectation level) of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421 is preset to increase in the following order: first decorative pattern group 421 > second decorative pattern group 411 & third decorative pattern 412 > third decorative pattern 412 only > second decorative pattern group 411 only > fourth decorative pattern group 413.

More specifically, based on the appearance rates associated with the results of the variable effects, the jackpot reliability (expectation level) of each decorative symbol group 411, 412, 413, 421 is preset to increase in the following order: fourth decorative symbol group 413 < second decorative symbol group 411 only < third decorative symbol 412 only < second decorative symbol group 411 & third decorative symbol 412 < first decorative symbol group 421.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the probability of a jackpot when the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 appear is set by setting the appearance rate for a jackpot and a miss, respectively. However, instead, the probability of a jackpot for the decorative symbols may be set regardless of their appearance frequency. For example, decorative symbols may be provided that have a low appearance rate for a jackpot and a low appearance rate for a miss, resulting in a low likelihood of a jackpot, or decorative symbols may be provided that have a high appearance rate for a miss and a high appearance rate for a jackpot and a high likelihood of a jackpot.

In this way, each of the components 430, 410, and 420 of the light-guiding unit 400 is formed in a shape that follows (corresponds to) the outer periphery of the drum display device 81 located on the rear side when viewed from the front, and is configured to illuminate (guiduce light) the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413, described below. Therefore, by combining the third symbol variation effect of the drum display device 81 with the effect of the light-guiding unit 400, a variety of effects can be produced, enhancing the effect of each device 81, 400 and drawing attention to the game. Furthermore, the light-guiding unit 400 is configured in a shape that follows the outer periphery of the effect device located on the rear side when viewed from the front, allowing the effect device (i.e., the drum display device 81) to be placed in the back space, thereby increasing the design flexibility of the effect device located on the rear side of the light-guiding unit 400 when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, by unitizing and fixing at least the front light guide plate 410, front lower LED 414c, front right LED 415c, and front left LED 416c, as well as the rear light guide plate 420, rear upper LED 422c, and rear lower LED 424 as a light guide unit 400 while positioning them using through holes and screws, etc., misalignment between each LED 414c, etc. and each light guide plate 410, 420 can be reduced, allowing light from each LED 414c, etc. to be appropriately directed toward each light guide plate 410, 420, and accurately representing each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421 on the front light guide plate 410 and rear light guide plate 420.

The specific selection rates for the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412, the third decorative symbol 412 only, the second decorative symbol group 411 only, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each decorative symbol 411, 412, 413, 421") upon a jackpot or loss will be described later in Figure 34.

A first decorative symbol group 60a, which are symbols similar to the first decorative symbol group 421 provided on the rear light guide plate 420, is provided on the surface of the gaming board 13 (base plate 60) on the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front, and a second decorative symbol group 60b, which are symbols similar to the first decorative symbol group 421 and the first decorative symbol group 60a provided on the rear light guide plate 420, is provided on the surface of the gaming board 13 (base plate 60) on the left side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front. The first decorative symbol group 60a and the second decorative symbol group 60b are configured to be lit and displayed in conjunction with the lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420. Specifically, when executing an effect related to the first decorative symbol group 421 in the variable third symbol effect, the first decorative symbol group 60a on the right side of the variable display unit 80 as viewed from the front is first lit, then the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 are lit in order from right to left as viewed from the front, and then the second decorative symbol group 60b on the left side of the variable display unit 80 as viewed from the front is lit. By configuring in this manner, in the effect related to the first decorative symbol group 421, the effect on the rear light guide plate 420 and the effect on the game board 13 are executed in an integrated manner, providing an impressive effect using the entire game board 13 and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

More specifically, in the third symbol variation effect, if the lighting lottery for the first decorative symbol group 421 is won and the timing for lighting the first decorative symbol group 421 arrives, first, the light-emitting effect on the gaming board 13 and drum display device 81 is stopped or suppressed, and the entire gaming board 13 is darkened. Then, an LED (not shown) located on the back side of the first decorative symbol group 60a on the right side of the gaming board 13 is illuminated, as if the first decorative symbol group 60a were moving from right to left when viewed from the front. Then, at the timing when the leftmost part of the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board is lit as viewed from the front, the rear upper LED 422c and rear lower LED 424 (see Figure 8; hereinafter simply referred to as "LEDs 422c, 424") corresponding to the rightmost part of the first decorative pattern group 421 provided in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, among the first decorative pattern group 421 provided on the rear light guide plate 420, are lit, thereby making the rightmost first decorative pattern group 421 in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (front side; the same applies below).

At this time, to prevent light emitted from the LEDs corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board from leaking toward the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410), the front right base 415a (see Figure 8) of the front right LED unit 415 is configured to block light from the LEDs corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board toward the rear light guide plate 420. This configuration allows light emitted from the LEDs corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board to be guided to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410), preventing problems such as the first decorative pattern group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 emitting light earlier than the intended light emission timing.

Next, with the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board illuminated, of the LEDs 422c, 424 (see Figure 8) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the right-hand region of the rear light guide plate 420, the LEDs 422c, 424 located to the left of the right-most LED 422c, 424 in the right-hand region as viewed from the front are illuminated sequentially from the right side as viewed from the front, and when the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 located at the leftmost position in the right-hand region of the rear light guide plate 420 are illuminated, the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the rightmost position of the first decorative pattern group 421 provided in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are illuminated, thereby making the rightmost first decorative pattern group 421 in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the first decorative symbol group 60a on the board and the first decorative symbol group 421 in the right and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 create an effect that makes it appear as if a series of school of fish symbols is moving from the right to the left side of the pachinko machine 10.

More specifically, among the LEDs 422c, 424 (see Figure 8) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, when the LED 422c, 424 located to the left of the rightmost LED 422c, 424 as viewed from the front (i.e., the center of the right region) is lit, it takes over the light color that was lit by the rightmost LED 422c, 424, and when the LED 422c, 424 located further to the left as viewed from the front (i.e., the leftmost in the right region) is lit, it takes over the light color that was lit by the LED 422c, 424 as viewed from the front. For example, if the rightmost LEDs 422c, 424 in the right-hand region are emitting red light, the LEDs 422c, 424 located to the left of the rightmost LEDs 422c, 424 as viewed from the front will light up red at the same time, and furthermore, the LEDs 422c, 424 located further to the left of the leftmost LEDs as viewed from the front (i.e., the leftmost LEDs in the right-hand region) will light up red at the same time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create an effect in which the same fish symbol in the first decorative symbol group 421 is displayed moving.

Next, of the LEDs 422c, 424 (see Figure 8) corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420, the LEDs 422c, 424 located to the left of the rightmost LED 422c, 424 in the central region when viewed from the front are sequentially lit from the right side, and when the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 located at the leftmost end in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit, the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the rightmost first decorative pattern group 421 provided in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit, thereby making the rightmost first decorative pattern group 421 in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. At this time, when the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 located at the leftmost end in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on, the LEDs (not shown) corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 60a on the board are turned off sequentially from the right side when viewed from the front. As a result, the first decorative symbol group 60a on the board and the first decorative symbol groups 421 in the right, central, and left regions of the rear light guide plate 420 create an effect in which a series of school of fish symbols of a constant width (i.e., the combined width of the central and right regions of the rear light guide plate 420 and the display width of the first decorative symbol group 60a on the board) move from the right to the left of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, among the LEDs 422c, 424 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420, the LEDs 422c, 424 located to the left of the rightmost LED 422c, 424 in the left region as viewed from the front are sequentially illuminated from the right side. When the LED 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 located at the leftmost position in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 is illuminated, the LED (not shown) corresponding to the rightmost second decorative symbol group 60b on the left side of the game board 13 is illuminated, thereby lighting up the second decorative symbol group 60b. At this time, when the LED corresponding to the leftmost second decorative symbol group 60b is illuminated, the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are sequentially extinguished from the right side as viewed from the front. As a result, the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board and the first decorative pattern group 421 in the left, central, and right regions of the rear light guide plate 420 create an effect in which a continuous school of fish pattern of a fixed width (i.e., the combined width of the left, central, and right regions of the rear light guide plate 420, or the combined width of the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 and the display width of the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board) moves from the right to the left side of the pachinko machine 10.

After that, the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off sequentially from the right side as viewed from the front. Then, at the same time that the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off, the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off sequentially from the right side as viewed from the front. Furthermore, at the same time that the LEDs 422c, 424 corresponding to the first decorative pattern group 421 in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off, the LEDs (not shown) corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board are turned off in preparation from the right side as viewed from the front. By configuring it in this way, the first decorative symbol group 60a on the board, the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420, and the second decorative symbol group 60b on the board create an effect in which a series of uniformly-spaced school of fish symbols move from the right to the left side of the pachinko machine 10.

At this time, to prevent light emitted from the LEDs corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 60b on the dial surface from leaking toward the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410), the front left base 416a (see Figure 8) of the front left LED unit 416 is configured to block light from the LEDs corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 60b on the dial surface toward the rear light guide plate 420. This configuration allows light emitted from the LEDs corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 60b on the dial surface to be guided to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410), preventing problems such as the first decorative pattern group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 emitting light at a later stage than the light emission timing.

In this way, in the effects related to the first decorative symbol group 60a, the first decorative symbol group 421, and the second decorative symbol group 60b on the board, the effects on the rear light guide plate 420 and the effects on the game board 13 are executed in an integrated manner. This also eliminates the problem of symbols being lit at different times due to the light from other LEDs when the LEDs are lit sequentially, providing a powerful, integrated effect using the entire game board 13, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

A first start hole 64a, through which a ball can enter, is located below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first start hole 64a, a first start hole switch (not shown) located on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When this first start hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a first special symbol jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see Figure 26), which will be described later. A display corresponding to the lottery result is then displayed on the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and a variable third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed on the drum display device 81. The first start hole 64a is also one of the prize holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters it.

Below the first start opening 64a is a second start opening 64b, which can only receive a ball when the normal electric role 64c is open. When a ball enters this second start opening 64b, a second start opening switch (not shown) located on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When this second start opening switch is turned on, a lottery for a second special symbol jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see Figure 26), which will be described later. The result of the lottery is then displayed by the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and a variable third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed on the drum display device 81. The second start opening 64b also serves as one of the prize openings, from which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when a ball enters it.

As described above, above the second starting hole 64b when viewed from the front, there is a normal electric actuator 64c that can open (expand) or close (reduced) the second starting hole 64b by opening and closing two blade members that cover the opening through which the ball enters the second starting hole 64b. Under normal circumstances, the normal electric actuator 64c is in a closed state with its blades closed (standing upward), making it impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the second starting hole 64b.

On the other hand, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops on the "○" symbol, the normal electric feature 64c is activated for a predetermined period of time. While the normal electric feature 64c is activated, the wings of the normal electric feature 64c move from an upwardly raised position to a roughly V-shape (an inverted V-shape), and the second start opening 64b enters an open state. When the second start opening 64b enters an open state, the ball can enter the second start opening 64b, or it becomes easier for the ball to enter compared to a closed state. In other words, if the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops on the "○" symbol, resulting in a win, and the second start opening 64b enters an open state, the ball can enter the second start opening 64b, allowing for more jackpot draws.

A variable prize-winning device 65 is disposed below the first starting hole 64a and the second starting hole 64b, with a horizontally elongated rectangular large prize winning hole (also called a large opening hole or a specific prize winning hole) 65a located approximately in the center of the device. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 draws a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is illuminated to display the jackpot stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the drum display device 81, indicating the occurrence of a jackpot. The game state then transitions to a special game state (jackpot), in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the large prize winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened a predetermined number of times (10 or 5 times) for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

When this large prize opening 65a is opened, it closes after a predetermined time has passed since it was opened, or when a predetermined number of wins are detected. After closing, the large prize opening 65a is opened again. The opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 10 times (10 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state (jackpot state) that is advantageous to the player, and by landing a ball in the large prize opening 65a, the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an added gaming value (game value).

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the large prize winning opening 65a, and a large prize winning opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening/closing plate to open and close forward, using the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as an axis. Large prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot or do not easily win. In the event of a jackpot, the large prize winning opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state in which balls can easily win large prize winning opening 65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state.

The variable prize-winning device 65 is positioned so that a ball can enter the large prize opening 65a in either left-handed or right-handed play. When a ball enters the large prize opening 65a, a large prize opening switch (not shown) located on the back of the game board 13 turns on. By counting the number of times the large prize opening switch turns on, the number of balls that have entered the large prize opening 65a is counted, and the closing conditions for the large prize opening 65a are determined. Furthermore, when the large prize opening switch is turned on, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls. Then, by repeatedly opening and closing the large prize opening 65a upon a jackpot, more balls are likely to enter the large prize opening 65a, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as a reward for gameplay value (game value). This state is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player.

However, the special game state is not limited to the above-described form. A special winning opening and a large opening that opens and closes separately from the special winning opening may be provided in the game area, and when the special LED group 37b corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the special symbol display device 37, the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined time. While the special winning opening is open, if a ball enters the special winning opening, the large opening is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, creating a special game state.

Through gates 67 are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front. The through gates 67 have vertical through holes (not shown) for the ball to pass through. When a ball is shot into the play area and passes through the through gate 67, a through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole turns on, which causes the main control device 110 to draw a winning normal symbol.

If the result of the normal symbol lottery conducted on the ball that passed through the through gate 67 indicates a win, the normal symbol display device 83 will display a variable normal symbol followed by a static display of a "circle" symbol, and then the normal electric device 64c located above the second starting hole 64b when viewed from the front will be activated. This will change the state from one in which the plate of the normal electric device 64c, which made it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting hole 64b, closed the second starting hole 64b to one in which the ball can enter the second starting hole 64b for a predetermined period of time, or one in which it is easier for the ball to enter compared to the closed state.

A special symbol display device 37 is located at the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of Figure 3), and is equipped with a status LED group 37a and a special LED group 37b, each composed of multiple LEDs that serve as light-emitting means. The special symbol display device 37 displays the changes (hereinafter, the change display of both special symbols may be referred to as "dynamic display") of the first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1") and the second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2") in response to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Figure 2), and also displays the game status of the pachinko machine 10.

The status LED group 37a indicates, by its lighting state, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not yet been displayed as a variable display, among the balls that have entered (entered) the first starting slot 64a or the second starting slot 64b (described below). The number of jackpot rounds and error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the status LED group 37a corresponding to the relevant state. The status LED group 37a is configured so that each LED has a different light color (e.g., red, green, blue), and by combining these light colors, it is possible to indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 using a small number of LEDs.

Note that a "round" in a jackpot refers to the period from when the large prize opening 65a, which will be described later and is used to determine the number of winning balls in a jackpot, opens until it closes. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, one "round" is executed when "30 seconds" have passed since the large prize opening 65a began to open, or when 10 balls enter the large prize opening 65a while it is open.

The special LED group 37b is made up of a total of 12 LEDs: an upper LED group 37b1 made up of six LEDs, and a lower LED group 37b2 also made up of six LEDs. The upper LED group 37b1 dynamically displays a first special symbol that indicates the result of the first lottery game. The lower LED group 37b2 dynamically displays a second special symbol that indicates the result of the second lottery game.

Specifically, the upper LED group 37b1 displays a dynamic display (in the first embodiment, the LEDs in the upper LED group 37b1 light up one by one in sequence, starting with the topmost LED and continuing down, and this lighting pattern is displayed repeatedly) until a variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on a win at the first starting hole 64a located in the center of the gaming board 13 has elapsed, and then a static display of a symbol indicating the result of the determination (in the first embodiment, one of a total of 64 different stop symbols, depending on the combination of the lighting patterns of the six LEDs) is displayed.

In addition, the lower LED group 37b2 displays a dynamic display (in the first embodiment, the LEDs in the lower LED group 37b2 light up one by one in sequence, starting from the top LED and continuing down, and this lighting pattern is displayed repeatedly) until a variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on a win at the second starting hole 64b located on the right side of the gaming board 13 has elapsed, and then displays a stopped symbol indicating the result of the determination (in the first embodiment, one of a total of 64 types of stop symbols, depending on the combination of the lighting patterns of the six LEDs).

For either LED group 37b1 or 37b2, if the result is a miss, only the leftmost LED will be lit; if the result is a jackpot, each LED group will be lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (category) of jackpot. Details of the stop patterns for each LED group will be described later.

In addition, with this pachinko machine 10, a determination is made (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not a ball that enters the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b is a jackpot, and if a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, the type of jackpot is also determined.

The types of jackpots that can be determined here are "Probable A" which corresponds to a "10-round (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "R") probability jackpot," "Probable B" which corresponds to a "5R probability jackpot," and "Time-saving A" which corresponds to a "10R time-saving jackpot" (see Figure 24(b)).

Here, the "Probable Variation A" jackpot type, which corresponds to a "10R Probable Variation Jackpot," refers to a jackpot in which, after a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, the jackpot probability for each special symbol becomes higher than in the "normal game state" until the next jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "next jackpot") occurs, and the jackpot probability for normal symbols also shifts to a "probability variable state" where it becomes higher than in the "normal game state" until the next jackpot occurs.

Furthermore, the "Probable B" jackpot type, which corresponds to a "5R Probable Jackpot," is a jackpot in which, after a jackpot with a maximum of 5 rounds, the jackpot probability for each special symbol becomes higher than in the "normal game state" until the next jackpot (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "next jackpot") occurs, and the jackpot probability for normal symbols also shifts to a "probability variable state" where it becomes higher than in the "normal game state" until the next jackpot occurs.

Furthermore, the "Time-saving A" jackpot type, which corresponds to a "10R time-saving jackpot," is a jackpot in which, after a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, the jackpot probability for each special symbol enters a low-probability state equivalent to the "normal game state," while the hit probability for normal symbols enters a high-probability state until the dynamic display of special symbols is executed 100 times (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "time-saving state").

Here, each gaming state will be explained in more detail. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "normal gaming state" refers to a gaming state that is not in the "probability variable state" or "time-shortened state." It refers to a state in which the jackpot probability for each special symbol and the hit probability for the normal symbol are normal (i.e., a low-probability state), and the opening time of the normal electric feature 64c is short (the so-called non-opening extended state). In other words, the "normal gaming state" is a state in which the jackpot probability for each special symbol is lower than in the "probability variable state," the hit probability for the normal symbol is lower than in the "probability variable state" and "time-shortened state," and the opening time of the normal electric feature 64c is also short. Therefore, it is not a gaming state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second start hole 64b (hereinafter, the state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the second start hole 64b may be referred to as the "win-assistance state"), but is the most unfavorable (least advantageous) gaming state for the player.

Next, in the "time-reduced state," the jackpot probability for each special symbol is low, just like in the "normal game state," but the probability of winning for normal symbols is increased and the opening time of the normal electric symbol 64c is extended, making it easier for the ball to enter the second starting hole 64b. (Hereinafter, the function that increases the winning probability for normal symbols and extends the opening time of the normal electric symbol 64c may be referred to as the "winning assist function." Also, the state in which the winning probability for normal symbols is increased and the opening time of the normal electric symbol 64c is extended, making it easier for the ball to enter the second starting hole 64b may be referred to as the "state in which the winning assist function is activated.") In other words, in the "time-reduced state," jackpots for special symbols are equivalent to those in the "normal game state," but winnings for normal symbols are easier to obtain and the opening time of the normal electric symbol 64c is extended. Therefore, in the "time-shortened state," it is easier to get the fired ball to enter the second starting hole 64b, making it possible to continuously execute the dynamic display of special chart 2, and by obtaining a prize ball (for example, 1 ball per prize) based on the ball entering the second starting hole 64b, it becomes possible to play while minimizing the reduction in the number of balls in hand.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, the "time-shortened state" is maintained after a jackpot of the "time-shortened A" jackpot type (see FIG. 24(b)), until the dynamic display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the first embodiment) for each jackpot. After the dynamic display of special symbols is executed the predetermined number of times (i.e., after the "electric support ends"), the machine is configured to transition from the "time-shortened state" to the "normal game state" (see FIG. 10).

Next, in the "probability-changing state," after a jackpot, the probability of a subsequent jackpot for each special symbol increases as an added value. The probability of a win for a normal symbol also increases, and the winning support function of the normal electric symbol 64c is activated. In other words, the "probability-changing state" is a state in which a jackpot result based on a special symbol is more likely to be derived, a winning result based on a normal symbol is more likely to be derived, and the open state of the normal electric symbol 64c is longer. Therefore, in the "probability-changing state," the winning support function is activated, and the fired ball is more likely to enter the second starting hole 64b. This allows the dynamic display of special symbol 2 to be executed continuously, and by winning a prize ball based on the second starting hole 64b (e.g., 1 ball per winning ball), the player can play while minimizing the reduction in the number of balls available. Furthermore, the player can play in a state in which a jackpot game (special game state) based on the dynamic display of special symbol 2 is more likely to occur.

Here, we will explain the display mode of the special LED group 37b for each jackpot type. The upper LED group 37b1 and lower LED group 37b2 for the first special symbol have a total of 64 display patterns for the stop indication (illumination indication): one display pattern corresponding to a miss, 21 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Probable A," 21 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Probable B," and 21 display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Time-saving A." Each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and random display patterns are pre-assigned. Therefore, when a player sees the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2, they can recognize that a miss has been displayed, but the display is configured to make it difficult to distinguish whether the jackpot type is "Probable A," "Probable B," or "Time-saving A."

With this configuration, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, it is difficult for the player to recognize the jackpot type that has been won unless they are familiar with all of the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display. Therefore, for example, even if "Probable Variety A" is won in the lottery for the first or second special symbol, by displaying a jackpot result corresponding to "Time Reduction A" as a provisional display on the drum display device 81, it is possible to make it difficult to determine which game state the player is in. As a result, gameplay that forces the player to guess which game state they are playing in is created, increasing the enjoyment of the game. In addition, by performing promotion effects during or after the jackpot, the player can experience unexpected gameplay and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Instead of changing the probability of winning a normal symbol, the time for which the normal electric feature 64c associated with the second start hole 64b (described below) is opened or the number of times the normal electric feature 64c is opened per one win with a normal symbol may be changed depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, in the "time-shortened state," the time for which the normal electric feature 64c associated with the second start hole 64b is opened may be made longer than in the "normal gaming state," or the number of times the normal electric feature 64c is opened per one win may be made greater than in the "normal gaming state." Furthermore, in the "time-shortened state," at least two of the following may be simultaneously achieved: increasing the probability of winning a normal symbol, lengthening the opening time of the normal electric feature 64c, and increasing the number of times the normal electric feature 64c is opened.

Attachment spaces K1 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13. Certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment spaces K1 can be seen through the small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64a, 64b, or 65a are guided through the outlet 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). Balls that enter winning openings 63, 64a, 64b, or 65a pass through a switch for detecting ball entry provided at each winning opening, and are then guided to the ball discharge path. Balls guided to the ball discharge path pass through an out switch (not shown) for detecting the guided ball, and are then discharged to the island equipment (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

The game board 13 is fitted with numerous nails to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (game parts) such as windmills are also provided.

Now, with reference to Figures 5 and 6, we will explain the base plate 60 that constitutes the gaming board 13, the back-of-board unit 300 that also constitutes the gaming board 13 and is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 from the base plate 60, the light guide unit 400 that is assembled to the back-of-board unit 300, and the drum display device 81 that is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 from the light guide unit 400. Figure 5 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board 13, and Figure 6 is an exploded perspective view of the back-of-board unit 300.

First, as shown in Figure 5, the game board 13 is composed of a base plate 60, a back-of-board unit 300, and a drum display device 81. The back-of-board unit 300 is attached to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the base plate 60, which forms the game area, and the drum display device 81 is attached to the back-of-board unit 300.

6, the rear panel unit 300 is composed of a rear panel unit base 301, a light guide unit 400, a right-side alert lamp LED board 302, a right-side alert lamp member 303, a left-side alert lamp LED board 304, a left-side alert lamp member 305, an alert lamp assembly portion 306, and a confirmation lamp unit 310. First, the light guide unit 400, the right-side alert lamp LED board 302, the left-side alert lamp LED board 304, and the confirmation lamp unit 310 are each attached to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the rear panel unit base 301 with screws. Then, the right-side alert lamp member 303 is attached to correspond to the right-side alert lamp LED board 302, and the left-side alert lamp member 305 is attached to correspond to the left-side alert lamp LED board 304. Finally, the alert lamp assembly portion 306 is attached to the rear panel unit base 301 with screws, thereby forming the rear panel unit 300.

The right-side notification lamp member 303 and the left-side notification lamp member 305 are lamps that indicate to the player various game conditions, etc., during the third symbol variation presentation. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, various information regarding the third symbol variation presentation and information regarding the game status can be indicated to the player by the lighting patterns and lighting colors of the right-side notification lamp member 303 and the left-side notification lamp member 305.

The confirmation lamp unit 310 is a drive lamp that indicates the occurrence of a jackpot by lighting and driving the confirmation lamp 311 when a jackpot occurs in the variable presentation. This confirmation lamp unit 310 is composed of the confirmation lamp 311, a confirmation lamp LED (not shown) for lighting the confirmation lamp 311, and a rotary drive motor (not shown) for rotating the confirmation lamp 311. In the first embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot occurs in the variable presentation of the third symbol, the confirmation lamp 311 is lit and rotated at a timing determined by lottery, clearly indicating to the player that a jackpot has occurred. Furthermore, the confirmation lamp 311 is configured to light in a long lighting pattern with a long lighting time (e.g., 10 seconds) when a jackpot that generates a "probability variable state" is won, and to light in a short lighting pattern with a short lighting time (e.g., 2 seconds) when a jackpot that does not generate a "probability variable state" is won. The timing of when this confirmation lamp 311 lights up will be described later.

Now, with reference to Figures 7 to 10, the detailed configuration of the light guide unit 400 and the positional relationship between the light guide unit 400 and the drum display device 81 will be described. Figure 7 is a rear perspective view of the light guide unit 400, Figure 8 is an exploded front perspective view of the light guide unit 400, and Figure 9 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light guide unit 400. Figure 10 is a diagram showing the positional relationship of the drum display device 81 with respect to the schematic side cross-sectional view of the light guide unit 400 taken along line X-X in Figure 7.

As shown in Figures 7 to 9, the light guide unit 400 is composed of a front light guide plate 410, a lower LED unit 414, a front right LED unit 415, a front left LED unit 416, an upper spacer 417, a lower spacer 418, a rear light guide plate 420, a rear upper LED unit 422, and a display area forming member 430.

The front light guide plate 410 is configured with a regular R-shaped portion that follows the outer periphery of the drum display device 81, and upper and lower flat plate portions that extend parallel to the surface of the base plate 60. More specifically, an upper inverted R-shaped portion that bends toward the front of the game board 13 with a radius of approximately R32 is formed from the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410. Continuing from this is an upper regular R-shaped portion that bulges toward the front of the game board 13 with a radius of approximately R80 that follows the outer periphery of the drum display device 81 (rear light guide plate 420). Continuing from this is a lower inverted R-shaped portion that bends toward the front of the game board 13 with a radius of approximately R32, and a lower flat plate portion is formed continuously from this lower inverted R-shaped portion.

As described above, the rear side of the front light guide plate 410 (the surface facing the rear of the pachinko machine 10) is provided with lens cuts of various concave and convex shapes so that by guiding light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from various directions, various decorative patterns, including a second decorative pattern group 411 resembling a cherry blossom storm made up of multiple cherry blossom petals, a third decorative pattern 412 resembling a single sunfish, and a fourth decorative pattern group 413 resembling a group of bubbles, can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The second decorative pattern group 411 is formed in the left and right end regions of the regular R-shaped portion when viewed from the front, the third decorative pattern is formed in the central region of the regular R-shaped portion when viewed from the front, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed evenly over the entire lower inverted R-shaped portion and the lower flat portion.

The uneven lens cuts (horizontal grooves) corresponding to the designs of the second decorative pattern group 411 are configured to emit guided light toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 when light is incident upward from the lower end face of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 from the front lower LEDs 414c on both the left and right sides mounted on the lower LED boards 414b of the lower LED unit 414. Therefore, the light incident upward from both ends of the lower end face of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 causes the second decorative pattern group 411 to emit light from the front of the pachinko machine 10, making it visible.

The uneven lens cuts (horizontal grooves) corresponding to the designs of this second decorative pattern group 411 are configured so that, of the light guided into the flat plate portion, only light that is incident from above is emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, while light that is incident from other directions (for example, the side) is prevented from being emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the uneven lens cuts corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411. In other words, the second decorative pattern group 411 is configured so that only light that is incident from the lower end face of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 is emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, while light that is incident from other directions is not emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, but passes directly through the area where the second decorative pattern group 411 is formed and does not emit light (is not visible or is difficult to see).

More specifically, the uneven lens cuts (horizontal grooves) corresponding to the patterns of the second decorative pattern group 411 are configured so that, of the light guided into the flat plate portion, light incident from the upward and downward directions when viewed from the front (light guided in the upward and downward directions when viewed from the front) is emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, while light incident from the lateral directions when viewed from the front (light guided in the left and right directions when viewed from the front) is not emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 due to the uneven lens cuts corresponding to the second decorative pattern group 411. Here, the lens cut may be shaped so that light irradiated onto the concave-convex lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the symbols of the second decorative symbol group 411 is emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 only when light guided to the flat plate portion is incident from either the upward direction as viewed from the front or the downward direction as viewed from the front (light guided in the upward and downward directions as viewed from the front). However, in this case, the shape of the lens cut must be precise, which may increase the processing costs of the lens cut. Therefore, by using a lens cut with a concave-convex shape that emits light irradiated onto the second decorative symbol group 411 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 regardless of whether light irradiated onto the flat plate portion is incident from either the upward direction as viewed from the front or the downward direction as viewed from the front (light guided in the upward and downward directions as viewed from the front), it is possible to prevent an increase in the processing costs of the lens cut.

On the other hand, as described above, the lens cut may be configured so that light irradiated onto the second decorative pattern group 411 is emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 using only one of the light guided to the flat plate portion that is incident from either the upward direction as viewed from the front or the downward direction as viewed from the front (light guided from the upward direction as viewed from the front and the downward direction as viewed from the front).

Furthermore, because the front light guide plate 410 is positioned closer to the front of the pachinko machine 10 (toward the front) than the rear light guide plate 420, it is more susceptible than the rear light guide plate 420 to the effects of light emitted from the confirmation lamp 311 located above the front light guide plate 410 and light emitted from the indoor lighting installed on the ceiling of the gaming hall. Therefore, it is preferable that the second decorative pattern group 411 (as well as the third decorative pattern 412 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) formed on the front light guide plate 410 have a lens cut with an uneven shape that is as insensitive as possible to light from above when viewed from the front (to avoid false lighting) and only lights up (emits light) when viewed from below when viewed from the front (or from the side when viewed from the front). Furthermore, by arranging the front lower LEDs 414c below the front of the front light guide plate 410 rather than arranging the light guide LEDs above the front, and configuring the front lower LEDs 414c to light up the second decorative symbol group 411, it is possible to prevent the second decorative symbol group 411 from being erroneously lit due to the lighting of the confirmation lamp 311 or the indoor lighting of the amusement hall, etc.

In the first embodiment, the second decorative pattern group 411 on the front light guide plate 410 was illuminated only by the lower front LEDs 414c arranged below the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front. However, instead, upper front LEDs may be arranged above the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front, and the second decorative pattern group 411 may be illuminated only by the upper front LEDs, or the second decorative pattern group 411 may be illuminated by the upper front LEDs and the lower front LEDs 414c. Furthermore, the third decorative pattern 412 may also be illuminated by the upper front LEDs and/or the lower front LEDs 414c.

The uneven lens cuts (horizontal grooves) corresponding to the design of the third decorative pattern 412 are configured to emit guided light toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 when light is incident upward from the lower end face of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 from front lower LEDs 414c other than those at the left and right ends mounted on the lower LED board 414b of the lower LED unit 414. Therefore, light incident upward from other than the ends of the lower end face of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 (i.e., the central portion of the lower end face) causes the third decorative pattern 412 to emit light from the front of the pachinko machine 10, making it visible.

The uneven lens cuts (horizontal grooves) corresponding to the designs of this third decorative pattern 412, like the uneven lens cuts corresponding to the designs of the second decorative pattern group 411, are configured so that, of the light guided into the flat plate portion, only light that is incident from above is emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, while light that is incident from other directions (for example, horizontally) is prevented from being emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the uneven lens cuts corresponding to the third decorative pattern 412. In other words, the third decorative pattern 412 is configured so that only light that is incident from the lower end face of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 is emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, while light that is incident from other directions is not emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, but passes directly through the area where the second decorative pattern group 411 is formed and does not emit light (is not visible or is difficult to see).

The concave-convex lens cuts (vertical grooves) corresponding to the designs of the fourth decorative design group 413 are configured to emit guided light toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 when light is incident laterally from the left and/or right end faces of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 from the front right LEDs 415c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front right LED board 415b of the front right LED unit 415 and/or the front left LEDs 416c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front left LED board 416b of the front left LED unit 416. Therefore, the light incident laterally from the left and/or right end faces of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 causes the fourth decorative design group 413 to emit light and become visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The uneven lens cuts (vertical grooves) corresponding to the designs of this fourth decorative pattern group 413 are configured so that, of the light guided into the flat plate portion, only light that is incident laterally is emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, while light that is incident from other directions (e.g., from below to above) is prevented from being emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the uneven lens cuts corresponding to the fourth decorative pattern group 413. In other words, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured so that only light that is incident from the left or right end face of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 is emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, while light that is incident from other directions is not emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, but passes directly through the area where the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed and does not emit light (is not visible or is difficult to see). Details of the illumination modes of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 will be described later.

Like the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420 is configured by a regular R-shaped portion that conforms to the outer periphery of the drum display device 81, and upper and lower flat plate portions that extend parallel to the surface of the base plate 60. More specifically, an upper inverted R-shaped portion bent toward the front of the game board 13 with a radius of approximately 30 is formed from the upper flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420. Continuing from this is an upper inverted R-shaped portion that bends toward the front of the game board 13 with a radius of approximately 75 and conforms to the outer periphery of the drum display device 81 (front light guide plate 410). Continuing from this is a lower inverted R-shaped portion that bends toward the front of the game board 13 with a radius of approximately 30, and a lower flat plate portion is formed continuously from this lower inverted R-shaped portion.

Furthermore, a rear-upper diffusion lens 423 is provided on the upper end (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front, which diffuses light emitted from multiple rear-upper LEDs 422c (see FIG. 12) mounted on the rear-upper LED board 422b of the rear-upper LED unit 422 in multiple directions within the rear light guide plate 420. Furthermore, a rear-downward diffusion lens 425 is provided on the lower end (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front, which diffuses light emitted from multiple rear-downward LEDs 424 mounted on the downward LED board 414b of the lower LED unit 414 in multiple directions within the rear light guide plate 420. Details of the light irradiation (passage) mode by the rear-upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear-downward diffusion lens 425 will be described later.

As described above, the rear side of the rear light guide plate 420 (the surface facing the rear of the pachinko machine 10) is provided with lens cuts of various uneven shapes so that by guiding light incident on the rear light guide plate 420 from above and/or below, a first decorative pattern group 421 resembling a school of fish made up of multiple types of fish can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. This first decorative pattern group 421 is formed evenly over the entire regular R-shaped portion.

The concave-convex lens cuts corresponding to the designs of the first decorative design group 421 are configured to emit guided light toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 when light is incident toward the lower flat plate portion and/or upper flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420 from the rear lower LEDs 424 mounted on the lower LED board 414b of the lower LED unit 414 and/or from the multiple rear upper LEDs 422c (see FIG. 12) mounted on the rear upper LED board 422b of the rear upper LED unit 422. Therefore, the light incident from the lower end (surface) of the lower flat plate portion and/or the upper end (surface) of the upper flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420 causes the first decorative design group 421 to emit light and become visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The concave-convex lens cuts corresponding to the symbols of this first decorative symbol group 421 are configured to emit light incident from various directions, among the light guided into the flat plate portion, toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the light emission mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 will be described later.

More specifically, the concave-convex lens cuts corresponding to the designs of the first decorative design group 421 are configured to emit, toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, light that is guided into the flat portion and that enters from directions parallel to the flat portion of the rear light guide plate 420, such as upward, downward, right, and left directions when viewed from the front. When light enters from a non-flat portion of the rear light guide plate 420, i.e., the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the light that repeatedly reflects within the rear light guide plate 420 is guided with slightly different angles of incidence and reflection on the front and back surfaces when reflected by the R-shaped portions of the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion. For this reason, even if light is incident on the upper inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, or lower inverted R-shaped portion from the side when viewed from the front, the light is not guided in the side direction when viewed from the front, but is guided diagonally upward or diagonally downward when viewed from the front, causing the light to be guided unevenly (non-homogeneously) to the first decorative pattern group 421 applied to the back side of the rear light guide plate 420, resulting in the first decorative pattern group 421 lighting up more or less intensely depending on the location, and possibly resulting in sparse lighting. For this reason, by illuminating light from the edge faces of the upper flat portion and lower flat portion of the rear light guide plate 420, light can be evenly incident on the first decorative pattern group 421, maintaining uniform lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421.

In the first embodiment, when light is incident (guided) on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the light is configured to be incident from the end face (portion) of one of the flat portions of each light guide plate 410, 420, and not from the R-shaped portion (i.e., the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion). This is because if light is attempted to be incident from the R-shaped portion, the direction of the incident light may be changed by the R-shaped portion, making it difficult or impossible to properly illuminate the desired pattern. In addition, LEDs and other devices must be arranged along the shape of the end face of the R-shaped portion, which may reduce design freedom. Furthermore, the R-shaped portion is formed to match the outer shape of the performance elements such as the drum display device 81 and movable props, and arranging an LED board or other device to the side of the R-shaped portion may restrict design freedom for the performance elements. Therefore, by allowing light to enter from the end face (portion) of one of the flat plate portions of each light guide plate 410, 420 that has an R-shaped portion, the above problem can be resolved effectively and the degree of freedom in designing each component can be increased.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are respectively made up of an upper flat plate portion (upper flat plate portion), an upper inverted R-shaped portion, a regular R-shaped portion, a lower inverted R-shaped portion, and a lower flat plate portion (lower flat plate portion), and are configured so that light from each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 is incident from the upper, right, left, and lower end faces (side faces) of the upper and lower flat plate portions when viewed from the front.

The first reason for this is to ensure that the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 of each light guide plate 410, 420 are properly illuminated. The non-flat portions of each light guide plate 410, 420, i.e., the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, and the lower inverted R-shaped portion, are formed with slightly different R-shaped radii on the front and back surfaces, corresponding to the thickness of each light guide plate 410, 420. Therefore, when light is incident from the end face (side surface) of the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion of each light guide plate 410, 420, the light is repeatedly reflected within each light guide plate 410, 420, and when reflected by the R-shaped portions of the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, or the lower inverted R-shaped portion, it is guided with slightly different angles of incidence and reflection on the front and back surfaces. As a result, light is guided unevenly (non-homogeneously) to the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 applied to the back side of each light guide plate 410, 420, and the lighting intensity of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, and 421 may vary depending on the location, resulting in sparse lighting.

Therefore, by introducing light into the end faces (side faces) of the upper and lower flat portions of each light guide plate 410, 420, the light that repeatedly reflects within each light guide plate 410, 420, while guided at least within the upper and lower flat portions, repeatedly reflects off the front and back surfaces of each planar light guide plate 410, 420, and is guided with uniform angles of incidence and reflection. This first stably guides light within the upper and lower flat portions of each light guide plate 410, 420, and then uniformly (homogeneously) guides light to each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 provided on the back surface of each light guide plate 410, 420, enabling each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 to be properly illuminated.

The second reason is to improve design freedom regarding the placement of each LED 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424. The side end faces of the R-shaped portions of each light guide plate 410, 420 (i.e., the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, and the lower inverted R-shaped portion) in a front view are shaped to follow the R-shaped portions. Therefore, when light is intended to be incident from the side end faces of the R-shaped portions, the placement of each LED on the LED board must also follow the side end faces of the R-shaped portions. In particular, when placing the LEDs while also taking into account the placement of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421, adjustments regarding the position and spacing of each LED on the LED board become complicated, which may reduce design freedom.

Therefore, the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 on each LED board 414b, 415b, 416b, and 422b are positioned so that light enters from the end faces (side faces) of the upper and lower flat portions of each light guide plate 410, 420, and the LED boards and LEDs are not positioned on the end faces (side faces) of the R-shaped portions of each light guide plate 410, 420. This configuration allows the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 on each LED board 414b, 415b, 416b, and 422b to be simply positioned in accordance with the shape of the end faces of the upper and lower flat portions (i.e., positioned in a straight line and at equal intervals), thereby improving design flexibility.

Furthermore, the third reason is to improve the design freedom of the presentation devices (drum display device 81, movable gimmicks, etc.) on the back and side of each light guide plate 410, 420. The presentation devices (drum display device 81 that performs the variable presentation itself, movable gimmicks that perform various presentations in the variable presentation, etc.) related to the variable presentation of the third symbol, which is the main game in the pachinko machine 10, are arranged on the back and side of each R-shaped portion of each light guide plate 410, 420. Here, if an LED board were arranged on the side of each R-shaped portion of each light guide plate 410, 420 when viewed from the front, the installation of the LED board could limit the design freedom of each presentation device.

To allow light to enter from the end faces (side faces) of the upper and lower flat portions of each light guide plate 410, 420, the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 on the LED boards 414b, 415b, 416b, and 422b are arranged on the upper side of the upper flat portion as viewed from the front, and on the lower side, right side, and left side as viewed from the front of the lower flat portion. This arrangement prevents LED boards and LEDs from being located to the sides of the R-shaped portions of each light guide plate 410, 420 as viewed from the front. This configuration ensures that when performance devices are installed on the back and side of each light guide plate 410, 420, the LED boards and other components do not interfere with the placement of the performance devices, thereby improving the design flexibility of each performance device.

The lower LED unit 414 is located below the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front, and is composed of a lower base 414a, a lower LED board 414b equipped with front lower LEDs 414c and rear lower LEDs 424, and a front lower condenser lens 414d.

The lower base 414a is configured to be able to hold the lower LED board 414b with screws or the like, and is configured to be able to position and fix the front light guide plate 410, rear light guide plate 420, and front lower condenser lens 414d by connecting and fixing the front right LED unit 415, front left LED unit 416, and display area forming member 430 with screws or the like while holding them in their predetermined positions with positioning bosses (ribs) or the like.

Furthermore, this lower base 414a has a predetermined partition rib formed thereon so that light emitted from the front lower LEDs 414c mounted on the lower LED board 414b is directed only to the front light guide plate 410 via the front lower condensing lens 414d, and light emitted from the rear lower LEDs 424 is directed only to the rear lower diffusing lens 425 formed on the lower end (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420. This allows the light emitted from each LED 414c, 424 to be accurately directed to the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, thereby enabling the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, or the third decorative pattern 412 to be illuminated accurately and with appropriate timing, thereby preventing display abnormalities such as the unintended illumination of decorative patterns. The manner in which light is emitted (passes) by the front-downward focusing lens 414d and the manner in which light is emitted (diffused) by the rear-downward diffusing lens 425 will be described in detail below.

The front right LED unit 415 is located to the right of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front, and is composed of a front right base 415a, a front right LED board 415b on which multiple front right LEDs 415c (see Figure 19) are mounted, and a front right condenser lens 415d.

The front right base 415a is configured to be able to hold the front right LED board 415b with screws or the like, and is provided with positioning ribs that conform to the shapes of the right end faces of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (the outer shapes of the upper flat plate portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, and lower flat plate portion). The front light guide plate 410, rear light guide plate 420, and front right condenser lens 415d are held in their respective positions by the positioning bosses and positioning ribs, and can be connected and fixed to the lower LED unit 414, rear upper LED unit 422, and display area forming member 430 with screws or the like, allowing them to be positioned and fixed.

Furthermore, this front right base 415a has a predetermined partitioning rib formed so that light emitted from the front right LEDs 415c (see Figure 19) mounted on the front right LED board 415b is emitted only to the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 via the front right condensing lens 415d. This allows the light emitted from the front right LEDs 415c to be accurately emitted to the front light guide plate 410, allowing the fourth decorative pattern group 413 to be illuminated accurately and with appropriate timing, and preventing display abnormalities such as the illumination of unintended patterns. Details of the manner in which light is illuminated (passed) by the front right condensing lens 415d will be described later.

The front-left LED unit 416 is located to the left of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front, and is composed of a front-left base 416a, a front-left LED board 416b on which multiple front-left LEDs 416c (see Figure 19) are mounted, and a front-left focusing lens 416d.

The front-left base 416a is configured to be able to hold the front-left LED board 416b with screws or the like, and is provided with positioning ribs that conform to the shapes of the left end faces of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (the outer shapes of the ends of the upper flat plate portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, and lower flat plate portion). The front light guide plate 410, rear light guide plate 420, and front-left condenser lens 416d are held in their respective positions by the positioning bosses and positioning ribs, and can be connected and fixed to the lower LED unit 414, rear upper LED unit 422, and display area forming member 430 with screws or the like, allowing them to be positioned and fixed.

Furthermore, this front-left base 416a has a predetermined partitioning rib formed so that light emitted from the front-left LEDs 416c (see Figure 19) mounted on the front-left LED board 416b is emitted only to the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 via the front-left condensing lens 416d. This allows the light emitted from the front-left LEDs 416c to be accurately emitted to the front light guide plate 410, allowing the fourth decorative pattern group 413 to be illuminated accurately and with appropriate timing, preventing display abnormalities such as the illumination of unintended patterns. Details of the manner in which light is illuminated (passed) by the front-left condensing lens 416d will be described later.

The rear upper LED unit 422 is located above the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front, and is composed of a rear upper base 422a and a rear upper LED board 422b equipped with rear upper LEDs 422c (see Figure 12).

The rear upper base 422a is configured to be able to hold the rear upper LED board 422b with screws or the like, and is configured to be able to position and fix the front light guide plate 410 and rear light guide plate 420 by connecting and fixing the front right LED unit 415, front left LED unit 416, and display area forming member 430 with screws or the like while holding them in their respective predetermined positions with positioning bosses (ribs) or the like.

Furthermore, this rear-upper base 422a is formed with a predetermined partitioning rib so that light emitted from the rear-upper LEDs 422c (see Figure 12) is directed only to the rear-upper diffusion lenses 423 formed on the upper end (surface) of the rear light guide plate 420. This allows light emitted from the rear-upper LEDs 422c to be accurately directed to the rear light guide plate 420, allowing the first decorative pattern group 421 to be illuminated accurately and with appropriate timing, and preventing display abnormalities such as the illumination of unintended patterns. Details of the light illumination (diffusion) mode by the rear-upper diffusion lenses 423 will be described later.

The upper spacer 417 and the lower spacer 418 have a predetermined thickness (e.g., 5 mm) and are formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the longitudinal direction. The upper spacer 417 and the lower spacer 418 are disposed between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 to provide a predetermined space between them. By providing a space between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 in this way, it is possible to prevent light incident on one light guide plate 410, 420 from being incident on the other light guide plate 420, 410, thereby preventing the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 from being unintentionally lit.

As described above, the display area forming member 430 is positioned in front of the front light guide plate 410 and rear light guide plate 420 (drum display device 81) when viewed from the front, and has a central opening 431 formed therein so that the drum display device 81 (the curved portions of the front light guide plate 410 and rear light guide plate 420) can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, with lens cuts 432 formed around the outer edge of the central opening 431.

This lens cut 432 is provided to clarify the display area (effective line) of the display pattern on the drum display device 81, and also to suppress (prevent) the light emitted from the confirmation lamp 311 located in the upper part of the display area forming member 430 when viewed from the front from being irradiated onto the front light guide plate 410 and rear light guide plate 420 (drum display device 81) when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit.

Now, referring to Figure 10, the positional relationships between the display area forming member 430, front light guide plate 410, rear light guide plate 420, drum display device 81, and confirmation lamp 311 will be described. Figure 10 is a diagram showing the positional relationships between the drum display device 81 and the positional relationships between the confirmation lamp 311 and display area forming member 430, relative to the schematic side cross-sectional view of the light guide unit 400 taken along line X-X in Figure 7. Note that for ease of explanation, the distances between the display area forming member 430, front light guide plate 410, rear light guide plate 420, and drum display device 81 are shown enlarged in Figure 10.

As shown in FIG. 10, when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front, the display area forming member 430, front light guide plate 410, rear light guide plate 420, and drum display device 81 are arranged in this order from the outside (front side of the pachinko machine 10 (left side of the drawing)). A total of nine symbol display areas, three for each of the LR, CR, and RR reels of the drum display device 81, are visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430, while the other symbol areas (third symbols) are covered by the lens cut 432 and are therefore invisible or difficult to see. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 when illuminated. Furthermore, because the lower side of the lens cut 432 below the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 is transparent, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 formed on the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when illuminated. Therefore, the display area forming member 430 clarifies the active lines for the variable effects on the drum display device 81, and when the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are illuminated, they can each be seen while avoiding the lens cut 432 of the display area forming member 430.

Furthermore, the lens cuts 432 are located in the upper part (lower part, both side parts) of the curved portion of each light guide plate 410, 420 so that when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, the light emitted from the confirmation lamp 311 is not or is unlikely to be guided to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, i.e., so as to block the light from the confirmation lamp 311.

More specifically, the lens cut 432 is configured with a rib shape on its rear side (the rear side of the pachinko machine 10) with multiple ribs standing upright in a continuous line, and is configured to disperse light incident on the lens cut 432 and reduce the amount of light transmitted through the lens cut 432.

In addition, instead of using multiple ribs, the lens cut 432 may be configured using knurling or mirror finishing to reduce the amount of light transmitted through the lens cut 432.

In addition, lens cuts 432 may also be applied to the inner surface of the upright wall (the entire bulge) on the side of the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 when viewed from the front. By configuring it in this way, the display area showing the effective line for the variable effect is clearly defined in a square shape, and light that may be incident from the side of the light guide unit 400 when viewed from the front is dispersed by the lens cuts 432, reducing the amount of light transmitted through the lens cuts 432.

In addition, the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 located above the light-guiding unit 400 when viewed from the front is an effect that suggests (notifies) that a jackpot will occur in the variable display, and is an effect that is more important in the game than the effects of the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the light-guiding unit 400 (i.e., indication of the likelihood of a jackpot). Therefore, the illumination brightness is configured to be stronger than the effects of the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413. This is to make it easier for the player to recognize the effect of the confirmation lamp 311, which is more important, if these effects are combined.

The front light guide plate 410 and rear light guide plate 420 are formed in a shape (regular R-shaped portion) that follows the outer periphery of the drum display device 81. If a lamp or the like is turned on at the top or bottom of the regular R-shaped portion, the light from the lamp will be incident on the regular R-shaped portion, causing each of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 to light up abnormally, which could result in a discrepancy between the lighting state of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 and the resulting changes in the variable presentation.

By positioning a lens cut 432 between the confirmation lamp 311 and the vertical position of the curved portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the lens cut 432 can diffuse (attenuate) the incident light. This prevents light other than that incident by the illumination of each LED 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 from entering the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, thereby preventing the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 from lighting abnormally. This prevents inconsistencies in the presentation, such as the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413, and 421 lighting abnormally.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the front light guide plate 410 is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the first decorative symbol group 421, which has the highest jackpot reliability (expectation level). Therefore, the front light guide plate 410 can also prevent light incident from the front of the pachinko machine 10 from entering the rear light guide plate 420. Therefore, by locating the front light guide plate 410 on the front side of the rear light guide plate 420 as a noise cover, the light incident by the front light guide plate 410 is somewhat diffused (weakened), thereby preventing the first decorative symbol group 421, which has a large effect discrepancy, from being abnormally illuminated if it is erroneously illuminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of effect discrepancies, such as the abnormal illumination of each of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413, and 421.

Next, with reference to Figures 11 to 25, the direction of light travel from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 relative to the rear light guide plate 420 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "light path"), and the light paths of light from the front lower focusing lens 414d, front right focusing lens 415d, and front left focusing lens 416d relative to the front light guide plate 410 will be explained. The following also describes the illumination mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420, the illumination mode of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413 on the front light guide plate 410, and the performance modes of the confirmation lamp 311, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81.

First, the positional relationship between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 will be described with reference to Figure 11. Figure 11 is a schematic perspective view of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. Note that in Figure 11, for ease of explanation, the arrangement of the second decorative pattern group 411, third decorative pattern 412, and fourth decorative pattern group 413 provided on the front light guide plate 410, and the first decorative pattern group 421 provided on the rear light guide plate 420 is depicted as being different from that shown in Figure 12, etc., which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 11, the front light guide plate 410 is located on the front side (left side of the drawing) of the pachinko machine 10, and the rear light guide plate 420 is located on its rear side (right side of the drawing). As described above, the front light guide plate 410 has a third decorative pattern 412 modeled after a sunfish formed in the center of the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, a second decorative pattern group 411 modeled after cherry blossom petals formed on both the left and right sides of the regular R-shaped portion on which the third decorative pattern 412 is formed, and a fourth decorative pattern group 413 modeled after bubble patterns formed over the entire area of the lower inverted R-shaped portion continuing from the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410.

Also, as described above, the rear light guide plate 420 has a first decorative pattern group 421 that resembles a school of fish pattern formed over the entire area of the regular R-shaped portion of the rear light guide plate 420.

Therefore, when the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are connected to form the light guide unit 400, the display areas of the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are configured to overlap (superimpose). In this way, when producing effects in the light guide unit 400, a variety of effects can be produced in a single display area, enhancing the presentation effect of the light guide unit 400 and drawing more attention to the game.

Next, with reference to Figures 12 to 16, the optical paths of light from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 relative to the rear light guide plate 420 and the light emission mode (lighting mode or display mode; the same applies below) of the first decorative pattern group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 will be described. Figure 12 is a schematic front view showing the positional relationship between the first decorative pattern group 421 that can be lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LEDs 422c of the rear upper LED unit 422, and the rear lower LEDs 424 of the lower LED unit 414. Figure 13 is a schematic enlarged view of part A in Figure 12, showing the relationship between the rear lower diffusion lens 425 formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 and the rear lower LEDs 424 of the lower LED unit 414. Figure 14 is a diagram showing the optical paths of light through the rear lower diffusion lens. Figure 15 is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 displayed on the rear light guide plate 420, where Figure 15(a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit, and Figure 15(b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are additionally lit from the state of Figure 15(a). FIG. 16 shows the illumination state of the first decorative pattern group 421 displayed on the rear light guide plate 420. FIG. 16(a) is a schematic diagram showing the illumination state of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the upper rear LED 422c and the lower rear LED 424 corresponding to the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 are additionally illuminated from the state shown in FIG. 15(b). FIG. 16(b) is a schematic diagram showing the illumination state of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the upper rear LED 422c and the lower rear LED 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off from the state shown in FIG. 16(a). Note that in FIGS. 12, 15, and 16, the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 and the diffusing lenses 423 and 425 are omitted or illustrated schematically for ease of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 12, the rear light guide plate 420 has a first decorative pattern group 421 formed over the entire curved portion as a school of fish pattern, which is a pattern imitating a school of multiple types of fish. Furthermore, when light is irradiated onto the rear upper diffusion lens 423 formed on the upper end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 by the rear upper LEDs 422c and rear lower LEDs 424 provided above and below the rear light guide plate 420, the light is diffused in multiple directions (three directions: left, center, and right in the first embodiment) from each of the diffusion lenses 423, 425.

Furthermore, the rear upper LEDs 422c and rear lower LEDs 424 are positioned so that one rear upper LED 422c and one rear lower LED 424 form a pair in the up-down direction (vertical direction).

Now, with reference to Figures 13 and 14, the manner in which light is diffused by the rear-downward diffusion lens 425 (rear-upper diffusion lens 423) will be described. Figure 13 is a schematic enlarged view of part A in Figure 12, and is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the rear-downward diffusion lens 425 formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 and the rear-downward LEDs 424 of the lower LED unit 414. Figure 14 is a schematic enlarged view of part B in Figure 13, and is a diagram showing the optical path of light through the rear-downward diffusion lens 425. Note that the configuration of the rear-upper diffusion lens 423 is the same as the configuration of the rear-downward diffusion lens 425, so a description thereof will be omitted.

More specifically, the rear upper diffusion lenses 423 and the rear lower diffusion lenses 425 are configured with the exact same shape, with the only difference being that they are positioned at the upper end face and the lower end face of the rear light guide plate 420 when viewed from the front. Therefore, when molding the rear upper diffusion lenses 423 and the rear lower diffusion lenses 425, the rear upper diffusion lenses 423 and the rear lower diffusion lenses 425 can be molded using the same forming process (manufacturing process, same mold, etc.), which prevents increases in the manufacturing costs of the rear light guide plate 420.

Furthermore, because the rear-upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear-downward diffusion lens 425 have the same shape, the optical paths of the light diffused from the rear-upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear-downward diffusion lens 425 are the same, making it easier to determine (understand) the destinations of the optical paths of the diffused light and the overlapping portions of the optical paths at the design stage. Specifically, in the first embodiment, the optical paths of the light irradiated from the rear-upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear-downward diffusion lens 425 may overlap one or more times in the positively curved portion of the rear light guide plate 420. More specifically, for example, the optical path of light irradiated from one front-direction diffusion portion 425b of the rear-downward diffusion lens 425 overlaps at all optical path portions with the optical path of light irradiated from the front-direction diffusion portion (unnumbered) opposite the rear-upper diffusion lens 423. The optical path of light emitted from the leftward diffusion portion 425a of one of the rear-downward diffusion lenses 425 overlaps with the optical path of light emitted from the leftward diffusion portion (no reference number) of the opposite recess of the rear-upward diffusion lens 423, and also overlaps with the optical path of light emitted from the frontward diffusion portion (no reference number) of the recess immediately to the left of the opposite recess. Furthermore, the optical path of light emitted from the rightward diffusion portion 425c of one of the rear-downward diffusion lenses 425 overlaps with the optical path of light emitted from the rightward diffusion portion (no reference number) of the opposite recess of the rear-upward diffusion lens 423, and also overlaps with the optical path of light emitted from the frontward diffusion portion (no reference number) of the recess immediately to the right of the opposite recess. As a result, it is easy to arrange decorative patterns on the rear light guide plate 420, the decorative patterns on the rear light guide plate 420 can be illuminated accurately, and decorative patterns that you want to highlight can be placed in overlapping areas, allowing you to highlight the decorative patterns.

As shown in Figure 13, rear-downward diffusion lenses 425 are formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 to correspond to each of the multiple rear-downward LEDs 424 of the lower LED unit 414. As shown in Figure 14, the rear-downward diffusion lenses 425 are formed with multiple recesses connected together, and each recess is composed of a leftward diffusion portion 425a, a frontward diffusion portion 425b, and a rightward diffusion portion 425c, all of which have the same side length.

The front diffusion section 425b is formed in a plane perpendicular to the direction of light emitted from the rear-downward LED 424. The left diffusion section 425a is formed in a plane tilted approximately 50 degrees (θ1 = 50°) to the left relative to the front diffusion section 425b. The right diffusion section 425c is formed in a plane tilted approximately 50 degrees (θ1 = 50°) to the right relative to the front diffusion section 425b. A recess formed by the left diffusion section 425a, front diffusion section 425b, and right diffusion section 425c is formed in the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420, extending continuously across the width of the light-emitting surface of at least one rear-downward LED 424.

In the first embodiment, the rear light guide plate 420 is made of acrylic resin (PMMA). When the refractive index of the acrylic resin is set to 1.49 to 1.53, the optical path of light incident on the front-direction diffusion section 425b from the rear-downward LEDs 424 is such that it is emitted straight (toward the upper side of the drawing in Figure 14) into the interior of the rear light guide plate 420. Light incident on the left-direction diffusion section 425a from the rear-downward LEDs 424 is refracted in a direction tilted approximately 20 degrees (θ2 = 20°) to the left relative to the light emitted from the front-direction diffusion section 425b before being emitted into the interior of the rear light guide plate 420. Light incident on the right-direction diffusion section 425c from the rear-downward LEDs 424 is refracted in a direction tilted approximately 20 degrees (θ3 = 20°) to the right relative to the light emitted from the front-direction diffusion section 425b before being emitted into the interior of the rear light guide plate 420.

The rear-downward diffusion lens 425 has a single recess formed by the leftward diffusion section 425a, the frontward diffusion section 425b, and the rightward diffusion section 425c, and the recess is provided in a number that is at least as wide as the light-emitting surface of the rear-downward LED 424. Therefore, the light emitted from one rear-downward LED 424 is diffused by the multiple recesses of the rear-downward diffusion lens 425 along an optical path in three directions within the rear light guide plate 420 (i.e., the frontward direction, a direction tilted 20 degrees left from the frontward direction, and a direction tilted 20 degrees right from the frontward direction). Furthermore, because the leftward diffusion section 425a, the frontward diffusion section 425b, and the rightward diffusion section 425c are each configured with the same side length, the width of the optical path of the diffused light is also configured to be the same. As a result, when one LED is turned on, multiple first decorative pattern groups 421 formed at positions corresponding to each diffused light path can be made to emit light in the same color, allowing a variety of effects to be produced even with a small number of LEDs, enhancing the presentation effects of the rear light guide plate 420 and increasing attention to the game.

Now, the rear downward diffusion lens 425 will be described with reference to Figure 51. Figure 51 is a schematic enlarged view of Figure 14, showing the light distribution pattern of the leftward diffusion section 425a, the frontward diffusion section 425b, and the rightward diffusion section 425c.

As shown in FIG. 51, the rear downward diffusion lens 425 is configured in one recess with a leftward diffusion section 425a, a frontward diffusion section 425b, and a rightward diffusion section 425c, each having a predetermined side length (e.g., 50 micrometers for the side irradiating light in the forward direction, and 62.5 micrometers for the side irradiating light in the left-right direction. Hereinafter, micrometers may be referred to as "μm"). Each diffusion section 425a-425c is configured so that the optical path width of light irradiated from each diffusion section 425a-425c is the same. Specifically, in each recess, the side length irradiating light in the forward direction is the same (e.g., 50 μm), and the side lengths irradiating light in the leftward and rightward directions are the same (e.g., 62.5 μm), so that the optical path width of light irradiated from each diffusion section 425a-425c is all the same. Furthermore, multiple such recesses are configured in a continuous line. That is, the horizontal width of recess 1 is 130.35 μm, calculated by adding the horizontal width X (cos 50° = x/62.5, x = 40.175, X = 2x = 80.35 μm) of leftward and rightward diffusing sections 425a and 425c to the length of the frontward diffusing section 425b (50 μm). Therefore, for example, if the light-emitting surface (illumination width) of LED 424 1 is 3 millimeters wide, approximately 23 rear downward diffusing lenses 425 for that LED 424 will be formed.

When one rear-lower LED 424 emits light and that light is irradiated onto each recess, the width of the light distributed in the front direction by the front-direction diffusion portion 425b of recess 1 is 50 μm, the width of the light distributed to the left by the left-direction diffusion portion 425a of recess 1 is also 50 μm, and the width of the light distributed to the right by the right-direction diffusion portion 425c of recess 1 is also 50 μm. The light distributed in the front, left, and right directions by each recess is then combined for each recess, forming a light path of at least a predetermined width (e.g., 50 μm x 26 = 1300 μm). In this case, for example, the front-direction diffusing portion 425b constituting one recess and the front-direction diffusing portion 425b constituting the recess adjacent to the first recess on the right are separated by the horizontal distance between the right-direction diffusing portion 425c constituting that recess and the left-direction diffusing portion 425a constituting the recess adjacent to the first recess. Therefore, the front-direction light paths of light distributed from the front-direction diffusing portion 425b constituting that recess and the front-direction diffusing portion 425b constituting the recess adjacent to the first recess on the right are also separated by the above horizontal distance. However, the diffusion of light distributed from the right-direction diffusing portion 425c and the left-direction diffusing portion 425a, as well as light distributed from the front-direction diffusing portion 425b itself, ensures that light is distributed comprehensively within the front light guide plate 410.

As a result, when one lower rear LED 424 is illuminated, the light diffused by the lower rear diffusion lens 425, which is composed of multiple recesses, can cause multiple first decorative symbol groups 421, each formed (arranged) in a position corresponding to each optical path of the diffused light and the periphery of that optical path, to emit light in the same color, thereby lighting up a wider range of first decorative symbol groups 421 than the light-emitting surface of one lower rear LED 424. As a result, even with a small number of LEDs, a variety of effects can be produced over a wide range, enhancing the presentation effects of the rear light guide plate 420 and increasing attention to the game. Furthermore, by configuring the side lengths of each diffusion section 425a-425c so that the light path width of the light emitted from each diffusion section 425a-425c is the same, the light path width of the light emitted from each diffusion section 425a-425c is the same, making it easier to set (understand) the light path of the light guided within the rear light guide plate 420, and making it easier to understand the pattern arrangement that will allow the first decorative pattern group 421 to emit light accurately during the setting stage.

Returning to Figure 12, the explanation will continue. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, nine upper rear LEDs 422c and nine lower rear LEDs 424 are provided, and one upper rear LED 422c and one lower rear LED 424 are arranged so as to overlap vertically. Therefore, the light irradiated from one upper rear LED 422c downward in a front view (downward in the drawing) via the front-direction diffusion portion (not shown) of the upper rear diffusion lens 423 and the light irradiated from one lower rear LED 424 upward in a front view (upward in the drawing) via the front-direction diffusion portion 425b of the lower rear diffusion lens 425 (see Figure 14) are configured to overlap (superimpose). Furthermore, light emitted (diffused) to the left or right from one rear-upper LED 422c via the left-direction diffusion section or right-direction diffusion section (neither shown) of the rear-upper diffusion lens 423 is configured to overlap (superimpose) with light emitted in each direction from other rear-upper LEDs 422c via the respective diffusion sections (not shown) of the rear-upper diffusion lens 423, and with light emitted in each direction from the rear-lower LED 424 via the respective diffusion sections 425a, 425b, 425c of the rear-lower diffusion lens 425, at the portions where their respective optical paths intersect.

Specifically, for example, if the LEDs of the rear upper LED 422c are lit in three colors, starting from the right: "red," "blue," "green," "red," "blue," "green," "red," "blue," "green," and the LEDs of the rear lower LED 424 are lit in three colors, starting from the right: "red," "blue," "green," "red," "blue," "green," and the LEDs of the rear lower LED 424 are lit in three colors, starting from the right: "red," "blue," "green," "red," "blue," "green," and the "red" light is diffused in a light path of a predetermined width from the diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the rightmost LEDs of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, .... From the diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the second LED from the right (i.e., the eighth from the left) of the upper LED 422c and the rear-side lower LED 424, "blue" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, from the diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the third LED from the right (i.e., the seventh from the left) of the rear-side upper LED 422c and the rear-side lower LED 424, "green" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, and from the diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the fourth LED from the right (i.e., the sixth from the left) of the rear-side upper LED 422c and the rear-side lower LED 424, "green" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width. From the diffusing lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the fifth LED from the right (i.e., fifth from the left, center) of the rear-upper LED 422c and the rear-lower LED 424, "red" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, from the diffusing lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the fifth LED from the right (i.e., fifth from the left, center) of the rear-upper LED 422c and the rear-lower LED 424, "blue" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, from the diffusing lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the sixth LED from the right (i.e., fourth from the left) of the rear-upper LED 422c and the rear-lower LED 424, "green" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, from the diffusing lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the sixth LED from the right (i.e., fourth from the left) of the rear-upper LED 422c and the rear-lower LED 424, From the diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the seventh LED from the right (i.e., third from the left), red light is diffused over an optical path of a predetermined width; from the diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the eighth LED from the right of the rear upper LED 422c and rear lower LED 424 (i.e., second from the left), blue light is diffused over an optical path of a predetermined width; and from the diffusion lenses 423, 425 corresponding to the ninth LED from the right of the rear upper LED 422c and rear lower LED 424 (i.e., leftmost), green light is diffused over an optical path of a predetermined width.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 includes an area where the optical path of "red" light and the optical path of "red" light overlap ("dark red"), an area where only the optical path of "red" light is displayed ("light red"), an area where the optical path of "red" light and the optical path of "blue" light overlap ("purple"), an area where the optical path of "red" light and the optical path of "green" light overlap ("yellow"), and an area where the optical path of "red" light, the optical path of "blue" light, and the optical path of "green" light overlap (" Each symbol in first decorative symbol group 421 is displayed in a total of 10 different colors: an area where the optical path of the "blue" light and the optical path of the "blue" light overlap ("dark blue"), an area where only the optical path of the "blue" light is displayed ("light blue"), an area where the optical path of the "blue" light and the optical path of the "green" light overlap ("blue-green"), an area where the optical path of the "green" light and the optical path of the "green" light overlap ("dark green"), and an area where only the optical path of the "green" light is displayed ("light green"). Each symbol in first decorative symbol group 421 is then arranged in each overlapping area.

As a result, even with a lighting pattern using a limited number of colors (for example, three colors), the light is diffused by the upper and lower diffusion lenses 423, 425, and the optical paths of the diffused light overlap, resulting in different emitted colors in the non-overlapping and overlapping areas, making it possible to display a greater number of colors than the color scheme. Therefore, by achieving a wide variety of display colors even with a limited number of emitted colors, LED light emission control is simplified and the control burden associated with LED light emission control can be reduced. In particular, if the above control is performed using multiple types of monochromatic light-emitting diodes rather than full-color LEDs, costs can be reduced by using monochromatic light-emitting diodes, which are less expensive than full-color LEDs, and LED light emission control is simplified, reducing the control burden associated with LED light emission control.

Furthermore, for each pattern in the first decorative pattern group 421, it is arranged so that it overlaps with the optical path of light of one color in a specified portion, while being arranged so that it overlaps with the optical path of light of other colors in portions other than the specified portion. In other words, by forming each pattern in the first decorative pattern group 421 so that it fits within a range of multiple optical path widths, the luminescent color of each portion of the pattern can be made different, and the pattern can be expressed in a variety of colors.

15 and 16, the lighting (presentation) mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 will be described. Figure 15 shows the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 displayed on the rear light guide plate 420. Figure 15(a) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the upper rear LED 422c and the lower rear LED 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit, and Figure 15(b) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting mode of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the upper rear LED 422c and the lower rear LED 424 corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are additionally lit from the state shown in Figure 15(a). FIG. 16 shows the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 displayed on the rear light guide plate 420. FIG. 16(a) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the upper rear LEDs 422c and the lower rear LEDs 424 corresponding to the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 are additionally turned on from the state of FIG. 15(b). FIG. 16(b) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the upper rear LEDs 422c and the lower rear LEDs 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off from the state of FIG. 16(a).

First, as shown in Figure 15 (a), when the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit sequentially from the right, the light emitted from the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused within the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (i.e., downward to the right, downward to the front, and downward to the left) with a predetermined light path width according to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. Similarly, when the rear-lower LEDs 424 arranged to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit sequentially from the right, the light emitted from the rear-lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (i.e., upward to the right, upward to the front, and upward to the left) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear-lower diffusion lenses 425, with a predetermined optical path width according to the lens edge width of each diffusion lens 423, 425.

For example, in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, if the right upper rear LED 422c lights up in "red," the central upper rear LED 422c lights up in "blue," the left upper rear LED 422c lights up in "green," and the right lower rear LED 424 lights up in "red," the central lower rear LED 424 lights up in "blue," and the left lower rear LED 424 lights up in "green," for a total of three colors, the area where the "red" light path and the "red" light path overlap (intersect; the same applies below) will be "dark red," and the area where the "red" light path and the "blue" light path overlap will be "dark red." Each first decorative pattern group 421 is lit up in a total of 10 colors: "purple" where the red and green light paths overlap, "yellow" where the red, blue and green light paths overlap, "white" where the red, blue and green light paths overlap, "dark blue" where the blue and blue light paths overlap, "blue-green" where the blue and green light paths overlap, "dark green" where the green and green light paths overlap, "red" where there is only the red light path, "blue" where there is only the blue light path, and "green" where there is only the green light path.

More specifically, of the multiple fish designs that make up the first decorative design group 421, each fish design is illuminated in one of ten colors: "dark red," "purple," "yellow," "white," "dark blue," "blue-green," "dark green," "red," "blue," and "green."

The first decorative pattern group 421 includes small patterns formed within the range of the optical path width of light 1, medium patterns formed within the range of the optical path width of light 2, and large patterns formed within the range of the optical path width of light 3 or more. With regard to the first decorative pattern group 421, small patterns formed within the range of the optical path width of display color 1 are illuminated in a single display color, and when portions of the medium or large pattern are located within the range of the optical path widths of multiple display colors, the portions of the medium or large pattern are illuminated in the luminous color of the optical path where they overlap. Therefore, in the first decorative pattern group 421, which is composed of multiple patterns, by representing each pattern in a different color or representing pattern 1 in multiple colors, it is possible to provide a colorful and varied presentation.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 remains unlit because light from the rear upper LED 422c and rear lower LED 424, which are provided to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, does not reach them, and they remain difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, as shown in Figure 15(b), when the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on from the state shown in Figure 15(a), and further when the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged to correspond to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on sequentially from the right, the light emitted from the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the central and right regions of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused within the rear upper light guide plate 420 in three directions (i.e., downward to the right, downward to the front, and downward to the left) with a predetermined light path width according to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. Similarly, when the rear-downward LEDs 424 arranged corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit and the rear-downward LEDs 424 arranged corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit sequentially from the right, the light emitted from the rear-downward LEDs 424 corresponding to the central and right regions of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (i.e., upward to the right, upward to the front, and upward to the left) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear-downward diffusion lenses 425, with a predetermined optical path width according to the lens edge width of each diffusion lens 423, 425.

For example, in the right and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420, if the right upper rear LED 422c lights up in "red," the central upper rear LED 422c lights up in "blue," and the left upper rear LED 422c lights up in "green," and the right lower rear LED 424 lights up in "red," the central lower rear LED 424 lights up in "blue," and the left lower rear LED 424 lights up in "green," a total of three colors, the overlapping portion of the "red" light path and the "red" light path will be "dark red," and the overlapping portion of the "red" light path and the "blue" light path will be "dark red." Each first decorative pattern group 421 is lit up in a total of 10 colors: "purple" where the red and green light paths overlap, "yellow" where the red, blue, and green light paths overlap, "white" where the red, blue, and green light paths overlap, "dark blue" where the blue and blue light paths overlap, "blue-green" where the blue and green light paths overlap, "dark green" where the green and green light paths overlap, "red" where there is only the red light path, "blue" where there is only the blue light path, and "green" where there is only the green light path.

More specifically, of the multiple fish designs that make up the first decorative design group 421, each fish design is illuminated in one of ten colors: "dark red," "purple," "yellow," "white," "dark blue," "blue-green," "dark green," "red," "blue," and "green."

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 remains unlit because light from the rear upper LED 422c and rear lower LED 424, which are provided to correspond to the central and right regions of the rear light guide plate 420, does not reach them, and they remain difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, as shown in Figure 16(a), when the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged to correspond to the right and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on from the state of Figure 15(b), and further when the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged to correspond to the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on sequentially from the right, the light emitted from the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the left, central and right regions (i.e., the entire region) of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused within the rear upper light guide plate 420 in three directions (i.e., downward to the right, downward to the front and downward to the left) with a predetermined light path width according to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. Similarly, when the rear-downward LEDs 424 arranged to correspond to the right and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit and the rear-downward LEDs 424 arranged to correspond to the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit sequentially from the right, the light emitted from the rear-downward LEDs 424 corresponding to the left, central, and right regions of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (i.e., upward to the right, upward to the front, and upward to the left) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear-downward diffusion lenses 425, with a predetermined light path width according to the lens edge width of each diffusion lens 423, 425.

For example, in each of the entire areas of the rear light guide plate 420 (i.e., the left area, the center area, and the right area), if the right-side upper rear LED 422c lights up in "red," the center upper rear LED 422c lights up in "blue," the left-side upper rear LED 422c lights up in "green," and the right-side lower rear LED 424 lights up in "red," the center lower rear LED 424 lights up in "blue," and the left-side lower rear LED 424 lights up in "green," a total of three colors, the overlapping areas of the "red" light path and the "red" light path will be "dark red," and the overlapping areas of the "red" light path and the "blue" light path will be "dark red." Each first decorative pattern group 421 is lit in a total of 10 colors: "purple" where the light paths overlap, "yellow" where the red and green light paths overlap, "white" where the red, blue and green light paths overlap, "dark blue" where the blue and blue light paths overlap, "blue-green" where the blue and green light paths overlap, "dark green" where the green and green light paths overlap, "red" where there is only the red light path, "blue" where there is only the blue light path, and "green" where there is only the green light path.

More specifically, of the multiple fish designs that make up the first decorative design group 421, each fish design is illuminated in one of ten colors: "dark red," "purple," "yellow," "white," "dark blue," "blue-green," "dark green," "red," "blue," and "green."

Next, as shown in Figure 16(b), when, from the state of Figure 16(a), the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged to correspond to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on and the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off sequentially from the right, the light emitted from the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused within the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (i.e., downward to the right, downward to the front, and downward to the left) with a predetermined light path width according to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. Similarly, when the rear-downward LEDs 424 provided to correspond to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on and the rear-downward LEDs 424 provided to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off sequentially from the right, the light emitted from the rear-downward LEDs 424 corresponding to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (i.e., upward to the right, upward to the front, and upward to the left) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear-downward diffusion lenses 425, with a predetermined optical path width according to the lens edge width of each diffusion lens 423, 425.

For example, in the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420, if the right-side upper rear LED 422c lights up in "red," the central upper rear LED 422c lights up in "blue," and the left-side upper rear LED 422c lights up in "green," and the right-side lower rear LED 424 lights up in "red," the central lower rear LED 424 lights up in "blue," and the left-side lower rear LED 424 lights up in "green," a total of three colors, the overlapping portion of the "red" light path and the "red" light path will be "dark red," and the overlapping portion of the "red" light path and the "blue" light path will be "dark red." Each first decorative pattern group 421 is lit up in a total of 10 colors: "purple" where the red and green light paths overlap, "yellow" where the red, blue, and green light paths overlap, "white" where the red, blue, and green light paths overlap, "dark blue" where the blue and blue light paths overlap, "blue-green" where the blue and green light paths overlap, "dark green" where the green and green light paths overlap, "red" where there is only the red light path, "blue" where there is only the blue light path, and "green" where there is only the green light path.

More specifically, of the multiple fish designs that make up the first decorative design group 421, each fish design is illuminated in one of ten colors: "dark red," "purple," "yellow," "white," "dark blue," "blue-green," "dark green," "red," "blue," and "green."

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is not illuminated because light from the rear upper LED 422c and rear lower LED 424, which are provided to correspond to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420, does not reach them, making them difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, even when the upper rear LEDs 422c and the lower rear LEDs 424 are controlled to emit light with only three or so colors, the overlap of light diffused by each diffusion lens 423, 425 allows the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 to be displayed in lighting colors equal to or greater than the above-mentioned emitted colors. Therefore, even when light emission is controlled with only a few emission patterns, colorful expressions can be produced, reducing the control burden on the upper rear LEDs 422c and the lower rear LEDs 424 while also enabling a variety of effects to be implemented, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, of the three upper rear LEDs 422c and three lower rear LEDs 424 arranged in each of the right, central, and left regions of the rear light guide plate 420, the upper rear LED 422c and lower rear LED 424 located on the far right side are lit in sequence, starting with the upper rear LED 422c and lower rear LED 424 located in the center, and finally the upper rear LED 422c and lower rear LED 424 located on the left side, thereby creating an effect in which the school of fish, which is the first decorative pattern group 421, appears to be swimming from right to left.

Furthermore, by lighting the rear upper LEDs 422c and rear lower LEDs 424 sequentially from the right side in conjunction with the lighting of the first decorative symbol group 60a and second decorative symbol group 60b (see Figure 3) on the base plate 60 of the gaming board 13, the effects on the rear light guide plate 420 and the effects on the gaming board 13 surface can be executed in unison, providing a powerful effect using the entire gaming board 13 surface and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Next, with reference to Figures 17 and 18, we will explain the optical path of light from the rear upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear lower diffusion lens 425 relative to the rear light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, and the illumination pattern of the first decorative pattern group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420.

Figure 17 is a diagram showing the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 displayed on the rear light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, and Figure 17(a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the confirmation lamp 311 is not lit and the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit, and Figure 17(b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 when, from the state of Figure 17(a), the confirmation lamp 311 is lit and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is additionally lit, while the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the central region and right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is turned off. 18A and 18B are diagrams showing a typical lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 that is lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit. FIG. 18A shows a state in which the confirmation lamp 311 continues to light up from the state shown in FIG. 17B, and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 is additionally lit, while the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the left region, central region, and right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off. 18(b) is a diagram schematically illustrating the lighting state of the first decorative pattern group 421 when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off from the state of FIG. 18(a) and the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the left and center regions of the rear light guide plate 420 are additionally turned on, while the rear upper LEDs 422c and rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if a jackpot occurs during a variable effect, the confirmation lamp 311 is lit at some point during the variable effect, clearly indicating to the player that a jackpot will occur. Furthermore, to indicate to the player the reliability of a jackpot during the variable effect, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 may be lit.

Here, the notification by the lighting of the confirmation lamp 311 is an effect that suggests that a jackpot will occur, and is the so-called jackpot confirmation effect. On the other hand, the notification by the lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421 is an effect that suggests whether or not a jackpot will occur, and does not definitively suggest that a jackpot will occur. Therefore, in terms of the importance of the effects in play on the pachinko machine 10, the notification by the confirmation lamp 311 is positioned as a more important effect than the notification by the first decorative pattern group 421.

However, if an effect using the confirmation lamp 311 is executed while an effect using the first decorative symbol group 421 is being executed, there is a risk that the effect using the first decorative symbol group 421 will interfere with the effect using the confirmation lamp 311, which is more important to the game (leading to low visibility and low recognition due to overlapping effects, etc.). Also, when an announcement using the confirmation lamp 311 is to be executed, it is possible to consider not executing an effect using the first decorative symbol group 421, or not executing an announcement using the confirmation lamp 311 while the first decorative symbol group 421 is being executed, but this would place restrictions on the presentation, which could increase the control burden and reduce the variety of presentations.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the confirmation lamp 311 effect is executed (when being executed), the scale of the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced to highlight the effect of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for gameplay. Specifically, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed at the timing when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, the width of the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced. In particular, by turning off or lighting only a small amount of light on the side of the first decorative symbol group 421 where the confirmation lamp 311 is located (i.e., the upper side when viewed from the front of the rear light guide plate 420), the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be separated so that they do not overlap or are unlikely to overlap, thereby making the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 more noticeable. This allows for a configuration that does not interfere with the effect of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for gameplay. Furthermore, it is easy to simultaneously execute the effects using the confirmation lamp 311 and the effects using the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complex control, thereby increasing the variety of effects available.

Now, we will explain the specific effects produced by the confirmation lamp 311 and the first decorative pattern group 421. First, as shown in Figure 17(a), when the confirmation lamp 311 is not lit (off), and the rear upper LEDs 422c provided to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are illuminated sequentially from the right, the light emitted from the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused within the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (i.e., downward to the right, downward to the front, and downward to the left) with a predetermined light path width according to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. Similarly, when the rear-lower LEDs 424 arranged to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit sequentially from the right, the light emitted from the rear-lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (i.e., upward to the right, upward to the front, and upward to the left) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear-lower diffusion lenses 425, with a predetermined optical path width according to the lens edge width of each diffusion lens 423, 425.

For example, when the confirmation lamp 311 is off, in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right upper rear LED 422c lights up in "red," the central upper rear LED 422c lights up in "blue," and the left upper rear LED 422c lights up in "green," and the right lower rear LED 424 lights up in "red," the central lower rear LED 424 lights up in "blue," and the left lower rear LED 424 lights up in "green," for a total of three colors. In this case, the overlapping (intersecting; the same applies below) areas of the red light path and the red light path are "dark red," and the red light path and the blue light path are "green." Each first decorative pattern group 421 is lit up in a total of 10 colors: "purple" where the light paths overlap; "yellow" where the "red" and "green" light paths overlap; "white" where the "red" and "blue" and "green" light paths overlap; "dark blue" where the "blue" and "blue" light paths overlap; "blue-green" where the "blue" and "green" light paths overlap; "dark green" where the "green" and "green" light paths overlap; "red" where there is only the red light path; "blue" where there is only the blue light path; and "green" where there is only the green light path.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 remains unlit because light from the rear upper LED 422c and rear lower LED 424, which are provided to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, does not reach them, and they remain difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, as shown in Figure 17(b), when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on from the state of Figure 17(a), the rear-lower LEDs 424 arranged corresponding to the right-hand region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on, and further, when the rear-lower LEDs 424 arranged corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on sequentially from the right, the light emitted from the rear-lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the central and right-hand regions of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (i.e., upward to the right, upward to the front, and upward to the left) inside the rear-lower light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear-lower diffusion lens 425, with a predetermined light path width according to the lens edge width of the rear-lower diffusion lens 425. On the other hand, when the confirmation lamp 311 lights up from the state shown in FIG. 17(a), the upper rear LED 422c provided to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 switches from a lit state to an unlit state, and the upper rear LED 422c provided to correspond to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 also does not light up (is unlit).

In other words, of the rear lower LEDs 424 arranged in positions far from the confirmation lamp 311, only the rear lower LEDs 424 provided in the central and right regions of the rear light guide plate 420 are configured to light up, while the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged in positions close to the confirmation lamp 311 are configured to be turned off.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each light path) emitted from the rear lower LED 424 and diffused by the rear lower diffusion lens 425 is lit up, while the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each light path) that would be diffused by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 when the rear upper LED 422c emits light is not lit (is off).

Here, the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged in the upper front-view portion of the rear light guide plate 420, which is close to the confirmation lamp 311, is not provided in a position that is lit by the light emitted by the rear lower LED 424 (only a small number of them are provided), and many of them are formed in a position that is lit by the light emitted by the rear upper LED 422c.

On the other hand, the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged in the lower portion of the rear light guide plate 420 as viewed from the front, far from the confirmation lamp 311, is provided in a position where it is lit by the light emitted by at least the lower rear LED 424 (there are a large number of them provided). Furthermore, the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged in the lower portion of the rear light guide plate 420 as viewed from the front, far from the confirmation lamp 311, may be provided in a position where it is lit by the light emitted by the upper rear LED 422c, or may be provided in a position where it is not lit by the light emitted by the upper rear LED 422c.

Therefore, when the rear upper LED 422c is lit, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the upper portion of the rear light guide plate 420 in a front view can (is likely to) be lit, and when the rear lower LED 424 is lit, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the lower portion of the rear light guide plate 420 in a front view can (is likely to) be lit. On the other hand, among the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the upper portion of the rear light guide plate 420 in a front view is not (is unlikely to) be lit even when the rear lower LED 424 is lit, and is not (is unlikely to) be lit when the rear upper LED 422c is off; the lit pattern is thinned out.

By configuring it in this way, the first decorative pattern group 421 in the upper front-view portion of the rear light guide plate 420, which is adjacent to the confirmation lamp 311, can be switched on or off depending on whether the rear upper LED 422c is lit. Furthermore, when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, even if the first decorative pattern group 421 is being played, by turning off the rear upper LED 422c, it is possible to create an effect in which the light emitted by the confirmation lamp 311 and the light emitted by the first decorative pattern group 421 do not interfere with each other.

For example, if the right-hand region and central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are illuminated in three colors, with the right-hand rear-lower LED 424 illuminating in "red," the central rear-lower LED 424 illuminating in "blue," and the left-hand rear-lower LED 424 illuminating in "green," then each of the first decorative pattern groups 421 will be illuminated in a total of seven colors: "purple" where the "red" and "blue" light paths overlap; "yellow" where the "red" and "green" light paths overlap; "white" where the "red" and "blue" and "green" light paths overlap; "blue-green" where the "blue" and "green" light paths overlap; "red" where only the "red" light path is present; "blue" where only the "blue" light path is present; and "green" where only the "green" light path is present.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 remains unlit because light from the rear lower LEDs 424, which are provided to correspond to the central and right regions of the rear light guide plate 420, does not reach them, and they remain difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, as shown in Figure 18(a), if the confirmation lamp 311 continues to light from the state in Figure 17(b), when the rear-lower LEDs 424 arranged corresponding to the central and right-hand regions of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit and further when the rear-lower LEDs 424 arranged corresponding to the left-hand region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit sequentially from the right, the light emitted from the rear-lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the left-hand, central and right-hand regions (i.e., the entire region) of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (i.e., upward to the right, upward to the front and upward to the left) inside the rear-lower diffusion lens 425 according to the shape of the rear-lower diffusion lens 425, with a predetermined light path width according to the lens edge width of the rear-lower diffusion lens 425. On the other hand, if the confirmation lamp 311 remains lit from the state shown in Figure 17(b), the rear upper LEDs 422c provided to correspond to the left, central, and right areas (i.e., the entire area) of the rear light guide plate 420 do not light up (are turned off).

In other words, only the rear lower LED 424, which is located far from the confirmation lamp 311, is lit, and the rear upper LED 422c, which is located close to the confirmation lamp 311, is turned off.

In this case, as in Figure 17(b), the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each light path) emitted from the rear lower LED 424 and diffused by the rear lower diffusion lens 425 is lit up, while the first decorative pattern group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each light path) that would be diffused by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 when the rear upper LED 422c emits light is not lit (is off).

For example, if the right-side lower rear LED 424 is lit in red, the central lower rear LED 424 is lit in blue, and the left-side lower rear LED 424 is lit in green in each of the left, central, and right regions of the rear light guide plate 420, then each of the first decorative pattern groups 421 will be lit in a total of seven colors: purple where the red and blue light paths overlap, yellow where the red and green light paths overlap, white where the red, blue, and green light paths overlap, blue-green where the blue and green light paths overlap, red where only the red light path is present, blue where only the blue light path is present, and green where only the green light path is present.

Next, as shown in Figure 18(b), when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off from the state shown in Figure 18(a), when the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged to correspond to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on and the rear upper LEDs 422c arranged to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off sequentially from the right, the light emitted from the rear upper LEDs 422c corresponding to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused within the rear upper light guide plate 420 in three directions (i.e., downward to the right, downward to the front, and downward to the left) with a predetermined optical path width according to the shape of the rear upper diffusion lens 423. Similarly, when the rear-downward LEDs 424 provided to correspond to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on and the rear-downward LEDs 424 provided to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off sequentially from the right, the light emitted from the rear-downward LEDs 424 corresponding to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (i.e., upward to the right, upward to the front, and upward to the left) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear-downward diffusion lenses 425, with a predetermined optical path width according to the lens edge width of each diffusion lens 423, 425.

For example, in the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420, if the right-side upper rear LED 422c lights up in "red," the central upper rear LED 422c lights up in "blue," and the left-side upper rear LED 422c lights up in "green," and the right-side lower rear LED 424 lights up in "red," the central lower rear LED 424 lights up in "blue," and the left-side lower rear LED 424 lights up in "green," a total of three colors, the overlapping portion of the "red" light path and the "red" light path will be "dark red," and the overlapping portion of the "red" light path and the "blue" light path will be "dark red." Each first decorative pattern group 421 is lit up in a total of 10 colors: "purple" where the red and green light paths overlap, "yellow" where the red, blue, and green light paths overlap, "white" where the red, blue, and green light paths overlap, "dark blue" where the blue and blue light paths overlap, "blue-green" where the blue and green light paths overlap, "dark green" where the green and green light paths overlap, "red" where there is only the red light path, "blue" where there is only the blue light path, and "green" where there is only the green light path.

In this case, the first decorative pattern group 421 formed in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is not illuminated because light from the rear upper LED 422c and rear lower LED 424, which are provided to correspond to the left and central regions of the rear light guide plate 420, does not reach them, making them difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, when the confirmation lamp 311 effect is executed (when being executed), the scale of the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced to highlight the effect of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for gameplay. Specifically, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed at the timing when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, the effect width of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed. In particular, by turning off or lighting only a small amount of light on the side of the first decorative symbol group 421 where the confirmation lamp 311 is located (i.e., the upper side when viewed from the front of the rear light guide plate 420), the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be compartmentalized so that they do not or are unlikely to overlap, making the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 more noticeable. Therefore, a configuration can be achieved that does not interfere with the effect of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for gameplay. Furthermore, it is easy to simultaneously execute the effects using the confirmation lamp 311 and the effects using the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complex control, thereby increasing the variety of effects available.

19 to 21, the optical paths of light from the front downward focusing lens 414d, front right focusing lens 415d, and front left focusing lens 416d (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each focusing lens 414d, 415d, 416d") relative to the front light guide plate 410, and the light emission modes of the second decorative pattern group 411, third decorative pattern 412, and fourth decorative pattern group 413 that can be illuminated and displayed on the front light guide plate 410 will be described. Figure 19 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the second decorative pattern group 411, third decorative pattern 412, and fourth decorative pattern group 413 that can be illuminated and displayed on the front light guide plate 410 and the lower LED unit 414, front right LED unit 415, and front left LED unit 416. Figure 20 is a diagram showing the optical paths of light through each of the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d. Figure 21(a) is a diagram showing the uneven shape forming the second decorative pattern group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 and the direction of light that can illuminate the second decorative pattern group 411. Figure 21(b) is a diagram showing the uneven shape forming the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 and the direction of light that can illuminate the fourth decorative pattern group 413.

As shown in Figure 19, on the front light guide plate 410, a second decorative pattern group 411 in the form of a cherry blossom storm pattern imitating multiple cherry blossom petals is formed on both left and right end regions excluding the center portion of the regular R-shaped portion, a third decorative pattern 412 in the form of a sunfish pattern imitating a sunfish is formed in the center portion of the regular R-shaped portion, and a fourth decorative pattern group 413 in the form of a bubble group pattern imitating multiple bubbles is formed on the entire area of the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion.

Furthermore, when light is irradiated from the front-downward LED 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410 onto the lower end face of the front-downward focusing lens 414d disposed below the front light guide plate 410, the light is configured to travel straight (upward) without being diffused from the upper end face of the front-downward focusing lens 414d. Furthermore, when light is irradiated from the front-right LED 415c provided to the right side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 onto the right end face of the front-right focusing lens 415d disposed to the right side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410, the light is configured to travel straight (leftward) without being diffused from the left end face of the front-right focusing lens 415d. Furthermore, when light is irradiated onto the left end face of the front left condenser lens 416d, which is disposed on the left side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410, by the front left LED 416c, which is provided on the left side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410, the light is configured to travel straight (to the right) from the right end face of the front left condenser lens 416d without being diffused.

Furthermore, the front right LEDs 415c and front left LEDs 416c are positioned so that one front right LED 415c and one front left LED 416c form pairs in the left-right direction (horizontal direction).

In the front light guide plate 410, decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 are arranged in the regular R-shaped portion or the lower flat portion and lower inverted R-shaped portion, but none of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 are arranged at the transition point (area) between the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the regular R-shaped portion. This is because if decorative patterns to be displayed using light guides are arranged at the transition point (area) between the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the regular R-shaped portion, it is difficult for the light reflected (guided) inside the front light guide plate 410 to properly reach the portion arranged in the regular R-shaped portion and the portion arranged in the lower inverted R-shaped portion, which could result in an unintended appearance depending on the player's line of sight. Therefore, by configuring the transition point (area) between the downward inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion so that none of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 are placed, the light-guiding displayed patterns can be properly expressed, and a presentation without any discrepancies can be produced.

The arrangement of decorative patterns at the switching point (hereinafter referred to as "switching point P") of the front light guide plate 410 will be described in more detail with reference to Figures 52, 53, and 54. Figure 52 is a schematic side cross-sectional view of the front light guide plate 410 showing the light guide pattern of light guided within the front light guide plate 410 when the front lower LED 414c is lit. Figure 52(a) is a schematic diagram showing the light guide pattern within the front light guide plate 410 of light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the front lower LED 414c at an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10). Figure 52(b) is a schematic diagram showing the light guide pattern within the front light guide plate 410 of light incident on the front light guide plate 410 at an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10). 52( a ) and 52 ( b ) are diagrams illustrating the light-guiding behavior within the front light guide plate 410 of light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the front-downward LED 414c at a downward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees toward the back of the pachinko machine 10), and FIG. 52( c ) is a diagram illustrating the light-guiding behavior within the front light guide plate 410 of light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the front-downward LED 414c in a direction directly ahead (vertically upward in the pachinko machine 10). Also, FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating the position of the switching point P in the front view of the front light guide plate 410 shown in FIG. 19 . Furthermore, FIG. 54 is a perspective view illustrating the light-guiding behavior within the front light guide plate 410 of light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the front-right LED 415c at an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees toward the front of the pachinko machine 10). For ease of explanation, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 described in Figure 52 will be described as being configured to be illuminated by light incident laterally from the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c, as well as light incident upward from the front downward LED 414c. Figure 54 also describes a case in which the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be illuminated by light incident leftward from the front right LED 415c, and a description of light incident rightward from the front left LED 416c is omitted, but light incident rightward from the front left LED 416c also has the same effect and benefits as light incident leftward from the front right LED 415c.

First, as shown in FIG. 52, the front light guide plate 410 is composed of a lower flat plate portion in a front view (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "front lower flat plate portion 410a"), a lower inverted R-shaped portion formed continuously from the front lower flat plate portion 410a (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b"), a regular R-shaped portion formed continuously from the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "front regular R-shaped portion 410c"), an upper inverted R-shaped portion formed continuously from the front regular R-shaped portion 410c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "front upper inverted R-shaped portion"), and an upper flat plate portion formed continuously from the front upper inverted R-shaped portion (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "front upper flat plate portion").

Furthermore, a fourth decorative pattern group 413 is formed on the back side (lower side in Figure 52) of the front lower flat portion 410a and the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, and a second decorative pattern group 411 and a third decorative pattern 412 are formed on the back side of the front normal R-shaped portion 410c. When the front lower LED 414c is lit, the second decorative pattern group 411 or the third decorative pattern 412 becomes visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (upper side in Figure 52), and when the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c are lit, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 becomes visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figures 52(a) to 52(c), the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the front lower LED 414c at an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees toward the front of the pachinko machine 10; see Figure 52(a)), a downward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees toward the back of the pachinko machine 10; see Figure 52(b)), and directly in the front direction (vertically above the pachinko machine 10; see Figure 52(c)) is guided within the front lower flat plate portion 410a. , and repeatedly reflects light, but as described above, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 provided on the back side of the front lower flat plate portion 410a is configured so that light from the front lower LED 414c does not or does not easily reflect light in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 (upper side in Figure 52), and therefore the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is configured so that it is difficult or impossible to see from the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 by the light emitted (guided) from the front lower LED 414c.

The light incident on the front light guide plate 410 at an upward angle of 45 degrees, a downward angle of 45 degrees, and directly from the front is repeatedly reflected within the front lower flat plate portion 410a or reaches the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b directly. In this case, light that collides with the surface of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b facing the rear of the pachinko machine 10 is reflected back into the front light guide plate 410 at an angle (e.g., 40 degrees) smaller than the angle of reflection (e.g., 45 degrees) when it collides with the front lower flat plate portion 410a. On the other hand, light that collides with the surface of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b facing the front of the pachinko machine 10 is reflected back into the front light guide plate 410 at an angle (e.g., 50 degrees) larger than the angle of reflection (e.g., 45 degrees) when it collides with the front lower flat plate portion 410a.

The light guided through the front-side downward inverted R-shaped portion 410b then reaches the front-side normal R-shaped portion 410c, which has a curved shape in the opposite direction to the front-side downward inverted R-shaped portion. In this case, light that collides with the surface of the front-side normal R-shaped portion 410c facing the rear of the pachinko machine 10 is reflected back into the front light guide plate 410 at an angle (e.g., 50 degrees) greater than the angle of reflection (e.g., 40 degrees) when it collides with the surface of the front-side normal R-shaped portion 410c facing the front of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, light that collides with the surface of the front-side normal R-shaped portion 410c facing the front of the pachinko machine 10 is reflected back into the front light guide plate 410 at an angle (e.g., 40 degrees) smaller than the angle of reflection (e.g., 50 degrees) when it collides with the front-side downward inverted R-shaped portion 410b.

That is, light guided via the front lower flat portion 410a to the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front regular R-shaped portion 410c impinges densely on the front surface of the front light guide plate 410, while impinging sparsely on the back surface of the front light guide plate 410, at the transition point between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front regular R-shaped portion 410c (part. Hereinafter, the transition point between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front regular R-shaped portion 410c may be referred to as the "transition point P").

Here, as shown in Figures 52(a) to 52(c) and 53, a fourth decorative pattern group 413 is arranged at the transition point (portion) between the front lower flat portion 410a and the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, while none of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 are arranged at the transition point P between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front normal R-shaped portion 410c.

As mentioned above, this is because the amount of light that strikes the back surface of the front light guide plate 410 at the transition point P between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front normal R-shaped portion 410c tends to be sparse (sparse), and even if the decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413 is placed at this point P, the decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413 will not emit light appropriately, and there is a risk that the decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413 will not be visible at the appropriate time from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, while each decorative symbol group 411, 412, 413 is configured to light up (become visible) only when illuminated by light from a specific direction, if decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413 were placed at point P, there is a possibility that each decorative symbol group 411, 412, 413 would be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 due to illumination from a direction in which they would not normally light up, and lighting up at an unintended timing could cause inconsistencies in the presentation. Therefore, by not placing any decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413 at point P where the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front normal R-shaped portion 410c transition, each decorative symbol group 411, 412, 413 can be made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 at the appropriate timing, and inconsistencies in the presentation can be made less likely to occur, resulting in a more appropriate gameplay experience.

Next, as shown in Figure 54, when light emitted from the front right LED 415c is incident through the front right focusing lens 415d at an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10; see Figure 54) on the right side end surface of the front lower flat plate portion 410a of the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front, while being guided within the front lower flat plate portion 410a, the light is repeatedly reflected by the front side and back side of the front light guide plate 410, and is guided straight to the left when viewed from the front, arriving at the left side of the front light guide plate 410. As described above, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed on the rear side surface of the front light guide plate 410 is configured to reflect light from the front right LED 415c in the direction directly ahead of the pachinko machine 10, and is therefore configured so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 can be clearly seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the light emitted (guided) from the front right LED 415c.

On the other hand, if an LED and a focusing lens are provided on the right side of the front-side lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b of the front light guide plate 410 as viewed from the front, and light is incident on the right-side end face of the front-side lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b as viewed from the front at an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees toward the front of the pachinko machine 10; see Figure 54), when the light guided within the front light guide plate 410 collides with the front side surface of the front-side lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, it is not reflected straight to the left as viewed from the front, in accordance with the R-shaped portion, but is reflected upward from the front side of the front light guide plate 410 as viewed from the front. If the reflected light then collides with the back side surface of the front-side lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, it is not reflected straight to the left as viewed from the front, in accordance with the R-shaped portion, but is reflected further upward from the front light guide plate 410. The light is then guided to the left side of the front light guide plate as viewed from the front, repeating this reflection multiple times. In such a case, if a decorative pattern is placed near the transition point P between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front normal R-shaped portion 410c of the front light guide plate 410, there may be areas where light is not guided, making it impossible to properly guide light to the decorative pattern and making it difficult to achieve the desired light emission mode. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, LEDs and condenser lenses are not positioned on the lateral side of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b when viewed from the front, so that light is not irradiated from the lateral side of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b when viewed from the front. Furthermore, by not placing a decorative pattern near the transition point P, the decorative patterns 411, 412, and 413 can be properly illuminated and displayed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment may be configured so that the decorative patterns 411, 412, and 413 are not placed at the transition point (portion) between the front normal R-shaped portion and the front upper reverse R-shaped portion. This configuration achieves the same effect as the above.

Furthermore, the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 may not be arranged at the transition point (portion) between the front lower flat portion 410a and the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, or at the transition point (portion) between the front upper inverted R-shaped portion and the front upper flat portion. Even at the transition point (portion) between the front lower flat portion 410a and the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, or at the transition point (portion) between the front upper inverted R-shaped portion and the front upper flat portion, the amount of light impinging on the rear surface of the front light guide plate 410 may be sparse. Therefore, by not arranging the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 at the transition point (portion) between the front upper inverted R-shaped portion and the front upper flat portion, an effect equivalent to that described above can be achieved.

Now, with reference to Figure 20, the manner in which light is focused by the front downward focusing lens 414d, the front right focusing lens 415d, and the front left focusing lens 416d will be described. As shown in Figure 20, each of the focusing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d has one first end face (the lower end face in Figure 20) formed in a straight line shape (or a nearly straight line shape), while the other second end face (the upper end face in Figure 20) formed on the opposite side of the first end face is formed in a plurality of semicircular convex shapes made up of a series of semicircular shapes.

In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410, like the rear light guide plate 420, is made of acrylic resin (PMMA). When the refractive index of the acrylic resin is set to 1.49 to 1.53, light incident on the first end face of each focusing lens 414d, 415d, 416d is emitted in a straight (or almost straight; toward the top of the drawing in Figure 20) direction from the second end face. As a result, light incident from the first end faces of the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, 416d can be emitted in one direction in a condensed state rather than diffused from the second end faces formed into a plurality of semicircular convex shapes, so that when the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c corresponding to the decorative symbols 411, 412, 413 to be displayed are turned on, the other decorative symbols 411, 412, 413 are not turned on, and only the decorative symbols 411, 412, 413 to be displayed can be properly turned on and displayed. In particular, when attempting to turn on the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has the lowest jackpot reliability, if the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412, which are formed on the same front light guide plate 410 and have a higher jackpot reliability than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, are turned on, an inconsistency in the presentation may occur, and the game may not be able to be played as specified in the game specifications. Therefore, by configuring the condenser lenses 415d, 416d to prevent the light directed at the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a low probability of winning, from being diffused, it is possible to display only the fourth decorative symbol group 413 at the appropriate time, making it less likely that inconsistencies will occur in the presentation content.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d are provided for each of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, and 413 on the front light guide plate 410, and are configured to irradiate each with condensed light. In contrast, for decorative symbol groups with a high likelihood of winning, i.e., the third decorative symbol 412, etc., a diffusing lens, such as that used to illuminate the first decorative symbol group 421, may be used instead of a condensing lens. The third decorative symbol 412 represents a higher likelihood of winning than at least the fourth decorative symbol group 413, and is located in front of the drum display device 81, which is the player's focus during play. Therefore, it is necessary to comprehensively irradiate the third decorative symbol 412 with light using a diffusing lens to clearly identify the third decorative symbol 412 to the player. Furthermore, if the third decorative symbol 412, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the fourth decorative symbol 413, is also lit when the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is illuminated, an inconsistent presentation will occur. However, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a lower jackpot expectation than the third decorative symbol 412, is lit when the third decorative symbol 412 is illuminated, the player will focus on the execution of the third decorative symbol 412, which has a higher jackpot expectation, and will not pay as much attention to the execution of the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a lower jackpot expectation, making it less likely that an inconsistent presentation will occur. Therefore, by using condensing lenses 415d, 416d for the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a lower jackpot expectation, and using a diffusing lens for the third decorative symbol 412, which has a higher jackpot expectation, the presentation effect of the front light guide plate 410 can be enhanced and attention to the game can be increased.

Now, with reference to Figure 21, the decorative symbols 411, 412, and 413 that are illuminated in the direction of light guided into the front light guide plate 410 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is configured to be illuminated in response to light in the horizontal direction (left-right direction) of the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front, and the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are configured to be illuminated in response to light in the vertical direction (up-down direction) of the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front. Note that the third decorative symbol 412, which can be illuminated in response to light in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, is illuminated by light in the same direction as the second decorative symbol group 411. Therefore, for the sake of convenience, description of the third decorative symbol 412 will be omitted, and only the second decorative symbol group 411 will be described.

21(a), the bubble symbol 1 forming the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is configured to be able to be represented by forming multiple continuous vertical grooves (concave and convex) in the front light guide plate 410 along the pattern of the bubble symbol in a vertical direction as viewed from the front. By configuring it in this way, light guided laterally (left and right) through the front light guide plate 410 as viewed from the front (for example, light emitted from the front left LED 416c) collides with the vertical grooves and is reflected (emitted) toward the front side of the front light guide plate 410, thereby illuminating and displaying the bubble symbol so that it can be seen from the front side of the front light guide plate 410 (i.e., the front side of the pachinko machine 10). On the other hand, light guided in the vertical direction (up and down) when viewed from the front within the front light guide plate 410 (for example, light emitted from the front downward LED 414c) is not or is difficult to reflect back to the front side of the front light guide plate 410 even when it collides with the vertical grooves, and is configured so that it is not or is difficult to see as a bubble pattern from the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

21(b), one cherry blossom pattern forming the second decorative pattern group 411 is configured to be able to be represented by forming multiple horizontal grooves (concave and concave) continuously along the pattern of the cherry blossom pattern in the front light guide plate 410 in the horizontal direction as viewed from the front. With this configuration, light guided in the vertical direction (up and down direction) as viewed from the front through the front light guide plate 410 (for example, light emitted from the front downward LED 414c) collides with the horizontal grooves and is reflected (emitted) toward the front side of the front light guide plate 410, thereby illuminating and displaying the cherry blossom pattern so that it can be seen from the front side of the front light guide plate 410 (i.e., the front side of the pachinko machine 10). On the other hand, light guided laterally (left and right) within the front light guide plate 410 when viewed from the front (for example, light emitted from the front left LED 416c) is not or is difficult to reflect back to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, even if it collides with the horizontal groove, and is configured so that it is not or is difficult to see as a bubble pattern from the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

In this way, by configuring one front light guide plate 410 so that the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 that can be illuminated vary depending on the direction (incident direction) of light guided into the front light guide plate 410, it is possible to illuminate and display multiple decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 individually on one front light guide plate 410, thereby improving the expressive power of one light guide plate and increasing attention to the game.

Furthermore, by using the entire front light guide plate 410 to produce effects using the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 on the front side and surrounding area of the drum display device 81, effects can be produced over an area expanded beyond the location of the drum display device 81. This allows for powerful effects to be produced using the drum display device 81 and front light guide plate 410, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The front light guide plate 410 may be configured to be able to display two decorative patterns (e.g., the third decorative pattern 412 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) in the same area (e.g., the area on the front side of the drum display device 81 (i.e., the front positive R-shaped portion)), with one decorative pattern (e.g., the fourth decorative pattern group 413) illuminated in response to light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the horizontal direction, and the other decorative pattern (e.g., the third decorative pattern 412) illuminated in response to light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from the vertical direction. However, in order to illuminate different decorative patterns in a single area in response to light from multiple directions, the unevenness of that area must be configured with a complex shape, which requires attention to the fact that design is more difficult than when displaying a single decorative pattern in a single area.

22 and 23, the lighting (presentation) modes of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 will be described. Figure 22 shows the lighting modes of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 that are illuminated and displayed on the front light guide plate 410. Figure 22(a) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting mode of the fourth decorative symbol group 413 when the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c are illuminated on the front light guide plate 410, and Figure 22(b) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting mode of the second decorative symbol group 411 when the front lower LEDs 414c on the right and left ends of the front light guide plate 410 are illuminated. Figure 23 shows the lighting modes of the second decorative pattern group 411, third decorative pattern 412, and fourth decorative pattern group 413 that are illuminated and displayed on the front light guide plate 410. Figure 23(a) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting mode of the third decorative pattern 412 when the front lower LEDs 414c in the center of the front light guide plate 410, excluding the right and left ends, are lit, and Figure 23(b) is a schematic diagram showing the lighting mode of the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 when all of the front lower LEDs 414c on the front light guide plate 410 are lit.

First, as shown in Figure 22 (a), when the front right LED 415c located on the right side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 is lit in "light blue," the light emitted from the front right LED 415c is focused by the front right focusing lens 415d and irradiated straight to the left onto the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 with an optical path width in the same range as the vertical width of the front right focusing lens 415d. Furthermore, when the front-left LED 416c located to the left of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 is lit in light blue, the light emitted from the front-left LED 416c is condensed by the front-left condensing lens 416d and irradiates the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 straight to the right with an optical path width equivalent to the vertical width of the front-left condensing lens 416d.

In this case, the light emitted straight to the left and right by the front right focusing lens 415d and the front left focusing lens 416d onto the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 collides with the vertical grooves of the fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed on the lower flat portion and lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the horizontal light is emitted toward the front side of the front light guide plate 410, causing the fourth decorative pattern group 413 to be visibly lit up in light blue on the front side of the front light guide plate 410. At this time, the light focused by each focusing lens 415d, 416d does not reach the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 formed on the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, making the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 invisible or difficult to see on the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

More specifically, light incident from the side of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front right focusing lens 415d and the front left focusing lens 416d is guided straight through the lower flat portion in the left-right direction and is slightly diffused upward when viewed from the front in the lower flat portion, reaching the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, but does not or has difficulty reaching the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat portion. As a result, the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front right focusing lens 415d and the front left focusing lens 416d illuminates and displays only the fourth decorative symbol group 413 arranged on the lower flat plate portion and lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 so that they are visible from the player's line of sight at the front of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the horizontal position where the drum display device 81 is disposed), while the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 arranged on the normal R-shaped portion are invisible or difficult to see from the player's line of sight at the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c may be illuminated sequentially from bottom to top, so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 appears to float from below to above the front light guide plate 410.

Next, as shown in Figure 22(b), when the rightmost and leftmost front lower LEDs 414c among the front lower LEDs 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410 are lit in "pink," the light emitted from the front lower LEDs 414c is focused by the semicircular portions at the right and left ends of the front lower focusing lens 414d, respectively, and is irradiated straight upward onto the lower flat portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion, and upper flat portion of the front light guide plate 410, with an optical path width equivalent to the width of the semicircular portion.

In this case, the light emitted by the front-lower focusing lens 414d in a straight upward direction onto the lower flat portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion, and upper flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 collides with the horizontal grooves of the second decorative pattern group 411 formed on the normal R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the vertical light is emitted toward the front side of the front light guide plate 410, causing the second decorative pattern group 411 to be visibly illuminated in "pink" on the front side of the front light guide plate 410. At this time, when light emitted from the front-lower LEDs 414c located at the right and left ends is focused by the front-lower focusing lens 414d, the focused light does not reach the third decorative pattern 412, making the third decorative pattern 412 invisible or difficult to see on the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

More specifically, light incident on the lower side of the right and left portions of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower focusing lens 414d is guided straight upward through the lower flat portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion and upper flat portion, and is slightly diffused left and right when viewed from the front in the lower flat portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion and upper flat portion. However, because the positions of the second decorative pattern group 411 arranged in the normal R-shaped portion and the third decorative pattern 412 are located a predetermined distance apart, the light does not reach the position of the third decorative pattern 412 in the normal R-shaped portion. As a result, the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front downward condensing lens 414d causes only the second decorative pattern group 411 located on the right and left sides of the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 to be visibly illuminated, while the third decorative pattern 412 located in the center of the regular R-shaped portion becomes invisible or difficult to see.

Furthermore, a fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed by vertical grooves is formed on the lower flat plate portion and lower inverted R-shaped portion, which form the optical path of light that is irradiated straight upward through the lower flat plate portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion, and upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410. However, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the vertical grooves is configured in a shape that does not, or makes it difficult for, light irradiated vertically from the front downward LEDs 414c on the right and left ends to exit toward the front side of the front light guide plate 410. As a result, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is not lit up on the front side of the front light guide plate 410, making it impossible or difficult to see.

Next, as shown in Figure 23(a), when any of the front-downward LEDs 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410 that are located other than at the right and left ends are lit up in green, the light emitted from the front-downward LED 414c is condensed by the semicircular portions of the front-downward condensing lens 414d other than the right and left ends, and is irradiated straight upward onto the lower flat portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion, and upper flat portion of the front light guide plate 410, with an optical path width equivalent to the width of the semicircular portion corresponding to the emitting front-downward LED 414c.

In this case, the light emitted by the front-lower focusing lens 414d in a straight upward direction onto the lower flat portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion, and upper flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 collides with the horizontal grooves of the third decorative pattern 412 formed on the normal R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the vertical light is emitted toward the front side of the front light guide plate 410, causing the third decorative pattern 412 to be visibly lit in "green" on the front side of the front light guide plate 410. At this time, if light emitted from the front-lower LEDs 414c located in locations other than the right and left ends is focused by the front-lower focusing lens 414d, the focused light does not reach the second decorative pattern group 411, making the second decorative pattern group 411 invisible or difficult to see on the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

More specifically, light incident on the lower side of the central part of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower focusing lens 414d is guided straight upward through the lower flat portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion and upper flat portion, and is diffused slightly left and right when viewed from the front in the lower flat portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion and upper flat portion. However, because the positions of the second decorative pattern group 411 arranged in the normal R-shaped portion and the third decorative pattern 412 are located a predetermined distance apart, the light does not reach the position of the second decorative pattern group 411 in the normal R-shaped portion. As a result, the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front downward condensing lens 414d illuminates and displays only the third decorative pattern 412 located in the center of the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, making the second decorative pattern group 411 located on the right and left sides of the regular R-shaped portion invisible or difficult to see.

Furthermore, a fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed by vertical grooves is formed on the lower flat plate portion and lower inverted R-shaped portion, which form the optical path of light that is irradiated straight upward through the lower flat plate portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion, and upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410. However, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the vertical grooves is configured in a shape that does not or makes it difficult for light irradiated vertically from the front downward LEDs 414c other than those at the right and left ends to exit toward the front side of the front light guide plate 410. As a result, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is not lit up on the front side of the front light guide plate 410 and is therefore invisible or difficult to see.

Next, as shown in Figure 23 (b), when the front lower LEDs 414c located at the right and left ends of the front lower LEDs 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410 are lit in "pink," the light emitted from the front lower LEDs 414c is focused by one semicircular portion at the right and left ends of the front lower focusing lens 414d, respectively, and is irradiated straight upward onto the lower flat portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion and upper flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 with an optical path width within the same range as the horizontal width of the one semicircular portion. Furthermore, when any of the front-downward LEDs 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410 that are located other than at the right and left ends are lit up in green, the light emitted from that front-downward LED 414c is condensed by the semicircular portions of the front-downward condensing lens 414d other than the right and left ends, and is irradiated straight upward onto the lower flat portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion, and upper flat portion of the front light guide plate 410, with a light path width within the same range as the width of the semicircular portion corresponding to the emitting front-downward LED 414c.

In this case, the light emitted by the front downward focusing lens 414d in a straight upward direction onto the lower flat plate portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion, and upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 collides with the horizontal grooves of the second decorative pattern group 411 formed on the normal R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the vertical light is emitted toward the front side of the front light guide plate 410, so that the second decorative pattern group 411 is visibly lit in "pink" and the third decorative pattern 412 is visibly lit in "green" on the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

More specifically, the "green" light incident on the lower side of the central part of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower focusing lens 414d is guided straight upward through the lower flat portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion and upper flat portion, and is diffused slightly left and right when viewed from the front in the lower flat portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion and upper flat portion. However, because the positions of the second decorative pattern group 411 arranged in the normal R-shaped portion and the third decorative pattern 412 are located a predetermined distance apart, the light does not reach the position of the second decorative pattern 411 in the normal R-shaped portion. In addition, the ``pink'' light incident on the lower side of the right and left parts of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front downward focusing lens 414d is guided straight upward through the lower flat plate portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion and upper flat plate portion, and is diffused slightly in the left and right directions when viewed from the front in the lower flat plate portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion and upper flat plate portion, but since the positions of the second decorative pattern group 411 arranged in the normal R-shaped portion and the third decorative pattern 412 are located a predetermined distance apart, it does not reach the position of the third decorative pattern 412 in the normal R-shaped portion. As a result, when different decorative patterns 411, 412 arranged on the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 are illuminated using light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front downward focusing lens 414d, even if light is guided to each decorative pattern 411, 412 in a different illumination color, the lights do not mix and each can be illuminated in its own individual display color.

Meanwhile, a fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed by vertical grooves is formed on the lower flat plate portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion, and upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410, which form the optical path of light irradiated straight upward through the lower flat plate portion, lower inverted R-shaped portion, normal R-shaped portion, upper inverted R-shaped portion, and upper flat plate portion. However, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the vertical grooves is configured in a shape that does not, or makes it difficult for, light irradiated vertically from the front downward LED 414c to exit toward the front side of the front light guide plate 410. As a result, the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is not lit up on the front side of the front light guide plate 410, making it impossible or difficult to see.

In this way, when multiple decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 are formed on one front light guide plate 410, the light emitted from each LED 414c, 415c, 416c is concentrated and irradiated, and the direction of light incidence determines whether each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. This configuration allows the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 that are desired to be displayed to light up at the appropriate time depending on the game result, and the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 that are not desired to be displayed to light up are reliably not lit. This allows for the execution of effects that utilize the entire front light guide plate 410 while preventing inconsistencies in the effects, increasing the variety of effects and drawing more attention to the game.

Furthermore, the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has the lowest probability of winning a jackpot, is formed in the area where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path overlap (i.e., the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion), so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is visible only with horizontal light. Furthermore, the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412, which have a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the fourth decorative pattern group 413, are formed in the area where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path do not overlap (i.e., the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion), so that the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are visible only with vertical light. Here, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 becomes visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 due to a vertical light, the vertical light is turned on when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412, which have a higher likelihood of winning a jackpot than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, are illuminated. Therefore, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is illuminated when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412 are illuminated, there is little inconsistency in the presentation. Therefore, by forming the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has the lowest likelihood of winning a jackpot, in the area where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path overlap, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 becomes visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 at an unintended time, it is possible to minimize inconsistencies in the presentation and provide the player with a natural gameplay experience.

24 and 25, the effects produced by the front light guide plate 410, rear light guide plate 420, and drum display device 81 of the first embodiment will be described. Figure 24 shows the effects produced by the front light guide plate 410, rear light guide plate 420, and drum display device 81. Figure 24(a) is a schematic diagram showing the unlit state of the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413. Figure 24(b) is a schematic diagram showing the unlit state of the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, and the third decorative pattern 412 while the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is lit. FIG. 25 shows the effects performed by the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81. FIG. 25(a) is a schematic diagram showing the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol group 412 in an lit state while the first decorative symbol group 421 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are not lit. FIG. 25(b) is a schematic diagram showing the first decorative symbol group 421 in an lit state while the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are not lit. Note that in FIGS. 24 and 25, the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 and the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d are omitted.

First, as shown in Figure 24(a), the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 corresponding to the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 on the front light guide plate 410, and the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420, are in an unlit (off) state. As a result, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are not visible or are difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the state shown in Figure 24(a), the display content (stop mode) of the drum display device 81, which is disposed on the rear side of the position where the third decorative symbol 412 on the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 are formed, are visible. Specifically, the left reel LR displays a "7" in the top row, a "blank symbol" in the middle row, and an "8" in the bottom row, all of which are stopped, while the center reel CR and right reel RR each display a "7" in the top row, a "blank symbol" in the middle row, and an "8" in the bottom row, all of which are stopped, all of which can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

In the first embodiment, the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has the lowest probability of winning a jackpot, is formed in the front light guide plate 410 in the portion where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path overlap (i.e., the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion), so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is visible only with horizontal light. Furthermore, the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412, which have a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the fourth decorative pattern group 413, are formed in the front light guide plate 410 in the portion where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path do not overlap (i.e., the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion), so that the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are visible only with vertical light. Furthermore, the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 is formed on the back side of the portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path do not overlap (i.e., the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion), and a drum display device 81 is disposed to execute the third symbol variable effect, which is the main effect of the game. In this way, the drum display device 81 that executes the third symbol variable effect, which is the main effect of the game, is disposed on the portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path do not overlap (i.e., the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion), and is configured to display the first decorative symbol group 421, which is the effect with the highest probability of winning a jackpot in the variable effect. This configuration does not interfere with the display results of the variable effect, which is important for the game, or the effect with the highest probability of winning a jackpot, and enhances the effect effects of the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81, thereby increasing attention to the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24(b), the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c corresponding to the fourth decorative symbol group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 are both lit in light blue, while the LEDs 414c, 422c, and 424 corresponding to the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 on the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 are unlit (off). As a result, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, while the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, and the third decorative symbol 412 are invisible or difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, in the state shown in Figure 24(b), similar to Figure 24(a), the display content (stop mode) of the drum display device 81 disposed on the rear side of the position where the third decorative symbol 412 on the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 are formed is visible. Specifically, the left reel LR displays a "7" in the top row, a "blank symbol" in the middle row, and an "8" in the bottom row, all of which are stopped, while the center reel CR and right reel RR each display a "7" in the top row, a "blank symbol" in the middle row, and an "8" in the bottom row, all of which are stopped, all of which can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, when the third symbol variable effect is performed on the drum display device 81 located on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, an effect is performed using the fourth decorative symbol group 413 formed on the lower flat plate portion and lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410. This creates an integrated, three-dimensional, and powerful effect by the drum display device 81 and the front light guide plate 410, thereby enhancing the effect of each device 81, 410 and increasing attention to the game.

25(a), the right- and left-most front-downward LEDs 414c corresponding to the second decorative symbol group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 are lit in "pink," and the front-downward LEDs 414c other than the right- and left-most LEDs corresponding to the third decorative symbol 412 of the front light guide plate 410 are lit in "green," while the LEDs 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 corresponding to the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are unlit (off). Therefore, the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, while the first decorative symbol group 421 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are invisible or difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, in the state of Figure 25(a), similar to Figures 24(a) and 24(b), the display content (stop mode) of the drum display device 81 disposed on the rear side of the position where the third decorative symbol 412 on the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 are formed is visible. Specifically, the left reel LR displays a "7" in the top row, a "blank symbol" in the middle row, and an "8" in the bottom row, all of which are stopped, while the center reel CR and right reel RR each display a "7" in the top row, a "blank symbol" in the middle row, and an "8" in the bottom row, all of which are stopped, all of which can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, when the third symbol variable effect is performed on the drum display device 81 located on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, an effect is performed using the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 formed on the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410. This creates an integrated, three-dimensional, and powerful effect using the drum display device 81 and the front light guide plate 410, thereby enhancing the effect of each device 81, 410 and increasing attention to the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(b), the rear upper LEDs 422c and rear lower LEDs 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 are lit in "red," "blue," and "green," respectively, while the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c corresponding to the second decorative symbol group 411, third decorative symbol 412, and fourth decorative symbol group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 are unlit (off). As a result, the first decorative symbol group 421 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, while the second decorative symbol group 411, third decorative symbol 412, and fourth decorative symbol group 413 are invisible or difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, in the state shown in Figure 25(b), similar to Figures 24(a), 24(b), and 25(a), the display content (stop mode) of the drum display device 81 disposed on the rear side of the position where the third decorative symbol 412 on the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 are formed is visible. Specifically, the left reel LR displays a "7" in the top row, a "blank symbol" in the middle row, and an "8" in the bottom row, all of which are stopped, while the center reel CR and right reel RR each display a "7" in the top row, a "blank symbol" in the middle row, and an "8" in the bottom row, all of which are stopped, all of which can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, when the third symbol variable effect is performed on the drum display device 81 located on the rear side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, an effect is performed using the first decorative symbol group 421 formed on the regular R-shaped portion of the rear light guide plate 420. This creates an integrated, three-dimensional, and powerful effect using the drum display device 81 and the rear light guide plate 420, thereby enhancing the effect of each device 81, 420 and increasing attention to the game.

In this way, by combining the third symbol variation effect on the drum display device 81 with the effect on the light guide unit 400, which has the front light guide plate 410 and rear light guide plate 420, a variety of effects can be produced, enhancing the effects of the drum display device 81, front light guide plate 410, and rear light guide plate 420, and increasing attention to the game.

More specifically, by executing a performance related to the third symbol variation performance (for example, the likelihood of a jackpot) in the front side (the front side of the pachinko machine 10) of the drum display device 81 that executes the third symbol variation performance and its surrounding areas (the top, bottom, left, and right areas when viewed from the front of the display area of the drum display device 81), the performance area for the third symbol variation performance can be expanded in two and three dimensions, and an impressive third symbol variation performance can be executed.

Furthermore, when configuring the variable effects to be able to execute multiple patterns of effects indicating the likelihood of a jackpot, effects with a low likelihood of a jackpot (i.e., the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) can be concentrated on one light guide plate (i.e., the front light guide plate 410), while effects with a high likelihood of a jackpot (i.e., the first decorative pattern group 421) can be placed on another light guide plate (i.e., the rear light guide plate 420). This prevents effects with a high likelihood of a jackpot from being lit up due to noise or the player's viewing angle, etc., when an effect with a low likelihood of a jackpot is executed, making it possible to execute effects without any discrepancies.

More specifically, if effects with a high probability of winning (i.e., first decorative symbol group 421) and effects with a low probability of winning (i.e., second decorative symbol group 411, third decorative symbol group 412, and fourth decorative symbol group 413) are provided on the same light guide plate, when attempting to light up an effect with a low probability of winning, if the player's viewing position relative to the light guide plate varies depending on their height or posture, depending on the viewing angle, the light used to light up the effect with a low probability of winning may appear to be lighting up an effect with a high probability of winning. If this occurs, the player may expect a jackpot, even though the variable third symbol effect has a low probability of winning. However, if a jackpot does not occur in the variable third symbol effect, the player may mistakenly believe that the effect with a high probability of winning has a low probability of winning.

Therefore, when configuring the variable effects to be able to execute multiple patterns of effects indicating the likelihood of a jackpot, effects with a low likelihood of a jackpot (i.e., second decorative pattern group 411, third decorative pattern group 412, and fourth decorative pattern group 413) are concentrated on one light guide plate (i.e., front light guide plate 410), while effects with a high likelihood of a jackpot (i.e., first decorative pattern group 421) are placed on another light guide plate (i.e., rear light guide plate 420). This prevents misinterpretation due to noise or differences in viewing position depending on the player's height or posture when executing effects with a low likelihood of a jackpot, and allows the player to experience effects that match the design values.

Furthermore, when multiple light guide plates 410, 420 are used to configure multiple patterns of effects indicating the likelihood of a jackpot in variable effects, by utilizing focusing lenses 414d, 415d, 416d in one light guide plate 410 (i.e., the front light guide plate 410), multiple types of effects (i.e., the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern group 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) can be individually configured, and by employing diffusing lenses 423, 425 in another light guide plate (i.e., the rear light guide plate 420), one effect (i.e., the first decorative pattern group 421) can be configured to be displayed in a variety of ways. This configuration makes it possible to execute more effects than the number of light guide plates 410, 420, increasing the variety of effects and drawing attention to the game.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Figure 26. Figure 26 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10, and is primarily a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device 110.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, a one-chip microcomputer that serves as a calculation unit. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 202 are executed, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. When this power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see Figure 32) is immediately executed as power outage processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to various solenoids 209, including the payout control device 111, audio lamp control device 113, special symbol display device 37, normal symbol display device 83, normal symbol hold lamp 84, a large prize opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the large prize opening 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as its axis, and a normal electric solenoid for driving the normal electric role 64c, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

In addition, to instruct sub-controllers such as the dispensing control unit 111 and the voice lamp control unit 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control unit 110 to the sub-controllers via the data transmission/reception circuit, but these commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control unit 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main control unit 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing lots for jackpots for each special symbol, setting the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37, setting the variable effects on the drum display device 81, drawing lots for the display results of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83, and setting the jackpot probability for each special symbol. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

In addition, ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a reserve number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, and a fluctuation pattern table 202e. The main control unit 110 performs the above main control using various counters stored in RAM 203 and various tables stored in ROM 202.

Here, with reference to Figure 27, we will explain the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform jackpot lottery draws, setting the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, setting the variable effects of the drum display device 81, and drawing lots for the display results of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83. In addition, in the explanation of the various counters, with reference to Figures 28 to 32, we will also explain the various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display settings of the special symbol display device 37, and the variable presentation settings of the drum display device 81 use a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used to select the type of stop of the jackpot symbol, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to select the presentation mode of the variable presentation, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used to select the variation pattern.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 4 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). Some counters are also updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 39), with the updated values stored appropriately in a counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of RAM 203. As will be described in detail later, RAM 203 is provided with a first reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1-4) related to the first special symbol, and a second reserved ball storage area 203e consisting of four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1-4) related to the second special symbol. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first starting hole 64a. Additionally, the second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second starting hole 64b.

Here, with reference to Figure 28(a), details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol in the first embodiment will be described. Figure 28(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a commonly used in the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol stored in ROM 202.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number table 202a is divided into two types for each setting value: one for a low probability state, which is used when the game state is a low probability state for special symbols in the "normal game state" or "time-shortened state," and one for a high probability state, which is used when the game state is a "probability-varying state," which is a high probability state for special symbols in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than in the low probability state for special symbols.

The number of jackpot random number values included in the low probability state and the high probability state are set differently for each setting value. Furthermore, the increase in the number of jackpot random number values required to transition from the low probability state to the high probability state is compensated for by the number of miss random number values corresponding to a miss. In this way, by varying the number of jackpot random number values depending on the game state, the probability of a jackpot changes between the low probability state and the high probability state.

As shown in Figure 28(a), in the jackpot random number table 202a of the first embodiment, when the set value is "1," the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 50, and these values "0 to 49" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in a low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-shortened state") for each special symbol with a set value of "1" is set to 50/10000 = 0.5/100 (i.e., 0.5%).

On the other hand, when the setting value is "1," the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that result in a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 500, and these values "0 to 499" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") for each special symbol with a setting value of "1" is 500/10000 = 5/100 (i.e., 5%), and the high probability state for special symbols is set to make it 10 times easier to win a jackpot than the low probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "1," the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will result in a loss in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9,950 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "50 to 9,999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. Also, the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will result in a loss in a high probability state is the remaining 9,500 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "500 to 9,999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the probability of losing in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-shortened state") for each special symbol with a setting value of "1" is set to 9950/10000 = 99.5/100 (i.e., 99.5%), and the probability of losing in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") for each special symbol is set to 9500/10000 = 95/100 (i.e., 95%).

Next, when the set value is "2," the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 52, and these values "0 to 51" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in a low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-shortened state") for each special symbol with a set value of "2" is set to 52/10,000 = 0.52/100 (i.e., 0.52%).

On the other hand, when the setting value is "2," the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that result in a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 520, and these values "0 to 519" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") for each special symbol with a setting value of "2" is 520/10000 = 5.2/100 (i.e., 5.2%), and the high probability state for special symbols is set to make it 10 times easier to win a jackpot than the low probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "2," the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will result in a loss in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9,948 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "52 to 9,999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. Also, the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will result in a loss in a high probability state is the remaining 9,480 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "520 to 9,999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the probability of losing in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-shortened state") for each special symbol with a setting value of "2" is set to 9948/10000 = 99.48/100 (i.e., 99.48%), and the probability of losing in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") for each special symbol is set to 9480/10000 = 94.8/100 (i.e., 94.8%).

Therefore, the setting value "2" in the jackpot random number table 202a slightly improves the jackpot probability compared to the setting value "1" (low probability state: 0.5% → 0.52%, high probability state: 5% → 5.2%), making it easier for a jackpot to occur than the setting value "1".

Next, when the set value is "3," the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 54, and these values "0 to 53" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in a low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-shortened state") for each special symbol with a set value of "3" is set to 54/10000 = 0.54/100 (i.e., 0.54%).

On the other hand, when the setting value is "3," the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that result in a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 540, and these values "0 to 539" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") for each special symbol with a setting value of "3" is 540/10,000 = 5.4/100 (i.e., 5.4%), and the high probability state for special symbols is set to make it 10 times easier to win a jackpot than the low probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "3," the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will result in a loss in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9,946 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "54 to 9,999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. Also, the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will result in a loss in a high probability state is the remaining 9,460 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "540 to 9,999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the probability of losing in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-shortened state") for each special symbol with a setting value of "3" is set to 9946/10000 = 99.46/100 (i.e., 99.46%), and the probability of losing in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") for each special symbol is set to 9460/10000 = 94.6/100 (i.e., 94.6%).

Therefore, the setting value "3" in the jackpot random number table 202a slightly improves the jackpot probability compared to the setting value "2" (low probability state: 0.52% → 0.54%, high probability state: 5.2% → 5.4%), making it easier for a jackpot to occur than the setting value "2".

Next, when the set value is "4," the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 56, and the values "0 to 55" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in a low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-shortened state") for each special symbol with a set value of "4" is set to 56/10000 = 0.56/100 (i.e., 0.56%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "4," the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that result in a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 560, and these values "0 to 559" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") for each special symbol with a set value of "4" is 560/10000 = 5.6/100 (i.e., 5.6%), and the high probability state for special symbols is set to make it 10 times easier to win a jackpot than the low probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "4," the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will result in a loss in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9,944 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "56 to 9,999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. Also, the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will result in a loss in a high probability state is the remaining 9,440 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "560 to 9,999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the probability of losing in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-shortened state") for each special symbol with a setting value of "4" is set to 9944/10000 = 99.44/100 (i.e., 99.44%), and the probability of losing in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") for each special symbol is set to 9440/10000 = 94.4/100 (i.e., 94.4%).

Therefore, the setting value "4" in the jackpot random number table 202a slightly improves the jackpot probability compared to the setting value "3" (low probability state: 0.54% → 0.56%, high probability state: 5.4% → 5.6%), making it easier for a jackpot to occur than the setting value "3".

Next, when the set value is "5," the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 58, and these values "0 to 57" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in a low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-shortened state") for each special symbol with a set value of "5" is set to 58/10000 = 0.58/100 (i.e., 0.58%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "5," the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that result in a jackpot in a high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 580, and these values "0 to 579" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") for each special symbol with a set value of "5" is 580/10,000 = 5.8/100 (i.e., 5.8%), and the high probability state for special symbols is set to make it 10 times easier to win a jackpot than the low probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "5," the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will result in a loss in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9,942 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "58 to 9,999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. Also, the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will result in a loss in a high probability state is the remaining 9,420 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "580 to 9,999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the probability of losing in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-shortened state") for each special symbol with a setting value of "5" is set to 9942/10000 = 99.42/100 (i.e., 99.42%), and the probability of losing in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") for each special symbol is set to 9420/10000 = 94.2/100 (i.e., 94.2%).

Therefore, the setting value "5" in the jackpot random number table 202a slightly improves the jackpot probability compared to the setting value "4" (low probability state: 0.56% → 0.58%, high probability state: 5.6% → 5.8%), making it easier for a jackpot to occur than the setting value "4".

Next, when the set value is "6," the number of values (jackpot random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that result in a jackpot in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 60, and the values "0 to 59" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in a low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-reduced state") for each special symbol with a set value of "6" is set to 60/10000 = 0.6/100 (i.e., 0.6%).

On the other hand, when the set value is "6," the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that result in a jackpot in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 600, and these values "0 to 599" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") for each special symbol with a set value of "6" is 600/10000 = 6/100 (i.e., 6%), and the high probability state for special symbols is set to make it 10 times easier to win a jackpot than the low probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "6," the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will result in a loss in a low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9,940 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "60 to 9,999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. Also, the number of random number values (missing random number values) that will result in a loss in a high probability state is the remaining 9,400 values other than the jackpot random number value, and these values "600 to 9,999" are specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In other words, the probability of losing in the low probability state (i.e., "normal game state" and "time-shortened state") for each special symbol with a setting value of "6" is set to 9940/10000 = 99.4/100 (i.e., 99.4%), and the probability of losing in the high probability state (i.e., "variable probability state") for each special symbol is set to 9400/10000 = 94/100 (i.e., 94%).

Therefore, the setting value "6" in the jackpot random number table 202a slightly improves the jackpot probability compared to the setting value "5" (low probability state: 0.58% → 0.6%, high probability state: 5.8% → 6%), making it easier for a jackpot to occur than the setting value "5".

In this way, by changing the probability of winning a jackpot for each probability setting value and thereby changing the ease of winning a jackpot, it is possible to change the payout rate for each probability setting value, and change the amount of gaming value that can be awarded to the player. This increases the variety of gameplay available in games played on the pachinko machine 10, and increases the enjoyment of the game.

Returning to Figure 27, we will continue the explanation. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the type of jackpot in the event of a jackpot. It is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") and return to "0" after reaching its maximum value (for example, "99" for a counter that can take values from "0 to 99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see Figure 40)).

Then, when the ball enters the first starting hole 64a, it is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reserved area, which is one of the first reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting hole 64a and is the same as the first reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored. Also, when the ball enters the second starting hole 64b, it is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reserved area, which is one of the second reserved areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting hole 64b and is the same as the second reserved area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area within the first held ball storage area 203d or the second held ball storage area 203e is not a random number that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value), i.e., if it is a random number that results in a loss (loss random number value), the variation pattern in the variation presentation and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "stop type") will be those for a loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area within the first held ball storage area 203d or the second held ball storage area 203e is a random number that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value), the variation pattern in the variation presentation and the stop type will be those for a jackpot. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type for that jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter with a range of "0 to 99," and the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in ROM 202. This jackpot type table 202b is commonly referenced in both the first lottery game for the first special symbol and the second lottery game for the second special symbol.

Now, with reference to Figure 28(b), we will explain the jackpot type table 202b. Figure 28(b) is a diagram that schematically shows an example of the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol (common) stored in ROM 202.

As shown in Figure 28 (b), the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which jackpot types are associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the jackpot types include a "10R guaranteed jackpot," which corresponds to a "probability-changing state" in which, after a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, the jackpot probability of special symbols and the probability of winning with normal symbols are both high until the next jackpot; a "5R guaranteed jackpot," which corresponds to a "probability-changing state" in which, after a jackpot with a maximum of 5 rounds, the jackpot probability of special symbols and the probability of winning with normal symbols are both high until the next jackpot; and a "10R normal jackpot," which corresponds to a "time-reduced state" in which, after a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, the jackpot probability of special symbols is low, but the probability of winning with normal symbols is high until the dynamic display of special symbols is executed 100 times.

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with a possible value of the jackpot type counter C2 that determines that jackpot type.

In the example of the jackpot type table 202b shown in Figure 28(b), a "10R variable probability jackpot" is associated with a jackpot type counter C2 value of "0 to 39", a "5R variable probability jackpot" is associated with a jackpot type counter C2 value of "40 to 59", and a "10R normal jackpot" is associated with a jackpot type counter C2 value of "60 to 99".

In other words, in the lottery for determining whether a special symbol will win or lose, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of one of the first reserved areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, or the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of one of the first reserved area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e, is a value that results in a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, 203e2 of the same first reserved area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7," a "10R certain jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type; if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "45," a "5R certain jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type; and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "78," a "10R normal jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

Therefore, if a jackpot is won with the dynamic display of each special symbol, the winning percentages are 40% for the "10R probability jackpot" jackpot type, 20% for the "5R probability jackpot" jackpot type, and 40% for the "10R regular jackpot" jackpot type.

The probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is set appropriately for each machine type. Then, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is determined in the jackpot type table 202b according to the set probability.

The probability of a jackpot type being selected may also be changed depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each gaming state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 202b.

Returning to Figure 27, we will continue to explain the various counters. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 99).

In the first embodiment, the general presentation mode of the variable presentation displayed on the drum display device 81 during a jackpot or a miss is selected based on the number of pending variable presentations and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Specifically, five presentation modes are selected: a "non-reach (long)" presentation mode or a "non-reach (short)" presentation mode in which no "reach display" occurs; a "normal reach" presentation mode in which only the variable elements of a "normal reach" are executed as a "reach display"; a "super reach" presentation mode in which the variable elements of the "normal reach" are developed to execute the variable elements of a "super reach"; and a "special reach" presentation mode in which the variable elements of a "normal reach" are developed to execute the variable elements of a "special reach."

Here, each presentation mode will be explained in detail. Among the presentation modes, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode (hereinafter, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode may be collectively referred to as "non-reach" presentation modes) are presentation modes in which, after a "high-speed fluctuation" variable element that rotates (shuffles) each of the three reels LR, CR, and RR (see Figure 4) at high speed is performed on the drum display device 81, which fluctuates the three reels LR, CR, and RR as a special symbol fluctuation effect, the same third symbol does not stop on any of the activated lines of the two reels that stop first (for example, the left reel LR and right reel RR), and a "reach display" does not occur.

Note that the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element refers to, for example, a variable element in which, in the third symbol fluctuation effect performed on the drum display device 81, the third symbol displayed on each reel LR, CR, RR is rapidly rotated and scrolled vertically downward on the display screen. In this "high-speed fluctuation," the third symbol is fluctuated so that the player cannot clearly recognize the displayed content of the third symbol, and an effect is executed in which the stop results of the previously stopped and displayed fluctuation effect are randomly mixed (shuffled).

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that after a "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, a "low-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, except for certain presentation modes ("non-reach (short)" presentation modes).

A "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element refers to a variable element in which, during the third symbol fluctuation presentation performed on the drum display device 81, the third symbol scrolls slowly at a speed visible to the player after the "fast-speed fluctuation" variable element described above. In this "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element, the reels LR, CR, and RR are displayed in a static state in order, allowing the player to recognize the displayed content of the third symbol. If the same third symbol stops on the first two symbol rows (for example, the left reel LR and the right reel RR), a "reach display" is generated, and the game progresses to a "normal reach" variable element. However, if different third symbols stop on the first two reels LR and RR, the remaining reel CR is displayed in a static state, and the fluctuation presentation ends. Details of the "fast-speed fluctuation" variable element and each variable element, including the "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element, will be provided below.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed after the "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element, with each reel LR, CR, and RR stopping in order, with different third symbols stopping on the two reels LR and RR that stop first, and the remaining reel CR stopping, and the first fluctuation presentation ending. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, the "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element is not performed after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, and after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, each reel LR, CR, and RR stop simultaneously, with different third symbols stopping on two reels LR, CR, and RR (for example, the two reels LR and RR that stop first in the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode), and the other reel CR also stopping, and the first fluctuation presentation ending.

Among the presentation modes, the "normal reach" presentation mode is a "reach display" presentation mode in which, during the third symbol variation presentation on the drum display device 81, the "normal reach" variation element is executed immediately after the same third symbol stops on the two reels LR and RR that are displayed first, and does not develop into other "reach displays," i.e., "super reach" variation elements or "special reach" variation elements.

More specifically, the "normal reach" variable element involves the middle reel CR scrolling slowly, which scrolls slowly until it reaches a predetermined stopping symbol at the start of the variation, and then stops when it reaches that stopping symbol.

Among the presentation modes, the "Super Reach" presentation mode is one of the "Reach Display" presentation modes in which the variable elements of a "Normal Reach" are developed and the variable elements of a "Super Reach" are executed.

More specifically, the variable elements of a "Super Reach" are scrolled at an even slower speed (for example, ultra-slow scrolling or frame-by-frame scrolling) than the slow scrolling of the variable elements of a "Normal Reach," and at the start of the variation, they vary at this slow scrolling until they reach a predetermined stopping pattern, and then stop when they reach that stopping pattern.

Among the presentation modes, the "Special Reach" presentation mode is one of the "Reach Display" presentation modes in which the variable elements of a "Normal Reach" are developed and the variable elements of a "Special Reach" are executed.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see Figure 40)). Then, when a ball enters the first start port 64a, it is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved area where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the first reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first start port 64a. Also, when a ball enters the second start port 64b, it is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reserved area where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, among the second reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second start port 64b.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d that references the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to differ depending on whether the variable effect is successful, the current game state, and the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls) for both special symbols currently on hold. In other words, multiple types of stop pattern tables 202d are provided, and one is selected depending on the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls) for both special symbols currently on hold, etc.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variable effect, first, one of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the success or failure of the variable effect, the current game status, and the current number of variable effects (number of reserved balls) is selected based on the reserved number table 202c stored in ROM 202. Then, a presentation mode, which is a rough outline of the variable effect, is selected based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. After that, the detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variable effect is determined based on the selected presentation mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1, which will be described later.

These multiple stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random number values of the stop pattern selection counter C3, which selects the presentation mode, differs for each stop pattern table 202d. The reason multiple stop pattern tables 202d are provided is to change the selection ratio of the presentation mode for the variable presentation depending on whether the variable presentation is a hit or miss, the game status, and the number of reserved balls. That is, the selection ratio of the presentation mode is changed depending on (1) whether a jackpot occurs in the variable presentation of the acquired third symbol, (2) whether the current game status of the pachinko machine 10 is the "probability variable state," "time shortening state," or "normal game state," and (3) how many reserved balls there are for the variable presentation.

The first reason for this is to change the likelihood of winning a jackpot for each presentation mode. In other words, by configuring the stop patterns, i.e., the proportion of "non-reach" presentation modes, "normal reach" presentation modes, "super reach" presentation modes, and "special reach" presentation modes, to differ between winning and losing the jackpot lottery, the likelihood of winning a jackpot is changed for each presentation mode. Specifically, for example, if you win the jackpot lottery, the "super reach" presentation mode or "special reach" presentation mode is more likely to be selected, and if you do not win the jackpot lottery, the "non-reach" presentation mode or "normal reach" presentation mode is more likely to be selected.

By configuring it in this way, the "Super Reach" and "Special Reach" presentation modes can be made to be more likely to result in a jackpot, while the "Normal Reach" and "Non-Reach" presentation modes can be made to be less likely to result in a jackpot or no jackpot at all, making it possible to differentiate the likelihood of a jackpot for each presentation mode. Therefore, when a presentation that is likely to result in a jackpot appears in a variable presentation, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility of a jackpot occurring while that presentation is occurring, increasing the player's interest in the game.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the obtained lottery result is a jackpot, the device is configured to select a presentation mode (stop pattern) that is the general content of the variable presentation based on stop pattern table 202d, which makes it easy to select a presentation that is likely to result in a jackpot and difficult to select a presentation that is unlikely to result in a jackpot. On the other hand, if the obtained lottery result is a loss, the device is configured to select a presentation mode (stop pattern) for the variable presentation based on stop pattern table 202d, which makes it difficult to select a presentation that is likely to result in a jackpot and difficult to select a presentation that is unlikely to result in a jackpot. As a result, when the lottery result for the third symbol is notified to the player in the variable presentation, if a presentation that is likely to result in a jackpot is being executed, the variable presentation will be more likely to result in a jackpot, and if a presentation that is unlikely to result in a jackpot is being executed, the variable presentation will be less likely to result in a jackpot. By providing a difference in the expected value of a jackpot for each presentation mode (stop pattern), it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game while the variable presentation is being executed.

The second reason is to minimize the number of wasted balls (so-called overflow winnings resulting in no special symbol being drawn) that result from a ball entering the first starting hole 64a when the number of waiting times for the first special symbol variable effect has reached its upper limit, or a ball entering the second starting hole 64b when the number of waiting times for the second special symbol variable effect has reached its upper limit.

Specifically, the number of waiting times for the first special symbol and second special symbol variable effects is limited to a maximum of four, and the variable effects are executed for at least a certain period of time. Therefore, in game states in which balls are likely to land into the second start port 64b in the "probability variable state" and "time-reduced state," the maximum number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is likely to be reached. In these game states, if a variable effect with a long variable time is selected, balls will frequently land into the second start port 64b after the maximum number of reserved balls for the second special symbol has been reached. Even if a ball does land into the second start port 64b, the chance to win the lottery for the second special symbol will not be obtained. Furthermore, even in the "normal game state," if a variable effect with a long variable time is selected after the maximum number of reserved balls for the first special symbol has been reached, the reserved balls for the first special symbol will not be consumed during the variable effect, and the chance to win the lottery for the first special symbol will not be obtained, even if a ball lands into the first start port 64a during that time. When this happens, the player will determine that they will not gain any gaming value by putting a ball into the first starting hole 64a, and will stop firing balls and discontinue play until the variable effect is exhausted and they are able to acquire reserved balls again. If play is discontinued, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 will decrease, which will have an impact on the business of the gaming parlor.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is therefore configured to select the presentation mode of the variable presentation based on the stop pattern table 202d, which tends to select a short variation time, in a game state in which the maximum number of reserved balls for the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is likely to be reached, or in a number of reserved balls that is close to (or equals) the maximum number of reserved balls. This makes it possible to prevent balls from entering the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b when the maximum number of reserved balls for the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached.

Furthermore, the third reason is that by setting a longer execution time and delaying the end of the variable effect, the variable effect can be maintained for a longer period of time. Specifically, when there are few (or no) reserved balls for the variable effect, the next variable effect cannot be started unless a new ball is placed into either the first start slot 64a or the second start slot 64b within the variable time of the currently executing variable effect, and a demo screen or the like must be displayed on the drum display device 81. If a variable effect is not being performed on the drum display device 81 even though the player is playing by firing a ball, the player will not be able to enjoy the excitement of the jackpot lottery that they are looking for, and will lose interest in the game. Furthermore, if a variable effect is not being performed on the drum display device 81, the player may perceive the pachinko machine 10 as one in which it is difficult for balls to be placed into the first start slot 64a or the second start slot 64b, conclude that it is a machine in which it is difficult to obtain gameplay value, and stop playing with that pachinko machine 10.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is therefore configured to select the presentation mode of the variable presentation based on the stop pattern table 202d, which is likely to select a long variable presentation time when the number of reserved balls for the variable presentation is small. This makes it less likely that a situation will occur in which the variable presentation is not being performed on the drum display device 81, and allows the variable presentation on the drum display device 81 to be maintained in an active state for a long period of time.

Here, the details of the reserved number table 202c will be explained with reference to Figure 29. Figure 29 is a diagram that schematically illustrates the reserved number table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a variable effect is performed based on a ball entering the first start hole 64a or the second start hole 64b, the reserved number table 202c is referenced based on whether the variable effect was successful, the game status at that time, and the total reserved number of variable effects for special chart 1 and special chart 2 at that time, and one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 is selected. The general presentation style of the variable effect is then determined based on one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202c in Figure 29, when a losing result is extracted in the "normal game state" and the total number of reserved balls is "1 to 3", or when a losing result is extracted in the "probability variable state" or "time shortening state" and the total number of reserved balls is "1", table A 202d1 (see Figure 30(a)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

Furthermore, when a losing result is extracted in the "normal game state" and the number of reserved balls is "4 to 8", or when a losing result is extracted in the "probability variable state" or "time shortening state" and the number of reserved balls is "2 to 8", table B 202d2 (see Figure 30(b)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

Furthermore, when a jackpot is won, regardless of the game state (i.e., "normal game state," "probability variable state," or "time-shortened state") and the number of reserved balls (i.e., 1 to 8), table C 202d3 (see Figure 30(c)) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

In other words, if a jackpot is won, stop pattern table 202d (table C 202d3) is selected based solely on the type of jackpot, regardless of the number of balls reserved or the game status at that time. Only if a jackpot is not won (i.e., a miss), stop pattern table 202d (table A 202d1 or table B 202d2) is selected based on the number of balls reserved and the game status at that time.

In addition, even when a jackpot is won, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to differ depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when a jackpot is won and there are a large number of reserved balls, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to select a relatively short fluctuation pattern (for example, a "Super Reach" presentation mode or a "Special Reach" presentation mode in which the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is 5 seconds).

In this case, each presentation mode in which a "reach display" is executed is configured to select a presentation mode in which only the duration of the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is changed from 10 seconds to only 5 seconds. By configuring it in this way, for example, if a variable effect is started when the maximum number of reserved balls for the first special pattern is four, even if the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed for 5 seconds, a "reach display" may occur in that variable effect when the 5-second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends (when it is recognized as a 5-second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element). Therefore, even if a 5-second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed, by configuring it to execute a presentation mode in which a "reach display" other than the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, it is possible to make it unclear at the time the 5-second "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed whether the variable effect will result in a jackpot or a miss.

Now, with reference to Figure 30, each stop pattern table 202d will be described. Figure 30(a) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of Table A 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, Figure 30(b) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of Table B 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, and Figure 30(c) is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of Table C 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in Figure 30(a), in Table A 202d1 of stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is set to "0" to "74", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to "75" to "94", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" presentation mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" presentation mode is set to "98" or "99". Note that in Table A 202d1, no stop pattern selection counter C3 value is assigned to the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is set not to be selected.

Next, as shown in Figure 30(b), in table B 202d2 of stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is set to "0" to "74", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to "75" to "94", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" presentation mode is set to "95" to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" presentation mode is set to "98, 99". Note that in table B 202d2, no stop pattern selection counter C3 value is assigned to the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, and the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is set not to be selected.

In other words, table A 202d1 is set so that the selection rates are 75% for the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, 20% for the "normal reach" presentation mode, 3% for the "super reach" presentation mode, and 2% for the "special reach" presentation mode. Furthermore, table B 202d2 is set so that the selection rates are 75% for the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, 20% for the "normal reach" presentation mode, 3% for the "super reach" presentation mode, and 2% for the "special reach" presentation mode.

Therefore, on table A 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is selected, and on table B 202d2, the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode.

Therefore, it can be said that table A 202d1 is more likely to have a relatively long variable effect time when selected compared to table B 202d2. In other words, table B 202d2 is more likely to have a shorter variable effect time when selected compared to table A 202d1.

The selection rates for the "normal reach" presentation mode, "super reach" presentation mode, and "special reach" presentation mode are set equal for table A 202d1 and table B 202d2.

In this way, when a losing lottery result is extracted, the variable effect presentation mode is selected based on the number of balls reserved for the pending variable effect. For example, when there are many balls reserved for the variable effect, a "non-reach (short)" presentation mode with a short variable effect presentation time is selected. This shortens the execution time of the variable effect when there are many balls reserved for the variable effect, and increases the number of times the variable effect is executed, thereby improving the execution efficiency of the variable effect.

Also, for example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is small, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, which has a longer variable effect time than the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, is selected to ensure time for the balls to enter the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. This allows the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, which has a longer variable effect time than when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected, making it easier to ensure time for the balls to enter the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, and by increasing the possibility of a new start winning occurring while the variable effect is being executed on the drum display device 81, the situation in which the variable effect is being executed can be maintained.

In the first embodiment, when selecting the presentation style for a losing variable presentation, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of balls reserved for the variable presentation is configured to differ, but the presentation style is configured so that substantially the same presentation style is selected when determining the variable presentation based on when a ball enters the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b and when determining the variable presentation based on when the ball enters the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b starts.

Specifically, in the case of a losing variable effect, either table A 202d1 or table B 202d2 is selected based on the number of balls reserved for the variable effect, but the values of the stop pattern counter C3 assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode or the "non-reach (short)" effect mode are the same on table A 202d1 and table B 202d2, and the values of the stop pattern counter C3 assigned to the other effect modes are also set to the same.

In other words, the only difference is whether a "non-reach (long)" presentation mode or a "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is selected based on the number of reserved balls for the variable presentation, so essentially the same presentation mode is selected. Therefore, the presentation mode selected at the time of the start winning and the presentation mode selected at the start of the variable presentation are essentially the same presentation mode, even if the game state changes (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). As a result, even if a pre-reading notice is made based on the presentation mode selected at the time of the start winning, it is possible to execute a presentation in the variable presentation that is the subject of the pre-reading notice that does not cause any discrepancy with the content of the pre-reading notice.

Next, as shown in Figure 30(c), in C table 202d3 of stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" presentation mode is set to "0" to "4", the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" presentation mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" presentation mode is set to "40" to "99". Note that C table 202d3 is the stop pattern table 202d selected in the event of a jackpot, and since a "reach display" always occurs, none of the "non-reach" presentation modes are selected.

In other words, Table C 202d3 is set so that the selection rates for the "Normal Reach" presentation mode are 5%, the "Super Reach" presentation mode are 35%, and the "Special Reach" presentation mode are 60%.

Therefore, when a jackpot is won, the variable effects are selected in the order "Special Reach" > "Super Reach" > "Normal Reach" and when a jackpot is lost, the variable effects are selected in the order "Normal Reach" > "Super Reach" > "Special Reach". Therefore, the probability of a jackpot when each "reach display" appears is configured so that the likelihood of a jackpot display result appearing increases in the order "Special Reach" > "Super Reach" > "Normal Reach". This allows the type of variable effect effect to indicate the player's likelihood of winning, and allows the player to experience the excitement of winning a jackpot depending on the effect of the variable effect executed.

As described above, by determining the presentation mode of the variable effect to be executed based on whether the variable effect is successful, the game status at that time, and the number of balls reserved for the variable effect at that time, it is possible to select a presentation mode that increases the execution efficiency of the variable effect by shortening the execution time of the variable effect and increasing the number of times the variable effect is executed based on the status of the game.

When the number of reserved balls for a variable effect is large (for example, "4") and a "reach display" is selected, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the "high-speed fluctuation" display element for each "reach display" is shortened. Also, when the number of reserved balls for a variable effect is large, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the "slow fluctuation" display element is omitted from each display mode. Furthermore, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the selection rate for each display mode is completely different depending on the number of reserved balls for the variable effect. However, if the selection rate for each display mode differs depending on the number of reserved balls for the variable effect, when a pre-reading notice is made, the number of reserved balls at the time the pre-reading notice is decided to be executed may differ from the number of reserved balls at the time the variable effect that was the target of the pre-reading notice is executed. In such cases, processing is required to maintain consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect, making the processing cumbersome.

Returning to Figure 27, we continue the explanation. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by "1" in sequence within the range of "0 to 9," for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e., "9"). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated each time the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40), described below, is executed, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see Figure 39). Then, when a ball enters the first starting hole 64a, the value is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first holding area, which is one of the first to fourth holding areas provided in the first holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting hole 64a, and in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored. Additionally, when the ball enters the second starting hole 64b, it is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserved area, which is one of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting hole 64b and in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored.

This variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the detailed variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in ROM 202, in the presentation mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and stop pattern selection counter C3. Determining the variation pattern specifically involves determining the variation time of the variation effect. Based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the audio lamp control device 113 and display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the drum display device 81, and also determine whether or not to execute a preview effect and the execution mode of the preview effect.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 selects a rough fluctuation pattern for the fluctuation presentation and determines only the fluctuation time. By configuring it in this way, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 does not need to perform detailed control such as advance lottery required to execute the fluctuation presentation, thereby reducing the MPU 201's processing load related to the fluctuation presentation. In addition, the main control unit 110 does not need to prepare commands for all fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation presentation, which reduces the ROM capacity of the main control unit 110.

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 and display control device 114 determine the detailed variation pattern for the variation presentation based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in selecting the variation presentation. Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 where the gaming state changes from moment to moment, it becomes possible to select or change the content of the variation presentation at any time in response to these changes, allowing appropriate presentations to be executed according to the gaming state.

Here, details of the variation pattern table 202e will be explained with reference to Figures 31 and 32. This pachinko machine 10 is provided with the following variation pattern tables 202e: a loss variation pattern table 202e1 that is used when the first and second special symbols are lost and is common to all game states; and a jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 that is used when the first and second special symbols are jackpots and is common to all game states.

Figure 31 is a diagram that schematically shows an example of a loss variation pattern table 202e1 stored in ROM 202, and Figure 32 is a diagram that schematically shows an example of a jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 stored in ROM 202. As shown in Figures 31 and 32, each variation pattern table 202e1, 202e2 is grouped based on the selected presentation mode.

Specifically, the presentation modes for misses are divided into "E0: Non-reach (Long)," which is referenced when the "Non-reach (Long)" presentation mode is determined; "E1: Non-reach (Short)," which is referenced when the "Non-reach (Short)" presentation mode is determined; "E2: Normal Reach," which is referenced when the "Normal Reach" presentation mode is determined; "E3: Super Reach," which is referenced when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is determined; and "E4: Special Reach," which is referenced when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is determined. Furthermore, the presentation modes for jackpots are divided into "E5: Normal Reach," which is referenced when the "Normal Reach" presentation mode is determined; "E6: Super Reach," which is referenced when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is determined; and "E7: Special Reach," which is referenced when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is determined. Each of these divided groups is then associated with a value of the variation type counter CS1.

In the first embodiment, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a holding area in the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a value that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value), or if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a holding area in the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a value that results in a jackpot (jackpot random number value), i.e., if either case results in a loss, the reserved number table 202c is referenced to select a stop pattern table 202d based on the game status and the number of reserved balls at that time, and a presentation mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, based on the selected presentation mode, a group to reference in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 is determined. In the group (group) of the loss fluctuation pattern table 202e1, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is determined as the fluctuation pattern for the fluctuation effect held in that holding area.

Here, we will explain each variable element that makes up a variable pattern. A variable element makes up part of one variable effect, and one variable effect is made up by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable elements provided are a "high-speed variable" variable element, a "low-speed variable" variable element, a "normal reach" variable element, a "super reach" variable element, a "special reach" variable element, and a "re-variation" variable element.

As mentioned above, the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that scrolls (rotates) at high speed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the content of the third symbol. This "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed for "5 seconds" at the beginning of the variable effect if a "non-reach (short)" presentation mode or the like is selected (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (short)"), and is performed for "10 seconds" at the beginning of the variable effect if a "non-reach (long)" presentation mode or the like is selected (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (long)"). Note that when this "high-speed fluctuation" variable element ends, either the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element described below is started (executed), or the variable effect ends as is.

The "slow fluctuation" variable element is a variable element that begins after the "5-second" or "10-second" "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is executed, and scrolls the third symbol visibly to show whether or not a "reach display" will occur. This "slow fluctuation" variable element is not executed if the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is selected, but if a presentation mode other than the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode (for example, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode) is selected, it is executed "5 seconds" after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element.

In other words, in the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, the "slow fluctuation" variable element is performed, causing the final stopped reel of the drum display device 81 (in the first embodiment, the middle reel CR (see Figure 4)) to slow down and stop, whereas in the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode, after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, each reel LR, CR, RR of the drum display device 81 is configured to stop abruptly (so-called "perfect stop") without going through the "slow fluctuation" variable element. Furthermore, when this "slow fluctuation" variable element ends, the variable presentation is configured to end immediately.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is configured with a fluctuation pattern that includes a "10-second" "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element and a "5-second" "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element. Furthermore, the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is configured with a fluctuation pattern that includes only a "5-second" "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element.

A "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element is a fluctuation element that executes a "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element again when a predetermined stop is provisionally displayed in the above-mentioned "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element. In other words, in the "slow fluctuation" variable element, when the right reel RR comes to a stop, a third symbol with a number "+1" larger than the third symbol stopped and displayed on the left reel LR is displayed on either active line (for example, a third symbol of "7" is displayed on the left reel LR and an "8" is displayed on the right reel RR), and then, when the center reel CR comes to a stop, a third symbol identical to the third symbol stopped and displayed on the left reel LR is displayed (for example, a third symbol of "7" is displayed on the left reel LR and center reel CR and an "8" is displayed on the right reel RR (i.e., a stopped number of "778"). Hereinafter, this combination will be referred to as a "chance symbol"), and the "slow fluctuation" variable element will become a "pseudo fluctuation" variable element, the execution symbol (reserved symbol) displayed in the reserve display section Db will not be consumed, and the fluctuation performance will continue.

This "pseudo fluctuation" variable element, like the "slow fluctuation" variable element, is executed for "5 seconds." In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the "pseudo fluctuation" variable element is executed, a symbol that will always generate a "reach display" (for example, a situation in which the third symbol displayed stopped on the left reel LR and the right reel RR is the same, and the fluctuation of the center reel CR continues; hereinafter referred to as a "reach forming symbol") is displayed, and the variable element develops into a "normal reach" variable element, which will be described later. Note that this "pseudo fluctuation" variable element may also be configured to end the variable presentation by displaying a "miss display" instead of displaying a "reach forming symbol."

Therefore, when a chance symbol is displayed as a variable element of this "pseudo fluctuation" that is equivalent to the variable element of the "slow fluctuation," the variable element of the "fast fluctuation" begins again from that chance symbol, and an effect is executed as if the fluctuation effect had started again.

In the first embodiment, the variable effect is configured to allow a maximum of one "pseudo consecutive" effect to be executed. Note that a single variable effect may be configured to execute the "pseudo variable" variable element multiple times.

The "normal reach" variable element is a variable element that indicates whether or not a jackpot will occur depending on the fluctuation results of the remaining reel CR when the same symbol (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "reach forming symbol") is displayed stopped on the active line of either of the two reels LR or RR that stop first in the "slow fluctuation" variable element. This "normal reach" variable element occurs "5 seconds" after the "slow fluctuation" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of a "normal reach" is executed, the following patterns are available: a pattern in which a "miss display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which a "jackpot display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which the variable element develops into a "super reach", a pattern in which the variable element develops into a "special reach", and a pattern in which a temporary "miss display" is displayed first, followed by the variable element of a "re-variation".

The "Super Reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "miss display" does not stop in the "Normal Reach" variable element and the remaining reel CRs continue to fluctuate, and a predetermined effect (for example, a "battle effect") is performed on the drum display device 81 to show whether or not a jackpot will occur. This "Super Reach" variable element is executed "10 seconds" after the execution of the "Normal Reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the "Super Reach" variable element is executed, three patterns are available: a pattern in which a "Missing Display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which a "Big Win Display" is directly displayed, and a pattern in which a temporary "Missing Display" is first displayed and then a "Re-Variation" variable element is executed.

The "Special Reach" variable element is developed and executed when the "Miss Display" does not stop in the "Normal Reach" variable element and the remaining reel CR continues to fluctuate, and a special effect (for example, a "Competition Effect") different from the above-mentioned predetermined effect is performed on the drum display device 81 to show whether or not a jackpot will occur. This "Special Reach" variable element is performed "20 seconds" after the execution of the "Normal Reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "special reach" is executed, three patterns are available: a pattern in which a "miss display" is directly displayed, a pattern in which a "jackpot display" is directly displayed, and a pattern in which a temporary "miss display" is displayed and then "varies again."

It is configured so that after the variable elements of a "Normal Reach" are executed, they develop into the variable elements of a "Super Reach" or a "Special Reach", but instead of this configuration, when the reach-forming symbol stops after "slow fluctuation", it may be configured so that it develops directly into the variable elements of a "Super Reach" or a "Special Reach" without going through the variable elements of a "Normal Reach". It may also be configured so that the variable elements of a "Special Reach" are executed after the variable elements of a "Super Reach" are executed.

The "re-change" variable element is a variable element that develops and executes after a "miss display" appears during one of the "reach displays," causing a "jackpot display" to appear. This "re-change" variable element occurs "5 seconds" after one of the "reach displays."

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern is provided in which a "jackpot display" appears after the "re-variation" variable element is executed.

In addition, this "re-variation" variable element is configured to occur only when a jackpot game is won. In other words, in the case of a "miss display," the "re-variation" variable element is configured not to be executed. This is because the "re-variation" variable element is a variable element that changes a temporarily stopped "miss display" to one of the "jackpot displays," so if it were to be executed in the case of a "miss display" that has not won a jackpot, a discrepancy in the presentation would occur. Therefore, this "re-variation" variable element is configured to be selected only in the jackpot variable pattern table 202e2 (see Figure 32), and not in the miss variable pattern table 202e1 (see Figure 31).

As shown in Figure 31, in the loss fluctuation pattern table 202e1 that is referenced when the first special symbol and second special symbol are lost, one fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time; hereinafter, it is of course possible to replace "fluctuation pattern" with "fluctuation time") is prepared for "E0: Non-reach (long)": "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation'" with a total fluctuation time of '15 seconds'.

In the example shown in Figure 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern for "E0: Non-reach (long)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation'", and only "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation'" is set to be selectable.

In other words, in any game state, when the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode is selected in the miss variation pattern table 202e1, which is referenced when the first special symbol and second special symbol variation presentation is executed, all possible values (0-9) of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with a "variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + a "variation element of 'slow-speed variation'". In other words, in the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode in the first special symbol and second special symbol variation presentation, the variation pattern always selected is a "variation element of 'high-speed variation (long)' + a "variation element of 'slow-speed variation'".

Next, in the losing fluctuation pattern table 202e1, one fluctuation pattern is prepared for "E1: Non-reach (short)": "Only the fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)'" with a total fluctuation time of "5 seconds."

In the example shown in Figure 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern for "E1: Non-reach (short)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" for "only fluctuation elements of 'high-speed fluctuation (short)'", and it is set so that only "only fluctuation elements of 'high-speed fluctuation (short)'" can be selected.

In other words, in any game state, when the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode is selected in the miss variation pattern table 202e1, which is referenced when the first special symbol and second special symbol variation presentation is executed, "only the 'high-speed variation (short)' variation elements" are associated with all possible values ('0-9') of the variation type counter CS1. In other words, in the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode in the first special symbol and second special symbol variation presentation, "only the 'high-speed variation (short)' variation elements" are always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the losing fluctuation pattern table 202e1, for "E2: normal reach", two selectable fluctuation patterns are provided: "Fluctuation element of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'slow fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'normal reach'" with a total fluctuation time of '20 seconds', and "Fluctuation element of 'high-speed fluctuation (long)' + 'pseudo fluctuation' + 'high-speed fluctuation (short)' + fluctuation element of 'slow fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'normal reach'" with a total fluctuation time of '30 seconds', and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for "E2: Normal Reach" is "0 to 6" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal Reach'", and "7 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal Reach'".

In other words, in any game state, when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected in the miss variation pattern table 202e1, which is referenced when the first special symbol and second special symbol variation presentation is executed, the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation element + 'Slow-speed variation' variation element + 'Normal reach' variation element" is selected 70%, and the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation element + 'Pseudo variation' variation element + 'High-speed variation (short)' variation element + 'Slow-speed variation' variation element + 'Normal reach' variation element" is selected 30% of the time.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" presentation mode selected when a loss occurs, the variation pattern of "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'Slow-speed fluctuation' variable element + 'Normal reach' variable element" is likely to be selected (70% of the time). Furthermore, by configuring the variation pattern of "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'Pseudo fluctuation' variable element + 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' variable element + 'Slow-speed fluctuation' variable element + 'Normal reach' variable element" to also be selected, it is possible to provide gameplay in which a loss can occur from any variation pattern.

Next, in the losing fluctuation pattern table 202e1, for "E3: Super Reach", two selectable fluctuation patterns are provided: "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Super Reach'" with a total fluctuation time of '30 seconds', and "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + 'Pseudo fluctuation' + 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Super Reach'" with a total fluctuation time of '40 seconds', and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for "E3: Super Reach" is "0 to 7" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Super Reach'", and "8, 9" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Super Reach'".

In other words, in any game state, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected in the miss variation pattern table 202e1, which is referenced when the first special symbol and second special symbol variation presentation is executed, the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation element + 'Slow-speed variation' variation element + 'Super Reach' variation element" is selected 80%, and the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation element + 'Pseudo variation' variation element + 'High-speed variation (short)' variation element + 'Slow-speed variation' variation element + 'Super Reach' variation element" is selected 20% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Super Reach" presentation mode selected when a loss occurs, the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element is likely to be selected (80% of the time). Furthermore, by configuring the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Pseudo fluctuation" variable element + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element" to also be selected, it is possible to provide gameplay in which a loss can occur from any of the variation patterns.

Next, in the losing fluctuation pattern table 202e1, for "E4: Special Reach", two selectable fluctuation patterns are provided: "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Special Reach'" with a total fluctuation time of '40 seconds', and "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + 'Pseudo fluctuation' + 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Special Reach'" with a total fluctuation time of '50 seconds', and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for "E4: Special Reach" is "0 to 8" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Special Reach'", and "9" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Special Reach'".

In other words, in any game state, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected in the miss variation pattern table 202e1, which is referenced when the first special symbol and second special symbol variation presentation is executed, the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation element + 'Slow-speed variation' variation element + 'Special Reach' variation element" is selected 90%, and the variation pattern of "'High-speed variation (long)' variation element + 'Pseudo variation' variation element + 'High-speed variation (short)' variation element + 'Slow-speed variation' variation element + 'Special Reach' variation element" is selected 10% of the time.

Therefore, in the "Special Reach" presentation mode selected when a loss occurs, the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Special Reach" variable element is likely to be selected (90% of the time). Furthermore, by configuring the variation pattern of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Pseudo fluctuation" variable element + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Special Reach" variable element" to also be selected, it is possible to provide gameplay in which a loss can occur from any variation pattern.

In addition, the predetermined variation pattern when a miss occurs (for example, the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode and the "non-reach (short)" presentation mode) is determined as the variation pattern by the presentation mode itself, so the variation pattern may be determined without using the variation type counter CS1. Also, although selection is made using only the variation type counter CS1, multiple variation type counters may also be used in combination for selection (selecting whether or not to display a warning, etc.).

Next, referring to Figure 32, the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referenced when a jackpot occurs for the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a holding area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that results in a jackpot, and when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a holding area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value that results in a jackpot, the reserved number table 202c is referenced to select a stop pattern table 202d based on the game status and the number of reserved balls at that time, and a presentation mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, based on the selected presentation mode, a group to be referenced in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined. In that group (group) of jackpot fluctuation pattern tables 202e2, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is determined as the fluctuation pattern for the fluctuation effect held in that holding area.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E5: Normal Reach" has a total fluctuation time of "20 seconds" and includes "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal Reach" fluctuation elements," a total fluctuation time of "25 seconds" and includes "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Normal Reach" fluctuation elements + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation elements," and a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" and includes "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Pseudo-fluctuation" fluctuation elements." Four selectable fluctuation patterns are available: "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Fluctuating element of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + "Fluctuating element of 'Slow fluctuation' + "Normal reach'" fluctuation element"; and "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Fluctuating element of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + "Fluctuating element of 'Slow fluctuation' + "Normal reach'" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation"" with a total fluctuation time of 35 seconds, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 32, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for "E5: Normal Reach" is "0" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal Reach'", "1, 2" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuation element of 'Re-fluctuation'", "3 to 5" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal Reach'", and "6 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Normal Reach' + fluctuation element of 'Re-fluctuation'".

In other words, in any game state, if the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation presentation is executed, the variation pattern of "variation factors of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation factors of 'slow-speed variation' + variation factors of 'normal reach'" is 10%, and the variation pattern of "variation factors of 'high-speed variation (long)' + variation factors of 'slow-speed variation' + variation factors of 'normal reach' + variation factors of 're-variation'" is 10%. The pattern is set to be selected at the following rates: 20%, "Fluctuation factor of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation factor of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + fluctuation factor of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + fluctuation factor of 'Slow fluctuation' + fluctuation factor of 'Normal reach'" 30%, and "Fluctuation factor of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation factor of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + fluctuation factor of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + fluctuation factor of 'Slow fluctuation' + fluctuation factor of 'Normal reach' + fluctuation factor of 'Re-fluctuation'" 40%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" presentation mode selected at the time of a jackpot, the variation pattern "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'pseudo fluctuation' variable element + 'high-speed fluctuation (short)' variable element + 'slow fluctuation' variable element + 'normal reach' variable element + 're-fluctuation' variable element" is likely to be selected (40% of the time). Furthermore, by configuring the variation patterns to be selected, "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'slow fluctuation' variable element + 'normal reach' variable element," "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'slow fluctuation' variable element + 'normal reach' variable element + 're-fluctuation' variable element," and "'High-speed fluctuation (long)' variable element + 'pseudo fluctuation' variable element + 'high-speed fluctuation (short)' variable element + 'slow fluctuation' variable element + 'normal reach' variable element" can be provided, providing gameplay in which a jackpot can be expected from any variation pattern.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E6: Super Reach" has a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" and includes "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Super Reach" fluctuation elements," a total fluctuation time of "35 seconds" and includes "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Slow-speed fluctuation" + "Super Reach" fluctuation elements + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation elements," and a total fluctuation time of "40 seconds" and includes "Fluctuating elements of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Pseudo-fluctuation" fluctuation elements." Four selectable fluctuation patterns are available: "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Fluctuating element of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + "Fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + "Super reach'" fluctuation element"; and "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Fluctuating element of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + "Fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + "Super reach'" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation"" with a total fluctuation time of 45 seconds, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 32, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for "E6: Super Reach" is "0, 1" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Super Reach'", "2 to 4" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Super Reach' + fluctuation element of 'Re-fluctuation'", "5, 6" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Super Reach'", and "7 to 9" for "Fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation element of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + fluctuation element of 'Slow fluctuation' + fluctuation element of 'Super Reach' + fluctuation element of 'Re-fluctuation'".

In other words, in any game state, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected in the special symbol 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation presentation is executed, the variation pattern of "variation factors of 'High-speed variation (long)' + variation factors of 'Slow-speed variation' + variation factors of 'Super Reach'" is 20%, and the variation pattern of "variation factors of 'High-speed variation (long)' + variation factors of 'Slow-speed variation' + variation factors of 'Super Reach' + variation factors of 'Re-variation'" is 40%. The pattern is set to be selected at the following rates: 30%, "Fluctuation factor of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation factor of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + fluctuation factor of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + fluctuation factor of 'Slow fluctuation' + fluctuation factor of 'Super reach'" 20%, and "Fluctuation factor of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuation factor of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + fluctuation factor of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + fluctuation factor of 'Slow fluctuation' + fluctuation factor of 'Super reach' + fluctuation factor of 'Re-fluctuation'" 30%.

Therefore, in the "Super Reach" presentation mode selected at the time of a jackpot, the following fluctuation patterns are likely to be selected (30% of the total): "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element + "Re-fluctuation" variable element, or "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Pseudo fluctuation" variable element + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element. Furthermore, by configuring the system to select each of the fluctuation patterns: "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element, or "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Pseudo fluctuation" variable element + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Super Reach" variable element, it is possible to provide gameplay that allows players to expect a jackpot from any of the fluctuation patterns.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E7: Special Reach" has a total fluctuation time of "40 seconds" and consists of "Fluctuating elements of 'High-Speed Fluctuation (Long)' + "Slow-Speed Fluctuation' + "Special Reach'" fluctuation elements, "Fluctuating elements of 'High-Speed Fluctuation (Long)' + "Slow-Speed Fluctuation' + "Special Reach'" fluctuation elements and "Re-Fluctuation'" fluctuation elements, with a total fluctuation time of "45 seconds" and "Fluctuating elements of 'High-Speed Fluctuation (Long)' + "Pseudo-Fluctuation'" fluctuation elements, with a total fluctuation time of "50 seconds". Four selectable fluctuation patterns are available: "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Fluctuating element of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + "Fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + "Special reach'" fluctuation element"; and "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Fluctuating element of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + "Fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + "Special reach'" fluctuation element + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation element" with a total fluctuation time of 55 seconds, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in Figure 32, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for "E7: Special Reach" is "0 to 2" for "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Special Reach'", "3, 4" for "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Special Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Re-fluctuation'", "5 to 7" for "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Special Reach'", and "8, 9" for "Fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + fluctuating element of 'Pseudo fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'High-speed fluctuation (short)' + fluctuating element of 'Slow-speed fluctuation' + fluctuating element of 'Special Reach' + fluctuating element of 'Re-fluctuation'".

In other words, in any game state, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected in the Special Symbol 1 Jackpot Variation Pattern Table 202e2, which is referenced when the first special symbol variation presentation is executed, the variation pattern of "variation elements of 'High-speed variation (long)' + variable elements of 'Slow-speed variation' + variable elements of 'Special Reach'" is 30%, and the variation pattern of "variation elements of 'High-speed variation (long)' + variable elements of 'Slow-speed variation' + variable elements of 'Special Reach' + variable elements of 'Re-variation'" is 40%. The pattern is set to be selected at the following rates: 20%, "Fluctuating factors of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)' + "Slow fluctuation" + "Special reach" fluctuation elements" at 30%, and "Fluctuating factors of 'High-speed fluctuation (long)' + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)' + "Slow fluctuation" + "Special reach" fluctuation elements + "Re-fluctuation" fluctuation elements" at 20%.

Therefore, in the "Special Reach" presentation mode selected at the time of a jackpot, the following fluctuation patterns are likely to be selected (30% of the total): "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Special Reach" variable element, or "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Pseudo fluctuation" variable element + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Special Reach" variable element. Furthermore, by configuring the system to select each of the fluctuation patterns: "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Special Reach" variable element + "Re-fluctuation" variable element, or "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Pseudo fluctuation" variable element + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" variable element + "Slow-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Special Reach" variable element + "Re-fluctuation" variable element, it is possible to provide gameplay that allows players to expect a jackpot from any of the fluctuation patterns.

In this way, by configuring the game so that a relatively long variation pattern is more likely to be selected when a jackpot is won, the content of the variation effect when a jackpot occurs can be enhanced, increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by configuring the game so that a relatively short variation pattern is more likely to be selected when a jackpot is not won, i.e., when a loss occurs, the content of the variation effect when a loss occurs can be shortened, allowing the variation effect to be consumed efficiently.

Returning to Figure 27, we will continue the explanation. The normal random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of "0 to 99", for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (i.e., "99"). Furthermore, when the normal random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal random number counter C4.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal random number counter C4 (value = "0 to 99"), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 40), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 39).

The value of the regular map hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once per timer interrupt process (see Figure 40)), and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is stored in one of the regular map reserve areas 1 to 4 provided in the regular map reserve ball storage area (not shown) of RAM 203. The data is then shifted sequentially to the regular map reserve ball execution area (not shown) in the order in which it was stored in the regular map reserve ball storage area, and a hit determination is made against the value of the regular map hit random number counter C4 stored in that regular map reserve ball execution area.

The random number value that results in a winning normal symbol is set for each game state by a normal symbol winning random number table (not shown) stored in ROM 202 of main control unit 110 (e.g., 1/100 in a low probability state, 50/100 in a high probability state, etc.), and a win is determined when the value of normal symbol winning counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserve ball execution area (not shown) of RAM 203 matches the random number value that results in a winning set by the normal symbol winning random number table. Then, a normal symbol variable table (not shown) is referenced depending on the game state, and the variable display time for the normal symbol is set (e.g., 30 seconds when the winning support function is not activated, 3 seconds when the winning support function is activated, etc.), and after the variable display time has elapsed, a "○" symbol is displayed lit as the stopping symbol (normal symbol) on the normal symbol display device 83. Thereafter, an electric role release table (not shown) is referenced depending on the game status, and the release time of the normal electric role 64c is set (for example, 0.1 seconds when the winning assistance function is not activated, 5 seconds when the winning assistance function is activated, etc.), and during this release time, the normal electric role 64c is released, during which time the ball can enter the second starting hole 64b.

On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol winning counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding area does not match the value of the random number that results in a win set by the normal symbol winning random number table (not shown), it is determined to be a loss. Then, a normal symbol variable table (not shown) is referenced depending on the game status to set a variable display time, and after the variable display time has elapsed, an "X" symbol is displayed lit as the stopping symbol (normal symbol) on the normal symbol display device 83.

Returning to Figure 26, we will continue our explanation. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in Figure 27, RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the MPU 201's internal registers and return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, input/output (Input/Output, hereafter abbreviated as "I/O") values are stored. RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply unit 115, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including when a power outage occurs; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when power is turned on (including when power is turned on after a power outage has been resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state it was in before power was cut off based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see Figure 39) when power is cut off, and the values written to RAM 203 are restored during the startup processing (see Figure 37) when power is turned on. When power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal of MPU 201 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. When this power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see Figure 44) is immediately executed as power outage processing.

RAM 203 further includes at least a first reserved ball counter 203a, a second reserved ball counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, and a reserved ball execution area 203f.

The first reserved ball counter 203a is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) for the dynamic display of the first special pattern (the variable presentation of the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern displayed on the drum display device 81) up to a maximum of four times, based on a ball entering the first start port 64a (hereinafter, a ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b may be referred to as a "start winning") detected during a timer interrupt process (see Figure 40) that is executed periodically every four milliseconds.

This first reserved ball counter 203a is initially set to "0" by the initial setting process of RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S117 in Figure 37). Then, each time a start winning entry into the first start hole 64a is detected and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special pattern increases, one is added up to the maximum value of "4" (see S303 in Figure 41). On the other hand, the first reserved ball counter 203a is decremented by one each time the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special pattern is executed (see S408 in Figure 42).

The second reserved ball counter 203b, like the first reserved ball counter 203a, is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) for the dynamic display of the second special pattern (the variable display of the third pattern corresponding to the second special pattern displayed on the drum display device 81) up to a maximum of four times based on the start winning at the second start port 64b detected during the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40) which is executed periodically every four milliseconds.

Like the first reserved ball counter 203a, this second reserved ball counter 203b is initially set to "0" by the initial setting process of RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, each time a start winning entry into the second start port 64b is detected and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable effect) of the second special pattern increases, one is added to the counter up to the maximum value of "4" (see S307 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, the second reserved ball counter 203b is decremented by one each time the dynamic display (variable effect) of the second special pattern is executed (see S405 in FIG. 42).

The value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (i.e., the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern) or the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (i.e., the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S310 in Figure 41). This reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the first reserved ball counter 203a or second reserved ball counter 203b is incremented by 1, and includes data regarding the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a and data regarding the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b.

The voice lamp control device 113 can use the reserved ball count command to obtain the actual number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special pattern or the second special pattern reserved in the main control device 110. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to manage the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variable effect) of each special pattern without accessing the main control device 110. Furthermore, by sending a reserved ball count command from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected, even if the reserved ball count for the dynamic display (variable effect) of each special pattern managed by the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual reserved ball count for the dynamic display (variable effect) reserved in the main control device 110 due to noise or other factors, the deviation can be corrected by the next received reserved ball count command.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the main control unit 110 sends a reserved ball count command to the audio lamp control unit 113, the reserved ball count command includes not only the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a or the second reserved ball count counter 203b that has been incremented by 1, but also the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c (see Figure 27) in response to the start winning that triggered the increment of the first reserved ball count counter 203a or the second reserved ball count counter 203b.

In other words, when a start win occurs, the main control unit 110 transmits the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c to the audio lamp control unit 113 via a reserved ball count command.

The audio lamp control device 113 reads ahead the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and change type counter CS1 transmitted by the reserved ball count command before the change effect based on those values is executed, and determines what the change effect will be (whether it will result in a jackpot, what the change time will be, etc.) before the change effect is executed. Based on the results of this read-ahead judgment, it can decide to execute various effects, and determine the effect content and execution time (timing) of the "reserve change notice" that changes the reserved pattern (execution pattern) displayed in the reserve display section Db of the drum display device 81.

It is also possible to configure the system to send a reserved ball count command indicating the number of reserved balls for the variable effect and a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, etc. separately. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, etc., separate from the reserved ball count command, a reserved ball count command can be generated when a ball enters the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, and commands similar to the variable pattern command and stop type command based on the ball entering (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) can be generated and sent to the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command can be easily created by reusing the programs for the variable pattern command and stop type command.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is a memory for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a start winning entry into the first start opening 64a. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has entered the first start opening 64a (start winning entry) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), it obtains the values of counters C1-C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer 203c and stores them in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first reserved ball storage area 203d has four reserve areas (first reserved areas 1-4) so that data corresponding to one start winning entry of the first special pattern (counter values C1-C3 and CS1) can be stored (reserved) up to four times (see FIG. 27).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a memory for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a start winning entry into the second start opening 64b. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has entered the second start opening 64b (start winning entry) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), it obtains the values of counters C1-C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer 203c and stores them in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second reserved ball storage area 203e has four reserve areas (second reserved areas 1-4) so that data corresponding to one start winning entry of the second special pattern (counter values C1-C3 and CS1) can be stored (reserved) up to four times (see FIG. 27).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f is memory for storing data (counter values C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referenced when starting execution, drawing a jackpot for the first or second special symbol during execution, and setting the dynamic display and variable effects of the special symbol display device 37 and drum display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start the execution of the variable effect of the first or second special symbol, the MPU 201 shifts the data corresponding to each start win (counter values C1-C3, CS1) stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e described above, corresponding to one start win, to the reserved ball execution area 203f if data corresponding to a start win for the second special symbol is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, in order to execute processes such as drawing a jackpot for the first or second special symbol, and setting up the dynamic display and variable effect of the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81. On the other hand, if data corresponding to a start win for the second special symbol is not stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e and data corresponding to a start win for the first special symbol is stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the MPU 201 shifts the data corresponding to one start win to the reserved ball execution area 203f. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display (variable effect) for the second special symbol is executed first, and the dynamic display (variable effect) for the first special symbol is executed only if the dynamic display (variable effect) for the second special symbol is not on hold. Note that, in the first embodiment, "shift" refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

Now, referring again to Figure 27, the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described in detail. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and to set the dynamic display and variable effects of the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81.

As described above, the jackpot lottery for the first or second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81, and the variable presentation settings use the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation, and the variable presentation counter CS1 used for determining the variable presentation pattern. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained by the MPU 201 from the counter buffer 203c when a ball enters the first start port 64a (start winning), and the second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained by the MPU 201 from the counter buffer 203c when a ball enters the second start port 64b (start winning).

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is made up of four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4). Each of the four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1 to 4) has a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Furthermore, like the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4). Like the first reserved ball storage area 203d, each of the four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) is provided with a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203e4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1, 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2, 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3, 203e3, and the variable type counter storage areas 203d4, 203e4 are all located together in a single reserved ball storage area 203d, 203e, respectively. However, multiple reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each counter C1 to C3, CS1.

As mentioned above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d stores up to four sets of data (values of each counter C1-C3, CS1) obtained when a ball enters one of the first start ports 64a (start entry). In this case, data is stored in the available areas of the four reserved areas (first reserved areas 1-4) in order of lowest area number (1-4). In other words, the area with the lowest area number stores data corresponding to the oldest start entry into the first start port 64a, and the first reserved area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest start entry into the first start port 64a.

The second reserved ball storage area 203e also stores up to four sets of data (counter values C1-C3, CS1) obtained when a ball enters the second start port 64b (start entry). In this case, data is stored in the available areas of the four reserved areas (second reserved areas 1-4) in order of lowest area number (1-4). In other words, the area with the lowest area number stores data corresponding to the oldest start entry into the second start port 64b, and the second reserved area 1 stores data corresponding to the oldest start entry into the second start port 64b.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f consists of only one area. Similar to the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, this reserved ball execution area 203f is provided with a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203f4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing a variable effect, if data (the values of counters C1-C3 and CS1) is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e, it shifts the data stored in the second reserved first area to each of areas 203f1-203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, when it is time to start executing a variable effect and no data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e but data is stored in the first reserved first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the MPU 201 shifts the data stored in the first reserved first area to each of areas 203f1-203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f.

The data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is then referenced in the fluctuation start process (see Figure 43), and a jackpot lottery is held based on the reference data and the game status, and the fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. The special symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, dynamically displays a picture based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type.

The variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a variation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the drum display device 81 performs a variation performance based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of data shifting will be explained below. When the MPU 201 determines that the timing to start executing the variable effect has arrived, it determines whether data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. If it determines that data is stored in the second reserved first area, it shifts the random number value in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reserved first area to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. Similarly, it shifts the random number value in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reserved first area to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reserved first area to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and the random number value in the variable type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserved first area to the variable type counter storage area 203f4.

When the shifting of data to the reserved ball execution area 203f is complete, the second reserved area 1 becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the data stored (reserved) in each area (2nd to 4th) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e to the area with the area number one smaller (1st to 3rd). Note that in the first embodiment, data shifting is only performed for the second reserved areas (1st to 4th) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e where data is stored (reserved).

Here, we will explain the data shifting performed for each reserved area within the second reserved ball storage area 203e. For example, assume that the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b is "4" when a decision is made to start the variable effect, and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. In this state, when the data in the second reserved area 1 is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f and the second reserved area 1 becomes empty, the MPU 201 shifts the data in the other areas (2nd to 4th) to the area (1st to 3rd) with the area number one smaller. In other words, the data in the second reserved area 2 is shifted to the second reserved area 1, the data in the second reserved area 3 is shifted to the second reserved area 2, and the data in the second reserved area 4 is shifted to the second reserved area 3.

Also, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b is "2" when a decision is made to start the variable effect, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the second reserved area 2 to the second reserved area 1, and ends the data shifting. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the second reserved areas (3rd to 4th) where no data is stored (reserved), which reduces the number of data shifts and the control burden.

It is also possible to configure the system so that each piece of data in the second holding area (2nd to 4th) is shifted to an area with an area number one smaller, regardless of whether or not data is present. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the second holding area (2nd to 4th), making it easier to create programs.

On the other hand, if the MPU 201 determines that no data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e when the timing to start executing the variable effect arrives, it then determines whether data is stored in the first reserved first area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. If the determination indicates that data is stored in the first reserved first area, it shifts the random number value in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved first area to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. Similarly, it shifts the random number value in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reserved first area to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved first area to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and the random number value in the variable type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reserved first area to the variable type counter storage area 203f4.

When the shifting of data to the reserved ball execution area 203f is complete, the first reserved area 1 becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the data stored (reserved) in each area (2nd to 4th) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d to the area with the area number one smaller (1st to 3rd). Note that in the first embodiment, data shifting is performed only for the first reserved areas (1st to 4th) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d where data is stored (reserved).

Here, we will explain the data shifting performed for each reserved area within the first reserved ball storage area 203d. For example, assume that the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a is "4" when a decision is made to start the variable effect, and data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. In this state, when the data in the first reserved area 1 is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f and the first reserved area 1 becomes empty, the MPU 201 shifts the data in the other areas (2nd to 4th) to the area with the area number one smaller (1st to 3rd). In other words, the data in the first reserved area 2 is shifted to the first reserved area 1, the data in the first reserved area 3 is shifted to the first reserved area 2, and the data in the first reserved area 4 is shifted to the first reserved area 3.

Also, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a is "2" when a decision is made to start the variable effect, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the first reserved second area to the first reserved first area, and ends the data shifting. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the first reserved areas (third to fourth) where no data is stored (reserved), which reduces the number of data shifts and the control burden.

It is also possible to configure the system so that each piece of data in the first holding area (second to fourth) is shifted to an area with an area number one smaller, regardless of whether or not data is present. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), making it easier to create programs.

Returning to Figure 26, we will continue the explanation. The input side of the input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208, including switches and sensors for detecting balls that have entered each winning slot 63, 64a, 64b, and 65a and balls guided to the ball discharge path through the outlet 66, a setting key 501 for setting the startup mode when the power is turned on, a setting change switch 502 for updating the probability setting value by pressing it in "setting change mode," and a RAM erase switch 503 for erasing data stored in RAM 203. The output side of the input/output port 205 is also connected to various solenoids 209, including a large winning slot solenoid (not shown), a special symbol display device 37, a normal symbol display device 83, and a normal symbol hold lamp 84. The MPU 201 performs various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208, 502, and 503 and the state of the setting key 501.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as work memory, etc.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area that stores the contents of the MPU 211's internal registers and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 211, as well as a work area (work region) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data even after power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply 115, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 in the event of a power outage or other power outage. When the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see Figure 44) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that this prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

When the main control unit 110 issues a command to launch a ball, the launch control unit 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the ball is launched with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and when the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and balls are launched at approximately 0.6 second intervals with a strength that corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the audio output from the audio output device (such as a speaker, not shown) 226, the output of lights on and off in the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33, indicator lamp 34, confirmation lamp 311, each notification lamp 303a, 305a, front lower LED 414c, front right LED 415c, front left LED 416c, rear upper LED 422c, and rear lower LED 424) 227, and the settings of the display mode of the effects performed by the drum display device 81, such as variable effects and continuous preview effects.

The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as work memory, etc. Details of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 will be described later.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice and lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, display control device 114, voice output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. In the first embodiment, the system is configured so that commands can only be sent in one direction from the main control device 110 to the voice and lamp control device 113, and so that commands cannot be sent from the voice and lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. On the other hand, the voice and lamp control device 113 and display control device 114 are configured so that they can send and receive commands to each other.

The audio and lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame buttons 22, and when the player operates the frame buttons 22, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to change the stage of the effect displayed on the drum display device 81 or change the background image of the "Super Reach" effect mode, etc., and instructs the display control device 114 to have the drum display device 81 execute content based on the pressing of the frame button 22.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio and lamp control device 113 and the drum display device 81, and controls the third symbol variation and continuous preview effects on the drum display device 81 based on commands received from the audio and lamp control device 113.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each component of the pachinko machine 10, and a power outage monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruptions due to power outages and the like. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc., via a power supply path (not shown). In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in 24-volt AC voltage supplied from an external source, generates 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., 5-volt voltage for logic, backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies these 12-volt voltage, 5-volt voltage, and backup voltage as needed to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when power is interrupted due to a power outage or other reason. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and if this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminals of the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing (see Figure 44). The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5-volt voltage, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the 24-volt DC stabilized voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing normally.

Now, with reference to Figure 33, the detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. Figure 33 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113. In addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least the following fixed value data: a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a fluctuation pattern table 222d, a light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, a confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f, and a reel control table 222g.

Of these tables 222a-222g, tables 222a-222d are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, stop pattern table 202d, and fluctuation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110.

The audio lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to perform pre-reading processing based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variation type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 upon a start winning and transmitted by the reserved ball count command, as well as the jackpot random number table 222a, jackpot type table 222b, stop pattern table 222c, and variation pattern table 222d.

This pre-reading process determines what the pending variable effect that was the subject of the pre-reading process will result in (whether it will be a jackpot, whether it will be a "reach display," etc.) before the variable effect is executed, and controls the execution of various effects, as well as the content (and execution time) of the "hold change notice" effect that changes the display mode of the pending pattern displayed in the hold display section Db.

The voice and lamp control device 113 is also configured to draw lots to execute a "setting suggestion effect" that suggests the jackpot probability setting value to the player, and to determine the content (type and timing) of the "setting suggestion effect" based on the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command sent by the main control device 110 and the probability setting value, etc.

The light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to execute and what the first decorative pattern group 421, second decorative pattern group 411, third decorative pattern 412, and fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 and rear light guide plate 420 will be, based on the success or failure of the variable effects, the variable pattern, etc., and the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, which will be described later. Details of this light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e will be described later.

The confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f is a table that is referenced to determine the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 during the execution of the variable effect, based on the success or failure of the variable effect and the value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e, which will be described later. Details of this confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f will be described later.

Furthermore, the reel control table 222g is a table that is referenced to determine the drive patterns of the left reel LR, center reel CR, and right reel RR of the drum display device 81 according to the change pattern of the third symbol change effect and the stopped symbol.

RAM 223 is provided with at least a fluctuation start flag 223a, a sub-first reserved ball count counter 223b, a sub-second reserved ball count counter 223c, a light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, a confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e, a first reserved information storage area 223f, a second reserved information storage area 223g, and an execution information storage area 223h.

The fluctuation start flag 223a is a flag that indicates that a fluctuation effect should be started when it is in the ON state. This fluctuation start flag 223a is initially set to OFF when the power is turned on, and is turned ON when a stop type command output from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1206 in Figure 47). It is then turned OFF when the fluctuation effect is set in the drum display device 81 (see S1402 in Figure 48).

When the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned on, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 performs a fluctuation effect setting process (see S1402 to S1415 in Figure 48) to execute a waiting fluctuation effect if one exists.

The sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110, is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (standby times) for the first special pattern variable effect (dynamic display) performed on the drum display unit 81 (special pattern display unit 37) and is reserved in the main control unit 110.

As mentioned above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on commands (reserved ball command) sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls using the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b.

Specifically, when a ball enters the first starting hole 64a, adding to the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern variable effect and incrementing the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a in the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit 113 receives a reserved ball count command sent from the main control unit 110, and stores the incremented value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control unit 110, which is included in the reserved ball count command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern variable effect reserved in the main control unit 110), in the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223b (see S1211 in Figure 47).

In addition, when the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a is decremented in the main control unit 110, the sound lamp control unit 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command corresponding to the first special symbol variation presentation sent from the main control unit 110, and when setting the mode of the first special symbol variation presentation in the drum display unit 81 in response to receiving these, it decrements (updates) the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223b by 1 (see S1406 in Figure 48). In this way, the sound lamp control unit 113 updates the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223b in accordance with the command sent from the main control unit 110 in conjunction with the update of the first reserved ball count counter 203a, so the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223b can be updated in synchronization with the first reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control unit 110.

The sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c, like the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control unit 110, is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (standby times) for the second special pattern variable effect (dynamic display) performed on the drum display unit 81 (special pattern display unit 37) and is reserved in the main control unit 110.

As mentioned above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on commands sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls using the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c.

Specifically, when a ball enters the second starting hole 64b, adding to the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern variable effect and incrementing the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b in the main control unit 110, the voice lamp control unit 113 receives a reserved ball count command sent from the main control unit 110, and stores the incremented value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control unit 110, which is included in the reserved ball count command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern variable effect reserved in the main control unit 110), in the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223c (see S1211 in Figure 47).

In addition, when the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b is decremented in the main control unit 110, the sound lamp control unit 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command corresponding to the variable presentation of the second special symbol sent from the main control unit 110, and when setting the mode of the variable presentation of the second special symbol in the drum display unit 81 in response to receiving these, it decrements (updates) the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223c by 1 (see S1409 in Figure 48). In this way, the sound lamp control unit 113 updates the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223c in accordance with the command sent from the main control unit 110 in conjunction with the update of the second reserved ball count counter 203b, so the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223c can be updated in synchronization with the second reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control unit 110.

The values of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223b and the sub-second reserved ball counter 223c are used to display the reserved and executed symbols on the drum display device 81. That is, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball count command, it stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the sub-first reserved ball counter 223b or the sub-second reserved ball counter 223c (see S1211 in FIG. 47), or updates the value of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223b or the sub-second reserved ball counter 223c in response to receiving a variation pattern command and a stop type command (see S1406 or S1409 in FIG. 48), and sends a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored or updated values of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223b and the sub-second reserved ball counter 223c.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball count command, it controls the drawing of images so that the reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, i.e., the values of the sub-reserved ball count counter 1 223b and the sub-reserved ball count counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution symbols indicating the variable effect currently being performed, are displayed on the reserved display section Db (see Figure 3) of the drum display device 81.

As described above, the value of the first reserved ball counter 223b changes in synchronization with the first reserved ball counter 203a of the main control unit 110, and the value of the second reserved ball counter 223c changes in synchronization with the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control unit 110. Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the reserved display section Db (see Figure 3) of the drum display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the values of the first reserved ball counter 203a and second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control unit 110. Therefore, the drum display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which variable effects are being held.

The light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is a counter used to draw lots to determine whether the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 will be illuminated.

The value of this light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is initially set to "0" when the power is turned on. Thereafter, during the counter update process of the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1112 in FIG. 46), the value is incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., "0 to 99"), and returns to "0" after reaching its maximum value (e.g., "99" for a counter that can take values from "0 to 99"). The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is updated (e.g., incremented by 1) once each time the main processing loops.

As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives commands (variation pattern command and display type command) related to the variable presentation of the third symbol, it refers to the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e to draw lots to determine whether or not to light up and display the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, depending on the content of the variable presentation (e.g., win/lose, presentation mode, variable elements, etc.) (see Figure 50).

Now, with reference to Figure 34, the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e in the first embodiment will be described in detail. Figure 34 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e stored in the ROM 222. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command from the main control device 110, it references the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e based on the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d at that time, and determines the lighting mode of the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, or the first decorative pattern group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420.

As shown in Figure 34, the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e categorizes the variable effects of each special symbol into "miss" and "jackpot" cases. Each of these groups is then further divided into different effect modes, and values of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d are assigned to the lighting modes of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 on the front light guide plate 410, or the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420.

Specifically, when a variable effect "misses," the lights are divided into groups for the "non-reach" effect mode, the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, and the "special reach" effect mode, which can be selected when the variable effect "misses." Furthermore, when a jackpot occurs, the lights are divided into groups for the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, and the "special reach" effect mode. Within each group, the possible values of the light-guiding pattern lottery counter 223d are associated with each of the illuminated symbols: "bubbles" representing the fourth decorative symbol group 413; "cherry blossoms" representing the second decorative symbol group 411; "sunfish" representing the third decorative symbol 412; "cherry blossoms & sunfish" representing the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412; and "school of fish" representing the first decorative symbol group 421.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the "non-reach" presentation mode when a "miss" occurs is associated with the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d only being "none," in which none of the first decorative symbol group 421, second decorative symbol group 411, third decorative symbol group 412, or fourth decorative symbol group 413 (hereinafter, the first decorative symbol group 421, second decorative symbol group 411, third decorative symbol group 412, and fourth decorative symbol group 413 may be collectively referred to as "each decorative symbol 411, 412, 413, 421") are lit, and no values are assigned to the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d for "bubbles," "cherry blossoms," "sunfish," "cherry blossoms & sunfish," and "school of fish."

In the example shown in Figure 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the illuminated symbols in the "non-reach" presentation mode when a "miss" occurs is "0 to 99" for "none." Note that no values are assigned to "bubbles," "cherry blossoms," "sunfish," "cherry blossoms & sunfish," and "school of fish," and therefore are represented as "-."

In other words, when the "non-reach" presentation mode for a "miss" is selected, the "none" lighting (non-lighting) mode, in which none of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 are lit, is set to be selected 100% of the time, and the lighting modes of "bubbles," "cherry blossoms," "sunfish," "cherry blossoms & sunfish," and "school of fish" are set to be selected 0% of the time.

Therefore, when a "miss" occurs and the "non-reach" effect is selected, the lighting mode for each decorative symbol 411, 412, 413, 421 is set to the "none" lighting (non-lighting) mode (100%), and the other decorative symbols 411, 412, 413, 421 are not lit.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, for the "normal reach" presentation mode when a "miss" occurs, the values of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d are associated with "none," "bubbles," "cherry blossom," and "sunfish," while no values of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d are assigned to "cherry blossom & sunfish" and "school of fish."

In the example shown in Figure 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the illuminated symbols in the "normal reach" presentation mode when a "miss" occurs is "0 to 39" for "none," "40 to 69" for "bubbles," "70 to 89" for "cherry blossoms," and "90 to 99" for "sunfish." Note that since no values are assigned to "cherry blossoms & sunfish" and "school of fish," they are represented as "-."

In other words, when the "Normal Reach" presentation mode is selected for a "Miss", the "None" (unlit) mode is selected 40% of the time, the "Bubbles" lighting mode is selected 30%, the "Cherry Blossom" lighting mode is selected 20%, and the "Sunfish" lighting mode is selected 10%, while the "Cherry Blossom & Sunfish" and "School of Fish" lighting modes are selected 0% of the time.

Therefore, when selecting the lighting mode for each decorative symbol 411, 412, 413, 421 during a "normal reach" performance mode on a "miss," the "none" lighting (non-lighting) mode is most likely to be selected (40%), but "bubbles," "cherry blossoms," or "sunfish" can also be selected.

The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not associated with the "non-reach" presentation mode when a "miss" occurs, and the "normal reach" presentation mode when a "miss" occurs, which will be described later, so that the lighting modes of "Cherry Blossom & Ocean Sunfish" and "School of Fish" are not selected. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when "Cherry Blossom & Ocean Sunfish" or "School of Fish" is lit, it is determined that a "Super Reach" presentation mode or a "Special Reach" presentation mode (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "Super Reach or higher" presentation mode) will be executed in the variable presentation. Therefore, in the "non-reach" presentation mode in which "Super Reach or higher" does not appear, and in the "normal reach" presentation mode, the lighting modes of "Cherry Blossom & Ocean Sunfish" and "School of Fish" are not selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the values of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d are associated with "Bubble," "Cherry Blossom," "Sunfish," "Cherry Blossom & Sunfish," and "School of Fish" for the "Super Reach" presentation mode when a "Miss" occurs, and no value is assigned to the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d for "None."

In the example shown in Figure 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the illuminated symbols in the "Super Reach" presentation mode when a "miss" occurs is "0-39" for "Bubbles," "40-69" for "Cherry Blossoms," "70-89" for "Sunfish," "90-97" for "Cherry Blossoms & Sunfish," and "98,99" for "School of Fish." Note that "None" is not assigned a value, so it is represented as "-."

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected for a "miss," the "bubbles" lighting mode is set to be selected 40%, the "cherry blossoms" lighting mode 30%, the "sunfish" lighting mode 20%, the "cherry blossoms & sunfish" lighting mode 8%, the "school of fish" lighting mode 2%, and the "none" lighting mode (non-lighting) mode 0% of the time.

Therefore, when selecting the lighting mode of each decorative symbol 411, 412, 413, 421 during the "Super Reach" performance mode on a "miss," the "bubble" lighting (non-lighting) mode is most likely to be selected (40%), but "cherry blossom," "sunfish," "cherry blossom & sunfish," or "school of fish" can also be selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the values of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d are associated with "Bubble," "Cherry Blossom," "Sunfish," "Cherry Blossom & Sunfish," and "School of Fish" for the "Special Reach" presentation mode when a "Miss" occurs, and no value is assigned to the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d for "None."

In the example shown in Figure 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the illuminated symbols in the "Special Reach" presentation mode when a "miss" occurs is "0 to 49" for "Bubbles," "50 to 79" for "Cherry Blossoms," "80 to 94" for "Sunfish," "95 to 98" for "Cherry Blossoms & Sunfish," and "99" for "School of Fish." Note that since no value is assigned to "None," it is represented as "-."

In other words, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected for a "miss," the "bubbles" lighting mode is set to be selected 50%, the "cherry blossoms" lighting mode 30%, the "sunfish" lighting mode 15%, the "cherry blossoms & sunfish" lighting mode 4%, the "school of fish" lighting mode 1%, and the "none" lighting (non-lighting) mode 0% of the time.

Therefore, when selecting the lighting mode for each decorative symbol 411, 412, 413, 421 during the "Special Reach" performance mode on a "miss," the "bubble" lighting (non-lighting) mode is most likely to be selected (50%), but "cherry blossom," "sunfish," "cherry blossom & sunfish," or "school of fish" can also be selected.

The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not associated with the "Super Reach" presentation mode and the "Special Reach" presentation mode, so that the "none" lighting mode is not selected. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the "Super Reach or higher" presentation mode is executed, it is determined that some kind of presentation will be executed on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. As a result, when the "Super Reach or higher" presentation mode is executed, some kind of presentation will always be executed on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, and the combination of the "reach display" presentation and the presentation on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 can comprehensively suggest to the player the likelihood of winning in the variable presentation.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, for the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot," the values of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d are associated with "none," "bubbles," "cherry blossom," and "sunfish," just as they are for a "miss," and no values are assigned to the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d for "cherry blossom & sunfish" and "school of fish."

In the example shown in Figure 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the illuminated symbols in the "normal reach" presentation mode upon a "jackpot" is "0-9" for "none," "10-29" for "bubbles," "30-59" for "cherry blossoms," and "60-99" for "sunfish." Note that since no values are assigned to "cherry blossoms & sunfish" and "school of fish," they are represented as "-."

In other words, when the "Normal Reach" presentation mode is selected for a "Big Win," the "None" lighting (non-lighting) mode is set to be selected 10% of the time, the "Bubble" lighting mode 20% of the time, the "Cherry Blossom" lighting mode 30% of the time, and the "Sunfish" lighting mode 40% of the time, while the "Cherry Blossom & Sunfish" and "School of Fish" lighting modes are set to be selected 0% of the time.

Therefore, when selecting the lighting mode for each decorative symbol 411, 412, 413, 421 during the "normal reach" presentation mode upon a "jackpot," the "sunfish" lighting mode is most likely to be selected (40%), but "none," "bubbles," "cherry blossoms," or "sunfish" can also be selected.

The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not associated with the "normal reach" presentation mode during a "jackpot" so that the lighting modes of "Cherry Blossom & Ocean Sunfish" and "School of Fish" are not selected. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when "Cherry Blossom & Ocean Sunfish" or "School of Fish" are lit, it is determined that a "Super Reach" presentation mode or a "Special Reach" presentation mode (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "Super Reach or higher" presentation mode) will be executed in the variable presentation. Therefore, even if a jackpot occurs, the lighting modes of "Cherry Blossom & Ocean Sunfish" and "School of Fish" are not selected in the "normal reach" presentation mode during a "jackpot" in which "Super Reach or higher" does not appear.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, for the "Super Reach" presentation mode when a "jackpot" occurs, the values of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d are associated with "Bubbles," "Cherry Blossoms," "Sunfish," "Cherry Blossoms & Sunfish," and "School of Fish," just as they are when a "miss" occurs, and no value is assigned to the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d for "None."

In the example shown in Figure 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the illuminated symbols in the "Super Reach" presentation mode upon a "jackpot" is "0, 1" for "bubbles," "2-9" for "cherry blossoms," "10-19" for "sunfish," "20-49" for "cherry blossoms & sunfish," and "50-99" for "school of fish." Note that "none" is not assigned a value, so it is represented as "-."

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected for a "jackpot," the "bubbles" lighting mode is set to be selected 2% of the time, the "cherry blossoms" lighting mode 8%, the "sunfish" lighting mode 10%, the "cherry blossoms & sunfish" lighting mode 30%, the "school of fish" lighting mode 50%, and the "none" lighting (non-lighting) mode 0% of the time.

Therefore, when selecting the lighting pattern for each decorative symbol 411, 412, 413, 421 during the "Super Reach" presentation mode upon a "jackpot," the "School of Fish" lighting pattern is most likely to be selected (50%), but "Bubbles," "Cherry Blossom," "Sunfish," or "Cherry Blossom & Sunfish" can also be selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, for the "Special Reach" presentation mode when a "jackpot" occurs, the values of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d are associated with "Bubbles," "Cherry Blossoms," "Sunfish," "Cherry Blossoms & Sunfish," and "School of Fish," just as they are when a "Miss" occurs, and no value is assigned to the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d for "None."

In the example shown in Figure 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the illuminated symbols in the "Special Reach" presentation mode upon a "jackpot" is "0-4" for "bubbles," "5-19" for "cherry blossoms," "20-39" for "sunfish," "40-59" for "cherry blossoms & sunfish," and "60-99" for "school of fish." Note that "none" is not assigned a value, so it is represented as "-."

In other words, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected for a "jackpot," the "bubbles" lighting mode is set to be selected 5% of the time, the "cherry blossoms" lighting mode 15%, the "sunfish" lighting mode 20%, the "cherry blossoms & sunfish" lighting mode 20%, the "school of fish" lighting mode 40%, and the "none" lighting mode (non-lighting) mode 0% of the time.

Therefore, when selecting the lighting pattern for each decorative symbol 411, 412, 413, 421 during the "Special Reach" presentation mode upon a "Big Win," the "School of Fish" lighting pattern is most likely to be selected (40%), but "Bubbles," "Cherry Blossom," "Sunfish," or "Cherry Blossom & Sunfish" can also be selected.

In this way, by combining the "reach display" effect with the effects of the front light guide plate 410 or rear light guide plate 420, it is possible to comprehensively suggest to the player the likelihood of a jackpot in the variable effects, and by executing variable effects on multiple effect devices, it is possible to increase the variety of effects and increase the enjoyment of the game.

Returning to Figure 33, we will continue the explanation. The confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e is a counter used to draw the lighting timing and whether the confirmation lamp 311 will light up during the third symbol variation effect.

The value of this confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e is initially set to "0" when the power is turned on. Thereafter, during the counter update process of the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1112 in Figure 46), the value is incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., "0 to 99"), and returns to "0" after reaching its maximum value (e.g., "99" for a counter that can take values from "0 to 99"). The value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e is updated (e.g., incremented by one) once each time the main processing loops.

As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives commands (variation pattern command and display type command) related to the variable presentation of the third symbol, it refers to the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f to draw lots to determine whether or not the confirmation lamp 311 will light up during the variable presentation and the timing at which it will light up, depending on the content of the variable presentation (e.g., win/lose, presentation mode, variable elements, etc.) (see Figure 49).

Now, with reference to Figure 35, the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f in the first embodiment will be described in detail. Figure 35 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f stored in the ROM 222. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command from the main control device 110, if a "jackpot" occurs in the variation effect, it references the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f based on the value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e at that time to determine the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311. In the first embodiment, if the variation effect is a miss, the confirmation lamp 311 is configured not to light up at any timing, whereas if a jackpot is won in the variation effect, the confirmation lamp 311 is configured to always light up at some timing in the variation effect. Note that there may be a pattern in which the confirmation lamp 311 does not light up even if a jackpot is won.

As shown in Figure 35, the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f categorizes the variable effects of each special symbol into "miss" and "jackpot" cases. Each of these groups is then further divided into different effect types, with values of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e assigned to the following timings: "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation" during the execution of a "high-speed fluctuation" variable element; "from reach formation to before development" during the execution of a "pseudo-fluctuation" variable element or a "low-speed fluctuation" variable element to a "normal reach" variable element; "after development to before re-fluctuation" during the execution of a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element; and "re-fluctuation to confirmation" during the execution of a "re-fluctuation" variable element or when the symbol is confirmed.

Specifically, when a jackpot occurs, the effects are divided into groups for "normal reach" presentation modes, "super reach" presentation modes, and "special reach" presentation modes. Within each group, the possible values of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e are associated with each lighting timing: "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation," "reach formation to before development," "after development to before re-fluctuation," and "re-fluctuation to confirmation." Note that, since the confirmation lamp 311 is configured not to light up when the fluctuation presentation "misses," all possible values of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e are associated with the lighting timing "none" for all presentation modes that can be selected when the "miss" occurs.

In the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f, for the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot", the value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e is associated only with "re-fluctuation to confirmation", and no value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e is assigned to "start of fluctuation to end of high-speed fluctuation", "reach formation to before development", or "after development to before re-fluctuation".

In the example shown in Figure 35, the correspondence between the value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the lighting timing in the "normal reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot" is "0 to 99" for "re-fluctuation to confirmation." Note that no values are assigned to "start of fluctuation to end of high-speed fluctuation," "reach formation to before development," and "after development to before re-fluctuation," so they are represented as "-."

In other words, when the "normal reach" presentation mode is selected for a "jackpot," the lighting timing for "re-change ~ confirmation," which occurs just before the change presentation ends, is set to be selected 100% of the time, and the lighting timing for "start of change ~ end of high-speed change," "reach formation ~ before development," and "after development ~ before re-change," which occur during the change presentation, is set to be selected 0% of the time.

Therefore, when selecting the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 during the "normal reach" presentation mode upon a "jackpot," the "re-change - confirmation" lighting timing is always selected (100%), and the confirmation lamp 311 is set not to light up at any other lighting timing.

In the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the "Super Reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot" is associated with the values of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e, respectively: "From the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation," "Reach formation to before development," "After development to before re-fluctuation," and "Re-fluctuation to confirmation."

In the example shown in Figure 35, the correspondence between the value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the lighting timing in the "Super Reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot" is "0 to 9" for "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation," "10 to 29" for "from reach formation to before development," "30 to 59" for "after development to before re-fluctuation," and "60 to 99" for "re-fluctuation to confirmation."

In other words, when the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected for a "jackpot," the lighting timing is set to be selected 10% of the time from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation, 20% from the formation of a reach to before development, 30% from after development to before re-fluctuation, and 40% from re-fluctuation to confirmation.

Therefore, when selecting the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 during the "Super Reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot," the lighting timing of "re-fluctuating to confirmation," which is the final part of the fluctuation presentation, is most likely to be selected (40%), but it is also possible to select "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation," "from reach formation to before development," or "after development to before re-fluctuating."

In the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the "special reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot" is associated with the values of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e, respectively: "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation," "reach formation to before development," "after development to before re-fluctuation," and "re-fluctuation to confirmation."

In the example shown in Figure 35, the correspondence between the value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the lighting timing in the "Special Reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot" is "0 to 19" for "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation," "20 to 39" for "reach formation to before development," "40 to 69" for "after development to before re-fluctuation," and "70 to 99" for "re-fluctuation to confirmation."

In other words, when the "Special Reach" presentation mode is selected for a "jackpot," the lighting timing is set to be selected 20% of the time from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation, 20% of the time from "reach formation to before development," 30% of the time from "after development to before re-fluctuation," and 30% of the time from "re-fluctuation to confirmation."

Therefore, when selecting the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 during the "Special Reach" presentation mode at the time of a "jackpot," the latter half of the variation presentation, "After development to before re-variation" or "Re-variation to confirmation," is likely to be selected (30%), but the first half of the variation presentation, "From the start of variation to the end of high-speed variation" or "Reach formation to before development," is also more likely to be selected than the "Super Reach" presentation mode.

In this way, when a jackpot is won in the variable presentation, the confirmation lamp 311 lights up at various times to indicate to the player that a jackpot has occurred, creating an element of surprise and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the lottery regarding the lighting of the confirmation lamp 311 and the lottery regarding the lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are conducted separately. Therefore, depending on the results of each lottery, there are possible patterns in which the confirmation lamp 311 lights up and the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 lights up; in which the confirmation lamp 311 and the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 all light up; and in which the confirmation lamp 311 does not light up and the first decorative pattern group 421, the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, or the fourth decorative pattern group 413 lights up. This configuration makes it easier to calculate the expected jackpot probability for each effect, facilitating the design of game specifications.

Returning to Figure 33, we will continue the explanation. The first reserved information storage area 223f is an area for storing information for performing the variable effects of the reserved first special symbol, i.e., the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 related to the variable effects of the first special symbol, which are obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control unit 110 upon a start winning and transmitted by the reserved ball count command.

The voice and lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a variable effect of the first special symbol using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first pending information storage area 223f and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222.

The second reserved information storage area 223g is an area for storing information for performing the variable effects of the reserved second special symbol, i.e., the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 related to the variable effects of the second special symbol, which are obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control unit 110 upon a start winning and transmitted by the reserved ball count command.

The voice and lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the variable effect of the second special symbol using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second pending information storage area 223g and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222.

The execution information storage area 223h is an area for storing information on the variable presentation of the first or second special symbol currently being executed on the drum display device 81, i.e., the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 upon a start winning and transmitted by the reserved ball count command.

When the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 detects that it is time to start executing the variable effect, it shifts the information for executing the variable effect (values of counters C1 to C3, CS1, etc.) stored in the first pending information storage first area of the first pending information storage area 223f or the second pending information storage second area of the second pending information storage area 223g to this execution information storage area 223h in order to execute the settings for the variable effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

Here, the first pending information storage area 223f, the second pending information storage area 223g, and the execution information storage area 223h will be described in detail with reference to Figure 36. Figure 36 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the first pending information storage area 223f, the second pending information storage area 223g, and the execution information storage area 223h.

The first pending information storage area 223f has four areas: first pending information storage areas 1 to 4. Each of the first pending information storage areas 1 to 4 includes at least a jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, a jackpot type counter storage area 223f2 in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223f4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Furthermore, like the first pending information storage area 223f, the second pending information storage area 223g has four areas, second pending information storage areas 1 to 4. Each of the second pending information storage areas 1 to 4 includes at least a jackpot random number counter storage area 223g1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, a jackpot type counter storage area 223g2 in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223g3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223g4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored.

Furthermore, the execution information storage area 223h is provided with at least a jackpot random number counter storage area 223h1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the currently executing first special pattern or second special pattern variable presentation is stored, a jackpot type counter storage area 223h2 in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223h3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variable type counter storage area 223h4 in which the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored.

Specifically, execution information storage area 223h is an area corresponding to the currently executing first or second special symbol variable effect. Furthermore, first pending information storage area 1 is an area corresponding to the first special symbol variable effect that was held first in time among the held first special symbol variable effects, first pending information storage area 2 is an area corresponding to the second-oldest first special symbol variable effect among the held first special symbol variable effects, first pending information storage area 3 is an area corresponding to the third-oldest first special symbol variable effect among the held first special symbol variable effects, and first pending information storage area 4 is an area corresponding to the fourth-oldest first special symbol variable effect among the held first special symbol variable effects. Furthermore, the second reserved information storage first area is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the second special symbol that was reserved first in time among the variable performances of the reserved second special symbol, the second reserved information storage second area is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the second special symbol that was reserved second oldest in time among the variable performances of the reserved second special symbol, the second reserved information storage third area is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the second special symbol that was reserved third oldest in time among the variable performances of the reserved second special symbol, and the second reserved information storage fourth area is an area corresponding to the variable performance of the second special symbol that was reserved fourth oldest in time among the variable performances of the reserved second special symbol.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball count command from the main control device 110, it extracts the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1, as well as the corresponding special symbol, from the reserved ball count command. The voice lamp control device 113 then stores the extracted values of each counter C1-C3 and CS1 in the corresponding jackpot random number counter storage areas 223f1, 223g1, jackpot type counter storage areas 223f2, 223g2, stop pattern selection counter storage areas 223f3, 223g3, and variable type counter storage areas 223f4, 223g4 of the corresponding first reserved information storage areas 1-4 or second reserved information storage areas 1-4 that correspond to the reserved ball count included in the reserved ball count command.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball count command is X (1≦X≦4) and corresponds to the first special symbol, the number of first special symbol variable effects currently reserved is X, and the values of counters C1-C3, CS1 included in the reserved ball count command correspond to the variable effect of the first special symbol that was reserved Xth in time among the variable effects of the reserved first special symbol. Therefore, the values of counters C1-C3, CS1 corresponding to counter storage areas 223f1-223f4 in the first reserved information storage area X are stored. At this time, the main control unit 110 stores the values of counters C1-C3, CS1 included in the reserved ball count command in the first reserved area X of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. In other words, the same values as counters C1-C3, CS1 stored in the first reserved area X of the main control unit 110 are stored in the first reserved information storage area X.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command and a stop type command from the main control device 110 indicating the start of a variation effect, it executes a process to shift the information stored in the first pending information storage area 223f or the second pending information storage area 223g to the execution information storage area 223h. In other words, if there is pending information regarding a second special symbol, the execution of the variation effect of the second special symbol that was temporally reserved first is started, and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage first area corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol that was reserved first are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the currently executing variation effect. On the other hand, if there is no reserved information for the second special symbol and only reserved information for the first special symbol, the variable effect of the first special symbol that was reserved first in time will begin to be executed, and the values of the counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in storage areas 223f1-223f4 of the first reserved information storage first area that correspond to the variable effect of the first reserved first special symbol will be moved to storage areas 223h1-223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h that correspond to the variable effect currently being executed.

In addition, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage first area. The values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage third area are moved to storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage second area, and the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage fourth area are moved to storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage third area.

Furthermore, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage area 1 are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage area 2 are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage area 1. The values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage third area are moved to storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage second area, and the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage fourth area are moved to storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223h will store the same values as the counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main control unit 110. Furthermore, the first reserved information storage areas 1-4 and the second reserved information storage areas 1-4 will store the same values as the counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved areas 1-4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d and the second reserved areas 1-4 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the main control unit 110, respectively. In other words, the sound lamp control unit 113 stores the counters C1-C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable effects of the first special symbol and second special symbol currently being executed and currently being held by the main control unit 110 in the execution information storage area 223h, the first reserved information storage area 223f, and the second reserved information storage area 223g.

When the audio lamp control device 113 performs a look-ahead process (not shown), it determines the number of reserved first and second special symbol variable effects (reserved ball count) from the sub-reserved ball count counter 123b and the sub-reserved ball count counter 123c. Based on the reserved ball count, it then looks ahead and reads the values of counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the areas of the first reserved information storage areas 1-4 and the second reserved information storage areas 1-4 where the first special symbol or second special symbol variable effect is reserved, and determines whether the variable effect will result in a jackpot, the variable effect duration, etc. For example, if the value of sub-1 reserved ball counter 223b is "1" and the value of sub-2 reserved ball counter 223c is "0," the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol variable effect has been 1 and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol variable effect has been 0, so the values of the counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved information storage area are read in advance and a judgment is made. Also, if the value of sub-1 reserved ball counter 223b is "0" and the value of sub-2 reserved ball counter 223c is "4," the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol variable effect has been 0 and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol variable effect has been 4, so the values of the counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved information storage area are read in advance and a judgment is made.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that commands are sent in only one direction, from the main control unit 110 to the sound and lamp control unit 113, and the sound and lamp control unit 113 cannot access the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. In contrast, the sound and lamp control unit 113 has a first pending information storage area 223f and a second pending information storage area 223g, and stores the counters C1-C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable effects of the first and second special symbols reserved by the main control unit 110 in the sound and lamp control unit 113 as well. Therefore, by referencing the counters C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the first pending information storage area 223f and the second pending information storage area 223g, the sound and lamp control unit 113 can execute pre-reading processing. In other words, when a variable effect of the reserved first and/or second special symbols is executed, the result of the variable effect (whether it will result in a jackpot, how long it will last, etc.) can be determined before the variable effect is executed, and the execution of various effects can be determined.

The above-mentioned shifting process in the first pending information storage area 223f or the second pending information storage area 223g, and the execution information storage area 223h moves (shifts) data only for the areas corresponding to the pending variable effects among the first pending information storage areas 1 to 4 and the second pending information storage areas 1 to 4, based on the number of pending balls when the variable pattern command and stop type command were received (the values of the sub-first pending ball count counter 223b and the sub-second pending ball count counter 223c before the update based on the reception of the variable pattern command and stop type command).

For example, suppose the value of the sub-first pending ball count counter 223b before the update when the variation pattern command and stop type command are received is "4," and data is stored in all areas of the first pending information storage area 223f (first pending information storage areas 1 to 4). In this case, the data in the first pending information storage area 1 is shifted to the execution information storage area 223h, the data in the second pending information storage area 2 is shifted to the first pending information storage area 1, the data in the first pending information storage area 3 is shifted to the first pending information storage area 2, and the data in the first pending information storage area 4 is shifted to the first pending information storage area 3.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223b before the update when the variation pattern command and stop type command are received is "2", the data in the first reserved information storage area 1 is shifted to the execution information storage area 223h, and the data in the first reserved information storage area 2 is shifted to the first reserved information storage area 1, completing the data shift. As described above, in this embodiment, data shifting is not performed for the first reserved information storage areas 3 and 4, where no variable effects are reserved, thereby reducing the number of data shifts and the control burden.

In addition, regardless of whether data is present or not, each piece of data in the first pending information storage areas 1-4 or the second pending information storage areas 1-4 may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller (execution information storage area 223h or the first pending information storage areas 1-3 or the second pending information storage areas 1-3). In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in each of the first pending information storage areas 1-4 or the second pending information storage areas 1-4, which makes it easier to create programs.

Referring back to Figure 33, the explanation continues. RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control unit 110 until processing corresponding to those commands is performed.

The command storage area is configured as a ring buffer, and data is read and written using the FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see Figure 47) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command storage area is read out from the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes that command and performs the appropriate processing.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and drum display device 81, and controls the special pattern variation and continuous preview effects on the drum display device 81 based on commands received from the audio lamp control device 113, controls the lighting of various lamps 311, etc. on the lamp display device 227 while the variation effects are being performed, and further controls the audio output from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the progress of the variation effects.

Next, the control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Figures 37 to 44. The processes of the MPU 201 can be broadly divided into start-up processes that are initiated when the power is turned on, main processes that are executed after the start-up processes, timer interrupt processes that are initiated periodically (every 2 millisecond period in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processes that are initiated when a power outage signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal.

Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. This startup process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on.

During this startup process, first, the initial value setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). For example, access permission to RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-controllers (peripheral controllers such as the voice lamp controller 113 and dispensing controller 111) to become operable (S102). Then, access to RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 503 (see Figure 26) provided on the main control unit 110 is turned on (S104). If the result of the determination is that the RAM clear switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether power outage information is stored in RAM 203 (S105). If no information is stored (S105: No), it is possible that processing did not end normally the previous time the power was shut off. In this case, processing proceeds to S116 to initialize RAM 203.

If power outage information is stored in RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S107: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S116.

As will be described later in the processing of S156 in Figure 39, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keywords written in a specified area of RAM 203 are correctly saved.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), power outage information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S107: Yes), the power outage information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in RAM 203 (S108). Next, it is determined whether the setting key 501 is turned on (S109).

If it is determined in the processing of S109 that the setting key 501 is on (S109: Yes), since the RAM erase switch 503 was off and the setting key 501 was on when the power was turned on, the startup mode is set to "setting confirmation mode." Therefore, to start the startup mode in "setting confirmation mode," the probability display device (not shown) first begins displaying the probability setting value (S110), and then it is determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned off (S111), and the "setting confirmation mode" is maintained until the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: No). On the other hand, if the setting key 501 has been turned off (S111: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device is terminated (S112), the "setting confirmation mode" is terminated, and processing proceeds to S113. In addition, if the setting key 501 is not turned on in the processing of S109 (S109: No), the processing of S110 to S112 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S113 in order to start up the startup mode in "normal mode."

In the processing of S113, a setting value command is generated based on the probability setting value and set in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203 (S113), after which an interrupt is permitted (S114). Then, the processing proceeds to the main processing (see Figure 39) described below.

The setting value command set here is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the timer interrupt process described below (see S201 in Figure 40). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this setting value command, it is configured to store (memorize) the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command in a memory for storing probability setting values provided in RAM 223.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S104 that the RAM clear switch 503 is on (S104: Yes), it is determined whether the setting key 501 is on (S115) to determine whether the startup mode should be "RAM clear mode" or "setting change mode."

If it is determined in the processing of S115 that the setting key 501 is not turned on (S115: No), the processing proceeds to S116 to start up the startup mode in "RAM clear mode."

In the processing of S116, initialization processing of RAM 203 (S116, S117) is performed.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized at power-on, regardless of whether settings have been changed, such as when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed when the startup process is executed, RAM initialization processing (S116, S117) is executed. Similarly, if power outage information is not set (S105: No) or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) (S107: No), RAM 203 initialization processing (S116, S117) is executed.

RAM initialization processing (S116, S117), i.e., in "RAM clear mode," the used area of RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S116), and then an initial value is set in RAM 203 (for example, the first reserved ball counter 203a is cleared to "0") (S117). After RAM 203 initialization processing is executed, processing proceeds to S113.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S115 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S115: Yes), a setting change process is performed to change the startup mode to "setting change mode" (S118).

Now, with reference to Figure 38, we will explain the setting change process (S118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Figure 38 is a flowchart showing this setting change process (S118). This setting change process (S118) is executed when the startup mode is "setting change mode," and is a process for accepting and confirming changes (updates) to the probability setting value from hall personnel, etc.

In this setting change process (S118), first, the start of displaying the current probability setting value is set on the probability display device (not shown) (S121), and then processing proceeds to S122. This setting to start displaying the probability setting value causes the probability display device to begin displaying the probability setting value.

The probability setting value displayed here may be fixed to a specific value, rather than the probability setting value that was set before the power was cut off. In other words, when the startup mode switches to "setting change mode," the probability display device may always start displaying a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1," the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "4," which are intermediate values of the probability setting values, or "6," which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. This allows hall staff and others to change the probability setting value from the specific probability setting value, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was cut off.

On the other hand, when the startup mode becomes "setting change mode," the probability display device may begin displaying the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. This allows hall staff and others to change the probability setting value while taking into account the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off.

Furthermore, when the startup mode switches to "setting change mode," the probability display device may begin displaying the probability setting value as "3" if the probability setting value set before the power was cut off is "3" or greater; if the probability setting value set before the power was cut off is less than "3," the display may begin displaying the probability setting value set before the power was cut off. For example, if the probability setting value set before the power was cut off is high, such as "5" or "6," there may be many cases where it is desirable to slightly reduce the probability setting value (e.g., by 1). In such cases, if the probability setting value begins displaying as the probability setting value set before the power was cut off, the following problem arises. That is, the probability setting value is updated by incrementing it by 1 each time the RAM clear switch 503 is turned on; if the RAM clear switch 503 is turned on when the probability setting value is "6," the probability setting value is reset to "1." Therefore, for example, if one wishes to change the probability setting value from "6" to "5," one must repeatedly turn on the RAM clear switch 503 to cycle through the probability setting value almost once. In contrast, if the probability setting value set before the power was turned off is high, by starting to display the probability setting value as "3," it is possible to update the probability setting value while reducing the number of times the RAM clear switch 503 is turned on.

Next, in S122, it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "6" (S122). If it is not within the specified range, i.e., the probability setting value is abnormal (S122: No), the probability setting value is changed to its initial value (S123), and processing proceeds to S124. This initial value may be "1," the minimum value of the probability setting value ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "4," which are intermediate values of the probability setting value, or "6," which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. On the other hand, if the result of S122 is that the probability setting value is determined to be within the range of "1" to "6" (S122: Yes), the probability setting value is normal, so processing S123 is skipped and processing proceeds to S124.

In the process of S124, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 503 is turned on (S124). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 503 is not turned on (S124: No), it is then determined whether the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125).

If it is determined as a result of S125 that the setting change switch 502 is not turned on (S125: No), the process returns to S122. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125: Yes), the probability setting value is updated (S126) and the process returns to S122.

The probability setting value is updated in S126 by adding 1 to the previous probability setting value if it is between "1" and "5", and resetting the probability setting value to "1" if it is "6". The probability setting value updated by S126 is displayed on the probability display device.

The loop processing of S122 → S123 → S124: No → S125 (and S126) → S122 continues until it is determined in S124 that the RAM clear switch 503 has been turned on (S124: Yes). If it is determined in S124 that the RAM clear switch 503 has been turned on (S124: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the probability display device 504 is confirmed as the probability setting value to be used in the upcoming game (S127), and the jackpot random number table 202a is set according to that probability setting value (S128).

After processing S128, it is then determined whether the setting key 501 has been turned off (S129). In processing S129, it may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off if it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from an on state to an off state, or it may be determined that the setting key 501 has been turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in an off state.

As a result of the processing of S129, as long as it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the OFF state (S129: No), the processing of S129 is repeatedly executed. Then, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the OFF state (S129: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device is set to end (S130), and this setting change processing (S118) is terminated.

After the setting change process is completed, the process returns to the startup process (see Figure 37), proceeds to S116, executes RAM203 initialization process (S116, S117), and erases (clears) the data in RAM203. In this way, by having hall staff or the like turn on the RAM erase switch 503 in the process of S124 to confirm the probability setting value, hall staff or the like can be made strongly aware that the data in RAM203 will be erased thereafter.

Furthermore, in the processing of S124, the probability setting value was confirmed by detecting that the RAM erase switch 503 was on, but it may also be configured to confirm the probability setting value by detecting that the setting key 501 is off.

Next, referring to Figure 39, we will explain the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 after the above-mentioned startup processing. Figure 39 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is broadly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

The main processing first determines whether power outage information is stored in RAM 203 (S151). If power outage information is not stored in RAM 203 (S151: No), the power outage monitoring circuit 252 has not output a power outage signal SG1, and the power supply has not been interrupted. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S152, S153).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S152). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (in this embodiment, "9999" and "99"), they are cleared to "0". The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding counter buffers 203c in RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated using the same method as the processing in S207 (see Figure 40) of the timer interrupt processing described below (S153), and the process proceeds to S151.

While this main processing is being executed, the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40), described below, is activated and executed at predetermined intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt processing, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during a jackpot, the opening and closing of the jackpot entry port 65a is controlled, and if a ball passes through the through gate 67, the display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display device 83 is controlled. Furthermore, in the jackpot lottery executed when variable display on the special symbol display device 37 is initiated, the number of jackpot random number values compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether the state is high or low probability. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt processing operation varies depending on the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt processing operation until the execution timing of the next timer interrupt processing operation is not constant, but changes depending on the state of the game at that time.

The above-mentioned S152 and S153 processes, which are part of the main processing, are executed within the remaining time of this timer interrupt processing. In other words, this remaining time is used to repeatedly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, so that the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the regular random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, randomness can be imparted to the updates of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the regular random number counter C4, which use these counters as their initial values for update.

If power outage information is stored in RAM 203 during the processing of S151 (S151: Yes), the power was cut off due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 output a power outage signal SG1, which resulted in the execution of the NMI interrupt processing described later in FIG. 44. Therefore, the processing at the time of power outage from S154 onwards is executed.

In the processing of S154, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S154), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S155). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved (S156), and access to RAM 203 is prohibited (S157), continuing the infinite loop until power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, the checksum value in the backed-up stack area and work area of RAM 203.

Note that S151 is executed at the end of one cycle of S152 and S153, which are performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40). As a result, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, various settings made using the timer interrupt process are completed, and the power outage information is confirmed when the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 have finished updating. Therefore, when recovering from a power outage, processing can be started from S151 after the start-up process is completed. In other words, processing can be started from S151, just as when initialization is performed during the start-up process.

Therefore, during processing at power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 do not need to be saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer; instead, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) during the initial setup process (S101), and processing can begin from S151. As a result, the control burden on the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or going out of control.

Next, with reference to Figure 40, we will explain the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Figure 40 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment.

In this timer interrupt process, external output processing is first executed (S201). In the timer interrupt process and main processing (see FIG. 39), commands or signals to be sent to the payout control device 111, audio lamp control device 113, hall computer (not shown), etc. are generated based on various processes. When a command is generated, it is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203. When a signal is generated, the signal is output to a device corresponding to the signal (for example, an external output terminal board (not shown) for connecting the hall computer and pachinko machine 10). In the external output process of S201, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device), and the signals are output to various devices.

After processing S201, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S202), and then a win process is executed to execute processing when each special symbol is hit (S203).

After S203, next, a normal electric symbol control process is executed (S204), which executes drive control process for the normal electric symbol 64c. Simply put, when the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a variable display of the normal symbol is performed on the normal symbol display device 83, and when the variable display of the normal symbol results in a winning normal symbol (e.g., a "○" symbol) appearing, indicating a winning state, the normal electric symbol 64c is opened for a predetermined time, whereas when a losing normal symbol (e.g., an "X" symbol) appears, the normal electric symbol 64c remains closed.

After processing S204, the process of reading the various winning switches is then executed (S205). That is, the states of the various switches 208 connected to the main control unit 110 are read, and the state of the switches 208 is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Furthermore, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of balls won to be sent to the payout control device 111 is set in a command sending ring buffer provided in RAM 203. As a result, the specified prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S206). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when its counter value reaches its maximum value ("9999" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0". The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when its counter value reaches its maximum value ("99" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0", and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of RAM 203.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, variable type counter CS1, and regular random number counter C4 are updated (S207). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, variable type counter CS1, and regular random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (in the first embodiment, "9999", "99", "99", "9", and "99", respectively), they are cleared to "0". Furthermore, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or regular random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or regular random number counter C4, and that initial value is set for the jackpot random number counter C1 or regular random number counter C4. The updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are then stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of RAM 203.

Next, the start winning process is executed in response to a win in the first start opening 64a or the second start opening 64b (S208). Details of this start winning process (S208) will be described later with reference to Figure 41.

Next, a gate passing process is executed to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S209). If it is determined in this gate passing process (S209) that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the regular symbol hit counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of the regular symbol hit counter C4 is stored in the regular symbol reserved ball storage area (not shown), and the number of reserved variable displays of regular symbols is displayed on the regular symbol reserved lamp 84.

After the gate passing process (S209) is executed, a special symbol change process (S210) is executed, which involves processing to dynamically display the special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 based on the processing content of the start winning process (S208) and setting the change pattern of the third symbol by the drum display device 81. Details of the special symbol change process (S210) will be described later with reference to Figure 42.

Next, based on the processing content of the gate passing process (S209), a judgment is made as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or a miss, and a normal symbol variation process is executed (S211), which is a setting process for displaying a variable normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 83 based on the judgment result. In this normal symbol variation process (S211), the probability of a hit for the normal symbol is set to either a high probability (for example, 9/10) or a low probability (1/10). Then, a variable normal symbol display is performed based on the hit or miss result, and a display result according to the hit or miss result is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83.

After executing the normal map change processing (S211), the launch control processing is executed (S212), and then other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S213), after which the timer interrupt processing ends.

The launch control process (S212) determines whether ball launch is on or off when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the control handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. If ball launch is on, the ball launch signal information is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203 in order to send a ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

In addition, in this embodiment, we have described a case where periodically executed processing is executed by timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40), and counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated in the main processing during the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing. However, some or all of the processing executed by timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed every predetermined time (e.g., every 2 milliseconds) within the main processing. For example, in this embodiment, some or all of the prize ball count signal, payout abnormality signal reading processing (S202), win processing (S203), normal electric control processing (S204), and switch reading processing (S205) executed by timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds within the main processing, rather than by timer interrupt processing.

In this case, a step can be provided in the main processing to determine whether a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed, and the processing to be performed at predetermined intervals can be performed only if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, with the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 being performed regardless of whether the predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is performed during the remaining time of the processing to be performed at predetermined intervals. However, since the time required to perform the processing to be performed at predetermined intervals varies depending on the state of the game, even with this configuration, each counter CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated randomly.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in Figure 41, we will explain the start winning process (S208), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 41 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S208).

The start winning process (S208) determines whether a ball has entered the first start opening 64a or the second start opening 64b, and if a winning has occurred, executes a process to store (reserve) the values of each counter C1-C3, CS1 in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the winning opening 64a, 64b. It also executes a process to transmit the reserved values of each counter C1-C3, CS1 together with the number of reserved balls to the audio lamp control device 113.

In this start winning process (S208), the MPU 201 first determines whether a ball has entered the first start hole 64a (start winning) (S301). Here, the ball entering the first start hole 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see Figure 40) based on the output signal of the special ball entry switch (not shown) that detects a ball entering the first start hole 64a (winning), which was read in the switch reading process (see S205 in Figure 40).

When it is determined that a ball has entered the first start hole 64a (a start win has occurred) (S301: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N1 that are activated for the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special symbol that are reserved in the main control unit 110) is less than the upper limit ("4" in the first embodiment) (S302). Then, even if a ball has entered the first start hole 64a, if the number of reserved balls that are activated N1 is not less than 4 (S302: No), this start win processing (S208) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40).

On the other hand, if the number of activated reserved balls N1 is less than 4 (S302: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1) is incremented by 1 (S303). Then, since the winning ball this time was in the first starting hole 64a corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination for each of the random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S304), and processing proceeds to S309.

If it is determined in the S301 process that the ball did not enter the first starting hole 64a (S301: No), it is then determined whether the ball entered the second starting hole 64b (starting entry) (S305). Here, as with the first starting hole 64a, a ball entering the second starting hole 64b is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see Figure 40) based on the output signal of the special ball entry switch (not shown) that detects a ball entering the second starting hole 64b (entry), which was read in the switch reading process (see S205 in Figure 40).

When it is determined that a ball has entered the second start hole 64b (a start hole has occurred) (S305: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of reserved balls N2 for the dynamic display (variable effect) of the second special symbol held in the main control unit 110) is less than the upper limit ("4" in the first embodiment) (S306). If there is no ball entering the second start hole 64b (S305: No), or if there is a ball entering the second start hole 64b but the number of reserved balls N2 is not less than 4 (S306: No), this start hole process (S208) ends and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40).

On the other hand, if the number of activated reserved balls N2 is less than 4 (S306: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (number of activated reserved balls N2) is incremented by 1 (S307). Then, since the winning bid was in the second starting hole 64b corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination for the random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S308), and processing proceeds to S309.

In the processing of S309, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3 and variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203c (see Figure 27), and if the first reserved ball storage area 203d is specified as the storage destination, among the first reserved areas 1 to 4 or second reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or second reserved ball storage area 203e set as the storage destination in S304 or S308, the values are respectively reserved (stored) in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 and variation type counter storage area 203d4 of the areas corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 203a (S309). Furthermore, if the second reserved ball storage area 203e is specified as the storage destination, the balls are reserved (stored) in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1, jackpot type counter storage area 203e2, stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3, and variable type counter storage area 203e4, which correspond to the value indicated by the second reserved ball count counter 203b (S309).

Specifically, for example, in the processing of S304 based on a winning entry into the first starting hole 64a, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination. Furthermore, if the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition in the processing of S303 is "1," the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area. Furthermore, if the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "2," the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area. If the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "3," the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area. If the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "4," the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved area.

For example, in the process of S308 based on a winning entry into the second starting hole 64b, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination, and if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition in the process of S307 is "1," the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved area 1. Also, if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "2," the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved area 2; if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "3," the values are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved area 3; and if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "4," the values are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved area 4.

Next, a reserved ball count command containing the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a or the second reserved ball counter 203b (operated reserved ball count N1 or N2) after addition by processing in S303 or S307, and the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1 stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e by processing in S309, is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203 (S310) in order to be sent to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the reserved ball count command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output processing of the timer interrupt processing that is executed next (see S201 in Figure 40). When processing in S310 is completed, this start-up winning processing (S208) is terminated and processing returns to the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40).

In addition, the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball count command in the processing of S310 may be the values read from the counter buffer 203c in the processing of S309, or the values stored (reserved) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e in the processing of S309 may be read.

Furthermore, in the processing of S301 and S305, if a ball simultaneously enters the first starting hole 64a and the second starting hole 64b, the processing for the ball entering the first starting hole 64a may be executed first, the processing for the ball entering the second starting hole 64b may be awaited, and the processing for the ball entering the second starting hole 64b may be executed in the starting winning processing (S208) in the next timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40).

Next, referring to Figure 42, we will explain the special chart change processing (S210), which is one process of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Figure 42 is a flowchart showing this special chart change processing (S210).

This special symbol change processing (S210) controls the dynamic display of the first special symbol and second special symbol on the special symbol display device 37, as well as the change presentation performed on the drum display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process (S210), the MPU 201 first determines whether either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is currently in a jackpot (S401). The jackpot period includes the jackpot game displayed on the drum display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of a jackpot, the predetermined period before the jackpot game begins (i.e., the jackpot opening), and the predetermined period after the jackpot game ends (i.e., the jackpot ending). If the determination in S401 indicates that either special symbol is in a jackpot (S401: Yes), the special symbol variation process (S210) ends and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

If it is determined in the processing of S401 that a jackpot is not occurring (S401: No), it is next determined whether the display mode of the special pattern display device 37 is in a dynamic display state (S402). If the display mode of the special pattern display device 37 is not in a dynamic display state (S402: No), it is then determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the dynamic display on the special pattern display device 37 stopped (S403). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the dynamic display stopped (S403: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40). As a result, the stopped patterns in the dynamic display (variable effect) are displayed on the special pattern display device 37 and the drum display device 81 for only the predetermined time, allowing the player to view the stopped patterns.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S403, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the dynamic display stopped (S403: Yes), a determination is made as to whether the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of activated reserved balls N2 for the dynamic display (variable effect) for the second special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is greater than "0" (S404). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (number of activated reserved balls N2) is not "0" (S404: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the dynamic display (variable effect) for the second special pattern, and first the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (number of activated reserved balls N2) is decremented by 1 (S405). This is because the execution of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variable effect) for the second special pattern is started by the variation start processing (S410) described below, and the number of reserved balls for the second special pattern is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S406). This data shift process (S406) shifts the data stored in the second reserved areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved ball storage area 203e sequentially toward the reserved ball execution area 203f, shifting the data in each area in the following order: second reserved area 1 → reserved ball execution area 203f, second reserved area 2 → second reserved area 1, second reserved area 3 → second reserved area 2, and second reserved area 4 → second reserved area 3.

On the other hand, if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (number of activated reserved balls N2) is determined to be "0" in the processing of S404 (S404: No), then it is determined whether the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1 for the dynamic display (variable effect) for the first special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is greater than "0" (S407). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1) is not "0" (S407: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the dynamic display (variable effect) for the first special pattern, and first the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1) is decremented by 1 (S408). This is because the execution of one of the dynamic displays (variable effects) for the reserved first special pattern is started by the variation start processing (S410) described below, and the number of reserved balls is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S409). This data shift process (S409) shifts the data stored in the first reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d sequentially toward the reserved ball execution area 203f, shifting the data in each area in the following order: first reserved area 1 → reserved ball execution area 203f, first reserved area 2 → first reserved area 1, first reserved area 3 → first reserved area 2, and first reserved area 4 → first reserved area 3.

After the data shift process of S406 or S409, a fluctuation start process is executed for the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift process (S410), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see Figure 40). The fluctuation start process (S410) will be described later with reference to Figure 43.

In the processing of S407, if it is determined that the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of activated reserved balls N1) is "0" (S407: No), it is determined whether a demo effect is being performed on the drum display device 81, etc., i.e., whether a demo is in progress (S411). In this determination processing, after a demo command is sent to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the period until it is determined that either the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a or the second reserved ball counter 203b (number of activated reserved balls N1 or number of activated reserved balls N2) is greater than "0" is determined to be the period during which a demo is in progress.

If it is determined that a demo is not in progress (S411: No), a demo command to be sent to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S412), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). On the other hand, if it is determined that a demo is in progress (S411: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). The demo command set in the process of S412 is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the timer interrupt process that is executed next (see S201 in FIG. 40).

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives a demo command, it sends a display demo command to the display control device 114, and based on the reception of the display demo command, the display control device 114 controls the drum display device 81, etc. to display a demo performance.

As mentioned above, the demo command is set when there are no reserved balls when a predetermined time has passed since the fluctuation stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation effect does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since the fluctuation stopped, a demo effect will be displayed on the drum display device 81.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S411 that a demo is not in progress (S411: No), a further process may be executed to determine whether a second predetermined time longer than the aforementioned predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped, and if the second predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped, the process of S412 may be executed to set a demo command. In this way, if there are no reserved balls after the fluctuation stopped, the stopped symbols of the stopped fluctuation effect can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demo effect.

In the processing of S402, if it is determined that the display mode of the special pattern display device 37 is in dynamic display mode (S402: Yes), it is determined whether the dynamic display time (variation time) has elapsed (S413). The display time during dynamic display of the special pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and if this dynamic display time (variation time) has not elapsed (S413: No), the display of the special pattern display device 37 is updated (S414), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40).

In the first embodiment, the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode in which, for example, the special LED group 37b (i.e., the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2) corresponding to the changing special symbol lights up or goes out in a predetermined lighting pattern from the start of dynamic display until the change time has elapsed.

On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variation time) for the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S413: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol is set for the special symbol display device 37 (S415). The stopped symbol is set in advance by the variation start process (S410), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. In the variation start process (S410), it is determined whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the process of S406 or S409, and if a jackpot has occurred, the symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

In the first embodiment, if the result is a miss, only the leftmost LED is lit, and if the result is a jackpot, each LED group is lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type (category) of the jackpot.

Once the display mode of the special pattern display device 37 corresponding to the stopped pattern is set in the processing of S415, a confirmation command is set (S416) to confirm and display the stopped pattern of the variable effect on the drum display device 81 in synchronization with the display of the special LED group 37b on the special pattern display device 37, and processing proceeds to S417. The confirmation command is a command used to confirm and display the variable effect currently being executed on the drum display device 81.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it sends a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display confirmation command, the display control device 114 is configured to stop the variable presentation of the third symbol on the drum display device 81 and display the stopped symbol as a confirmed symbol.

In the processing of S417, to determine whether or not the "time-saving state" is in effect, it is determined whether or not the value of a time-saving counter (not shown) provided in RAM 203 is greater than "0" (S417).

In the processing of S417, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (S417: Yes), the "time-saving state" is in effect, and one dynamic display (variation effect) of one of the special symbols has been completed in that state. Therefore, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (S418), this special symbol variation processing (S210) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40).

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is "0" in the processing of S417 (S417: No), the game is not in the "time-saving state" but in the "normal game state" or "probability fluctuation state," so the processing of S418 is skipped, this special chart fluctuation processing (S210) is terminated, and the program returns to the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 40).

Next, referring to Figure 43, we will explain the variation start process (S410), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Figure 43 is a flowchart showing the variation start process (S410). This variation start process (S410) draws a lottery for a jackpot or loss (jackpot lottery) depending on the game status based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f depending on the game status, and determines the dynamic display and dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of the variation effects performed by the special symbol display device 37 and drum display device 81.

In the fluctuation start process (S410), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the "probability fluctuation state" (S501). If it is determined that the gaming state is not in the "probability fluctuation state" (S501: No), the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "time-shortened state," and the jackpot probability for the special symbol is in a low probability state, so the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state (see Figure 28(a)) is set (S502), and processing proceeds to S504. On the other hand, if it is determined that the gaming state is in the "probability fluctuation state" (S451: Yes), the jackpot probability for the special symbol is in a high probability state, so the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S503), and processing proceeds to S504.

In the processing of S504, a jackpot lottery (win/lose determination) process is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a set in S502 or S503 (S504).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not a jackpot has occurred is determined by referencing the jackpot random number table 202a, which is set based on the probability setting value, and based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the current gaming state (mode). As described above, when the gaming state (mode) available to the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal low-probability state ("normal gaming state" or "time-shortened state"), the jackpot random number table 202a specifies the jackpot random number value so that the jackpot probability is 50/10,000 for a setting value of "1" and 60/10,000 for a setting value of "6." Furthermore, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state ("variable probability state"), the jackpot random number table 202a specifies a jackpot random number value such that the jackpot probability is 500/10,000 for a setting value of "1" and 600/10,000 for a setting value of "6."

In S504, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number values specified in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, a jackpot is determined to have occurred. If the result of S504 is that a jackpot has occurred (S504: Yes), the display mode for the jackpot is then set based on the jackpot type table 202b2 (see Figure 28(b)) and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f (S505).

In this process, the jackpot type table 202b determines the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. This determines whether the jackpot type is a "10R probability jackpot," in which, after a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, the player transitions to a "probability variable state" in which the special symbol is in a high probability state and the winning support function continues until the next jackpot; a "5R probability jackpot," in which, after a jackpot with a maximum of 5 rounds, the special symbol is in a high probability state and the winning support function continues until the next jackpot; or a "10R normal jackpot," in which, after a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, the special symbol is in a low probability state but the winning support function remains active until the special symbol has changed 100 times. The display mode (display mode of the special LED group 37b) of the special symbol display device 37 at the time of a jackpot is then set based on the determined jackpot type.

Specifically, the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is stored in a shift source buffer (not shown) in the reserved ball execution area 203f to determine whether it is data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d or data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e. If the data is shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the jackpot type is determined from the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot type table 202b. Also, if the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the jackpot type is determined based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot type table 202b.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined (S506), and processing proceeds to S509. Specifically, the special symbol display device 37 and drum display device 81 select a presentation mode based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of a jackpot and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, and from the selected presentation mode, the dynamic time (fluctuating time) of the dynamic display (fluctuating presentation) is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of this jackpot, the stop pattern table 202d (see Figure 30) to be used is first selected depending on the stop type of the jackpot.

Specifically, in the processing of S457, a presentation mode corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d provided for jackpots. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected presentation mode, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined variation pattern and variation time.

On the other hand, if the processing of S504 determines that the result is not a jackpot (S504: No), the display mode for a loss is set (S507). In the processing of S507, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the loss symbol, and one of the following presentation modes is set as the presentation mode to be displayed on the drum display device 81 based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a and/or the second reserved ball number counter 203b, and the current game state: "Non-reach (shortened)" presentation mode, "Non-reach (normal)" presentation mode, "Normal Reach" presentation mode, "Super Reach" presentation mode, or "Special Reach" presentation mode. In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 value corresponding to each presentation mode differs depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "normal game state," "probability variable state," or "time shortened state."

Next, the fluctuation pattern in the event of a loss is determined (S508), and processing proceeds to S509. In S508, the fluctuation time until the special symbol display device 37 and drum display device 81 stop and display a losing symbol is determined. Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (presentation mode) in the event of a loss determined in S507, a fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the predetermined fluctuation pattern and fluctuation time.

In this way, the process for setting the presentation mode and variation pattern when a jackpot occurs and the process for setting the presentation mode and variation pattern when a loss occurs are determined and determined by the same determination program using the same random number values C3 and CS1, making it possible to standardize the program and reduce development man-hours.

In the processing of S509, based on the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined by the processing of S506 and S508, a fluctuation pattern command is set that notifies the display control device 114 of the fluctuation time corresponding to that fluctuation pattern via the audio lamp control device 113 (S509). Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery is won and the jackpot is a "10R probability variable jackpot," and the "25-second" "Super Reach" fluctuation pattern is selected, a fluctuation pattern command indicating a jackpot, a "10R probability variable jackpot," and a "25-second" "Super Reach" is set. Also, if the jackpot lottery is lost and the "25-second" "Super Reach" fluctuation pattern was selected, a fluctuation pattern command indicating a loss and a "25-second" "Super Reach" is set.

In this way, even if the variable effect has the same variable time, by setting the correct or incorrect state of the variable effect and the general details of the variable pattern in the variable pattern command, the audio lamp control device 113 can grasp the details of the variable effect, including whether it is correct or incorrect, and the variable time, and can determine the detailed variable effect pattern based on this information.

In addition, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S505 or S507 via the voice lamp control device 113 (S510), and the process returns to the special chart change processing (see Figure 42).

Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot is a "10R probability jackpot," a stop type command indicating a "10R probability jackpot" is set without specifying the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, a "7" symbol, etc.). Also, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot is a "10R normal jackpot," a stop type command indicating a "10R normal jackpot" is set without specifying the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, a "4" symbol, etc.).

On the other hand, if a jackpot is not won and the "Super Reach" presentation mode is selected, a stop type command is set indicating that a "Super Reach" presentation mode will occur when a miss occurs, without specifying the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "787"). Also, if a jackpot is not won and the "Normal Reach" presentation mode is selected, a stop type command is set indicating that a "Normal Reach" presentation mode will occur when a miss occurs, without specifying the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "737"). Also, if a jackpot is not won and the "Non-Reach" presentation mode is selected, a stop type command is set indicating that a "Non-Reach" presentation mode will occur when a miss occurs, without specifying the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "258").

In this way, by setting a general stop type based on whether the variable effect is successful or not in the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) can grasp the stop type based on whether it is successful or not, and based on this information, can determine the detailed stop result of the variable effect.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203, and are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the next timer interrupt process (see S201 in Figure 40). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command or stop type command, it generates a display fluctuation pattern command or display type command based on the received command and transmits it to the display control device 114.

Next, referring to Figure 44, we will explain the NMI interrupt processing executed by the main control unit 110 in the event of a power outage or other problem. Figure 44 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110.

NMI interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. This NMI interrupt processing causes power outage information to be stored in RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The MPU 201 then interrupts the ongoing control and starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power outage information in RAM 203 as the power outage information setting (S601), and terminates the NMI interrupt processing.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in RAM 213. In other words, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, causing the MPU 211 to interrupt the control currently being executed and start the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, with reference to Figures 45 to 50, we will explain the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. The processes of the MPU 221 can be broadly divided into start-up processes (see Figure 45) that are activated when the power is turned on, and main processes (see Figure 46) that are executed after the start-up processes.

First, referring to Figure 45, we will explain the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice and lamp control device 113. Figure 45 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is initiated when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, the initial setting process associated with power-on is first executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was initiated during the power-off processing of S1116 (see FIG. 46) due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 46, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1113 in FIG. 46), it executes the power-off processing of S1116. Before executing this power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is set on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is set off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S1116 is currently being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1002: No), this startup process was initiated after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing of S1116 was completed, or after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in RAM 223 has been corrupted (S1003).

Checking for data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" was written to a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in that specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004, where initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

If this startup process is initiated after the power supply has been completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because RAM 223's memory is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that RAM 223 data has been corrupted (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, if this startup process is initiated after a momentary power outage has occurred and the power-off process of S1116 has been completed, or if it is initiated after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 is normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

Furthermore, if the power-off processing in progress flag is on in S1002 (S1002: Yes), this startup process was initiated after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing in S1116 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, control cannot continue in this case, so the process proceeds to S1004 and initialization of RAM 223 begins.

In the processing of S1004, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S1004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to "0".

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written to a specific area of RAM 223 to set RAM corruption check data (S1006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written to this specific area, it is possible to check whether data corruption has occurred in RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of RAM 223 (S1005: No), an abnormality in RAM 223 is reported (S1007), and an infinite loop occurs until power is cut off. The abnormality in RAM 223 is reported by the indicator lamp 34. The abnormality in RAM 223 may be reported by sound output from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the drum display device 81, etc.

In S1008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 46). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1116 is executed. Therefore, the process of S1008 will be reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process was started after a momentary power outage and after the power-off process of S1116 had been executed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the working area of RAM 223 is cleared (S1009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, initial values are set in RAM 223 (S1010), interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012. Note that the working area of RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands, etc. received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, if the power-off flag is off and S1008 is reached, the process proceeds from S1004 to S1006 to S1008 because the current startup process was initiated after the power was completely shut off, or if the process was initiated because only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which clears the working area of RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1010. After setting the initial values of RAM 223 (S1010), interrupt permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to S1012.

The clearing process of S1009 is skipped because when the process proceeds from S1004 to S1006 and then to S1008, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1004, and if only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the startup process is initiated, the data in the working area of RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, allowing control of the voice lamp control device 113 to continue.

In the processing of S1012, it is determined whether or not a setting value command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1012), and the processing of S1012 is repeatedly executed and waits until the setting value command is received (S1012: No). Then, if a setting value command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1012: Yes), the probability setting value indicated by the setting value command is stored in RAM 223, and the processing proceeds to the main processing (see Figure 46).

In this way, during the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113, by waiting to transition to the main process (see FIG. 46) until it receives a setting value command generated at the end of the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 37), the voice lamp control device 113 can reliably grasp the probability setting value set by the main control device 110 and execute the main process and subsequent processes based on that probability setting value. Furthermore, if a setting value command is not received from the main control device 110, the end of the startup process of the main control device 110 has not been reached and the startup process of the main control device 110 has not ended normally, so the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 does not end normally and does not transition to the main process. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the voice lamp control device 113 to determine whether the startup process of the main control device 110 has been executed normally, and it is possible to prevent the voice lamp control device 113 from running out of control when the main control device 110 has not started up normally.

In the process of S1012, the process waits until a setting value command is received from the main control unit 110. In this case, if a momentary power outage (a so-called instantaneous power outage) causes only the voice lamp control unit 113 to shut off power while the main control unit 110 continues to remain powered on, the voice lamp control unit 113 may repeatedly execute the process of S1012, potentially preventing it from returning to normal control. Therefore, in the process of S1012, for example, if no setting value command is received from the main control unit 110 for a predetermined period of time, the voice lamp control unit 113 may be configured to start up in a safe mode in which control related to setting values is not executed and other control is initiated.

Next, referring to Figure 46, we will explain the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice and lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice and lamp control device 113. Figure 46 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

When the main processing is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the last time the processing of S1101 was executed (S1101). If 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S1101: No), processing of S1102 to S1109 is not executed and processing proceeds to S1110. The reason for determining whether or not 1 millisecond has passed in processing of S1101 is that while S1102 to S1109 do not need to be executed in short cycles (within 1 millisecond), the variable presentation processing of S1110 and the command determination processing of S1111 are processes that are preferably executed in short cycles. Specifically, by executing processing of S1111 in short cycles, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control unit 110 from being missed, and by executing processing of S1110 in short cycles, it is possible to perform variable presentation settings without delay based on the commands received by the command determination processing.

If it is determined in S1101 that one millisecond or more has passed since the last time S1101 was executed (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to S1102. Note that if S1101 is executed for the first time since the startup process shown in FIG. 45, the process proceeds directly to S1102.

In S1102, the various commands set by S1103 to S1112 are sent to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 is set, and the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the lamp edited in S1107 (described below) (S1103). After that, a power-on notification process is executed (S1104). The power-on notification process notifies the user that power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) when power is turned on. This notification is made by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Alternatively, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the user that power has been supplied on the screen of the drum display device 81. Note that if the power is not being turned on, the power-on notification process is not made and the process proceeds to S1105.

Next, in the processing of S1105, a jackpot effect process is performed to execute the effect related to the jackpot set by the command determination processing of S1111 described below (S1105), and the processing proceeds to S1106.

Next, in the processing of S1106, the frame button input monitoring and effect processing is executed (S1106). This frame button input monitoring and effect processing monitors input to determine whether the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the processing, and sets up a corresponding effect when input to the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this processing, when operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

In addition, if the frame button 22 is pressed during a period when a variable effect has not yet been executed or during the period of a "high-speed variable" variable element, a stage change process is performed, and a stage change command is set for the display control device 114 instead of the frame button operation command. By including information regarding the presentation mode corresponding to the changed stage in this stage change command, the display control device 114 performs processing to change the presentation mode to one that corresponds to the stage being executed on the drum display device 81. In addition, if a preview character appears at the start of a variable effect, pressing the frame button 22 can display the expected value of a jackpot due to this variation, or pressing the frame button 22 during a "reach display" can change the presentation to one that creates a sense of anticipation for a jackpot, or the frame button 22 can be used as a decision button to select one of multiple reach effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1106 is omitted (skipped).

Once the frame button input monitoring and performance process (S1106) is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1107), followed by the sound editing and output process (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29-33, the lighting patterns of the front light guide plate 410 and rear light guide plate 420, and the lighting process of the confirmation lamp 311 are set to correspond to the display on the drum display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display on the drum display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to these settings.

After processing S1108, the LCD display performance execution management process is executed (S1109), and processing proceeds to S1110. In the LCD display performance execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable performance performed on the drum display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in this LCD display performance execution monitoring process, and the sound editing and output process of S1108 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable performance performed on the drum display device 81.

In the processing of S1110, in order to display a variable effect on the drum display device 81, a variable effect processing is executed, which is processing for starting a variable effect based on the variable effect pattern command and stop type command received from the main control device 110. Details of this variable effect processing will be described later with reference to Figure 48. After the variable effect processing, a command determination processing is executed (S1111) in which processing is performed according to the command received from the main control device 110, and the process moves to S1112. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to Figure 47.

In S1112, a counter update process is executed to update various counters, such as the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e, stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1112). Specifically, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e are each incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach their maximum values (in this embodiment, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e are both "99"), they are each cleared to "0."

The updated light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is used to select whether or not to perform an effect (light up) on the front light guide plate 410 or rear light guide plate 420 during the variable effect, and the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e is used to select whether or not to light up the confirmation lamp 311 (light up timing) during the variable effect.

After processing S1112 is completed, it is determined whether power failure information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). Power failure information is stored when a power failure command is received from the main control unit 110. If power failure information is stored in processing S1113 (S1113: Yes), the power failure flag and the power failure processing in progress flag are both turned on (S1115), and power failure processing is executed (S1116). After the power failure processing is executed, the power failure processing in progress flag is turned off (S1117), and the processing then enters an infinite loop. During power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, turning off output from the audio output device 226 and lamp display device 227. The stored power failure information is also erased.

On the other hand, if no power outage information is stored in the processing of S1113 (S1113: No), a determination is made as to whether RAM 223 has been corrupted or not based on the keywords stored in RAM 223 (S1114). If RAM 223 has not been corrupted (S1114: No), the processing returns to S1101 and the main processing is repeated. On the other hand, if RAM 223 has been corrupted (S1114: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processing.

If it is determined that RAM corruption has occurred and an infinite loop occurs, the main processing will not be executed, and the display on the drum display device 81 will not change thereafter. This will let the player know that an abnormality has occurred, and they can call a hall staff member or the like and request that the pachinko machine 10 be repaired. Furthermore, if it is confirmed that RAM 223 has been corrupted, the audio output device 226 or lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of RAM corruption.

Next, referring to Figure 47, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. Figure 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1111). This command determination process (S1111) is executed within the main process (see Figure 46) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether a command from the main control unit 110 has been received in the command storage area provided in RAM 223 (S1201). If the determination results in a command being received from the main control unit 110 (S1201: Yes), the first unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read and analyzed, and it is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1202). Then, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1203).

The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in RAM 223 and is used in the variation performance processing (see Figure 48) described below when setting a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of the variation performance and the variation pattern type. This command determination processing (S1111) is then terminated, and processing returns to the main processing (see Figure 46).

On the other hand, if it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1202: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1204). If it is determined that a stop type command has been received (S1204: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1205).

The stop type extracted here is stored in RAM 223 and is used when setting a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect in the variable effect processing (see FIG. 48) described below. After that, the variable effect start flag 223a, which indicates that the variable effect will start, is set to ON (S1206), and this command determination processing (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 46).

The stop type command is a command that is always sent by the main control unit 110 after the main control unit 110 sends a fluctuation pattern command when starting a fluctuation presentation, as a command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation presentation whose fluctuation pattern is indicated by that fluctuation pattern command. By setting the fluctuation start flag 223a to on by the processing of S1206, in the fluctuation presentation processing that is executed later (see Figure 48), a determination is made as to whether or not the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation presentation extracted earlier based on the values of each counter C1, etc. included in the reserved ball count command matches the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation presentation extracted from the received stop type command. A determination is also made as to whether or not the stop type of the fluctuation presentation extracted earlier based on the values of each counter C1, etc. included in the reserved ball count command matches the stop type of the fluctuation presentation extracted from the received stop type command. If, as a result of these determinations, in one variation presentation, the variation pattern based on the reserved ball count command does not match the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command, or if the stop type based on the reserved ball count command does not match the stop type based on the stop type command, it is determined that some kind of abnormality has occurred (for example, an abnormal command reception due to noise), and error processing is performed to indicate the abnormality.

If it is determined as a result of the processing of S1204 that a stop type command has not been received (S1204: No), it is then determined whether a confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1207). The confirmation command is a command used to confirm and display the variable effect currently being performed on the drum display device 81. If it is determined that this confirmation command has been received (S1207: Yes), the display confirmation command is set (S1208), this command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

The display confirmation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in Figure 46). The display control device 114 performs display control so that the variable display of the third symbol is confirmed on the drum display device 81 at the confirmation timing indicated by this display confirmation pattern command.

If, as a result of processing S1207, it is determined that a confirmation command has not been received (S1207: No), it is then determined whether a reserved ball count command has been received (S1209). If it is determined that a reserved ball count command has been received (S1209: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a and/or second reserved ball count counter 203b (see Figure 26) of the main control unit 110 contained in the reserved ball count command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the variable performance of the first special pattern and/or second special pattern reserved in the main control unit 110) is extracted and stored in the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223b and/or sub-second reserved ball count counter 223c of the audio lamp control unit 113 (S1210). Then, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type counter CS1, which are also included in the reserved ball count command, are stored in the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved information storage area 223f, or the second reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 of the second reserved information storage area 223g, indicated by the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223b or sub-second reserved ball count counter 223c updated in S1210 (S1211), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

Here, the reserved ball number command is sent from the main control unit 110 when a ball enters the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (start entry), so each time a start entry occurs, the value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b and/or sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control unit 110 by processing S1212. Therefore, even if the values of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223b and/or sub-second reserved ball counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 differ from the values of the first reserved ball counter 203a and/or second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110 due to noise or other factors, when a start-up win is detected, the values of the sub-first reserved ball counter 223b and/or sub-second reserved ball counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the values of the first reserved ball counter 203a and/or second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110.

The audio lamp control device 113 is also able to perform pre-reading processing by referencing the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the first pending information storage area 223f or the second pending information storage area 223g. In other words, it is possible to determine what the outcome of a pending variable effect will be if it is executed (whether it will result in a jackpot, how long it will last, etc.) before the variable effect is executed, and to decide whether to execute various effects.

If, as a result of the processing of S1209, it is determined that a reserved ball count command has not been received (S1209: No), processing according to the other command is executed (S1212), this command determination processing (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 46). Here, if the received other command is a command to be used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is executed, and the processing result is stored in RAM 223. If it is a command to be used by the display control device 114, the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114. For example, a demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command by the processing of S1212, temporarily stored in a command sending ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S1102) of the main processing.

Next, with reference to Figure 48, we will explain the variable effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Figure 48 is a flowchart showing this variable effect processing (S1110). This variable effect processing (S1110) is executed during the main processing (see Figure 46), and executes various processes to execute variable effects on the drum display device 81.

In the fluctuation presentation process (S1110), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223a stored in RAM 223 is on (S1401). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (i.e., it is off) (S1401: No), this means that at least a stop type command has not been received from the main control unit 110, so the fluctuation presentation process (S1110) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see Figure 46).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command have been received, so to start the fluctuation effect, the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned off (S1402). Next, it is determined whether the fluctuation effect to be executed this time is related to the first special symbol (S1403). If the result of the determination is that the fluctuation effect is related to the first special symbol (S1403: Yes), the data contained in the first pending information storage area 1 provided in the first pending information storage area 223f is shifted to the execution information storage area 223h (S1404). Furthermore, the data contained in the second to fourth first pending information storage areas provided in the first pending information storage area 223f is shifted to the first to third first pending information storage areas (S1405). The value of the sub-first pending ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (S1406), and the process proceeds to S1410.

In other words, in this case, the number of held first special pattern variable effects is reduced by one, and the execution of the first held first special pattern variable effect is started, so the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each storage area 223f1 to 223f4 of the first held information first area corresponding to the first held variable effect are moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the variable effect currently being executed. In addition, the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage second area are moved to storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage first area, the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage third area are moved to storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage second area, and the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage fourth area are moved to storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223h will store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main control unit 110, and the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 will store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the main control unit 110, respectively.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1403 that the variable effect is not related to the first special symbol, i.e., if it is determined that the variable effect is related to the second special symbol (S1403: No), the data contained in the second pending information storage area 1 provided in the second pending information storage area 223g is shifted to the execution information storage area 223h (S1407), and further, the data contained in the second pending information storage areas 2 to 4 provided in the second pending information storage area 223g is shifted to the second pending information storage areas 1 to 3 (S1408), the value of the sub-second pending ball count counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S1409), and the processing proceeds to S1410.

In other words, in this case, the number of reserved second special pattern variable effects is reduced by one, and the execution of the first reserved second special pattern variable effect is started, so the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each storage area 223g1 to 223g4 of the second reserved information first area corresponding to the first reserved variable effect are moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the variable effect currently being executed. In addition, the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage second area are moved to storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage first area, the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage third area are moved to storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage second area, and the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage fourth area are moved to storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second pending information storage third area.

As a result, the execution information storage area 223h will store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main control unit 110, and the second reserved information storage areas 1 to 4 will store the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the main control unit 110, respectively.

Next, in the processing of S1410, the variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed is obtained based on the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223h (S1410). After that, in order to display the variation effect on the drum display device 81, a display variation pattern command is set based on the obtained variation pattern (S1411), and processing proceeds to S1412.

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in Figure 47). The display control device 114 begins display control of the variation effect so that the third symbol variation display is performed on the drum display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

Next, in the processing of S1412, the stop type of the variable effect to be executed is obtained based on the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223h (S1412). After that, a display stop type command is set based on the obtained stop type of the variable effect (S1413), and processing proceeds to S1414.

The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in a command sending ring buffer provided in RAM 223, and is then sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in Figure 47). When the display control device 114 is to confirm and display the variable effect executed by the display variable pattern command set by the process of S1411, it sets a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command.

In the processing of S1414, a confirmation lamp lighting setting process is performed to determine whether or not to light the confirmation lamp 311 and set the lighting timing for the variable performance currently being executed (S1414), and the process then proceeds to S1415. This confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) will be described later in FIG. 49.

In the processing of S1415, a light guide pattern setting process is performed to set whether or not the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 on the front light guide plate 410, or the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420, will be lit in the currently executed variable effect (S1415), and then this variable effect process (S1110) is terminated and processing returns to the main process (see Figure 46). This light guide pattern setting process (S1415) will be described later in Figure 50.

Next, with reference to Figure 49, the confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. Figure 49 is a flowchart showing this confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414). This confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) is executed within the variable performance process (see Figure 48), and determines whether a jackpot will occur in the variable performance to be executed, and if a jackpot will occur, determines at what timing in the variable performance the confirmation lamp 311 will be lit.

In the confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414), first, it is determined whether a jackpot will occur based on the variable effects stored in the execution information storage area 223h (S1501). If it is determined that a jackpot will not occur (S1501: No), the confirmation lamp 311 is not lit, the confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable effect process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1501 that a jackpot will occur (S1501: Yes), the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 in the variable effect to be executed is set by referring to the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f (see Figure 35) according to the value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e (S1502), and processing proceeds to S1503.

In the process of S1503, it is determined whether or not a "probability fluctuation state" will occur based on the current jackpot (S1503). If it is determined that a "probability fluctuation state" will occur as a result of the determination (S1503: Yes), a long lighting pattern in which the confirmation lamp 311 is lit for a long time (for example, 10 seconds) is set at the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 set in the process of S1502 (S1504), this confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable effect process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1503 that a "probability fluctuation state" will not occur based on the jackpot won this time, i.e., if a jackpot that will cause a "time reduction state" has been won (S1503: No), the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 set in the processing of S1502 is set to a short lighting pattern with a short lighting time (for example, "2 seconds") of the confirmation lamp 311 (S1505), this confirmation lamp lighting setting processing (S1414) is terminated, and the processing returns to the variable presentation processing (see FIG. 48).

Note that if the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 set in the processing of S1504 or S1505 exceeds the variable time of the variable effect currently being executed, for example, if a long lighting pattern is started when the variable effect is confirmed, the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 may be configured to end when the variable effect is confirmed, or the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 may be configured to be brought forward from the initially set timing (for example, starting "10 seconds" before confirmation). Furthermore, it may be configured so that a short lighting pattern may be lit even if the "probability variable state" is won.

In this way, if a jackpot is won in a variable presentation, the confirmation lamp 311 can be configured to indicate to the player that a jackpot will occur at various times during the variable presentation, providing an element of surprise and increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by changing the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 depending on the type of jackpot won, the presentation can be varied to a greater extent, and the level of attention paid to the game can be increased.

Next, with reference to Figure 50, the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. Figure 50 is a flowchart showing this light guide pattern setting process (S1415). This light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is executed within the variable performance process (see Figure 48), and executes various processes to determine whether or not each of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 on the front light guide plate 410 or rear light guide plate 420 is lit, and if the confirmation lamp 311 is displayed lit, executes a process to change the lit area of the first decorative pattern group 421.

The light guide pattern setting process (S1415) first determines whether the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 has been selected in the variable effect to be executed (S1601). This determination is made by referencing the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e (see FIG. 34) according to the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, and by drawing a lottery to determine whether the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 will be lit in the variable effect to be executed.

If it is determined in the processing of S1601 that the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 has not been selected (S1601: No), the light guide pattern setting processing (S1415) is terminated and the process returns to the variable effect processing (see FIG. 48). On the other hand, if the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 has been selected (S1601: Yes), the decorative symbol 411, 412, 413, or 421 on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 to be illuminated is then determined (S1602).

If, as a result of the determination in S1602, the bubble group symbol, which is the fourth decorative symbol group 413 on the front light guide plate 410, has been selected as the lighting target (S1602: "Bubbles"), the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c are set to light up in "blue" (S1603) at the timing when the "reach display" is formed in the variable effect (i.e., at the end of the "slow fluctuation" variable element and the start of the "normal reach" variable element; same below), and this light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable effect process (see FIG. 48).

If, as a result of the determination in S1602, the cherry blossom blizzard pattern, which is part of the second decorative pattern group 411 on the front light guide plate 410, has been selected as the lighting target (S1602: "Cherry Blossoms"), the rightmost and leftmost front lower LEDs 414c are set to light up in "pink" at the timing when the "reach display" is formed in the variable performance (S1604), this light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable performance process (see FIG. 48).

If, as a result of the determination in S1602, the sunfish pattern, which is the third decorative pattern 412 on the front light guide plate 410, has been selected as the lighting target (S1602: "sunfish"), at the timing when the "reach display" is formed in the variable performance, the front lower LEDs 414c other than the right and leftmost ones are set to light up in "green" (S1605), this light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable performance process (see FIG. 48).

If, as a result of the determination in S1602, the cherry blossom blizzard pattern, which is the second decorative pattern group 411 on the front light guide plate 410, and the sunfish pattern, which is the third decorative pattern 412, have been selected to be illuminated (S1602: "Sunfish & Cherry Blossoms"), at the timing when the "reach display" is formed in the variable effect, the rightmost and leftmost front lower LEDs 414c of the front lower LEDs 414c are set to illuminate in "pink" and the front lower LEDs 414c other than the rightmost and leftmost are set to illuminate in "green" (S1606), this light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable effect process (see FIG. 48).

If the result of the determination in S1602 is that the school of fish symbol, which is part of the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420, has been selected as the illumination target (S1602: "School of Fish"), first, a determination is made as to whether the confirmation lamp 311 will illuminate at the start of the "reach display," i.e., when a reach is formed (S1607). This determination is made by determining whether the illumination timing and illumination duration of the confirmation lamp 311 set in S1502, S1504, and S1505 of the confirmation lamp illumination setting process (see FIG. 49) have arrived (overlapped) during the execution of the first decorative symbol group 421. If it is determined that the confirmation lamp 311 is not lit during the execution of the first decorative pattern group 421 when a reach is formed (S1607: No), then at the timing when the "reach display" is formed in the variable presentation, the rear upper LED 422c and rear lower LED 424 are set to light up in the order of the right region → central region → left region of the rear light guide plate 420, and the three LEDs 422c, 424 provided in each region are set to light up in "red", "blue", and "green" from the right (S1608), this light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the process returns to the variable presentation process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1607, if it is determined that the confirmation lamp 311 is lit during the execution of the first decorative pattern group 421 when a reach is formed (S1607: Yes), when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit at the timing when the "reach display" is formed in the variable performance, only the rear lower LEDs 424 are illuminated in the order of the right area → central area → left area of the rear light guide plate 420, and the three LEDs 424 provided in each area are illuminated in "red", "blue", and so on from the right. When the confirmation lamp 311 is off, the rear upper LED 422c and rear lower LED 424 are set to light up in "red," "blue," and "green" in the order of the right region → center region → left region of the rear light guide plate 420, respectively, and the three LEDs 422c, 424 provided in each region are set to light up in "red," "blue," and "green" from the right (S1609), this light guide pattern setting process (S1415) ends, and the process returns to the variable performance process (see FIG. 48).

In this way, by using the front light guide plate 410 and rear light guide plate 420 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the drum display device 81 to execute a jackpot probability suggestion effect during the variable effect during the variable effect, a wide variety of effects can be executed and attention to the game can be favorably increased. Furthermore, since the drum display device 81 differs from a liquid crystal display device (LCD) that can easily execute additional preview effects, by displaying previews on its front side using the front light guide plate 410 and rear light guide plate 420, the content of the variable effect can be enriched and attention to the game can be favorably increased, even when using a drum display device 81 that has difficulty displaying additional previews. Furthermore, during the execution of the confirmation lamp 311, which is the most important in the variable effect, the scale of the effect using the first decorative pattern group 421, which is less important to the game than the confirmation lamp 311, is reduced and executed, thereby highlighting the effect using the confirmation lamp 311, which is important to the game. By configuring it in this way, the effects of the first decorative symbol group 421 and the effects of the confirmation lamp 311 can be separated so that they do not overlap or are unlikely to overlap, making the effects of the confirmation lamp 311 more noticeable. This allows for a configuration that does not interfere with the effects of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for gameplay. Furthermore, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effects of the confirmation lamp 311 and the effects of the first decorative symbol group 421 without complex control, thereby increasing the variety of effects.

<A: Multiple display areas are displayed by lighting one LED using a diffusion lens>
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the rear-downward diffusion lens 425 (and the rear-upward diffusion lens 423 as well) has a plurality of recesses formed by the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontward diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c, each of which is at least as wide as the light-emitting surface of the rear-downward LED 424. Therefore, the light emitted from one rear-downward LED 424 is diffused by the plurality of recesses of the rear-downward diffusion lens 425 along optical paths in three directions (i.e., the frontward direction, a direction tilted 20 degrees left from the frontward direction, and a direction tilted 20 degrees right from the frontward direction) within the rear light guide plate 420. Furthermore, because the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontward diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c are each configured with the same side length, the width of the optical path of the diffused light is also configured to be the same. As a result, when one LED is turned on, a plurality of first decorative pattern groups 421 formed at positions corresponding to each of the diffused light paths can be made to emit light in the same color, and even with a small number of LEDs, a variety of effects can be produced, thereby enhancing the effect of the rear light guide plate 420 and drawing attention to the game.

<B: Designs are placed on the light paths, and designs are also placed in the areas where light paths of different colors overlap>
The first decorative pattern group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 includes a portion where the optical path of "red" light and the optical path of "red" light are displayed overlapping each other ("dark red"), a portion where only the optical path of "red" light is displayed ("light red"), a portion where the optical path of "red" light and the optical path of "blue" light are displayed overlapping each other ("purple"), a portion where the optical path of "red" light and the optical path of "green" light are displayed overlapping each other ("yellow"), and a portion where the optical path of "red" light, the optical path of "blue" light, and the optical path of "green" light are displayed overlapping each other ("white"). Each symbol of the first decorative symbol group 421 is displayed in a total of 10 different display colors, including a portion where the optical path of the "blue" light and the optical path of the "blue" light overlap ("dark blue"), a portion displayed only by the optical path of the "blue" light ("light blue"), a portion where the optical path of the "blue" light and the optical path of the "green" light overlap ("blue-green"), a portion where the optical path of the "green" light and the optical path of the "green" light overlap ("dark green"), and a portion displayed only by the optical path of the "green" light ("light green").The symbols of the first decorative symbol group 421 are arranged in each overlapping portion.

As a result, even with a lighting pattern using a limited number of colors (for example, three colors), the light is diffused by the upper and lower diffusion lenses 423, 425, and the optical paths of the diffused light overlap, resulting in different emitted colors in the non-overlapping and overlapping areas, making it possible to display a greater number of colors than the color scheme. Therefore, by achieving a wide variety of display colors even with a limited number of emitted colors, LED light emission control is simplified and the control burden associated with LED light emission control can be reduced. In particular, if the above control is performed using multiple types of monochromatic light-emitting diodes rather than full-color LEDs, costs can be reduced by using monochromatic light-emitting diodes, which are less expensive than full-color LEDs, and LED light emission control is simplified, reducing the control burden associated with LED light emission control.

Furthermore, for each pattern in the first decorative pattern group 421, it is arranged so that it overlaps with the optical path of light of one color in a specified portion, while being arranged so that it overlaps with the optical path of light of other colors in portions other than the specified portion. In other words, by forming each pattern in the first decorative pattern group 421 so that it fits within a range of multiple optical path widths, the luminescent color of each portion of the pattern can be made different, and the pattern can be expressed in a variety of colors.

<C: Different LEDs light up in succession for each horizontal section, providing a moving and colorful display>
Of the three upper rear LEDs 422c and three lower rear LEDs 424 arranged in each of the right, central and left regions of the rear light guide plate 420, the upper rear LED 422c and lower rear LED 424 located on the far right, the upper rear LED 422c and lower rear LED 424 located in the center, and the upper rear LED 422c and lower rear LED 424 located on the left side, light up in sequence, creating an effect that makes it appear as if a school of fish, the first decorative pattern group 421, is swimming from right to left.

Furthermore, by lighting the rear upper LEDs 422c and rear lower LEDs 424 sequentially from the right side in conjunction with the lighting of the first decorative symbol group 60a and second decorative symbol group 60b (see Figure 3) on the base plate 60 of the gaming board 13, the effects on the rear light guide plate 420 and the effects on the gaming board 13 surface can be executed in unison, providing a powerful effect using the entire gaming board 13 surface and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

<D: When multiple effects overlap, one effect is displayed with priority over the other (method of reducing the fish display area when the confirmation lamp lights up)>
When the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 is executed (during execution), the scale of the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced to highlight the effect of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for gameplay. Specifically, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed at the timing when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, the width of the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed. In particular, by making the side of the first decorative symbol group 421 where the confirmation lamp 311 is located (i.e., the upper side when viewed from the front of the rear light guide plate 420) unlit or lighted to a low level, the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be compartmentalized so that they do not or are unlikely to overlap, and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more noticeable. Therefore, a configuration can be made that does not obstruct the effect of the confirmation lamp 311, which is important for gameplay. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effects using the confirmation lamp 311 and the effects using the first decorative pattern group 421 without performing complex control, thereby increasing the variety of effects.

<E: Weak and medium warnings are displayed on one light guide plate, and strong warnings are displayed on a separate light guide plate>
When the effect indicating the probability of a jackpot in a variable effect can be configured to be executable in multiple patterns, effects with a low probability of a jackpot (i.e., the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412 and the fourth decorative pattern group 413) are concentrated on one light guide plate (i.e., the front light guide plate 410), while effects with a high probability of a jackpot (i.e., the first decorative pattern group 421) are provided on another light guide plate (i.e., the rear light guide plate 420).This prevents effects with a high probability of a jackpot from being lit up due to noise or the player's viewing angle, etc., when an effect with a low probability of a jackpot is executed, and thus makes it possible to execute an effect without any discrepancies.

<F: Multiple display objects on one light guide plate, different LED light path direction for each display object, few-directional areas (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossoms) and multi-directional areas (two directions, bubbles) within one light guide plate, strong effects in the few directions (weak effects where light paths overlap)>
In the front light guide plate 410, a fourth decorative pattern group 413 having the lowest probability of winning a jackpot is formed in a portion where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path overlap (i.e., the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion), so that the fourth decorative pattern group 413 is visible only with horizontal light. Also, a second decorative pattern group 411 and a third decorative pattern 412 having a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the fourth decorative pattern group 413 are formed in a portion where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path do not overlap (i.e., the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion), so that the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 are visible only with vertical light. Here, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 due to the vertical light, the vertical light is turned on when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, are turned on, and even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is turned on when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412 is turned on, there is little inconsistency in the presentation. Therefore, by forming the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has the lowest expectation of a jackpot, in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light overlap, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 at an unintended timing, it is possible to minimize inconsistency in the presentation and provide the player with a natural game experience.

<G: Multiple display objects on one light guide plate, different LED light path direction for each display object, few-directional areas (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossoms) and multi-directional areas (two directions, bubbles) within one light guide plate, few-directional areas located in front of the displays (main display, main drum, main LCD)>
In the first embodiment, a fourth decorative symbol group 413 having the lowest probability of winning is formed in a portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the optical path of vertical light and the optical path of horizontal light overlap (i.e., the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion), so that the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is visible only with horizontal light. Also, a second decorative symbol group 411 and a third decorative symbol 412 having a higher probability of winning than the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are formed in a portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the optical path of vertical light and the optical path of horizontal light do not overlap (i.e., the regular R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion), so that the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are visible only with vertical light. Furthermore, the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 is formed on the back side of the portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path do not overlap (i.e., the normal R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion), and a drum display device 81 that executes the variable third symbol effect, which is the main effect of the game, is disposed. In this way, the drum display device 81 that executes the variable third symbol effect, which is the main effect of the game, is disposed on the portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the vertical light path and the horizontal light path do not overlap (i.e., the normal R-shaped portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion), and is configured to be able to display the first decorative symbol group 421, which is the effect with the highest probability of winning a jackpot in the variable effect. This configuration does not interfere with the display results of the variable effect, which is important for the game, and the effect with the highest probability of winning a jackpot, and thereby enhances the effect effects of the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81, and can increase attention to the game.

<H: One light guide plate with a flat shape and a curved shape, both shapes guide light from the flat part (but not from the curved part)>
In the first embodiment, when light is incident (guided) on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the light is configured to be incident from the end face (portion) of one of the flat portions of each light guide plate 410, 420, and not from the curved portion (i.e., the normal curved portion, the upper inverted curved portion, or the lower inverted curved portion). This is because if light is attempted to be incident from the curved portion, the direction of the incident light may be changed by the curved portion, making it difficult or impossible to properly illuminate the desired pattern. Furthermore, LEDs and other devices must be arranged along the shape of the end face of the curved portion, which may reduce design freedom. Furthermore, the curved portion is formed to fit the outer shape of the performance components such as the drum display device 81 and movable props, and if an LED board or other device is arranged to the side of the curved portion, this may limit design freedom for the performance components. Therefore, in each of the light guide plates 410, 420 having an R-shaped portion, by making light incident from the end face (portion) of one of the flat plate portions, the above problem can be suitably solved and the degree of freedom in designing each component can be increased.

<I: R-shape/reverse R-shape, display a preview of 1 up to the changeover point (decided part of the symbol display area), do not place symbols at the part where the R-shape changes>
In the front light guide plate 410, decorative symbol groups 411, 412, and 413 are arranged in the normal R-shaped portion or the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion, but none of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, and 413 are arranged in the transition point (area) between the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion. This is because, if decorative symbols to be displayed using light guide are arranged in the transition point (area) between the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion, it is difficult for the light reflected (guided) inside the front light guide plate 410 to properly reach the portion arranged in the normal R-shaped portion and the portion arranged in the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and there is a risk that the image will appear in an unintended manner depending on the player's line of sight. Therefore, by configuring the transition point (area) between the downward inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion so that none of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, 413 are placed, the expression of the patterns displayed by light can be made appropriate, and a performance without any discrepancies can be executed.

<J: Cover to prevent abnormal lighting due to light from the front side of the strong warning light guide plate (sunfish/bubble light guide plate, slit portion of display area forming member)>
By arranging the lens cut 432 between the confirmation lamp 311 and the up-down position of the positive R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the lens cut 432 can diffuse (weaken) the incident light. Therefore, by suppressing light other than the light incident by the illumination of each LED 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, it is possible to suppress abnormal lighting of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconsistencies in the presentation, such as abnormal lighting of each decorative pattern group 411, 412, 413, 421.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the front light guide plate 410 is located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the first decorative symbol group 421, which has the highest jackpot reliability (expectation level). Therefore, the front light guide plate 410 can also prevent light incident from the front of the pachinko machine 10 from entering the rear light guide plate 420. Therefore, by locating the front light guide plate 410 on the front side of the rear light guide plate 420 as a noise cover, the light incident by the front light guide plate 410 is somewhat diffused (weakened), thereby preventing the first decorative symbol group 421, which has a large effect discrepancy, from being abnormally illuminated if it is erroneously illuminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of effect discrepancies, such as the abnormal illumination of each of the decorative symbol groups 411, 412, 413, and 421.

<K:1 light guide plate produces strong and weak effects, and at least the weak area illumination is highly anisotropic (good straightness, no diffusion, condensing lens)>
The front light guide plate 410 in the first embodiment is made of acrylic resin (PMMA), similar to the rear light guide plate 420. When the refractive index of the acrylic resin is set to 1.49 to 1.53, light incident on the first end face of each of the focusing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d is emitted in a straight direction (or almost straight; toward the upper side of the drawing in FIG. 20) from the second end face. As a result, light incident from the first end faces of the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, 416d can be emitted in one direction in a condensed state rather than diffused from the second end faces formed into a plurality of semicircular convex shapes, so that when the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c corresponding to the decorative symbols 411, 412, 413 to be displayed are turned on, the other decorative symbols 411, 412, 413 are not turned on, and only the decorative symbols 411, 412, 413 to be displayed can be properly turned on and displayed. In particular, when attempting to turn on the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has the lowest jackpot reliability, if the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412, which are formed on the same front light guide plate 410 and have a higher jackpot reliability than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, are turned on, an inconsistency in the presentation may occur, and the game may not be able to be played as specified in the game specifications. Therefore, by configuring the condenser lenses 415d, 416d so that light directed at at least the fourth decorative pattern group 413, which has a low probability of winning, is not diffused, it is possible to display only the fourth decorative pattern group 413 at an appropriate timing, making it less likely that inconsistencies will occur in the presentation content.

<L:1 light guide plate produces strong and weak effects, and at least the strong area illumination is highly isotropic (diffused lens, three-way lens)>
For decorative symbol groups with a high probability of winning a jackpot, i.e., the third decorative symbol 412 and the like, a diffusing lens such as that used to light the first decorative symbol group 421 may be used instead of a condensing lens. The third decorative symbol 412 has a higher probability of winning a jackpot than at least the fourth decorative symbol group 413, and is located in front of the drum display device 81, which is the focus of the player during play. Therefore, it is necessary to irradiate the third decorative symbol 412 with light comprehensively using a diffusing lens to allow the player to clearly recognize the third decorative symbol 412. Furthermore, when lighting the fourth decorative symbol group 413, lighting the third decorative symbol 412, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, would result in an inconsistent presentation, but when lighting the third decorative symbol 412, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a lower jackpot expectation than the third decorative symbol 412, is also lit, the player will focus on the execution of the third decorative symbol 412, which has a higher jackpot expectation, and will not pay as much attention to the execution of the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a lower jackpot expectation, so inconsistencies in presentation are unlikely to occur. Therefore, by employing condensing lenses 415d, 416d for the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a lower jackpot expectation, and employing a diffusing lens for the third decorative symbol 412, which has a higher jackpot expectation, the presentation effect of the front light guide plate 410 can be enhanced, and attention to the game can be increased.

<M: Multiple light guide plates, at least one separate light guide plate with a diffusion means>
When multiple light guide plates 410, 420 are used to configure multiple patterns of effects indicating the likelihood of a jackpot in variable effects, by utilizing condenser lenses 414d, 415d, 416d in one light guide plate 410 (i.e., the front light guide plate 410), multiple types of effects (i.e., the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413) can be individually configured to be executed, and by employing diffusing lenses 423, 425 in another light guide plate (i.e., the rear light guide plate 420), one effect (i.e., the first decorative symbol group 421) can be executed with a variety of expressions. This configuration makes it possible to execute effects greater than the number of light guide plates 410, 420, and by executing flashy effects using light guide plates employing diffusing lenses 423, 425, the variety of effects can be increased, thereby attracting attention to the game.

Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to Figure 55, a pachinko machine 10 in a second embodiment will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410, rear light guide plate 420, and display area forming member 430 are configured to have multiple R-shaped portions (i.e., a downward inverted R-shaped portion, a normal R-shaped portion, and an upper inverted R-shaped portion) that follow the outer periphery of the drum display device 81, and are configured to illuminate and display the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, and 421 by irradiating light from the lateral (upper, lower, right, or left) end faces of the flat plate portions of the front light guide plate 410 and rear light guide plate 420.

In contrast, in the second embodiment, the second front light guide plate 440, the second rear light guide plate 450, and the second display area forming member 460 are formed in a shape different from the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. Furthermore, light is irradiated onto the second front light guide plate 440 by the second front-downward LED 441 from the lower end surface of the second front-downward inverted-R-shaped portion 440a, which is the only R-shaped portion formed at the bottom of the second front light guide plate 440. Furthermore, light is irradiated onto the second rear-downward LED 450 from the lower end surface of the second rear-downward positive-R-shaped portion 450a, which is the only R-shaped portion formed at the bottom of the second rear light guide plate 450.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and their illustrations and descriptions will be omitted.

Figure 55 is a diagram showing the positional relationship of the drum display device 81 with respect to a schematic side cross-sectional view of the light guide unit 400 in the second embodiment. Note that for ease of explanation, Figure 55 shows an enlarged view of the spacing between the second front light guide plate 440, second rear light guide plate 450, second display area forming member 460, and drum display device 81 that constitute the light guide unit 400 in the second embodiment.

As shown in Figure 55, the light guide unit 400 of the second embodiment is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the drum display device 81, and is composed of, in order from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a second display area forming member 460, a second front light guide plate 440, and a second rear light guide plate 450.

Like the display area forming member 430, the second display area forming member 460 is made of a transparent resin (e.g., polycarbonate) and is formed in a flat plate shape that is different from (unrelated to) the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81, which is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the light guide unit 400. It is also formed in a shape that is different from the shapes of the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear light guide plate 450, which are assembled to the light guide unit 400. Furthermore, this second display area forming member 460 has a second central opening 461 formed therein so that three symbols on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR (see Figure 4) on the drum display device 81 are visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. A predetermined second lens cut 462 is formed around the periphery of this second central opening 461, which is configured to make it difficult or impossible to see the area behind the second lens cut 462 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the second lens cut 462 around the periphery of the second central opening 461 clearly shows the player the symbol display area and pay lines on the drum display device 81. Furthermore, the second upper front decorative symbol 442 provided on the second front light guide plate 440 and the second upper rear decorative symbol 452 provided on the second rear light guide plate 450 are configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the second central opening 461. Furthermore, the lower portion of the lower second lens cut 462 allows the second lower front decorative symbol 443 provided on the second front light guide plate 440 and the second lower rear decorative symbol 453 provided on the second rear light guide plate 450 to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Like the front light guide plate 410, the second front light guide plate 440 is made of a transparent resin material (e.g., acrylic) and is configured with a second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a that has a shape different from the outer periphery of the drum display device 81 and is the opposite of the outer periphery of the drum display device 81 (i.e., an R-shaped portion opposite to the R-shaped outer periphery of the drum display device 81), and a second front upper flat portion 440b that is formed continuously from the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a and has a shape that follows the shape of the second display area forming member 460.

In addition, this second front light guide plate 440 is configured so that the drum display device 81 and a portion of the second rear light guide plate 450, which are located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 from the second front light guide plate 440, can be viewed from the second central opening 461 of the second display area forming member 460.

Furthermore, the back side of the second front light guide plate 440 (i.e., the back side of the pachinko machine 10) is provided with lens cuts of various uneven shapes corresponding to the second front upper decorative pattern 442 and the second front lower decorative pattern 443, and by lighting the second front lower LED 441 arranged below the second front light guide plate 440 when viewed from the front, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 formed on the back side of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a is displayed so as to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and by lighting the second front upper LED (not shown) arranged to the side of the second front light guide plate 440 when viewed from the front, the second front upper decorative pattern 442 formed on the back side of the second front upper flat plate portion 440b is displayed so as to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, a condenser lens may be provided to condense the light emitted from the second front upper LED and the second front lower LED 441 and irradiate it onto the end face of the second front light guide plate 440.

Here, the lens cut (concave and convex shape) forming the second upper front decorative pattern 442 is configured with a shape that allows light incident from the second upper front LED (not shown) in a lateral direction as viewed from the front to be reflected toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, but is configured with a shape (e.g., vertical grooves) that does not or makes it difficult to reflect light incident from the second lower front LED 441 in an upward direction as viewed from the front to the front of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, the lens cut (concave and convex shape) forming the second lower front decorative pattern 443 is configured with a shape that allows light incident from the second lower front LED 441 in an upward direction as viewed from the front (vertical up and down direction) to be reflected toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, but is configured with a shape (e.g., horizontal grooves) that does not or makes it difficult to reflect light incident from the second upper front LED (not shown) in a lateral direction as viewed from the front to the front of the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, if it is desired to light up each of the decorative patterns 442, 443 on the second front light guide plate 440 as appropriate, by configuring the decorative patterns 442, 443 that can be illuminated to differ depending on the direction (incident direction) of the light guided into the second front light guide plate 440, it is possible to light up multiple decorative patterns 442, 443 individually on one second front light guide plate 440, improving the expressive power of one light guide plate 440 and increasing attention to the game.

A second lower front decorative pattern 443 is disposed on the back surface of the second lower front inverted R-shaped portion 440a of the second front light guide plate 440, and the light-emitting surface of the second lower front LED 441 that illuminates the second lower front decorative pattern 443 is disposed so as to face the lower end face of the second lower front inverted R-shaped portion 440a. Because the second lower front inverted R-shaped portion 440a is configured in an R-shape, if the light guided within the second light guide plate 440 is weak, the second lower front decorative pattern 443 may not be illuminated properly. Therefore, in order to accurately illuminate the second front lower decorative pattern 443 located on the back side of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a, the second front lower LED 441 guides light to the second front lower decorative pattern 443 from the end face closer to the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a, i.e., the lower end face of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a, rather than from the end face farther from the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a (i.e., the upper end face of the second front upper flat portion 440b). This configuration allows the second front lower decorative pattern 443 to be accurately illuminated, thereby increasing attention to the game.

Like the rear light guide plate 420, the second rear light guide plate 450 is made of a transparent resin material (e.g., acrylic) and is configured with a second rear lower positive curved portion 450a that has a shape different from the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 and corresponds to the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 (i.e., a curved shape in the same direction as the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81), and a second rear upper flat plate portion 450b that is formed continuously from the second rear lower positive curved portion 450a and has a shape that follows the shape of the second display area forming member 460 (second front upper flat plate portion 440b).

In addition, this second rear light guide plate 450 is configured so that a portion of the drum display device 81, which is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 from the second rear light guide plate 450, can be viewed from the second central opening 461 of the second display area forming member 460.

Furthermore, the back side of the second rear light guide plate 450 (i.e., the back side of the pachinko machine 10) is provided with lens cuts of various uneven shapes corresponding to the second upper rear decorative pattern 452 and the second lower rear decorative pattern 453, and by lighting the second lower rear LED 451 arranged below the second rear light guide plate 450 when viewed from the front, the second lower rear decorative pattern 453 formed on the back side of the second lower rear regular R-shaped portion 450a is displayed so as to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and by lighting the second upper rear LED (not shown) arranged to the side of the second rear light guide plate 450 when viewed from the front, the second upper rear decorative pattern 452 formed on the back side of the second upper rear flat plate portion 450b is displayed so as to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It is also possible to provide a condensing lens to condense the light emitted from the second rear upper LED and the second rear lower LED 451 and irradiate it onto the end face of the second rear light guide plate 450.

Here, the lens cut (concave and convex shape) forming the second upper rear decorative pattern 452 is configured with a shape that allows light incident from the second upper rear LED (not shown) in a horizontal direction as viewed from the front to be reflected toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, but is configured with a shape (e.g., vertical grooves) that does not or makes it difficult to reflect light incident from the second lower rear LED 451 in an upward direction as viewed from the front to the front of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, the lens cut (concave and convex shape) forming the second lower rear decorative pattern 453 is configured with a shape that allows light incident from the second lower rear LED 451 in an upward direction as viewed from the front (vertical up and down direction) to be reflected toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, but is configured with a shape (e.g., horizontal grooves) that does not or makes it difficult to reflect light incident from the second upper rear LED (not shown) in a horizontal direction as viewed from the front to the front of the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, if it is desired to light up each of the decorative patterns 452, 453 on the second rear light guide plate 450 as appropriate, by configuring the decorative patterns 452, 453 that can be illuminated to differ depending on the direction (incident direction) of light guided into the second rear light guide plate 450, it is possible to light up multiple decorative patterns 452, 453 individually on one second rear light guide plate 450, improving the expressive power of one light guide plate 450 and increasing attention to the game.

A second lower rear decorative pattern 453 is disposed on the back surface of the second lower rear positive R-shaped portion 450a of the second rear light guide plate 450, and the light-emitting surface of the second lower rear LED 451 that illuminates the second lower rear decorative pattern 453 is disposed so as to face the lower end face of the second lower rear positive R-shaped portion 450a. Because the second lower rear positive R-shaped portion 450a is configured in an R-shape, if the light guided within the second light guide plate 450 is weak, the second lower rear decorative pattern 453 may not be illuminated properly. Therefore, in order to accurately illuminate the second lower rear decorative pattern 453 located on the back side of the second lower rear regular R-shaped portion 450a, the second lower rear LED 451 guides light to the second lower rear decorative pattern 453 from the end face closer to the second lower rear regular R-shaped portion 450a, i.e., the lower end face of the second lower rear regular R-shaped portion 450a, rather than from the end face farther from the second lower rear regular R-shaped portion 450a (i.e., the upper end face of the second upper rear flat portion 450b). This configuration allows the second lower rear decorative pattern 453 to be accurately illuminated, thereby increasing attention to the game.

Furthermore, the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a of the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a of the second rear light guide plate 450 are formed by bending in directions away from each other, and a predetermined space is formed between the second front lower decorative pattern 443 formed on the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 formed on the rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a. With this configuration, even when the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 are lit simultaneously, by forming a predetermined distance between the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 using the above-mentioned predetermined space, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453 can be lit and displayed so that they are recognizable from each other, and a three-dimensional effect can be created by the second front lower decorative pattern 443 and the second rear lower decorative pattern 453.

Furthermore, by arranging the second lower front LED 441 on the extension of the second lower front inverted R-shaped portion 440a in order to illuminate the second lower front decorative pattern 443 on the second front light guide plate 440 (hereinafter, the same applies to the second rear light guide plate 450), it is not necessary to arrange the illumination LED on the extension of the second upper front flat portion 440b of the second front light guide plate 440, which relaxes restrictions on LED arrangement and improves the design freedom of the light guide unit 400.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment and achieves the same effects.

<Third Embodiment> Next, with reference to Figure 56, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, light from each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c is guided (irradiated) into the front light guide plate 410 via each of the condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d, and light from each of the LEDs 422c and 424 is guided (irradiated) into the rear light guide plate 420 via each of the diffusing lenses 423 and 425, and the same type of lens is used for each of the light guide plates 410 and 420. In contrast, in the third embodiment, a diffusing lens 473 and condensing lenses 475b and 476b are used in combination for a third light guide plate 470 formed in a shape that follows the outer periphery of the drum display device 81.

Specifically, a third upper decorative pattern group 471 equivalent to (or identical to) the first decorative pattern group 421 of the first embodiment is formed on the back side of the third regular R-shaped portion 470c of the third light guide plate 470, and a third lower decorative pattern group 474 equivalent to (or identical to) the fourth decorative pattern group 413 of the first embodiment is formed on the back side of the third lower flat portion 470a and the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b of the third light guide plate 470. Then, in order to illuminate the third upper decorative pattern group 471, light from a third upper LED 472 is irradiated onto the third light guide plate 470 via a third upper diffusion lens 473. Furthermore, in order to illuminate the third lower decorative symbol group 474, light from a third right LED 475a provided in the third right LED unit 475 is irradiated onto the third light guide plate 470 via a third right condenser lens 475b, and light from a third left LED 476a provided in the third left LED unit 476 is irradiated onto the third light guide plate 470 via a third left condenser lens 476b. Note that, similar to the first embodiment, the relationship between the third upper decorative symbol group 471 and the third lower decorative symbol group 474 in the third embodiment is set to provide an effect in which the likelihood of a jackpot is higher when the third upper decorative symbol group 471 is illuminated than when the third lower decorative symbol group 474 is illuminated.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first or second embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those of the first or second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of these elements will be omitted.

Figure 56 is a schematic front view showing the positional relationship between the third upper decorative pattern group 471 and the third upward LED 472, the positional relationship between the third lower decorative pattern group 474 and the third right LED 475a of the third right LED unit 475, and the positional relationship between the third lower decorative pattern group 474 and the third left LED 476a of the third left LED unit 476, which may be illuminated and displayed on the third light guide plate 470 in the third embodiment. Note that in Figure 56, the third upward LED 472, third right LED 475a, and third left LED 476a, as well as the third upward diffusing lens 473, third right condensing lens 465b, and third left condensing lens 476b, are shown schematically for ease of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 56 , the third regular R-shaped portion 470c of the third light guide plate 470 has a third upper decorative pattern group 471 formed as a school of fish pattern, which is a pattern imitating a school of multiple types of fish. The uneven lens cuts (horizontal grooves) corresponding to this third upper decorative pattern group 471 are configured to emit or facilitate the emission of light incident in the vertical and diagonal directions from the light guided into the third regular R-shaped portion 470c toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, while preventing or making it difficult for light incident from other directions (e.g., horizontal) to be emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the uneven lens cuts corresponding to the third upper decorative pattern group 471. Therefore, the light diffused downward or diagonally from the upper end surface of the third light guide plate 470 causes the third upper decorative pattern group 471 to emit light and become visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when light is irradiated from multiple third upward LEDs 472 provided above the third light guide plate 470 as viewed from the front onto third upward diffusion lenses 473, which are composed of multiple recesses on the upper end surface of the third light guide plate 470 as viewed from the front, the light is diffused in multiple directions from each diffusion lens 473 (three directions: left, center, and right in the third embodiment). Note that the third upward diffusion lenses 473 are configured in the same way as the rear downward diffusion lenses 425 in the first embodiment, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided with nine third upward LEDs 472, and one recess of the third upward diffusion lens 473 is positioned to correspond to one third upward LED 472. Furthermore, the third upward diffusion lens 473 at the rightmost or leftmost end of the third light guide plate 470 does not have a rightward diffusion section or a leftward diffusion section, but rather is formed with only a frontward diffusion section and a leftward diffusion section, or a frontward diffusion section and a rightward diffusion section. This configuration prevents light from being diffused in directions where the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is not located, and allows the light emitted by the third upward LEDs 472 to be irradiated onto the third light guide plate 470 without waste.

The light emitted from one third upward LED 472 toward the bottom (lower side of the drawing) via a front-direction diffusion portion (not shown) of one recess in the third upward diffusion lens 473 is configured to overlap with light emitted (diffused) to the left or right from the adjacent third upward LED 472 via a left-direction diffusion portion (not shown) or a right-direction diffusion portion (not shown) of one recess in the third upward diffusion lens 473, at the intersection of their respective optical paths. The light emitted from one third upward LED 472 toward the bottom (lower side of the drawing) via a left-direction diffusion portion (not shown) or a right-direction diffusion portion of one recess in the third upward diffusion lens 473 is also configured to overlap with light emitted (diffused) to the right or left from the adjacent third upward LED 472 via a right-direction diffusion portion (not shown) or a left-direction diffusion portion of one recess in the third upward diffusion lens 473, at the intersection of their respective optical paths.

Specifically, for example, if the LEDs of the third upward LED 472 are illuminated in three colors, in order from the right, namely, "red," "blue," "green," "red," "blue," "green," "red," "blue," and "green," "red," "blue," and "green," "red" will diffuse "red" light in a predetermined width of optical path from the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the rightmost LED of the third upward LED 472, "blue" light will diffuse in a predetermined width of optical path from the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the second LED from the right (i.e., the eighth from the left) of the third upward LED 472, "green" light will diffuse in a predetermined width of optical path from the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the third LED from the right (i.e., the seventh from the left) of the third upward LED 472, and "red" light will diffuse in a predetermined width of optical path from the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the fourth LED from the right (i.e., the sixth from the left) of the third upward LED 472, The third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the fifth LED from the right (i.e., fifth from the left; center) of the third upward LEDs 472 diffuses "blue" light in an optical path of a predetermined width, the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the sixth LED from the right (i.e., fourth from the left) of the third upward LEDs 472 diffuses "green" light in an optical path of a predetermined width, the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the seventh LED from the right (i.e., third from the left) of the third upward LED 472 diffuses "red" light in an optical path of a predetermined width, the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the eighth LED from the right (i.e., second from the left) of the third upward LED 472 diffuses "blue" light in an optical path of a predetermined width, and the third upward diffusion lens 473 corresponding to the ninth LED from the right (i.e., leftmost) of the third upward LED 472 diffuses "green" light in an optical path of a predetermined width.

In this case, the third upper decorative pattern group 471 formed on the third regular R-shaped portion 470c of the third light guide plate 470 displays each fish pattern in six different colors: a portion displayed only by the optical path of red light ("red"), a portion displayed where the optical path of red light and the optical path of blue light overlap ("purple"), a portion displayed where the optical path of red light and the optical path of green light overlap ("yellow"), a portion displayed only by the optical path of blue light ("blue"), a portion displayed where the optical path of blue light and the optical path of green light overlap ("blue-green"), and a portion displayed only by the optical path of green light ("green"). Furthermore, one fish pattern from the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is arranged on each optical path and in each overlapping portion.

As a result, even with a lighting pattern using a limited number of colors (for example, three colors), the third upward diffusion lens 473 diffuses the light, and the optical paths of the diffused light overlap, causing the emitted colors to differ between non-overlapping and overlapping areas, making it possible to display a greater number of colors than the color scheme. Therefore, by achieving a wide variety of display colors even with a limited number of emitted colors, LED light emission control is simplified and the control burden associated with LED light emission control can be reduced. In particular, if the above control is performed using multiple types of monochromatic light-emitting diodes rather than full-color LEDs, costs can be reduced by using monochromatic light-emitting diodes, which are less expensive than full-color LEDs, and LED light emission control is simplified, reducing the control burden associated with LED light emission control.

Furthermore, the fish pattern 1 of the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is arranged so that it overlaps with the light path of light of one color in a specified portion, while overlapping with the light path of light of other colors in portions other than the specified portion. In other words, by forming the fish pattern 1 of the third upper decorative pattern group 471 so that it fits within the range of multiple light path widths, the light emission color of each portion of the fish pattern can be made different, and the fish pattern 1 of the third upper decorative pattern group 471 can be expressed in a variety of colors.

In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, three third upper LEDs 472 are arranged in each of the right, central, and left regions of the third light guide plate 470. The third upper LEDs 472 are sequentially lit, starting with the rightmost third upper LED 472, then the central third upper LED 472, and finally the left third upper LED 472, in that order, to create the effect of a school of fish, the third upper decorative pattern group 471, swimming from right to left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56, the third light guide plate 470 has a third lower decorative pattern group 474, which is a bubble group pattern resembling multiple bubbles, formed over the entire area of the third lower flat portion 470a and the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b. This third lower decorative pattern group 474 is positioned at least in the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b in a position that does not overlap with (avoid) the optical path of the light diffused from the above-mentioned third upper diffusion lens 473, so that the third lower decorative pattern group 474 is unlikely to be lit even when the third upper LED 472 is lit.

In addition, when light is irradiated from the third right LED 475a provided on the right side of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 to the right end face of the third right focusing lens 475b arranged on the right side of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 when viewed from the front, the light is configured to travel straight (to the left) from the left end face of the third right focusing lens 475b without being diffused. Furthermore, when light is irradiated onto the left end face of the third left condensing lens 476b, which is disposed on the left side of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 as viewed from the front, by the third left LED 476a, which is provided on the left side of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 as viewed from the front, the light is configured to travel straight (to the right) from the right end face of the third left condensing lens 476b without being diffused.

Furthermore, the third right LED 475a and the third left LED 476a are positioned so that one third right LED 475a and one third left LED 476a form a pair in the left-right direction (horizontal direction).

The uneven lens cuts (vertical grooves) corresponding to this third lower decorative pattern group 474 are configured so that, of the light guided into the third lower flat portion 470a and the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b, light incident laterally is emitted or easily emitted toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, while light incident from other directions (e.g., up and down or diagonal directions) is not emitted or is difficult to emit toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 due to the uneven lens cuts corresponding to the third lower decorative pattern group 474. Therefore, light incident laterally from the left end face and/or right end face of the third lower flat portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 causes the third lower decorative pattern group 474 to emit light and become visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

As described above, in the third light guide plate 470, the decorative symbol groups 471, 474 are arranged on the third regular R-shaped portion 470c or the third lower flat portion 470a and the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b. However, similar to the front light guide plate 410 of the first embodiment, none of the decorative symbol groups 471, 474 are arranged at the transition point P between the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b and the third regular R-shaped portion 470c. This is because, if a decorative symbol to be displayed using light guide is arranged at the transition point P between the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b and the third regular R-shaped portion 470c, it is difficult for the light reflected (guided) inside the third light guide plate 470 to properly reach the portion arranged in the third regular R-shaped portion 470c and the portion arranged in the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b, which may result in an unintended appearance depending on the player's line of sight. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, by configuring the transition point P between the third downward inverted R-shaped portion 470b and the third normal R-shaped portion 470c so that neither of the decorative pattern groups 471, 74 is placed, the light-guiding displayed patterns can be properly expressed, and a performance without discrepancies can be produced.

In the third embodiment, the third light guide plate 470 is made of acrylic resin (PMMA). When the refractive index of the acrylic resin is set to 1.49 to 1.53, light incident on the first end face of each condenser lens 475b, 476b is emitted in a straight (or nearly straight, i.e., left or right direction in FIG. 56 ) direction from the second end face. This allows the light incident on the first end face of each condenser lens 475b, 476b to be emitted in one direction in a concentrated state rather than diffused from the second end face formed into multiple semicircular convex shapes. Therefore, when it is desired to light up the third lower decorative pattern group 474, lighting the corresponding LEDs 475a, 476a allows only the third lower decorative pattern group 474 to be properly illuminated and displayed without lighting up other decorative patterns (i.e., the third upper decorative pattern group 471). In particular, because the third lower decorative symbol group 474 has a lower jackpot reliability than the third upper decorative symbol group 471, if an attempt is made to light up the third lower decorative symbol group 474 and the third upper decorative symbol group 471, which is formed on the same light guide plate 470 and has a higher jackpot expectation than the third lower decorative symbol group 474, lights up, there is a risk that inconsistencies will occur in the presentation and that the gameplay will not be able to be achieved as specified. Therefore, by configuring the condenser lenses 475b, 476b to not diffuse the light directed at the third lower decorative symbol group 474, which has a lower jackpot expectation, it is possible to display only the third lower decorative symbol group 474 at the appropriate time, making it less likely that inconsistencies will occur in the presentation.

On the other hand, the light entering the third light guide plate 470 from the third upper LED 472 via the third upper diffusion lens 473 is guided downward and diagonally downward, and therefore reaches the position of the third lower decorative pattern group 474, which is positioned below the third upper decorative pattern group 471 when viewed from the front, and there is a risk that the third lower decorative pattern group 474 will be lit up. However, the third lower decorative symbol group 474 has a lower jackpot expectation than the third upper decorative symbol group 471. Even if the third lower decorative symbol group 474, which has a lower jackpot expectation than the third upper decorative symbol group 471, is also lit when the third upper decorative symbol group 471 is lit, the player will focus on the execution of the third upper decorative symbol group 471, which has a higher jackpot expectation, and not so much on the execution of the third lower decorative symbol group 474, which has a lower jackpot expectation, making it unlikely for inconsistencies to occur. Therefore, by employing condensing lenses 475b, 476b for the third lower decorative symbol group 474, which has a lower jackpot expectation, and employing a diffusing lens 473 for the third upper decorative symbol group 471, which has a higher jackpot expectation, it is possible to reduce the likelihood of inconsistencies in the presentation, enhance the presentation effect of the third light guide plate 470, and increase attention to the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment has the same configuration as the first and second embodiments and achieves the same effects.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 57 and 58.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those of the first to third embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of these elements will be omitted.

In the fourth embodiment, first, referring to Figure 57, we will explain in detail the patterns of pseudo-stopping symbols that can be used in the variable elements of the "pseudo-variation" that occurs in the variable presentation of the third symbol. Figure 58 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns of pseudo-stopping symbols that can be stopped in the variable elements of the "pseudo-variation" in the variable presentation of the third symbol in the fourth embodiment.

As described in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is configured such that the left reel LR, center reel CR, and right reel RR have different symbol arrangements on the drum display device 81. More specifically, broadly speaking, (1) the third symbols are arranged in descending order (i.e., "8" → "7" → "6" → ...) on the left reel LR, while the third symbols are arranged in ascending order (i.e., "1" → "2" → "3" → ...) on the center reel CR and right reel RR. Furthermore, (2) the third symbol, a "345" symbol consisting of multiple symbols, is arranged on the center reel CR, which is the final stop symbol row. Furthermore, (3) the third symbol corresponding to the "4" symbol (part of the "345" symbol) arranged on the center reel CR is not arranged on the left reel LR or right reel RR. Additionally, (4) on the left reel LR, the "Chance" symbol is arranged in a position where it can be seen next to the "1" symbol, while on the center reel CR and right reel RR, the "Chance" symbol is arranged in a position where it can be seen next to the "8" symbol.

The above configuration (1) is primarily intended to increase the variety of reach displays, such as the so-called single reach, which is a "reach display" on the first payline, and the so-called double reach, which is a "reach display" on the second payline, in the third symbol variation presentation. In a drum display device 81 configured so that three third symbols are visible on each of the LR, CR, and RR reels, if all LR, CR, and RR reels are arranged in the same order (e.g., ascending order), so-called single reach displays will only occur on the middle paylines, and so-called double reach displays will only occur on the top and bottom paylines. In such cases, the variety of reach displays may become stale, potentially losing players' interest in the game. Therefore, as in the fourth embodiment, by reversing the order of the symbols on at least the left reel LR and right reel RR that can form a "reach display" (i.e., ascending and descending), so-called single reaches can occur on the top, middle, and bottom pay lines, and so-called double reaches can occur on pay lines that slope downward to the right and pay lines that slope upward to the right. This configuration increases the variety of possible "reach displays" that can occur, making the game more exciting.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the configuration of (2) above is configured so that when the "345" symbol stops on the center reel CR, it can change to a jackpot result regardless of whether a "reach display" is formed. This sets the "345" symbol as a so-called chance symbol, and even if the "reach display" does not appear because the stopped symbols on the left reel LR and the right reel RR are different, it is possible to maintain anticipation of a jackpot until the final sequence of stopped symbols has stopped. More specifically, if the "345" symbol is stopped when the drive of the center reel CR stops (temporarily stops), it is configured so that it can develop into a "re-variation" variable element that changes all reels LR, CR, and RR again. This "re-variation" variable element can only be selected if a jackpot lottery result has been derived, so when the "345" symbol stops in the variation effect and the "re-variation" variable element is executed, it becomes possible to execute a so-called sudden reversal effect, which can increase the excitement of the game.

Furthermore, the configuration of (3) above includes a "4" only in the "345" symbol that is only displayed on the center reel CR, while not displaying the "4" symbol on the left reel LR or right reel RR. Although a "reach display" using the "4" symbol itself cannot occur, the "345" symbol on the center reel CR stands out and its uniqueness is emphasized, highlighting the gameplay of whether or not the "345" symbol will stop on the center reel CR, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the configuration of (4) above arranges a "chance" symbol (hereinafter, the "chance" symbol may be abbreviated as "C" symbol) at the transition area of the left reel LR where the number symbols are arranged in descending order (i.e., "8" symbol → "7" symbol → ... → "1" symbol), i.e., the area between the "1" symbol and the "8" symbol, and arranges a "chance" symbol at the transition area of the middle reel CR and right reel RR where the number symbols are arranged in ascending order (i.e., "1" symbol → "2" symbol → ... → "8" symbol), i.e., the area between the "8" symbol and the "1" symbol. In the fourth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when a "chance" symbol that is not a number symbol is stopped and displayed, a "pseudo-variation" variable element, a "re-variation" variable element, or a "special reach" variable element, which has the highest probability of winning a jackpot, is executed. When the "chance" symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable effect continues, and a jackpot can be expected in the variable effect. In this way, in the variable effect, by arranging "chance" symbols, which have a different nature from the number symbols, among the number symbols arranged in descending or ascending order on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR that move downward, the number symbols that move on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR are made easier to recognize, and by arranging "chance" symbols, which have a different nature from the number symbols, the game can be more varied and more interesting.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is configured so that (5) in the variable presentation, when a "reach display" using the "7" symbol appears, the jackpot result (i.e., "777") that can cause a "probability fluctuation state" is more likely to appear. In other words, if the jackpot lottery is won, the "reach display" using the "7" symbol is likely to be selected, while if the jackpot lottery is not won, the "reach display" using the "7" symbol is less likely to be selected. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation of a jackpot when the "reach display" using the "7" symbol appears, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation" is provided with an effect in which the "reach formation symbol" changes in stages. More specifically, the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation" of the fourth embodiment is provided with a symbol change effect in which the "reach formation symbol" changes in stages (in ascending order) in three stages. For example, when the variable element of the "slow fluctuation" ends, a pseudo "1" symbol is stopped in the middle of the left reel LR, and a pseudo "1" symbol is also stopped in the middle of the right reel RR, and a "reach display" is generated on the active line in the middle (hereinafter, this situation will be referred to as "pseudo stop 1"). When a "pseudo-variable" variable element is executed in a "pseudo-variable" game, the "reach" indicator of the "1" pseudo-stop symbol changes to a "reach" indicator of the "2" pseudo-stop symbol and pauses (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as "pseudo-stop 2"), and then changes to a "reach" indicator of the "3" symbol (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as "reach formation"), after which various "reach" indicators are executed from the "normal reach" variable element. This configuration executes an effect in which a "reach" indicator occurs for any number symbol in the "pseudo-variable" variable element, i.e., whether a "reach" indicator that can cause a "probability variable state" occurs, thereby enriching the game's variety and increasing the enjoyment of the game. The number of stages that can be changed in the "pseudo-variable" variable element may be any number of times that can be executed within the "pseudo-variable" variable element, and may be two or less (including one time) or four or more.

However, in a pachinko machine 10 configured with the left reel LR, center reel CR, and right reel RR configured as described above in (1) to (4) to perform the "pseudo fluctuation" variable elements, and further configured to perform the variable effects with the game specifications described above in (5), there are certain restrictions on the stopping patterns of the pseudo stop symbols "pseudo stop 1," "pseudo stop 2," and "reach formation" during the "pseudo fluctuation" variable elements in the symbol change effects performed by the "pseudo fluctuation" variable elements.

Here, referring to Figures 57 and 58, we will explain the patterns of pseudo-stop symbols that can be executed in the variable elements of the "pseudo-variation." Figure 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns of pseudo-stop symbols that can be stopped in the variable elements of the "pseudo-variation" in the variable presentation of the third symbol in the fourth embodiment. Also, Figure 58 is a schematic diagram showing the progression of the variable elements of the "pseudo-variation" executed by the drum display device 81 in the fourth embodiment. Figure 58(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the pseudo-stop symbol as "pseudo-stop 1" has stopped, Figure 58(b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the pseudo-stop symbol as "pseudo-stop 2" has stopped from the state of Figure 58(a), Figure 58(c) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the "reach-forming symbol" has stopped from the state of Figure 58(b), and Figure 58(d) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the "reach display" is being performed from the state of Figure 58(c). In Figure 57, the "●" indicates the changing center reel CR, and the numbers to the left and right of it indicate the stopped symbols on the left reel LR and right reel RR. Also, in Figure 58, the configuration of the drum display device 81 and the display mode of the third symbol are omitted (schematically represented).

As shown in Figure 57, first, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 1," where "pseudo stop 1" is the "1" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is the "2" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "3" symbol (i.e., "1●1" → "2●2" → "3●3"), are not restricted by the configurations (1) to (5) above, and are therefore configured to be executable.

More specifically, as shown in Figure 58(a), in the "pseudo fluctuation" variable element, when the "slow fluctuation" variable element ends, a "pseudo stop 1" occurs, where a "1" symbol is pseudo-stopped in the middle section of the left reel LR and right reel RR of the drum display device 81, creating a state as if a "reach display" using the "1" symbol has occurred. The "reach display" using this "1" symbol is maintained for a predetermined period (e.g., two seconds) while the variable performance progresses.

Then, from the state shown in Figure 58(a), the left reel LR and right reel RR spin downwards, and the "2" symbol appears to stop in a pseudo-stop in the middle of the left reel LR and right reel RR on the drum display device 81, resulting in a "pseudo stop 2," as if a "reach display" based on the "1" symbol has been replaced by a "reach display" based on the "2" symbol (see Figure 58(b)). The variable presentation then progresses with this "reach display" based on the "2" symbol maintained for a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds).

Then, from the state shown in Figure 58(b), the left reel LR and right reel RR spin downward, and a "3" symbol stops in the middle of the left reel LR and right reel RR on the drum display device 81 as a "reach formation," and the "reach display" with a "2" symbol changes to a "reach display" with a "3" symbol (see Figure 58(c)). From this state, the "reach display" shown in Figure 58(d) (for example, a variable element of a "normal reach") is executed, and an effect is executed to see whether the "reach display" will display a jackpot result.

Returning to Figure 57, we will continue with the explanation. Next, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 2," where "pseudo stop 1" is the "2" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is the "3" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "4" symbol (i.e., "2●2" → "3●3" → "4●4"), are configured to be unable to be executed due to the constraint imposed by the configuration in (3) above, i.e., the left reel LR and right reel RR do not contain the "4" symbol.

Next, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 3," where "pseudo stop 1" is the "3" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is the "4" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "5" symbol (i.e., "3●3" → "4●4" → "5●5"), are configured to be unable to be executed, just like "Pattern 2" above, due to the constraint imposed by the configuration in (3) above, i.e., the left reel LR and right reel RR do not contain the "4" symbol.

Next, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 4," where "pseudo stop 1" is the "3" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is the "5" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "6" symbol (i.e., "3 ● 3" → "5 ● 5" → "6 ● 6") do not include the "4" symbol, and are therefore not affected by the constraints imposed by the configuration in (3) above. However, although "pseudo stop 1" was a "reach display" (i.e., a reach with a "3" symbol) that could cause a "probability fluctuation state," "reach formation" has changed to a "reach display" (i.e., a reach with a "6" symbol) that does not cause a "probability fluctuation state," and this is a so-called "deterioration" effect that makes it appear as if the potential profit has decreased, and is configured not to be executed to prevent players from losing interest in the game.

Next, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 5," where "pseudo stop 1" is the "4" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is the "5" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "6" symbol (i.e., "4●4" → "5●5" → "6●6"), are configured to be unable to be executed, just like "Pattern 2" and "Pattern 3" above, due to the constraint imposed by the configuration in (3) above, i.e., the left reel LR and right reel RR do not contain the "4" symbol.

Next, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 6," where "pseudo stop 1" is the "5" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is the "6" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "7" symbol (i.e., "5●5" → "6●6" → "7●7"), are not restricted by the configurations (1) to (5) above, and are therefore configured to be executable.

Next, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 7," where "pseudo stop 1" is a "6," "pseudo stop 2" is a "7," and "reach formation" is an "8" (i.e., "6●6" → "7●7" → "8●8"), are that "pseudo stop 2" is a "reach display" (i.e., a "7" symbol) that makes it easy for a jackpot to occur, but "reach formation" changes to a normal "reach display" (i.e., a "reach" symbol) due to the constraints in (5) above. This is a so-called "degradation" effect that makes it appear as if the potential profit has decreased, and is therefore configured not to be executed so as not to lose the player's interest in the game.

Next, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 8," in which "pseudo stop 1" is the "7" symbol, "pseudo stop 2" is the "8" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "C" symbol (i.e., "7●7" → "8●8" → "C●C"), are configured so that they cannot be executed due to the constraints in (5) above. Although "pseudo stop 1" is a "reach display" (i.e., a reach with a "7" symbol) that makes it easy for a jackpot to occur, "pseudo stop 2" changes to a normal "reach display" (i.e., a reach with an "8" symbol), which is a so-called "degradation" effect that will dampen the player's interest. Furthermore, when the "C" symbol stops, the "re-fluctuation" variable element may be executed, so this pattern cannot necessarily be said to be a so-called "downgrade" effect, but when the "C" symbol stops, the "pseudo-fluctuation" variable element may be executed, and because the "pseudo-fluctuation" variable element would be executed again, "Pattern 8" is configured not to be executed.

Next, in "Pattern 9," where "Pseudo Stop 1" is an "8" symbol, "Pseudo Stop 2" is a "C" symbol, and "Reach Formation" is a "1" symbol, the variable elements of the "Pseudo Fluctuation" (i.e., "8 ● 8" → "C ● C" → "1 ● 1") are as follows: in "Pseudo Stop 2," a "Reach Display" (i.e., a "Reach" with a "C" symbol) that can generate a "Re-Fluctuation" or "Pseudo Fluctuation" variable element is displayed; in "Reach Formation," however, it changes to a "Reach Display" (i.e., a "Reach" with a "1" symbol) that does not generate a "Re-Fluctuation" or "Pseudo Fluctuation" variable element. This is a so-called "degradation" effect that makes it appear as if the potential profit has decreased, and is therefore configured not to be executed to prevent players from losing interest in the game.

Next, the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation" in "Pattern 10," in which "Pseudo Stop 1" is the "8" symbol, "Pseudo Stop 2" is the "1" symbol, and "Reach Formation" is the "2" symbol (i.e., "8●8" → "1●1" → "2●2"), is configured so that the "Reach Display" using the "C" symbol is skipped from "Pseudo Stop 1" to "Pseudo Stop 2" and the "8" symbol changes to the "1" symbol, and is not restricted by the configurations (1) to (5) above, and is therefore configured to be executable. In the case of "Pattern 10," the variable element of the "pseudo fluctuation" is executed by omitting (skipping) the "C" symbol, and therefore the symbol control (changes to the acceleration/deceleration patterns of each reel LR, CR, RR, and the time scale of constant speed fluctuation, fine adjustments to slip return, etc.) in "Pattern 1" and "Pattern 6" above is configured to be different.

It is also possible to configure the system so that a pattern that skips one of the consecutive symbols and executes the variable elements of the "pseudo-variation", as in "Pattern 10", is not executed. By configuring it in this way, the control patterns for each reel LR, CR, and RR related to the variable elements of the "pseudo-variation" can be simplified, and the control burden related to symbol control can be reduced.

Next, in "Pattern 11," where "Pseudo Stop 1" is a "C" symbol, "Pseudo Stop 2" is a "1" symbol, and "Reach Formation" is a "2" symbol, the variable elements of the "Pseudo Fluctuation" (i.e., "C●C" → "1●1" → "2●2") are configured so that, although "Pseudo Stop 1" was a "Reach Display" (i.e., a "Reach" with a "C" symbol) that could generate a "Re-Fluctuation" or a "Pseudo Fluctuation" variable element, "Reach Formation" changes to a "Reach Display" (i.e., a "Reach" with a "2" symbol) that does not generate a "Re-Fluctuation" or a "Pseudo Fluctuation" variable element. This is a so-called "degradation" effect that would dampen the player's interest, and is therefore not possible to execute.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the pseudo-stop symbol in the "pseudo-variation" variable element is selected from "Pattern 1," "Pattern 6," and "Pattern 10," and other patterns (i.e., "Pattern 2," "Pattern 3," "Pattern 4," "Pattern 5," "Pattern 7," "Pattern 8," "Pattern 9," and "Pattern 11") are not executed in the "pseudo-variation" variable element. This configuration allows for variable effects to be executed while accurately maintaining various game specifications, and prevents inconsistencies in the effects from occurring, preventing players from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, in the "pseudo-variation" variable element, the execution of a so-called "falling effect" in which a temporarily stopped third symbol with a high profit changes to a third symbol with a low profit is prevented, preventing players from losing interest in the game, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to third embodiments and achieves the same effects.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figures 59 to 70.

In the fifth embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot result based on a predetermined number pattern appears in a variable effect, the number pattern changes while maintaining the jackpot result within the variable effect, which is called a "full rotation" effect.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those of the first to fourth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of these elements will be omitted.

First, with reference to Figure 59, we will explain the configuration of the left reel LR, center reel CR, and right reel RR in the left reel unit 81a1, center reel unit 81a2, and right reel unit 81a3 that make up the drum display device 81. Since the configurations of the left reel unit 81a1, center reel unit 81a2, and right reel unit 81a3 are the same or equivalent, Figure 59 will use the left reel unit 81a1 (left reel LR) as an example for explanation.

The left reel unit 81a1 comprises a cylindrical member 610, which is a cylindrical base body, and a left reel LR that is endlessly wound around the outer periphery of the cylindrical member 610. The left reel LR is attached to the cylindrical member 610 via a pair of seals (not shown) formed along both long sides of the left reel LR, so that the left reel LR remains wound around the cylindrical member 610.

As described above, numerical symbols and "chance" symbols serving as identification information are printed at equal intervals on the outer peripheral surface of the left reel LR (see Figure 4). An attachment recess 610a is formed in the center of this cylindrical member 610, and the drive shaft of the stepping motor 600 is attached to this attachment recess 610a via a disk-shaped connecting plate 611. As a result, when the drive shaft of the stepping motor 600 rotates, the cylindrical member 610 rotates around the drive shaft, and this rotation changes the numerical symbols and "chance" symbols on the left reel LR that are visible from the display area forming member 430 (see Figure 6).

The stepping motor 600 is fixed with a fixing member (not shown) such as a screw to the side of a fixed plate (not shown) that is arranged in an upright position inside the drum display device 81. A reel position detection sensor 620, which has a light-emitting element 621 and a light-receiving element 622 held at a predetermined distance, is fixed to this fixed plate.

The base end 632 of the initial position member 630, which extends radially, is fixed to the connecting plate 611, which is integrated with the cylindrical member 610, with a fixing member (not shown) such as a screw.

The tip 631 of this initial position member 630 is bent at a substantially right angle from the base end 632 and is positioned so that it can pass between the light-emitting element 621 and light-receiving element 622 of the reel position detection sensor 620. Each time the left reel LR rotates once, the reel position detection sensor 620 detects the passage of the tip 631 of the initial position member 630, and each time this detection occurs, a detection signal is output to the display control device 114 (see Figure 33). The display control device 114 can check and correct the angular position of the left reel LR for each rotation based on this detection signal.

The stepping motor 600 is set so that, for example, applying a 400-pulse excitation signal causes the left reel LR to rotate once, and the rotation position of the stepping motor 600, i.e., the rotation position of the left reel LR, is driven and controlled by the display control device 114 depending on the output mode of this excitation signal.

More specifically, the left reel LR has multiple symbols and areas (16 in total, including number symbols, "chance" symbols, and blank areas) drawn along its long side (rotation direction). Therefore, to switch from a symbol (area) in a given position to the next symbol (area), i.e., to change the symbol by one frame, 25 pulses (= 400 ÷ 16 symbols = 16 frames) are required. The number of pulses from the time the reel position detection sensor 620 outputs a detection signal can be used to determine which symbols and areas are visible through the central opening 431 (see Figure 6) of the display area forming member 430, and to control the symbols so that any symbol or area is visible through the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430.

As described above, the number of symbols and areas visible through the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430, among the symbols and areas on the left reel LR, center reel CR, and right reel RR, is determined by the size of the symbol (area) and the vertical length of the central opening 431, and in the fifth embodiment, each reel LR, CR, and RR is configured to have three symbols and areas. Therefore, when all reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols and areas are visible to the player.

Next, with reference to Figures 60 to 66, the configuration of the stepping motor 600 will be described in more detail.

First, the operating principle of the stepping motor 600 will be explained with reference to Figures 60 and 61. Figure 60 is a schematic diagram showing the operating principle of the stepping motor 600 in the fifth embodiment. Also, Figure 61 is a connection diagram showing the drive system of the stepping motor 600 in the fifth embodiment.

The stepping motor 600 of the fifth embodiment is a hybrid two-phase excitation drive stepping motor that employs a one-two phase excitation drive system. Note that the stepping motor 600 is not limited to a hybrid or two-phase stepping motor, and various other stepping motors may be used, such as a four-phase excitation drive or five-phase excitation drive stepping motor, or a one-phase excitation drive stepping motor.

As shown in Figure 60, the hybrid stepping motor 600 is composed of a centrally located rotating part 602 and a fixed part 601 having a first shaft part 603, a second shaft part 604, a third shaft part 605, and a fourth shaft part 606 arranged around the rotating part 602.

The rotating part 602 is composed of a front rotating part 602a magnetized to the north pole and a rear rotating part 602b magnetized to the south pole, and is attached to the rotating shaft with a relative offset of 1/2 pitch so that the teeth on the periphery (outer periphery) of the rear rotating part 602b are positioned between the teeth on the periphery (outer periphery) of the front rotating part 602a. A cylindrical magnet (not shown) is attached between the front rotating part 602a and the rear rotating part 602b.

As shown in Figure 61, excitation coils L1 and L3 are bifilar wound around the first and third shaft portions 603 and 605, with the end of excitation coil L1 connected to the beginning of excitation coil L3, and a predetermined DC power supply +B (e.g., 24 volts) applied to this. Similarly, excitation coils L2 and L4 are bifilar wound around the second and fourth shaft portions 604 and 606, with the end of excitation coil L2 connected to the beginning of excitation coil L4, and the DC power supply +B is also applied to this.

Here, the phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L1 of the first shaft portion 603 to excite the first shaft portion 603 to the south pole and the third shaft portion 605 to the north pole is referred to as the "A phase." Conversely to the "A phase," the phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L3 of the third shaft portion 605 to excite the first shaft portion 603 to the north pole and the third shaft portion to the south pole is referred to as the "reverse A phase" (in Figure 61, a "-" is written above the "A").)

Similarly, the phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L2 of the second shaft portion 604 to excite the second shaft portion 604 to the south pole and the fourth shaft portion 606 to the north pole is referred to as the "B phase." Conversely to the "B phase," the phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L4 of the fourth shaft portion 606 to excite the second shaft portion 604 to the north pole and the fourth shaft portion 606 to the south pole is referred to as the "reverse B phase" (in Figure 61, a "-" is written above the "B").

In the fifth embodiment, in a stepping motor 600 using a 1-2 phase excitation drive system, in the case of a 1-phase excitation drive system, excitation signals can be applied sequentially to "phase A," "phase B," "reverse phase A," and "reverse phase B" to drive the rotating part 602 to rotate in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

For example, when voltage is first applied (energized) to "A phase," the protrusion of the first shaft portion 603, which has become its south pole, and the tooth of the front rotating portion 602a, and the protrusion of the third shaft portion 605, which has become its north pole, and the tooth of the rear rotating portion 602b, are attracted to each other by their respective attractive forces. Next, when voltage is applied (energized) to "B phase," the protrusion of the second shaft portion 604, which has become its south pole, and the tooth of the front rotating portion 602a, and the protrusion of the fourth shaft portion 606, which has become its north pole, and the tooth of the rear rotating portion 602b, are attracted to each other by their respective attractive forces. Next, when voltage is applied (energized) to "reverse A phase," the protrusion of the first shaft portion 603, which has become its north pole, and the tooth of the rear rotating portion 602b, and the protrusion of the third shaft portion 605, which has become its south pole, and the tooth of the front rotating portion 602a, are attracted to each other by their respective attractive forces. Next, when "reverse B phase" is applied (energized), the protrusion of the second shaft portion 604, which has become the north pole, faces the tooth of the rear rotating portion 602b, and the protrusion of the fourth shaft portion 606, which has become the south pole, faces the tooth of the front rotating portion 602a, due to their respective attractive forces. By exciting in this order, the rotating portion 602 rotates clockwise in Figure 60.

Now, with reference to Figure 62, the excitation sequence of the stepping motor 600 of the fifth embodiment will be described. Figure 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between excitation data and excitation order pointers in the fifth embodiment. The fifth embodiment employs a 1-2 phase excitation drive method in which 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are alternately performed. In 1-phase excitation, only one set of the first to fourth shaft sections 603-606 is excited, while in 2-phase excitation, two adjacent sets of the first to fourth shaft sections 603-606 are excited. In this 1-2 phase excitation drive method, excitation is performed according to the following excitation sequence (excitation order) of (a) to (h).

Specifically, the 1-2 phase excitation drive method is a drive method in which first, (a) only "A phase" is energized (1-phase excitation), then, (b) both "A phase" and "B phase" are energized (2-phase excitation), then, (c) only "B phase" is energized (1-phase excitation), then, (d) both "B phase" and "inverted A phase" are energized (2-phase excitation), then, (e) only "inverted A phase" is energized (1-phase excitation), then, (f) both "inverted A phase" and "inverted B phase" are energized (2-phase excitation), then, (g) only "inverted B phase" is energized (1-phase excitation), then, (h) both "inverted B phase" and "A phase" are energized (2-phase excitation), and then, returns to (a).

In the fifth embodiment, the left reel LR rotates once with a 400-pulse excitation signal, so the angle change based on a 1-pulse excitation signal, i.e., the angle change per step, is 9 degrees.

The excitation signal for the stepping motor 600 is provided to the motor driver 607 (see FIG. 61) as the excitation data shown in FIG. 62. This excitation data is stored in the RAM (not shown) of the display control device 114, and the appropriate excitation data is output to the input/output port 608 of the display control device 114 by timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU (not shown) of the display control device 114 every 2 milliseconds, which is the same interval as the periodic processing in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1102 to S1109 in FIG. 46). This excitation data determines the excitation phase for the stepping motor 600, and an excitation signal (current) is applied to that excitation phase. Note that the interval of the timer interrupt processing of the display control device 114 may be configured to be every 1 millisecond, the same interval as the periodic processing in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113.

The stepping motor 600 is configured to use two-phase excitation for the initial excitation. With one-phase excitation, the rotational torque generated is smaller than with two-phase excitation, so there is a possibility that sufficient initial speed will not be obtained. If sufficient initial speed is not obtained, there is a high possibility of step-out, so two-phase excitation is preferred for initial excitation.

In addition, when stopping the stepping motor 600, four-phase excitation is performed immediately after two-phase excitation. If braking were performed using only two-phase excitation, the rotation speed would drop sharply due to the strong braking force, and players would be concerned that the movement of the reels LR, CR, and RR during braking would feel strange to the player. In contrast, by performing four-phase excitation immediately after two-phase excitation, it is possible to smoothly stop the reels LR, CR, and RR.

When using the stepping motor 600 of the fifth embodiment, the drive characteristics shown in Figure 63 or Figure 64 are required. Figure 63 is a diagram showing an example of the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 600 executed in a series of variable effects in the fifth embodiment. Also, Figure 64 is a diagram showing an example of the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 600 executed during the "full rotation" effect in the fifth embodiment.

The example shown in Figure 63 shows the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 600 in the "non-reach (long)" presentation mode, and is divided into an acceleration period Ta, in which the stepping motor 600 begins to rotate after the variable presentation starts, and reaches a constant speed at a high speed where the symbols are difficult for the player to see; a high-speed constant-speed period Tb during which the motor rotates at this high-speed constant speed (for example, changing one frame every 100 ms); a first deceleration period Tc during which the motor decelerates from the high-speed constant-speed rotation to a low-speed constant-speed rotation where the symbols are visible to the player; a low-speed constant-speed period Td during which the motor rotates at the low-speed constant speed; and a second deceleration period Te during which the motor stops rotating at this low-speed constant speed.

In other words, the period consisting of the acceleration period Ta and the high-speed constant period Tb matches the execution time of the "high-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element in the variable effect, and is set so that Ta + Tb = 10 seconds. Furthermore, the period consisting of the first deceleration period Tc, the low-speed constant period Td, and the second deceleration period Te matches the time until the left reel LR stops during the execution time of the "slow-speed fluctuation" variable element in the variable effect, and is set so that Tc + Td + Te ≦ 5 seconds.

The example shown in Figure 64 shows the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 600 during a "full rotation" presentation, which is one type of "re-variation" presentation mode. In a "full rotation" presentation, when a jackpot symbol (for example, a jackpot result with a "5" symbol) appears on any active line, the jackpot symbol changes again, and each of the LR, CR, and RR reels rotates approximately one time, changing into another jackpot symbol (for example, a jackpot result with a "6" symbol). This re-variation and provisional stop are then executed multiple times, and finally, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot result that won the jackpot lottery (for example, a jackpot result with a "7" symbol) is stopped.

In the example shown in Figure 64, the stepping motor 600 begins to rotate after the "full rotation" effect of the symbols that have been temporarily stopped in the various variable elements begins, and the period is divided into a first acceleration period T1 during which the symbols rotate at a constant speed at a high speed that makes them difficult for the player to see, a first high-speed constant speed period T2 during which the symbols rotate at this high-speed constant speed, a first temporary stop period T3 during which all reels LR, CR, RR that have been rotating at this high-speed constant speed come to a simultaneous stop (so-called perfect stop) and begin to rotate again, a second acceleration period T4 during which the symbols rotate at the high-speed constant speed again, and a second high-speed constant speed period T5 during which the symbols rotate at this high-speed constant speed.

That is, during the period consisting of the first acceleration period T1 and the first high-speed constant speed period T2, the first temporary stop symbol (for example, a jackpot with a "1" symbol) that appears before the start of the "full rotation" effect changes to the next second temporary stop symbol (for example, a jackpot with a "2" symbol), the second temporary stop symbol is shown to the player during the first temporary stop period T3, and during the period consisting of the second acceleration period T4 and the second high-speed constant speed period T5, the second temporary stop symbol changes to the next actual stop symbol (for example, a jackpot with a "3" symbol).

In the fifth embodiment, during the "full rotation" effect, the first acceleration period T1 and first high-speed constant speed period T2 on all reels LR, CR, and RR are configured to last 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds; hereinafter, milliseconds may be referred to as "ms"). The first temporary stop period T3 during which the second temporary stop symbol is displayed on all reels LR, CR, and RR is configured to last 0.5 seconds (500 ms). Furthermore, the second acceleration period T4 and second high-speed constant speed period T5 on all reels LR, CR, and RR are configured to last 2 seconds (2000 ms). Therefore, when the "re-change" variable element is executed in the "full rotation" effect, the execution time from the first temporary stop symbol to the actual stop symbol is 4.5 seconds (4500 ms), and then the actual stop symbol is displayed for 0.5 seconds (500 ms), thereby ending the "re-change" variable element.

As mentioned above, the arrangement of the symbols on the left reel LR, center reel CR, and right reel RR is reversed, so when the "full spin" effect is produced, all reels LR, CR, and RR are driven for approximately one rotation (i.e., approximately 16 symbols = approximately 16 frames (± 2 frames)). Hereinafter, spinning all reels LR, CR, and RR for 14 to 18 frames may be referred to as "approximately one rotation") from the first temporary stop symbol to change to the second temporary stop symbol, the amount of change in the symbol on the left reel LR is different from the amount of change in the symbol on the center reel CR and right reel RR.

Specifically, for example, if, as a result of a "reach display," a jackpot symbol of "1" is temporarily stopped in the middle position of each reel LR, CR, and RR as the first temporary stopping symbol, and a "full rotation" effect is executed, in order to stop a jackpot symbol of "2" in the middle position of each reel LR, CR, and RR as the second temporary stopping symbol, the left reel LR, whose symbols are arranged in descending order, needs to change its symbol by 16 frames - 2 frames = 14 frames for one rotation, while the middle reel CR and right reel RR, whose symbols are arranged in ascending order, need to change its symbol by 16 frames + 2 frames = 18 frames for one rotation. In other words, when changing from one temporary stop symbol to the next during a "full spin" effect, the left reel LR has a four-frame smaller change amount than the center reel CR and right reel RR.

In this case, in order for the reels LR, CR, and RR, which were fluctuating at high speed during the first acceleration period T1 or the first high-speed constant speed period T2, to stop simultaneously and change to the second temporary stop pattern, it is necessary to rotate all reels LR, CR, and RR in a state where they are aligned with the second temporary stop pattern during the first acceleration period T1 or the first high-speed constant speed period T2. In order to align all reels LR, CR, and RR during the first acceleration period T1 and the first high-speed constant speed period T2, (1) all reels LR, CR, and RR stopped and displayed with the first provisional stop symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol of a symbol "1") are started to rotate simultaneously, and only the left reel LR has a different fluctuation pattern (acceleration pattern, high-speed constant speed time, or high-speed constant speed, etc.) from the fluctuation pattern (acceleration pattern, high-speed constant speed time, or high-speed constant speed, etc.) of the center reel CR and the right reel RR, and the second provisional stop symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol of a symbol "2") is stopped simultaneously after about one rotation of all reels LR, CR, and RR; or (2) among all reels LR, CR, and RR stopped and displayed with the first provisional stop symbol, the second provisional stop symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol of a symbol "2") is stopped simultaneously after about one rotation of all reels LR, CR, and RR. One possible drive control pattern is to start the rotation of the center reel CR and right reel RR first, as these have a larger amount of change before reaching the stopping pattern, and then start the rotation of the left reel LR when the numerical pattern corresponding to the second temporary stopping pattern on the center reel CR and right reel RR (for example, the "2" on the center reel CR and right reel RR) reaches the vicinity of the numerical pattern corresponding to the second temporary stopping pattern on the left reel LR (for example, the "2" on the left reel LR), and then simultaneously stop all reels LR, CR, and RR at the end of the first high-speed constant speed period T2 with the second temporary stopping pattern aligned on all reels LR, CR, and RR at the same rotation speed during at least some of the first high-speed constant speed period T2.

However, in the case of drive control pattern (1), although the rotation start times of all reels LR, CR, and RR are synchronized, it is necessary to prepare multiple acceleration patterns for each reel LR, CR, and RR during the first acceleration period T1, it is necessary to prepare multiple rotation speed patterns for each reel LR, CR, and RR during the first high-speed constant speed period T2, and control is required to adjust the execution timing of the above acceleration patterns and rotation speeds, making the drive control of each reel LR, CR, and RR to adjust the acceleration pattern and rotation speed complicated. Furthermore, because blank areas are formed between the number symbols on each reel LR, CR, and RR, the rotation speeds of the reels LR, CR, and RR, which rotate at a constant speed for a relatively long period during the first high-speed constant speed period T2, may differ (shift) and the number symbols may not line up. As a result, the blank areas line up horizontally between the number symbols, creating a fluctuating appearance as if the number symbols are lined up, which may give the player a sense of discomfort and dampen interest in the "full spin" effect.

On the other hand, in the case of drive control pattern (2), although it is necessary to prepare multiple acceleration patterns for each reel LR, CR, and RR during the first acceleration period T1 and to control the execution timing of the acceleration patterns and rotation speeds, it is not necessary to prepare multiple rotation speed patterns for each reel LR, CR, and RR during the first high-speed constant speed period T2. Therefore, although there is a sense of incongruity due to the rotation start timing of the left reel LR differing from the rotation start timing of the center reel CR and right reel RR, it is possible to synchronize and change the rotation speeds of all reels LR, CR, and RR at a constant speed relatively early in the first high-speed constant speed period T2 for each reel LR, CR, and RR. As a result, the drive control of each reel LR, CR, RR can be simplified compared to the drive control pattern (1), reducing the control burden, and not only does it not give the player a sense of discomfort relatively early in the first high-speed constant speed period T2 (at least the latter half), it also prevents the player from losing interest in the game and increases the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is configured to drive and control each reel LR, CR, RR using the drive control pattern (2) above during the "full spin" presentation.

As mentioned above, the stepping motor 600 is configured to transition to a constant speed rotation state after a predetermined acceleration period. This acceleration period is the transition time from when the previous variable effect stops to when the subsequent variable effect is clearly being executed (i.e., high-speed constant speed rotation in the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element). Therefore, it is desirable for the stepping motor 600 to transition from the acceleration state to the constant speed rotation state as quickly as possible. This can be achieved by quickly switching the excitation phase of the stepping motor 600, but this could result in loss of synchronization or unstable rotation.

In particular, with the stepping motor 600, when the teeth of the rotating part 602 are attracted to the protrusions of each of the shaft parts 603-606 during initial excitation, initial rotational fluctuations (micro-vibrations accompanied by reciprocating motion) occur in the rotating part 602. While this rotational fluctuation varies depending on the specifications, for example, there may be five to six reciprocating motions, with one reciprocating motion occurring every 30 ms. Therefore, it is necessary to set the excitation phase switching mode during the acceleration period while taking this initial rotational fluctuation into consideration.

In the fifth embodiment, the reels LR, CR, and RR are configured to suppress the effects of the initial rotational fluctuations described above, while the acceleration patterns during the "full spin" effect are set to be different for the left reel LR, center reel CR, and right reel RR. Specifically, the center reel CR and right reel RR begin spinning with the same normal acceleration pattern (see S2015 in Figures 65 and 70) as when normal fluctuations begin, while the left reel LR begins spinning with a special acceleration pattern that differs from the normal acceleration pattern.

Now, with reference to Figures 65 to 68, we will explain the excitation patterns of each reel LR, CR, and RR when accelerating during the "full spin" effect. Figure 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the excitation pattern for normal acceleration processing in the fifth embodiment, and Figure 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the excitation pattern for special acceleration processing in the fifth embodiment. Furthermore, Figure 67 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the drive mode of each reel LR, CR, and RR and the output mode of the music during the "full spin" effect in the fifth embodiment. Furthermore, Figure 68 is a schematic diagram showing the progression of the "full rotation" effect performed by the drum display device 81 in the fifth embodiment, Figure 68(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a provisional jackpot result by the "1" symbol is stopped, Figure 68(b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the center reel CR and the right reel RR have started to rotate by normal acceleration processing from the state of Figure 68(a), and Figure 68(c) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the center reel CR and the right reel RR have started to rotate at a high and constant speed from the state of Figure 68(b), and the left reel L FIG. 68(d) is a schematic diagram showing the state in which the left reel LR, center reel CR, and right reel RR have begun to spin through special acceleration processing, from the state in FIG. 68(c) , with the left reel LR, center reel CR, and right reel RR spinning at high and constant speeds, FIG. 68(e) is a schematic diagram showing the state in which the left reel LR, center reel CR, and right reel RR are spinning at high and constant speeds, similar to the state in FIG. 68(d), and FIG. 68(f) is a schematic diagram showing the state in which the provisional jackpot result of the "2" symbol has stopped, from the state in FIG. 68(e) . Note that in FIG. 68, the configuration of the drum display device 81 and the display mode of the third symbol are omitted (schematically).

First, in the example of normal acceleration processing shown in Figure 65, this is the same acceleration processing as when the reels LR, CR, and RR start to fluctuate during a fluctuation presentation. For the initial excitation, "acceleration order 1" (1 pulse), the state set to two-phase excitation is maintained for 67 interrupts (i.e., 67 timer interrupt processes = 134 ms). Then, for "acceleration order 2," it switches to one-phase excitation, and this state is maintained for eight interrupts (i.e., 16 ms). Then, for "acceleration order 3," it switches to two-phase excitation, and this state is maintained for seven interrupts (i.e., 14 ms). Then, the excitation phases are alternately switched, with the excitation phase switching interval gradually becoming shorter. As a result, during the normal acceleration process's "acceleration orders 1-25," i.e., the period during which 25 pulses are output, equivalent to one symbol change, 150 interrupts = 2 ms x 150 = 300 ms is set as the excitation period, making it possible to eliminate the initial rotational fluctuations mentioned above. Furthermore, by reusing the acceleration pattern used at the start of fluctuations, the number of acceleration patterns can be reduced, simplifying the drive control of each reel LR, CR, and RR.

In the example of special acceleration processing shown in Figure 66, the initial excitation, "Acceleration Order 1" (1 pulse), is maintained in a 2-phase excitation state for 17 interrupts (i.e., 17 timer interrupts = 34 ms). Then, as in normal acceleration processing, "Acceleration Order 2" switches to 1-phase excitation, and this state is maintained for 8 interrupts (i.e., 16 ms). Then, as in "Acceleration Order 3," switches to 2-phase excitation, and this state is maintained for 7 interrupts (i.e., 14 ms). After that, the excitation phases are alternately switched, with the excitation phase switching intervals gradually shortening. As a result, the excitation period for "Acceleration Orders 1 to 25" of the special acceleration processing, i.e., the period during which 25 pulses are output, equivalent to one symbol change, is set to 100 interrupts = 2 ms x 100 = 200 ms, during which the initial rotational fluctuation can be eliminated.

In other words, the special acceleration process controls the drive of the left reel LR so that it accelerates to high-speed constant rotation in a period 100 ms shorter than the normal acceleration process. Therefore, during the "full rotation" effect, the left reel LR can be rotated at high-speed constant rotation in a relatively short period of time.

More specifically, as shown in Figures 67 and 68, during the "full spin" effect, first, the center reel CR and right reel RR, which are displayed stopped with the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "1" symbol), begin to rotate simultaneously using normal acceleration processing (see the start of rotation of the center reel CR and right reel RR in Figure 67 and Figures 68(a) and (b)). Then, once they reach a predetermined high constant speed, the center reel CR and right reel RR are rotated while maintaining that high constant speed rotation. Next, when the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2") on the center reel CR and right reel RR, which are being rotated at a high constant speed, reaches the near side of the position corresponding to the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2") on the left reel LR (see the start of rotation of the left reel LR in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68(c)), the left reel LR, which is displayed as stopped with the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "1"), begins to rotate by special acceleration processing. Then, when the left reel LR reaches the high-speed constant rotation speed (see the constant speed state of all reels LR, CR, and RR in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68(d) and (e)), the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2") on the left reel LR and the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2") on the center reel CR and right reel RR are set to rotate at a high constant speed while maintaining a horizontal alignment. Then, when the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) reaches the middle pay line, all reels LR, CR, and RR, which have been spinning at a constant high speed, come to a perfect stop simultaneously, and the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) is displayed stopped on the middle pay line (see the timing when all reels LR, CR, and RR come to a stop in Figure 67 and Figure 68 (f)).

This configuration simplifies the drive control of each reel LR, CR, and RR, reducing the control burden. Furthermore, during at least the latter half of the first high-speed constant speed period T2, the number symbols can be rotated while aligning with each other without any blank areas in the horizontal direction of the number symbols. This prevents players from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest in the game, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, in order to reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player when the rotation start timing of the center reel CR and right reel RR differs from the rotation start timing of the left reel LR during the "full spin" effect, the timing of the output of a predetermined music piece is synchronized during the period from when one temporary stop symbol (e.g., "1" symbol) changes to the next temporary stop symbol (e.g., "2" symbol), thereby alleviating the sense of discomfort.

Specifically, during the "full spin" effect, a predetermined piece of music is played in sync with the period from when the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "1" symbol) to when the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) stops and appears. Furthermore, the timing at which each reel (LR, CR, RR) starts spinning is synchronized with the beats (rhythms) that are output (played) at equal intervals in the music.

More specifically, in the example shown in Figure 67, during the "full spin" effect, the center reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, are set to change from the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "1" symbol) to the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) in 2 seconds, and the tempo of the music output during this change time is set to 120 beats per minute (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "BPM"), i.e., one beat every 0.5 seconds, and one measure of the music is output in 4/4 time. The center reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, begin spinning simultaneously with the start of the first beat of the measure, and the left reel LR, which change by 14 frames, begins spinning at the timing of the second beat of the measure.

In this case, the center reel CR and right reel RR, which displace by 18 frames, spin the first frame (i.e., from the "1" symbol to the blank area above) using normal acceleration processing with an acceleration change every 300 ms, and then spin the remaining 17 frames (i.e., from the blank area to the "2" symbol) at a high-speed constant speed of 100 ms, changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol over a total of 2000 ms. In other words, the center reel CR and right reel RR begin spinning in sync with the start of the first beat (strong beat) of a measure in a 120 BPM, 4/4 time song.

Meanwhile, the left reel LR, which displaces by 14 frames, spins the first frame (i.e., from the "1" symbol to the blank area above) using a special acceleration process of 200 ms, and then spins the remaining 13 frames (i.e., from the blank area to the "2" symbol) at a high-speed constant speed of 100 ms, changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol over a total of 1500 ms. In other words, the left reel LR begins spinning in sync with the start of the second beat (weak beat) of a measure in a 120 BPM, 4/4 time song.

Then, while all reels LR, CR, and RR are spinning at a high constant speed, the third beat (weak beat) and fourth beat (weak beat) of one measure are output, and then, at the end of that measure (after the fourth beat ends, 2000 ms after the center reel CR and right reel RR start to spin), all reels LR, CR, and RR stop spinning simultaneously, synchronized, and the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) is displayed stopped on the middle active line.

By configuring it in this way, during the "full spin" effect, the discrepancy in the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR that can be seen by the player is matched to the beat of the music that can be perceived by the player's ears. This cancels out (suppresses) the discrepancy caused by the visual perception through the harmony (synchronization) of the tempo perceived by the player, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable during the "full spin" effect, which has the highest chance of winning a jackpot, and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to Figures 69 and 70, we will explain the control processes executed by the MPU (not shown) within the display control device 114. The MPU processes mainly include motor control processing (see Figure 69) that controls the drive of the stepping motor 600, and reel rotation start processing (see Figure 70) that is executed within the motor control processing.

Figure 69 is a flowchart showing the motor control processing executed by the MPU in the display control device 114 of the fifth embodiment. Note that the motor control processing may also be configured to be executed by a control device other than the display control device 114, for example, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 or the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The motor control process shown in Figure 69 is executed within the main process, which is executed periodically after the specified startup process in the display control device 114 has completed, and mainly performs drive control of the stepping motor 600 in the drum display device 81.

In this motor control process, it is first determined whether control of the stepping motor 600 corresponding to any of the reels LR, CR, and RR is necessary (S2001). If it is determined that control of the stepping motor 600 corresponding to any of the reels LR, CR, and RR is not necessary (S2001: No), that is, if all of the reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped, this motor control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2001 that control of the stepping motor 600 corresponding to any of the reels LR, CR, and RR is necessary (S2001: Yes), processing is performed to determine the rotational position of the reel LR, CR, or RR to be processed based on the detection results of the reel position detection sensor 620 and the number of excitation data outputs (S2002).

Next, it is determined whether the timing to start braking has arrived for the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed (S2003). If it is determined that the timing to start braking has arrived for the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to reel rotation processing (S2004) to start the rotation of the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed. After the reel rotation processing (S2004) is completed, the process proceeds to S2005. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing to start braking has not arrived for the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed (S2003: No), the process skips S2004 and proceeds to S2005.

Now, the reel spin start processing (S2004) will be described with reference to Figure 70. Figure 70 is a flowchart showing the reel spin start processing (S2004) executed by the MPU in the display control device 114 of the fifth embodiment.

In this reel spin start process (S2004), it is first determined whether the braking start timing of each reel LR, CR, and RR is the start of a variable effect (S2011). If it is determined that it is the start of a variable effect (S2011: Yes), all reels LR, CR, and RR begin spinning using normal acceleration processing (S2012), and this reel spin start process (S2004) ends, returning to the motor control process (see FIG. 69). If it is determined that it is the start of a variable effect, it is further determined whether it is a normal fluctuation, which is performed when the number of reserved balls is small, or a shortened fluctuation, which is performed when the number of reserved balls is large. If it is a normal fluctuation, the rotation of each reel LR, CR, and RR begins using normal acceleration processing, while if it is a shortened fluctuation, the rotation of each reel LR, CR, and RR begins using special acceleration processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2011 that the variable effect has not yet begun (S2011: No), it is then determined whether or not a "full spin" effect is occurring (S2013). If the result of this determination is that the "full spin" effect is not occurring (S2013: No), this reel spin start processing (S2004) is terminated and the process returns to the motor control processing (see FIG. 69). On the other hand, if it is determined that the "full spin" effect is occurring (S2013: Yes), it is then determined whether or not all reels LR, CR, and RR are temporarily stopped and the temporary stop time has elapsed, i.e., whether or not it is time for the center reel CR and right reel RR to start spinning (S2014).

If it is determined in S2014 that all reels LR, CR, and RR are temporarily stopped and that the temporary stop time has elapsed (S2014: Yes), the center reel CR and right reel RR begin to rotate using normal acceleration processing (see FIG. 65) (S2015), and at that timing, the first beat of one measure of the music corresponding to the "full spin" effect (i.e., 120 BPM and 4/4 time) is output from the audio output device 226 (S2016), the reel rotation start processing (S2004) ends, and the process returns to the motor control processing (see FIG. 69).

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S2014 is that all reels LR, CR, and RR are temporarily stopped and the timing has not yet reached the point where the temporary stop time has elapsed (S2014: No), then it is determined whether the left reel LR is temporarily stopped and the timing has reached the point where the temporary stop time has elapsed, i.e., whether it is the timing for the left reel LR to start spinning (S2017).

If, as a result of the determination in S2017, it is determined that the left reel LR is in a temporarily stopped state and that the temporary stop time has elapsed (S2017: Yes), the left reel LR starts spinning using a special acceleration process (see FIG. 66) (S2018), and at that timing, the second beat of the first measure of the music corresponding to the "full spin" effect is output from the audio output device 226 (S2019), after which the reel spin start process (S2004) ends and the process returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69). Note that, if, in the process of S2017, it is determined that the left reel LR is in a temporarily stopped state and that the temporary stop time has not elapsed (S2017: No), the reel spin start process (S2004) ends and the process returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69).

Returning to Figure 69, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S2005, reel control processing is performed (S2005), and processing proceeds to S2006. This reel control processing (S2005) performs processing to generate excitation data for rotation control of the stepping motor 600. In addition, in order to realize the excitation pattern of the fifth embodiment, multiple acceleration tables (see Figures 65 and 66) are stored in the ROM (not shown) of the display control device 114, and these acceleration tables contain at least acceleration counter data and switching interval data that corresponds one-to-one to the acceleration counter data.

The reel control process of S2005 uses a switching interval counter, acceleration counter, and excitation order pointer provided in the RAM (not shown) of the display control device 114. The switching interval counter is set with the number of timer interrupts corresponding to the excitation phase switching interval. The excitation order pointer is a pointer used when determining the excitation phase for the stepping motor 600. When a 1-2 phase excitation stepping motor 600 is used, 1 phase excitation and 2 phase excitation are performed alternately, resulting in 8 phase excitation patterns as shown in Figure 62. The value (0 to 7) of this excitation order pointer specifies which excitation data for which phase excitation is acquired as output excitation data and temporarily stored in the RAM of the display control device 114.

This reel control process determines whether each reel LR, CR, and RR is braking. If not, the process subtracts 1 from the switching interval counter, provided that the numerical information of the switching interval counter is 1 or greater, and determines whether the numerical information after the subtraction is 0. If the numerical information is not 0, the reel control process is terminated. If the numerical information is 0, the acceleration table is read from the ROM (not shown) of the display control device 114, and the switching interval data from the acceleration table corresponding to the current acceleration counter value is set to the switching interval counter. For example, when each reel LR, CR, and RR starts to spin, the reel spin start process (see Figure 70) is executed, and the numerical information of the acceleration counter is set to 25, which corresponds to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table. In this case, the numerical information of 2 is set to the switching interval counter.

Next, the excitation order pointer is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information of the excitation order pointer, and if the numerical information after this addition exceeds the maximum value of the excitation order pointer, "7," the numerical information is cleared to "0." An excitation data table such as that shown in FIG. 62 is then read from the ROM of the display control device 114, and the excitation data corresponding to the current numerical information of the excitation order pointer is read. The read excitation data is then stored in RAM as the current excitation data for the reels LR, CR, and RR that are the targets of the reel control process.

Next, provided that the numerical information on the acceleration counter is "1" or greater, the numerical information on the acceleration counter is decremented by 1. As a result, when the next excitation phase switching is performed for the reels LR, CR, and RR currently being processed, the switching interval data corresponding to the numerical information on the acceleration counter after this decrement is set. In this case, because execution is performed on the condition that the numerical information on the acceleration counter is "1" or greater, if the numerical information on the acceleration counter is already "0," that state is maintained. Furthermore, when the numerical information on the acceleration counter is "0," the switching interval is one interrupt. Therefore, once the numerical information on the acceleration counter becomes "0," the excitation phase is switched according to the numerical information of the excitation order pointer each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. This state is the constant speed state.

In S2006, it is determined whether control of the stepping motor 600 for all rotating reels LR, CR, and RR has ended (S2006). If control of the stepping motor 600 for all rotating reels LR, CR, and RR has ended (S2006: Yes), excitation data for each rotating reel LR, CR, and RR is output to the input/output port 608 (see FIG. 61) of the display control device 114 (S2007), and this motor control process ends. On the other hand, if control of the stepping motor 600 for all rotating reels LR, CR, and RR has not ended (S2006: No) in S2006, S2007 is skipped and this motor control process ends.

Since the output to the input/output port 608 of the display control device 114 is a data writing process to an output port (not shown) corresponding to the input/output port 608, the excitation data is supplied to the motor driver 607 (see Figure 61) at the same time that the excitation data is written to the input/output port 608. As a result, the stepping motor 600 immediately energizes the excitation phase specified by the excitation data, and excitation of the rotating part 602 is performed.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the "full rotation" effect, the center reel CR and right reel RR, which are stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop symbol, begin to rotate simultaneously using normal acceleration processing. Then, when a predetermined constant speed is reached, the center reel CR and right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high-speed constant rotation. Next, the second temporary stop symbol on the center reel CR and right reel RR, which are being rotated at high speed, becomes the second temporary stop symbol on the left reel LR, and the left reel LR, which is stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop symbol, begins to rotate using special acceleration processing. Then, when the left reel LR reaches the high-speed constant rotation, the second temporary stop symbol on the left reel LR and the second temporary stop symbols on the center reel CR and right reel RR are set to rotate at high speed while maintaining a horizontal alignment. Then, when the second temporary stop symbol next reaches the middle payline, all reels LR, CR, and RR that have been spinning at high constant speed come to a simultaneous, so-called "perfect stop," and the second temporary stop symbol is displayed stopped on the middle payline. This configuration simplifies the drive control of each reel LR, CR, and RR, reducing the control burden. Furthermore, during at least the latter half of the first high-speed constant speed period T2, the number symbols can be rotated while aligning with each other without any blank areas to the side of the number symbols. This prevents the player from feeling uneasy and losing interest in the game, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the "full rotation" effect, the time it takes for the center reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, to change from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol is set to 2 seconds, and the tempo of the music output during this change time is set to 120 BPM, which indicates the number of beats per minute, and one measure of the music is output in 4/4 time. The center reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, are then configured to start rotating simultaneously with the start of the first beat of the measure, and the left reel LR, which change by 14 frames, is configured to start rotating at the timing of the second beat of the measure. By configuring it in this way, during the "full spin" effect, the discrepancy in the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR that can be seen by the player is matched to the beat of the music that can be heard by the player, thereby canceling out (suppressing) the discrepancy caused by the visual perception through the harmony (synchronization) of the tempo perceived by the player. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable during the "full spin" effect, which has the highest chance of winning a jackpot, and prevents the player from losing interest in the game, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to fourth embodiments and achieves the same effects.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, with reference to Figure 71, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the "full rotation" effect, the sound of one measure of music is output while the first temporary stop symbol changes from the first to the second temporary stop symbol, and the center reel CR and right reel RR begin to rotate on the first beat of that measure, and the left reel LR begins to rotate on the second beat of that measure, synchronizing the timing at which each reel LR, CR, and RR begins to spin with the tempo of the music. In this case, by differentiating the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the center reel CR and right reel RR from the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the left reel LR, the timing at which each reel LR, CR, and RR begins to spin is synchronized with the tempo of the music.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment outputs a musical piece composed of a main note that forms the main sound (e.g., a loud volume, main melody, female part (soprano or alto), melody line, etc.) and a secondary note that forms a supplementary sound to the main note (e.g., a softer volume, secondary melody (accompaniment), male part (tenor or bass), bass line, etc.) while the "full rotation" effect is changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol. The main note is output when the center reel CR and right reel RR start to rotate, and the secondary note is also output when the left reel LR starts to rotate. In this case, the acceleration pattern for the center reel CR and right reel RR and the acceleration pattern for the left reel LR are executed in the same pattern (i.e., normal acceleration processing).

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those of the first to fifth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of these elements will be omitted.

In the sixth embodiment, the drive modes and timing of each reel LR, CR, and RR during the "full spin" effect, and the output modes and timing of the music consisting of the main sound and secondary sound, will be explained with reference to Figure 71. Figure 71 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the drive modes of each reel LR, CR, and RR and the output modes of the music during the "full spin" effect in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 71, during the "full rotation" effect of the sixth embodiment, first, the center reel CR and right reel RR, which are stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "1" symbol), begin to rotate simultaneously using normal acceleration processing (when the center reel CR and right reel RR start to rotate in FIG. 71). Then, when they reach a predetermined high constant speed, the center reel CR and right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high constant speed rotation. Next, when the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) on the center reel CR and right reel RR, which are rotating at a high constant speed, reaches the front side of the position corresponding to the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) on the left reel LR (when the left reel LR starts to rotate in FIG. 71), the left reel LR, which is stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "1" symbol), begins to rotate using normal acceleration processing, similar to the center reel CR and right reel RR. Then, when the left reel LR reaches the high-speed constant rotation (constant rotation of all reels LR, CR, and RR in Figure 71), the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2") on the left reel LR and the second temporary stop symbols (i.e., the "2") on the center reel CR and right reel RR are set to rotate at high speed while maintaining a horizontal alignment. Then, when the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2") reaches the middle payline, all reels LR, CR, and RR, which have been rotating at high speed, come to a perfect stop simultaneously, and the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2") is displayed stopped on the middle payline (the timing when all reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped in Figure 71).

By configuring in this way, the acceleration process at the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, and RR can be standardized, simplifying drive control and reducing the control burden. Furthermore, during at least the latter half of the first high-speed constant speed period T2, the number symbols can be rotated while aligning with each other without any blank areas existing horizontally between them. This prevents players from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest in the game, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, in order to reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player due to the difference in the rotation start timing of the center reel CR and right reel RR from the rotation start timing of the left reel LR during the "full spin" effect, the timing of the output of a predetermined music piece is synchronized during the period from when one temporary stop symbol (e.g., "1" symbol) changes to the next temporary stop symbol (e.g., "2" symbol), thereby mitigating the sense of discomfort.

Specifically, during the "full spin" effect, a predetermined piece of music is output that synchronizes with the period from the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "1" symbol) to the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) appearing in a stopped state. The music is also composed of a main note and a secondary note, and the timing at which the spinning of each of the reels LR, CR, and RR begins is synchronized with the timing at which the main note and secondary note begin to be output.

More specifically, in the example shown in Figure 71, during the "full spin" effect, the center reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, are configured to change from the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "1" symbol) to the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) over a period of 2 seconds, and the music output during this change period is also configured to be output for 2 seconds. The center reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, are configured to start spinning simultaneously with the start of output of the main sound of the music, and the left reel LR, which change by 14 frames, is configured to start spinning at the same time as the start of output of the secondary sound of the music.

In this case, the center reel CR and right reel RR, which displace by 18 frames, spin the first frame (i.e., from the "1" symbol to the blank area above) using normal acceleration processing with an acceleration change every 300 ms, and then spin the remaining 17 frames (i.e., from the blank area to the "2" symbol) at a high-speed constant speed of 100 ms, changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol over a total of 2000 ms. In other words, the center reel CR and right reel RR begin spinning in sync with the output of the main sound of the music for 2 seconds.

The left reel LR, which displaces by 14 frames, spins the first frame (i.e., from the "1" symbol to the blank area above) at a normal acceleration rate of 300 ms, just like the center reel CR and right reel RR, and then spins the remaining 13 frames (i.e., from the blank area to the "2" symbol) at a high-speed constant rate of 100 ms, changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol over a total of 1600 ms. In other words, the left reel LR begins spinning in sync with the output of the secondary sound, which is output 400 ms after the start of the 2-second music.

Then, while all reels LR, CR, and RR are spinning at a high constant speed, the main and secondary sounds of the song are continuously output, and then, when the song ends (2000 ms after the center reel CR and right reel RR start spinning), all reels LR, CR, and RR stop spinning simultaneously, and the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) is displayed stopped on the middle pay line.

By configuring it in this way, during the "full spin" effect, the discrepancy in the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR that can be seen by the player is driven in accordance with the output of each element that makes up the music that can be perceived by the player's ears. This cancels out (suppresses) the discrepancy caused by the sight through the harmony (synchronization) of the music that is heard by the player, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable during the "full spin" effect, which has the highest chance of winning a jackpot, and increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, by using the same normal acceleration process to perform the acceleration process at the start of rotation for each reel LR, CR, and RR during a "full spin" effect, there is no need to set up special acceleration patterns such as special acceleration processes, which simplifies the drive control of each reel LR, CR, and RR and reduces the control burden related to symbol control.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to fifth embodiments and achieves the same effects.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, with reference to Figure 72, a pachinko machine 10 according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the "full rotation" effect, the sound of one measure of music is output while the first temporary stop symbol changes from the first to the second temporary stop symbol, and the center reel CR and right reel RR begin to rotate on the first beat of that measure, and the left reel LR begins to rotate on the second beat of that measure, synchronizing the timing at which each reel LR, CR, and RR begins to spin with the tempo of the music. In this case, by differentiating the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the center reel CR and right reel RR from the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the left reel LR, the timing at which each reel LR, CR, and RR begins to spin is synchronized with the tempo of the music.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment outputs a musical piece (sound effect) composed of at least one first note (e.g., Do-Mi) that constitutes a chord (chord) formed by combining three or more notes (e.g., Do-Re-Mi (C chord)) while the first temporary stop symbol changes from the first to the second temporary stop symbol during a "full rotation" effect, and the second note (e.g., So) that is the remaining note of the chord. The first sound is output when the center reel CR and right reel RR start to rotate, and the second sound is output when the left reel LR starts to rotate. In this case, as in the sixth embodiment, the acceleration pattern for the center reel CR and right reel RR and the acceleration pattern for the left reel LR are executed in the same pattern (i.e., normal acceleration processing).

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the first to sixth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those of the first to sixth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions of these elements will be omitted.

In the seventh embodiment, the drive modes and timing of each reel LR, CR, and RR during the "full spin" effect, and the output modes and timing of the music (sound effect) consisting of the first and second sounds, will be described with reference to Figure 72. Figure 72 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the drive modes of each reel LR, CR, and RR and the output modes of the music during the "full spin" effect in the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 72, during the "full rotation" effect of the seventh embodiment, first, the center reel CR and right reel RR, which are stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "1" symbol), begin to rotate simultaneously using normal acceleration processing (when the center reel CR and right reel RR start to rotate in FIG. 72). Then, when they reach a predetermined high constant speed, the center reel CR and right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high constant speed rotation. Next, when the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) on the center reel CR and right reel RR, which are rotating at a high constant speed, reaches the front side of the position corresponding to the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) on the left reel LR (when the left reel LR starts to rotate in FIG. 72), the left reel LR, which is stopped and displayed with the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "1" symbol), begins to rotate using normal acceleration processing, just like the center reel CR and right reel RR. Then, when the left reel LR reaches the high-speed constant rotation (constant rotation of all reels LR, CR, and RR in Figure 72), the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) on the left reel LR and the second temporary stop symbols (i.e., the "2" symbol) on the center reel CR and right reel RR are set to rotate at high speed while maintaining a horizontal alignment. Then, when the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) reaches the middle pay line, all reels LR, CR, and RR, which have been rotating at high speed, come to a perfect stop simultaneously, and the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) is displayed stopped on the middle pay line (the timing when all reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped in Figure 72).

Here, in the seventh embodiment, in order to reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player when the rotation start timing of the center reel CR and right reel RR differs from the rotation start timing of the left reel LR during the "full spin" effect, the timing of the output of a predetermined music piece is synchronized during the period from when one temporary stop symbol (for example, a "1" symbol) changes to the next temporary stop symbol (for example, a "2" symbol), thereby alleviating the sense of discomfort.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 72, during the "full spin" effect, the center reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, are configured to change from the first temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "1" symbol) to the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) over a two-second period, and the music output during this change time is also configured to be output for two seconds. The center reel CR and right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, are configured to start rotating simultaneously with the start of output of the first note in the chord music (in the seventh embodiment, the Do-Mi of the Do-Mi-So triad), and the left reel LR, which change by 14 frames, is configured to start rotating at the start of output of the second note in the chord music (in the seventh embodiment, the So of the Do-Re-Mi triad).

In this case, the center reel CR and right reel RR, which displace by 18 frames, spin the first frame (i.e., from the "1" symbol to the blank area above) using normal acceleration processing with an acceleration change every 300 ms, and then spin the remaining 17 frames (i.e., from the blank area to the "2" symbol) at a high-speed constant speed of 100 ms, changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol over a total of 2000 ms. In other words, the center reel CR and right reel RR begin spinning in sync with the output of the first sound of the 2-second music piece.

The left reel LR, which displaces by 14 frames, spins the first frame (i.e., from the "1" symbol to the blank area above) at a normal acceleration rate of 300 ms, just like the center reel CR and right reel RR, and then spins the remaining 13 frames (i.e., from the blank area to the "2" symbol) at a high-speed constant rate of 100 ms, changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol over a total of 1600 ms. In other words, the left reel LR begins spinning in sync with the output of the second sound, which is output 400 ms after the start of the two-second music.

Then, while all reels LR, CR, and RR are spinning at a high constant speed, the first and second notes of the song are output continuously, creating a chord. Then, when the song ends (2000 ms after the center reel CR and right reel RR start spinning), all reels LR, CR, and RR stop spinning simultaneously, and the second temporary stop symbol (i.e., the "2" symbol) is displayed stopped on the middle pay line.

By configuring it in this way, during the "full spin" effect, the discrepancy in the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR that may be visually perceived by the player is driven in accordance with the output of the first and second sounds that make up a chord that can be perceived as a harmony by the player's ears. This cancels out (suppresses) the discrepancy caused by the visual perception through the musical harmony perceived by the ears, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable during the "full spin" effect, which has the highest chance of winning a jackpot, and increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the seventh embodiment, when each reel LR, CR, and RR rotates from the second temporary stop symbol to the actual stop symbol, a chord (e.g., Re-Si-So (chord G)) that does not create a sense of incongruity when combined with the chord (e.g., Do-Re-Mi (chord C)) that was output when each reel LR, CR, and RR rotated from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol may be output. This configuration allows the symbol control and audio output control during the entire "full spin" effect to be executed as an integrated and harmonious effect, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable during the "full spin" effect, preventing them from losing interest in the game during the "full spin" effect, which has the highest chance of winning a jackpot, and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, during the "full spin" effect, a C-E-G triad was output in accordance with the rotation of each reel LR, CR, and RR. However, instead, other triads (major triad, minor triad, augmented triad, diminished triad), tetrads (major seventh, minor seventh, minor major seventh, half-diminished, diminished seventh, augmented major seventh), or pentatonic chords (dominant ninth, major ninth) may be output.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the first to sixth embodiments and achieves the same effects.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, but it is readily apparent that the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, each embodiment may be modified by adding or replacing part or parts of the configuration of another embodiment with that embodiment. Furthermore, the numerical values given in the above embodiments are merely examples, and other numerical values can of course be used.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are made of an acrylic material (acrylic resin, refractive index: approximately 1.49 to 1.53). Alternatively, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 may be made of polycarbonate (polycarbonate-based resin, refractive index: approximately 1.59), optical plastic (polymethyl methacrylate resin, refractive index: approximately 1.491 to 1.57), nylon (nylon-based resin, refractive index: approximately 1.53), or polyester (polyester-based resin, refractive index: approximately 1.60). In this case, the shapes of the rear upper diffusion lenses 423 and the rear lower diffusion lenses 425 (i.e., the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontward diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c) may be appropriately changed depending on the refractive index of each resin, thereby ensuring that light is irradiated (diffused) toward the first decorative pattern group 421.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, one recess in the rear-upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear-downward diffusion lens 425 is configured with three sides, namely, the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontward diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c, and is configured to diffuse light in three directions, namely, the leftward, frontward, and rightward directions, relative to the direction of light irradiation by each LED 422c, 424. In contrast to this, one recess in the rear-upper diffusion lens 423 and the rear-downward diffusion lens 425 may be configured with two sides or four or more sides, so that light is diffused in two or four or more directions.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 in the rear light guide plate 420 are arranged in pairs in the up-down direction (positions where they overlap in the vertical up-down direction). Also, the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c in the front light guide plate 410 are arranged in pairs in the left-right direction (positions where they overlap in the horizontal left-right direction). Alternatively, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, or the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c may be arranged in positions where they do not overlap in the vertical up-down direction or the horizontal left-right direction. By configuring it in this manner, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of blank areas on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 where no light is irradiated, and it is possible to reliably display each decorative pattern 411, 412, 413, 421 over the entire surface of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, thereby increasing attention to the game.

<Modification 4>
In the first embodiment, the rear-upper diffusion lenses 423 and the rear-lower diffusion lenses 425 are formed on the upper and lower end faces of the rear light guide plate 420, respectively, over the width of the light-emitting surface of one of the LEDs 422 c and 424. However, the rear-upper diffusion lenses 423 and the rear-lower diffusion lenses 425 may be formed over the entire upper and lower end faces of the rear light guide plate 420. This configuration allows the rear-upper diffusion lenses 423 and the rear-lower diffusion lenses 425 to be formed without considering the positions of the LEDs 422 c and 424, thereby improving the production efficiency of the rear light guide plate 420 and increasing the design freedom regarding the arrangement of the LEDs 422 c and 424.

<Modification 5>
In the first embodiment, the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontward diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c constituting one recess of the rear-upward diffusion lens 423 and the rear-downward diffusion lens 425 are configured so that their sides are equal in length. Alternatively, the leftward diffusion portion 425a, the frontward diffusion portion 425b, and the rightward diffusion portion 425c may be configured so that their sides are different in length. In particular, when the sizes of the decorative patterns to be displayed on the rear light guide plate 420 are different, the lengths of the sides may be adjusted according to the sizes of the displayed objects. Specifically, for example, if there is a first display object of a predetermined size and a second display object twice the size of the first display object, the length of the side corresponding to the light path toward the second display object is adjusted to be twice the length of the side corresponding to the light path toward the first display object. By adjusting the side lengths of the diffusion lenses to correspond to the sizes of the displayed objects, each display object can be appropriately illuminated.

<Modification 6>
In the first embodiment, the light guide unit 400 is configured with a front light guide plate 410 and a rear light guide plate 420 that are shaped to fit the outer periphery of the cylindrical drum display device 81. Alternatively, the light guide unit 400 may be configured with a light guide plate that fits the outer periphery of the cylindrical drum display device 81 and a light guide plate having a shape (e.g., a flat plate shape) unrelated to the outer periphery of the drum display device 81. The light guide unit 400 may also be configured with a plurality of light guide plates having a shape (e.g., a flat plate shape) unrelated to the outer periphery of the cylindrical drum display device 81. Furthermore, when a display device with a flat display unit such as a liquid crystal display device is used instead of the drum display device 81 to perform the third symbol variation effect, the light guide unit 400 may be configured with a light guide plate (e.g., a flat plate shape) that fits the outer periphery of the flat liquid crystal display device and a light guide plate having a shape (e.g., a shape having a curved portion) unrelated to the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device. Furthermore, when the display unit of a flat display device such as a liquid crystal display device is used instead of the drum display device 81 to perform the variable third pattern presentation, the light guide unit 400 may be constructed of a plurality of light guide plates having a shape unrelated to the external shape of the flat liquid crystal display device (for example, a shape having an R-shaped portion in one part).

<Modification 7>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 is configured to be able to display three types of decorative patterns (i.e., the second decorative pattern group 411, the third decorative pattern 412, and the fourth decorative pattern group 413), and the rear light guide plate 420 is configured to be able to display one type of decorative pattern (i.e., the first decorative pattern group 421), so that four types of effects, which is more than the number of light guide plates 410, 420, can be executed using two light guide plates 410, 420. In contrast to this, a configuration may be adopted in which three or more light guide plates are used to execute multiple types of effects (for example, four or more types), which is more than the number of light guide plates.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, both the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 were configured with a shape having a regular R-shaped portion that conforms to the outer periphery of the drum display device 81. Alternatively, the front light guide plate of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured with a regular R-shaped portion, while the rear light guide plate may be configured with a portion having an inverted R-shaped portion that is the opposite (opposite) of the regular R-shaped portion. In this case, a predetermined effect device (e.g., a movable prop or a liquid crystal display device) may be provided in the space between the front light guide plate with a regular R-shaped portion and the rear light guide plate with an inverted R-shaped portion. This configuration allows the front light guide plate and the rear light guide plate to create an integrated, three-dimensional, and powerful effect, thereby enhancing the effect of each light guide plate and increasing attention to the game.

<Modification 9>
In the first embodiment, the vertical width of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit. Alternatively, the execution mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 may be reduced horizontally when the confirmation lamp 311 is activated. Furthermore, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is displayed when the confirmation lamp 311 is activated, the first decorative symbol group 60a and the second decorative symbol group 60b on the board may not be executed. This configuration allows the effects of the first decorative symbol group 421 and the confirmation lamp 311 to be compartmentalized so that they do not overlap or are unlikely to overlap, thereby making the effects of the confirmation lamp 311 more noticeable. Therefore, the effects of the confirmation lamp 311, which are important for gameplay, can be configured not to be obstructed. Furthermore, it is easy to simultaneously execute the effects of the confirmation lamp 311 and the first decorative symbol group 421 without complex control, thereby increasing the variety of effects.

<Modification 10>
In the first embodiment, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is activated, the school of fish symbol above the first decorative symbol group 421 is not illuminated. In contrast, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is activated, the display color of the first decorative symbol group 421 on the confirmation lamp 311 side may be displayed in a color (e.g., "blue") that is clearly different from the display color (e.g., "red") of the confirmation lamp 311. This configuration allows the effects of the first decorative symbol group 421 and the confirmation lamp 311 to be compartmentalized so that they do not overlap or are unlikely to overlap, thereby making the effects of the confirmation lamp 311 more noticeable. Therefore, the effects of the confirmation lamp 311, which are important for gameplay, can be configured not to be obstructed. Furthermore, it is easy to simultaneously execute the effects of the confirmation lamp 311 and the first decorative symbol group 421 without complex control, thereby increasing the variety of effects.

<Modification 11>
In the first embodiment, the effects using the front light guide plate 410 and the effects using the rear light guide plate 420 were performed separately so as not to overlap. In contrast, by simultaneously performing effects using the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, a variety of effects can be performed, the effects of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 can be enhanced, and attention to the game can be increased.

<Modification 12>
In the first embodiment, when the confirmation lamp 311 is activated and the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed, the scale of the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced. In contrast, when the confirmation lamp 311 is activated and the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is executed, or when a variable effect performed by the drum display device 81 is executed, the scale of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413, or the variable effect, may be reduced and executed. Examples of reducing the scale of the effect include reducing the width or range of the effect, reducing the color or brightness of the effect, or shortening the time for the effect.

<Modification 13>
In the first embodiment, whether or not a jackpot is to be drawn is determined by the variation of the third symbol using the drum display device 81. However, it is also possible to use a liquid crystal display device, a seven-segment display device, or a rotary belt display device to perform the variation and draw the jackpot, or to draw the jackpot based on whether or not a ball enters a predetermined winning hole provided in a lottery device with a crane.

<Modification 14>
In the first embodiment, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, the effect width of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced. In contrast, a movable role that can predict the game outcome in the variable effect may be provided. If the movable role's range of motion overlaps with the effect portion of the first decorative symbol group 421, the effect width of the first decorative symbol group 421 may be reduced so as not to overlap with the movable role's range of motion. The movable role's range of motion may also be reduced so as not to overlap with the effect width of the first decorative symbol group 421. In this case, the effect with a higher probability of winning the variable effect is prioritized. This configuration allows multiple effects to be distinguished so that they do not overlap or are unlikely to overlap, thereby highlighting the effect with a higher probability of winning. Therefore, the configuration can be such that important effects for the game are not obstructed.

<Modification 15>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 is configured to allow light to be incident from the lateral end faces of the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, thereby enabling the fourth decorative pattern group 413 to be illuminated, and is also configured to allow light to be incident from the downward end face of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410, thereby enabling the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 to be illuminated. In contrast to this, any of the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 may be configured to allow light to be incident from their respective lateral end faces, thereby enabling the respective decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 to be illuminated. Specifically, the front light guide plate 410 may be configured so that light can be incident from the lateral end faces of the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion, thereby enabling the fourth decorative pattern group 413 to be illuminated, and the front light guide plate 410 may be configured so that light can be incident from the lateral end faces of the regular R-shaped portion, thereby enabling the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 to be illuminated.

In this case, a condensing lens may be used to illuminate the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a low probability of winning a jackpot, so that decorative symbol groups 411 and 412 other than the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are not illuminated when the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is to be illuminated. On the other hand, a diffusing lens may be used to illuminate the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412, which have a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, so that the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are clearly illuminated when the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are to be illuminated. Even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is illuminated when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412 is illuminated, there will be little inconsistency in the presentation. Therefore, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has the lowest probability of winning when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol group 412 is lit, becomes visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to minimize inconsistencies in the presentation and provide the player with a natural gameplay experience.

The second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412, which are formed to correspond to the position of the drum display device 81 that shows the results of the third pattern variable performance, are located in the same area where the movable parts that execute the variable performance are stored and arranged. In this case, the LED boards for lighting the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412 must be arranged to avoid the position and movable range of the movable parts, which may reduce the design freedom of the movable parts or LED boards. Therefore, by forming the LED boards for lighting the second decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412, which are formed to correspond to the position of the drum display device 81 that shows the results of the third pattern variable performance, in an area that does not interfere with the position and movable range of the movable parts (for example, above or below the front light guide plate 410), the design freedom of the movable parts or LED boards can be increased.

<Modification 16>
In the first embodiment, the LEDs 422c and 424 on the rear light guide plate 420 are lit as if the first decorative pattern group 421 is moving from right to left as viewed from the front. Alternatively, the LEDs 422c and 424 may be lit as if the first decorative pattern group 421 is moving from below or above, or from above or below. In this case, the LEDs 422c and 424 may be arranged on the left and right sides of the rear light guide plate 420, and the LEDs 422c and 424 arranged on the left and right sides may be sequentially lit from one direction to multiple directions, thereby creating an effect in which the first decorative pattern group 421 is moving from below or above, or from above or below.

<Modification 17>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 employs condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d to illuminate the respective decorative symbol groups 411, 412, and 413, while the rear light guide plate 420 employs diffusing lenses 423 and 425 to illuminate the first decorative symbol group 421. Alternatively, a single light guide plate may employ condensing lenses and diffusing lenses to illuminate the respective decorative symbols. Specifically, for example, low-reliability decorative symbols with a low probability of winning a jackpot may be positioned so that they become visible when the condensing lenses are illuminated, while high-reliability decorative symbols with a high probability of winning a jackpot may be positioned so that they become visible when the diffusing lenses are illuminated. In this case, when the low-reliability decorative symbol is illuminated, the light is concentrated by the condensing lens so that the high-reliability decorative symbol cannot be illuminated, while when the high-reliability decorative symbol is illuminated, the light is diffused by the diffusing lens so that the low-reliability decorative symbol can be illuminated. Even if the low-reliability decorative symbol is illuminated when the high-reliability decorative symbol is illuminated, there is little inconsistency in the presentation. Therefore, even if the low-reliability decorative symbol, which has the lowest expected probability of winning a jackpot, becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 when the high-reliability decorative symbol is illuminated, the inconsistency in the presentation can be minimized, and the player can be provided with a game that feels natural.

<Modification 18>
In the first embodiment, the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has the lowest jackpot expectation rate, and the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412, which have a higher jackpot expectation rate than the fourth decorative symbol group, are collectively formed on the front light guide plate 410, and the first decorative symbol group 421, which has a higher jackpot expectation rate than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, the second decorative symbol group 411, and the third decorative symbol 412, is formed on the rear light guide plate 420, which is different from the front light guide plate 410. In contrast to this, only the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has the lowest jackpot expectation rate, may be formed on the front light guide plate 410, and the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, and the third decorative symbol 412, which have a higher jackpot expectation rate than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, may be formed on the rear light guide plate 420.

<Modification 19>
In the first embodiment, the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 are formed so that none of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413 is located at the transition point between the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410. However, any of the decorative patterns 411, 412, 413, 421 may be located at the transition point between the upper flat plate portion and the upper inverted R-shaped portion, the transition point between the upper inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion, the transition point between the normal R-shaped portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion, or the transition point between the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the lower flat plate portion.

<Modification 20>
In the first embodiment, light is incident from the upper flat plate portion or the lower flat plate portion of each of the light guide plates 410 and 420. However, light may be incident from the end face of either of the rounded portions.

<Modification 21>
In the first embodiment, when performing the third symbol variation effect on the drum display device 81, the symbols on the left reel LR are arranged in descending order, and the symbols on the center reel CR and right reel RR are arranged in ascending order. Furthermore, the center reel CR has a "4" symbol arranged thereon, which is not arranged on the left reel LR or right reel RR. Therefore, since there are no jackpot symbols including a "4" symbol, a "reach display" cannot produce a "reach" symbol including a "4." Therefore, when stepping up the reach-forming symbols in a "pseudo-variation" effect, for example, when increasing the numbers of the reach-forming symbols in ascending order, a step-up effect including a "4" cannot be performed. Specifically, while a three-step step-up effect such as "1" → "2" → "3" or "5" → "6" → "7" can be performed, a "2" → "3" → "4" or "3" → "4" → "5" effect cannot be performed. Therefore, when stepping up the reach formation symbols by "pseudo fluctuation" or the like, the step-up effect is configured to be performed from symbols that do not include "4." By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a natural effect that does not cause any inconsistency in the effect.

<Modification 22>
In the first embodiment, when performing the third symbol variation effect on the drum display device 81, the symbols on the left reel LR are arranged in descending order, and the symbols on the center reel CR and right reel RR are arranged in ascending order. Therefore, when performing a so-called full spin effect in which the symbols on all reels LR, CR, and RR are aligned and varied during the variation effect, the center reel CR and right reel RR, both arranged in ascending order, begin rotation with their symbols aligned. When the symbols on the center reel CR and right reel RR that are to be temporarily stopped during a full spin are aligned with the symbols on the left reel LR, the left reel LR and the center reel CR and right reel RR begin rotation so that they are aligned. The aligned symbols are then temporarily stopped on one of the pay lines (e.g., the middle line), and this is repeated multiple times to perform the full spin effect. In this case, music (sound effects) is output in accordance with the timing of the temporary stop, and music (sound effects) is also output when each of the reels LR, CR, and RR starts to rotate and while it is rotating, thereby making it possible to produce a rhythmic, well-tempoed, and powerful performance.

<Modification 23>
In the first embodiment, the game board 13 is provided with a first decorative symbol group 60a and a second decorative symbol group 60b that resemble school of fish symbols, and the rear light guide plate 420 is provided with a first decorative symbol group 421 that has the same form as the school of fish symbols, so that the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 perform an integrated effect. In this case, the fish symbols may be arranged so that the first decorative symbol group 60a or the second decorative symbol group 60b of the game board 13 and the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 complete one fish symbol. Specifically, for example, a symbol in which a part of a fish is broken is arranged in the first decorative symbol group 60a, and the remaining part of the fish symbol is arranged on the rear light guide plate 420, so that one fish symbol is formed when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a continuous, integrated effect in the left-right direction on the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420, and it is possible to suitably suppress the unnaturalness caused by the discontinuity of one fish symbol at the boundary between the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420. Note that it is advisable to determine the size of each divided fish symbol taking into consideration the difference in height between the game board surface position of the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 (the height in the front-to-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10), and to configure it so that one fish symbol can be recognized naturally (without appearing unnatural) when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

<Modification 24>
In the first embodiment, the display area forming member 430 is not provided with decorative symbols or the like, but is configured to clearly indicate the active lines on the drum display device 81. In contrast, decorative symbols may be provided on the display area forming member 430, and an integrated effect may be achieved in conjunction with the light guide unit 400 or the game board 13. Specifically, for example, the display area forming member 430 may also be formed with school of fish decorative symbols of the same form as the first decorative symbol group 421 and the school of fish symbols of the first and second decorative symbol groups 60a and 60b, and an integrated effect may be achieved in conjunction with the game board 13, the rear light guide plate 420, and the display area forming member 430. In this case, for example, a pattern in which a part of a fish is interrupted is arranged on the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board surface or on the rear light guide plate 420, and the remaining part of the fish pattern is arranged on the display area forming member 430 so that one fish pattern is formed when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a continuous, integrated effect in the left-right direction with the game board 13 or the rear light guide plate 420 and the display area forming member 430.

<Modification 25>
In the first embodiment, the lens cuts 432 of the display area forming member 430 are configured in the shape of a plurality of ribs. However, the lens cuts 432 may be configured by a light diffusion process (e.g., a graining process) that creates fine irregularities so as to make it difficult for external light to be incident on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420.

<Modification 26>
In the first embodiment, the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d are configured to condense light emitted from the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c, emitting light having directivity in the front direction of the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c, and causing the light to be incident on the front light guide plate 410. However, a light emitting unit having a directivity different from the above configuration may be used to cause light to be incident on the front light guide plate 410. Specifically, for example, a lens may be used that absorbs light other than that oriented in the front direction and irradiates only light oriented in the front direction toward the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c.

<Modification 27>
In the first embodiment, the leftward diffusing portion 425a, the frontward diffusing portion 425b, and the rightward diffusing portion 425c of the rear-upper diffusing lens 423 and the rear-downward diffusing lens 425 are configured to have the same shape, and are configured to diffuse light irradiated onto each diffusing lens 423, 425 at the same angle. However, the shapes of the diffusing portions 425a, etc. of the rear-upper diffusing lens 423 and the rear-downward diffusing lens 425 may be different, so that the angles of light diffused by the rear-upper diffusing lens 423 and the rear-downward diffusing lens 425 are different. With this configuration, light can be guided into the rear light guide plate 420 from various directions, and the light can be comprehensively guided into the rear light guide plate 420, thereby properly lighting all of the first decorative pattern group 421. Furthermore, by differentiating the angle of the direction of travel of the light diffused by the rear upper diffusion lens 423 from the angle of the direction of travel of the light diffused by the rear lower diffusion lens 425, randomness can be imparted to the lighting (illumination) display of the first decorative pattern group 421, thereby preventing the illumination display of the first decorative pattern group 421 from becoming monotonous.

<Modification 28>
In the first embodiment, the leftward diffusing portion 425a, the frontward diffusing portion 425b, and the rightward diffusing portion 425c are commonly formed in all recesses of the rear-downward diffusing lens 425, and the rear-downward diffusing lens 425 at the rightmost or leftmost end of the rear light guide plate 420 is also configured to have the rightward diffusing portion 425c or the leftward diffusing portion 425a. In contrast, the rear-downward diffusing lens 425 at the rightmost or leftmost end of the rear light guide plate 420 may be configured to include only the frontward diffusing portion 425b and the leftward diffusing portion 425a, or only the frontward diffusing portion 425b and the rightward diffusing portion 425c, without the rightward diffusing portion 425c or the leftward diffusing portion 425a. By configuring in this manner, the light emitted by each LED 424 can be irradiated onto the rear light guide plate 420 without being diffused in directions where the first decorative pattern group 421 is not arranged, without waste.

<Modification 29>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 indicate a jackpot probability indication in the variable presentation, and the confirmation lamp 311 indicates a jackpot occurrence indication in the variable presentation, with each indication being executed by a different display device. In contrast, the jackpot probability indication and the jackpot occurrence indication may be executed by a single display device, such as a single light guide plate, drum display device 81, or LCD display device. In this case, if the execution timing of the jackpot occurrence indication and the jackpot probability indication are combined, it is preferable to narrow the execution area of the jackpot probability indication being executed and execute the jackpot occurrence indication, as in the case where the confirmation lamp 311 is lit when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed.

<Modification 30>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are disposed on the front side of the drum display device 81 that executes the variable performance of the third symbol, and the preview performance in the variable performance is executed by each of the light guide plates 410, 420. In contrast to this, one or more movable role objects such as a shutter role object may be disposed on the front side of the drum display device 81, and the preview performance in the variable performance may be executed by the movable role object.

<Modification 31>
In the first embodiment, the display area forming member 430 is disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the drum display device 81, and the area of the drum display device 81 visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 is configured as the active lines. However, the display area forming member 430 may be configured to be drivable, and the display area of the drum display device 81 visible from the central opening 431 may be configured to be variable, so that the number of active lines can be changed.

<Modification 32>
In the first embodiment, the variable winning device 65 was provided below the front view of the game board 13 (below the first starting opening 64a when viewed from the front), and the variable winning device 65 was provided with a large winning opening 65a that could be opened and closed only when a jackpot was hit, and was equipped with only the function of a game ball winning device. In contrast, the variable winning device 65 may be provided with functions such as a first special symbol lamp that variably displays in response to the variable presentation of the first special symbol that can notify the execution status of the variable presentation of the first special symbol, a second special symbol lamp that variably displays in response to the variable presentation of the second special symbol, a first reserved number lamp that corresponds to the reserved number of the first special symbol, a second reserved number lamp that corresponds to the reserved number of the second special symbol, a launch mode notification lamp that indicates the launch mode of the game ball to the player (a so-called right-hit notification lamp), an error notification lamp that notifies the player that normal play is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10, and the like, a so-called fourth symbol display device, a game status indication device, etc. With this configuration, the game status can be grasped only by the variable winning device 65, so that even if the drum display device 81 or various notification lamps, etc., fail, the notification function of the variable winning device 65 can accurately indicate the game status, etc. to the player. Also, in the case of a pachinko machine in which the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, and the second starting hole 64b are located on the right side of the game board 13 as viewed from the front, and the player is made to play right-hand in a game state advantageous to the player (i.e., a "probability variable state" or a "time shortened state"), by adding functions such as a so-called fourth symbol display device and a game status suggestion device to the variable winning device 65, the game content (result) can be easily indicated to the player by checking the variable winning device 65 during the above game state.

<Modification 33>
In the first embodiment, the rear-upper diffusion lenses 423 and the rear-downward diffusion lenses 425 provided on the rear light guide plate 420 were formed to have the same shape. However, the rear-upper diffusion lenses 423 and the rear-downward diffusion lenses 425 may be configured to have different shapes. Specifically, for example, the rear-upper diffusion lenses 423 and the rear-downward diffusion lenses 425 are configured to have different shapes so that the angles of the optical paths of the light diffused by the rear-upper diffusion lenses 423 and the rear-downward diffusion lenses 425 are different. This configuration creates randomness in the overlapping portions of the optical paths of the light diffused from the rear-upper diffusion lenses 423 and the rear-downward diffusion lenses 425, allowing for the illumination of unexpected decorative patterns and the implementation of a variety of effects.

<Modification 34>
In the first embodiment, the side lengths of the leftward diffusing portion 425a, the frontward diffusing portion 425b, and the rightward diffusing portion 425c that form one recess of the rear downward diffusing lens 425 are set so that the optical path widths of the light irradiated from the leftward diffusing portion 425a, the frontward diffusing portion 425b, and the rightward diffusing portion 425c are the same. However, the optical path widths of the light irradiated from the leftward diffusing portion 425a, the frontward diffusing portion 425b, and the rightward diffusing portion 425c may be set to be different. Specifically, for example, the side lengths of the leftward diffusing portion 425a, the frontward diffusing portion 425b, and the rightward diffusing portion 425c may be set to be the same (e.g., all 50 μm), and the optical path widths of the light irradiated from the frontward diffusing portion 425b may be set to be different from the optical path widths of the light irradiated from the leftward diffusing portion 425a and the rightward diffusing portion 425c. By configuring in this manner, randomness is created in the optical path of the light diffused from each of the diffusion sections 425a to 425c, making it possible to realize the lighting display of unexpected decorative patterns and to perform a variety of effects.

<Modification 35>
In the first embodiment, the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c corresponding to the fourth decorative symbol group 413 on the front light guide plate 410 are arranged to illuminate the fourth decorative symbol group 413. However, an LED (e.g., the front right LED 415c) corresponding to the fourth decorative symbol group 413 may be arranged on only one side (e.g., the right side) to illuminate the fourth decorative symbol group 413. This configuration can reduce the installation cost of the LEDs.

<Modification 36>
In the first embodiment, condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d are provided to condense light emitted from the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c so that the decorative pattern groups 411, 412, and 413 on the front light guide plate 410 can be illuminated. However, at least one of the condensing lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d may not be provided, and light emitted from the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c may be directly irradiated onto the front light guide plate 410 in some locations without using a condensing lens. In particular, condensing lenses may not be provided for LEDs corresponding to locations where there is little need to condense light from the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c (for example, decorative patterns where different decorative patterns are not adjacent to each other (i.e., the fourth decorative pattern group 413)). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to eliminate the condenser lens in an area where inconsistencies in the presentation are unlikely to occur, reduce the number of parts in the light guide unit 400, and reduce manufacturing costs.

<Modification 37>
In the first embodiment, the rear light guide plate 420 has the diffusion lenses 423, 425 formed on the upper end surface of the rear upper flat plate portion and the lower end surface of the rear lower flat plate portion, respectively, so that the first decorative pattern group 421 can be illuminated by the light diffused from each diffusion lens 423, 425. Alternatively, the diffusion lens 425 may be formed only on one end surface (e.g., the lower end surface of the rear lower flat plate portion) and no diffusion lens may be formed on the other end surface (e.g., the upper end surface of the rear upper flat plate portion), so that the first decorative pattern group 421 can be illuminated only by the diffusion lens 425 formed on the one end surface. This configuration reduces the number of components in the light guide unit 400 and reduces manufacturing costs.

<Modification 38>
In the second embodiment, the light guide unit 400 was formed by the second front light guide plate 440 having the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a, which is the only R-shaped portion in the second front light guide plate 440, and the second rear light guide plate 450 having the second rear lower normal R-shaped portion 450a, which is the only R-shaped portion in the second rear light guide plate 450. In contrast to this, the light guide unit 400 may be configured such that the front light guide plate located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 has a normal R-shaped portion as its only R-shaped portion (i.e., a R-shaped portion in the same direction as the front outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81), and the rear light guide plate located on the back side of the front light guide plate has an inverted R-shaped portion as its only R-shaped portion (i.e., a R-shaped portion in the opposite direction to the front outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81). With this configuration, a predetermined space can be formed between the upper flat plate portions of the front light guide plate and the rear light guide plate. Therefore, for example, by configuring the predetermined space to allow other performance devices to perform performances (such as the appearance and disappearance of movable characters), a variety of performances can be performed using the light guide unit 400 and other performance devices, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. In addition, in the second embodiment, the light guide plates 440 and 450 each having a unique R-shaped portion formed thereon were provided below the drum display device 81. Alternatively, the light guide plate having a unique R-shaped portion may be provided above, to the left, or to the right of the drum display device 81.

<Modification 39>
In the second embodiment, the two light guide plates 440, 450 are each configured to have an R-shaped portion. However, it is also possible to form an R-shaped portion on only one of the light guide plates 440, 450 and not form an R-shaped portion on the other light guide plate 450, 440, i.e., to configure the light guide plate with only a flat portion. Also, it is also possible to configure the various effects to be performed using only one light guide plate with one R-shaped portion.

<Modification 40>
In the second embodiment, the second front lower LED 441 (second rear lower LED 451) was disposed below the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a (second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a) to illuminate the second front lower decorative pattern 443 (second rear lower decorative pattern 453) provided in the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a (second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a). Alternatively, the second front lower LED 441 (second rear lower LED 451) may be configured to illuminate the second front upper decorative pattern 442 (second rear upper decorative pattern 452). This configuration can ease restrictions on the arrangement of LEDs in the light-guiding unit 400, improving the design freedom of the light-guiding unit 400.

<Modification 41>
In the first embodiment, two light guide plates 410 and 420 are provided, and one light guide plate 410 is irradiated with light via condenser lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d, and the other light guide plate 420 is irradiated with light via diffusing lenses 423 and 425. In the third embodiment, one light guide plate 470 is provided, and light is irradiated with light via condenser lenses 475b and 476b, and also via diffusing lens 473. On the other hand, when two light guide plates are provided, it is possible to irradiate one light guide plate with light using only one condensing lens, multiple condensing lenses, only one diffusing lens, multiple diffusing lenses, a combination of condensing lenses and diffusing lenses, or no condensing lenses or diffusing lenses, depending on the type or aspect of the decorative pattern to be illuminated, and to irradiate the other light guide plate with light using only one condensing lens, multiple condensing lenses, only one diffusing lens, multiple diffusing lenses, a combination of condensing lenses and diffusing lenses, or no condensing lenses or diffusing lenses.Furthermore, when one light guide plate is provided, it is possible to irradiate the light guide plate with light using only one condensing lens, multiple condensing lenses, only one diffusing lens, multiple diffusing lenses, a combination of condensing lenses and diffusing lenses, or no condensing lenses or diffusing lenses, depending on the type or aspect of the decorative pattern to be illuminated. By configuring it in this manner, by using an appropriate focusing lens or diffusing lens depending on the type or form of the decorative pattern to be illuminated, it is possible to illuminate the decorative pattern on the light guide plate as desired, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the light guide plate and increasing attention to the game.

<Modification 41>
In the fourth embodiment, "chance" symbols are arranged on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR, respectively, to create a game where the "chance" symbol stops or not. Alternatively, the "chance" symbols may not be arranged on each of the reels LR, CR, and RR, and the symbol arrangement may be configured to consist of only numerical symbols. This configuration simplifies the pattern control, such as changing the acceleration/deceleration pattern and the time scale of constant-speed fluctuation, and fine-tuning the return slip, which were necessary to skip the "chance" symbol when the "chance" symbol is arranged during the "pseudo-variation" fluctuation element or full rotation. Furthermore, the acceleration/deceleration pattern, fluctuation time, and return slip variations of each of the reels LR, CR, and RR can be standardized, thereby reducing the control burden of controlling the symbols of each of the reels LR, CR, and RR.

<Modification 42>
In the fourth embodiment, the symbol control including the pseudo-stop symbol in the variable element of "pseudo-variation" was explained. In contrast, the symbol control of the pseudo-stop symbol may be configured to be adopted in the re-draw effect or the full rotation effect in which the jackpot symbol changes during the variable effect. By configuring in this way, the symbol control pattern in the re-draw effect and the symbol control pattern in the "full rotation" effect can be simplified, and the control burden related to the symbol control can be reduced.

<Modification 43>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the symbol control and audio output control in the "full rotation" effect were described. In contrast, the symbol control and audio output control may be configured to be used in other variable elements in the variable effect, such as the variable elements of the "pseudo-variation" or the variable elements of the "re-variation," or in the effect of a portion of any "reach display." By configuring in this way, the symbol control and audio output control in the variable effect are linked, and the sense of incongruity based on the symbol control is counteracted (suppressed) by the aural harmony of the music. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable in the variable effect, suppresses the player's loss of interest in the game, and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

<Modification 44>
In the first embodiment, each of the reels LR, CR, and RR was provided with a "chance" symbol, which does not award a jackpot simply by matching, but which develops into one of the "reach displays." In contrast, each of the reels LR, CR, and RR may be configured with a symbol arrangement consisting of only numerical symbols that can directly award a jackpot when aligned, rather than with a "chance" symbol, which does not directly award a jackpot. This configuration allows symbol control to be performed without considering the "chance" symbol when performing the variable elements of the "pseudo-variation" or the so-called symbol step-up effect during the "full rotation" effect. As a result, by simplifying symbol control, the control burden associated with symbol control can be reduced.

<Modification 45>
In the fourth embodiment, the center reel CR is provided with a "345" symbol, which is not provided on the other reels LR and RR. In contrast, the center reel CR may be provided with the same symbol arrangement as the other reels LR and RR, but without a special symbol such as the "345" symbol. This configuration allows for symbol control without considering the "345" symbol when implementing the variable elements of the "pseudo-variation" or the so-called symbol step-up effect during the "full rotation" effect. As a result, the simplified symbol control reduces the control burden associated with the symbol control.

<Modification 46>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the output and non-output of music are alternately performed for each temporary stop during the "full rotation" effect. In contrast to this, a predetermined music piece may be continuously output during the "full rotation" effect, and other music pieces may be output in accordance with each temporary stop and start of rotation.

<Modification 47>
In the first embodiment, light emitted by the LEDs 414c and the like is incident from either end of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. However, for example, a predetermined recess may be provided in the flat plate portion or the rounded portion of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, and light may be irradiated onto the recess so that the light is irradiated toward the interior of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 and guided into the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. This configuration improves the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement of the LEDs 414c and the like.

<Modification 48>
In the first embodiment, the display means (presentation means) is a drum display device 81 having reels LR, CR, and RR, which rotates and drives each of the reels LR, CR, and RR to perform a variable presentation of the third symbols attached to each of the reels LR, CR, and RR. Alternatively, a rotating belt-type reel mechanism may be used which is made up of a plurality of belt members wound in a loop around a plurality of pulleys and on which a plurality of third symbols are printed, and which rotates and drives each of the belt members to perform a variable presentation of the third symbols attached to each of the belt members.

<Modification 49>
In the first embodiment, the LEDs 422c, 424 of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit in sequence from the right end in front view toward the left side in front view, thereby producing an effect in which the first decorative pattern group 421 moves from the right side in front view toward the left side in front view. Alternatively, the LEDs 422c, 424 may be lit in sequence from the right end in front view toward the left side in front view of the rear light guide plate 420, and the LEDs 422c, 424 may be lit in sequence from the left end in front view of the rear light guide plate 420 toward the right side in front view, thereby producing an effect in which the first decorative pattern group 421 moves from both ends of the rear light guide plate 420 toward the center.

<Modification 50>
In the first embodiment, when the execution of multiple effects overlaps, i.e., when the illumination of the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 and the illumination of the confirmation lamp 311 can occur simultaneously, the effect area of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced in order to clearly execute the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 that is of high importance to the game (indicating a high probability of a jackpot). In contrast, when the execution of multiple effects overlaps, one effect may be prioritized (by reducing other effects) based on a predetermined priority order (e.g., high or low expectation of the effect, size or smallness of the effect execution area, speed or slowness of the effect order, length or shortness of the effect duration, amount of suggestive information (information communicated to the player), forward or backward in the longitudinal direction of the pachinko machine 10, etc.). This configuration allows the player to accurately recognize the effect that should be prioritized based on predetermined rules.

<Modification 51>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted from each LED 414c, etc. is collected by each collecting lens 414d, etc., and the light with increased directivity by the collecting lens 414d, etc. is irradiated toward the front light guide plate 410 in a direction substantially in front of each LED 414c, etc. In contrast, the light irradiated from each LED 414c, etc. may be irradiated toward the front light guide plate 410 with increased directivity compared to when light is irradiated (diffused) only by the LED 414c, etc. Specifically, for example, a collecting lens capable of diffusing light in the front direction of each LED 414c, etc. and in an oblique direction (for example, approximately ±15 degrees) from the front direction may be used to collect and slightly diffuse the light from each LED 414c, etc., and irradiate it toward the front light guide plate 410.

<Modification 52>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted from each LED 424 is diffused by the diffusion lenses 425, and the light with increased diffusivity by the diffusion lenses 425 is guided from each LED 424 in three directions: a front direction, a left direction tilted approximately 20 degrees to the left from the front direction, and a right direction tilted approximately 20 degrees to the right from the front direction. However, the light emitted from each LED 424 may be guided within the rear light guide plate 420 with increased diffusivity compared to when light is emitted (diffused) only by the LED 424. Specifically, for example, a diffusion lens capable of diffusing light in three directions: a front direction of each LED 424, a left direction tilted approximately 15 degrees or less to the left from the front direction, and a right direction tilted approximately 15 degrees or less to the right from the front direction may be used to diffuse the light from each LED 424 and irradiate it onto the rear light guide plate 420.

<Modification 53>
In the fourth embodiment, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" are not executed in a pattern including a "4" symbol included in the "345" symbol arrayed only on the center reel CR. That is, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" are not executed in a pattern directly including a non-common "4" symbol, such as "2" → "3" → "4,""3" → "4" → "5," or "4" → "5" → "6." The variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" are also not executed in a pattern indirectly including a non-common "4" symbol, such as "2" → "3" → "5" or "3" → "5" → "6," by skipping (omitting) non-common "4" symbols. In contrast, the variable elements of the "pseudo fluctuation" are not executed in a pattern directly including a non-common "4" symbol, but patterns indirectly including a non-common "4" symbol, such as "2" → "3" → "5" or "3" → "5" → "6," may be executed as variable element patterns of the "pseudo fluctuation." In this case, patterns that do not include the "4" symbol are stored in advance, and the amount of change (variation) in the symbols is different from a pattern that changes in a permutation (for example, "1" → "2" → "3"), so symbol control different from the pattern control in the permutation is necessary, but this increases the variety of variable elements in the "pseudo-variation," thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In the above embodiments, the probability setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6," allowing the probability of a jackpot and/or the probability of a hit for the second symbol to be changed. However, the number of stages in which the probability setting value can be changed is not limited to six, and it may be changed to any stage.

In the above embodiments, we have described cases where the probability of winning a jackpot is changed by changing the probability setting value, but it is also possible to change the probability of winning a normal symbol or the probability of winning a small jackpot.

Furthermore, if it is determined during the startup process that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, a specific probability setting value (for example, "1") from the range of "1" to "6" may be forcibly set as the probability setting value. However, if it is determined during play (for example, during timer interrupt processing) that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, it is better not to forcibly set the probability setting value to a specific probability setting value. This is to prevent players from suffering any disadvantages due to a sudden change in the jackpot probability during play.

In the above embodiment, a case was described in which the probability setting value was included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value (checksum), but the probability setting value may also be excluded from the calculation of the RAM judgment value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM judgment value is normal (S107 in Figure 20), it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, a setting change process may be forcibly executed to have hall personnel change the probability setting value, or the hall personnel may be prompted to restart the pachinko machine 10 in setting change mode, or a specific probability setting value within the normal range may be forcibly set as the probability setting value.

In the above embodiment, a case was described in which the probability setting value was not included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value (checksum), but the probability setting value may also be included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in "setting change mode," the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 or by turning on the setting change switch. However, this can also be done using the setting key 501. Specifically, the setting key 501 is configured to be rotatable from the on state to a setting change position located in the opposite direction from the off side, and is configured so that when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, it automatically returns to the on state. Then, the probability setting value is updated each time the setting key 501 is rotated from the on state to the setting change position. This also makes it easy to change the probability setting value.

In the above embodiment, we described a case where the probability setting value is confirmed by turning the setting key 501 off or by turning the RAM erase switch 503 on when the pachinko machine 10 is started in "setting change mode." However, this may also be done by operating a separately provided switch, for example, a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is a switch that is operated, for example, during "setting change mode" to confirm the probability setting value, and may be provided so that it protrudes from the main board through a hole in the board box 100, allowing it to be operated by hall personnel, etc., without having to open the board box 100. This also makes it easy to confirm the probability setting value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and started up in "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode," the startup mode is set depending on the detection state of the RAM clear switch 503 and the setting key 501. In contrast, the startup mode may be set depending on the detection state of the RAM clear switch 503 and the setting key 501, with at least the opening of the inner frame 12 being a required condition. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the hall can select whether or not opening the inner frame 12 is a condition for changing settings or confirming settings.

In each of the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 503 was installed in the main control device 110. However, the RAM erase switch 503 may also be configured to be installed in the power supply device 115 or the dispensing control device 111.

In each of the above embodiments, the setting key 501 was configured to allow the probability of a jackpot to be changed. However, the setting key 501 may also be configured to allow multiple settings related to the degree of advantage to the player to be changed, such as the number of prize balls paid out when one prize slot is won (e.g., changing from 3 to 5), the drive time (e.g., changing from 3 seconds to 5 seconds) or drive width (e.g., changing from 20 mm to 30 mm) of the movable device that assists in winning the prize slot, the tilt angle (e.g., changing from 1 degree to 3 degrees) of a component that affects the way the ball flows down (e.g., the stage or crane on which the ball rolls), or the tilt angle of the pachinko machine 10 itself (e.g., changing from 1 degree to 3 degrees).

In each of the above embodiments, the keyhole of the setting key 501 was configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10. However, the keyhole of the setting key 501 may also be configured to face laterally (left or right) of the pachinko machine 10, diagonally from the pachinko machine 10, or toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number values, the small win random number values, and the losing random number values are all continuous, allowing for range determination of whether a jackpot or small win has occurred (for example, whether it is between "0" and "49"), thereby reducing the control burden on the main control unit 110. In contrast, the random number values that award game value (i.e., the jackpot random number values and small win random number values) may be arranged in a dispersed (scattered) manner rather than in a continuous arrangement. Specifically, for example, in the case of a jackpot random number counter C1 that is updated between "0 and 999," the jackpot random number values may be "7,341,555,777,831," and the small win random number values may be "77,175,223,315,415,526,634,717,845."

Here, if there are consecutive values that become jackpot random numbers regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a value between 0 and 50 in both low and high probability states is a jackpot), there is a possibility that the value could be predicted externally, increasing the possibility of fraudulently winning a jackpot. Therefore, by configuring it as in the above modified example, it is possible to make each random number value that confers gaming value more difficult to predict externally, thereby increasing the deterrent effect against fraud and improving the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified example, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state may be set separately so that they do not overlap. By configuring in this way, the value of the random number that results in a jackpot can be changed depending on the situation (i.e., depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), making the value of the random number that results in a jackpot more difficult to predict, thereby improving the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type random number C2, etc. were updated by software processing such as timer interrupt processing (see Figure 23) (so-called soft random numbers). In contrast, the jackpot random number counter C1, etc. may be updated by a random number generation IC with a faster update cycle than the above software random numbers (so-called hard random numbers). This configuration makes it difficult to externally ascertain the random number value being updated, thereby improving security performance.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number value was configured to increase evenly with each increase in the setting value. However, it may also be configured to increase the jackpot random number value (or small jackpot random number value) unevenly or at a predetermined rate with each increase in the setting value. Specifically, for example, from setting values "1" to "3," the jackpot random number value increases by "2," while from setting values "4" to "6," the jackpot random number value increases by "5." By configuring it in this way, the game value that can be awarded changes significantly depending on the setting difference, making it possible to provide a game with a sense of rhythm (variation) due to the setting difference, and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above embodiment, the role corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 was configured to change for each setting value. In contrast, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 or the small jackpot type counter (not shown), which determines the content of the small jackpot, may be changed for each setting value, resulting in setting differences due to changes in the selection ratio of the jackpot type or small jackpot type.

In the above embodiment, a time-saving counter common to both the first and second special symbols was used to count the number of times each special symbol was displayed in the "time-saving state." In contrast, a special symbol 2 time-saving counter that counts only the number of times the second special symbol is displayed, and a total time-saving counter that counts the total number of times the first and second special symbols are displayed, may be used to count the number of times each special symbol's dynamic display is displayed in the "time-saving state," thereby determining the conditions for terminating the "time-saving state." Alternatively, a special symbol 1 time-saving counter that counts only the number of times the first special symbol is displayed may be provided, and the "time-saving state" may be terminated depending on the number of times the first special symbol is displayed, thereby determining the conditions for terminating the "time-saving state." This configuration can increase the variety of games and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In the above embodiment, the dynamic display of the second special symbol was configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first special symbol. However, it may also be configured to execute each special symbol in the order in which the dynamic display was acquired (order in which it was reserved), or to execute the dynamic display of the first special symbol with priority over the dynamic display of the second special symbol.

In the above embodiment, the random number value that awards game value (i.e., jackpot random number value) is changed in response to a setting change, and the change is compensated for from random number values that do not award game value (i.e., losing random number values). In contrast, when a random number value that awards game value (e.g., jackpot random number value) is changed in response to a setting change, the change may be compensated for from random number values that award other game value (e.g., small win random number value). By configuring in this way, differences can be created in the game value that can be awarded for each setting, providing a game with a variety of settings and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the second embodiment, the jackpot random number table 202a specified (set) each random number in the order of "jackpot random number range," "small jackpot random number range," and "miss random number range." In contrast, the jackpot random number table 202a may be configured to specify (set) each random number in the order of "jackpot random number range," "small jackpot random number range," "jackpot random number range (hereinafter referred to as "repeated jackpot random number range")," and "miss random number range." Here, the "repeated jackpot random number range" is configured to correspond to the increase in the jackpot random number resulting from a setting change. This configuration allows the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (i.e., the increase in the jackpot random number value) to be adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (i.e., the missing random number value), thereby fixing the range of random numbers that do not change due to a setting change (i.e., the jackpot random number value and small jackpot random number value that do not change due to a setting change). This allows, for example, in a control program for determining whether a game has been won or lost, to standardize the basic win/loss determination of a fixed random number value across all settings, while additionally determining the increase in the jackpot random number value resulting from a setting change according to the setting value, making it easier to design the control program and reducing development man-hours.

In the above embodiment, the random number values were specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a in the order of "jackpot random number range," "small jackpot random number range," and "miss random number range." However, the random number values may also be specified (set) in descending order of the number of random number values.

In the above embodiment, the random numbers in the jackpot random number table 202a were specified (set) in the order of "jackpot random number range," "small win random number range," and "miss random number range." In contrast, the jackpot random number table 202a may be configured to specify (set) the "jackpot random number range" that increases with a setting change so that it is adjacent to the "miss random number range" that decreases with a setting change. Specifically, the random numbers in the jackpot random number table 202a are specified (set) in the order of "small win random number range," "jackpot random number range," and "miss random number range." This configuration allows the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (i.e., the increase in the jackpot random number value) to be adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (i.e., the miss random number value), thereby fixing the range of random numbers that do not change with a setting change (i.e., the small win random number value). This allows, for example, in a control program for determining whether a small win has occurred, the determination of the small win random number value can be standardized across all setting values, while additionally determining the increase in the large win random number value due to a setting change according to the setting value, making it easier to design the control program and reducing development man-hours.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability for special symbols was configured to increase (10 times higher) when transitioning from the "normal gaming state" to the "probability variable state." In contrast, the jackpot probability for special symbols may be configured to increase when transitioning from the "normal gaming state" to the "probability variable state." Furthermore, when transitioning from the "normal gaming state" to the "probability variable state," the increase in the jackpot probability for special symbols may be set to 10 times or less (for example, 2 times). Furthermore, when transitioning from the "normal gaming state" to the "probability variable state," both the jackpot probability and the small jackpot probability may be set to increase (for example, the jackpot probability may be increased by 5 times and the small jackpot probability may also be increased by 5 times).

In the second embodiment described above, the probability of winning a small jackpot with the second special pattern was configured to be higher than the probability of winning a small jackpot with the first special pattern. In contrast, the probability of winning a small jackpot with the first special pattern may be configured to be higher than the probability of winning a small jackpot with the second special pattern, or the probability of winning a small jackpot with the first special pattern and the second special pattern may be configured to be equal.

In the above embodiment, the game was configured as a so-called loop type game specification, in which, once a "probability fluctuation state" is entered, the "probability fluctuation state" is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. In contrast, the game may be configured as a "probability fluctuation state" (so-called ST type) in which, after a jackpot ends, a predetermined number of dynamic displays are executed after the jackpot ends, regardless of which jackpot is won. This configuration can increase the variety of games and contribute to increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability was configured to increase evenly (10x increase for all settings) when changing from a low probability state to a high probability state for special symbols. Alternatively, the increase rate of the jackpot probability can be configured to vary for each setting (for example, 5x for setting value "1," 6x for setting value "2," ... 10x for setting value "6"). By configuring it in this way, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win a jackpot in a high probability state for special symbols, and the phenomenon of winning a jackpot early in a high probability state itself becomes a setting suggestion. This creates a gameplay element of how quickly you can win a jackpot in a high probability state, which can increase the excitement of the game.

In the above embodiment, a setting difference in the jackpot probability was created in both the low probability state and the high probability state of the special symbol. In contrast, a setting difference in the jackpot probability in one of the states (low probability state or high probability state) may be eliminated, and a setting difference may be created in the jackpot probability in the other state (high probability state or low probability state).

In the second embodiment described above, the jackpot random number value was increased for each setting value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value was compensated for from the loss random number value. Alternatively, the jackpot random number value may be increased for each setting value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value may be compensated for from the small win random number value and the loss random number value. This configuration makes it possible to compensate for changes in the number of jackpot random number values based on setting changes from the small win random number value and the loss random number value, eliminating the need to compensate for changes in the jackpot random number value from a fixed, predetermined random number value of 1. This eliminates the need to secure the number of predetermined random number values from the change in the jackpot random number value and the predetermined random number value of 1, eliminating constraints when designing game specifications, increasing the design freedom of game specifications and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the first embodiment described above, if there is no jackpot round selected as the timing for executing the "setting suggestion effect," the "setting suggestion effect" is configured to be executed at another timing (ending effect). In contrast, if there is no jackpot round selected as the timing for executing the "setting suggestion effect," the "setting suggestion effect" may be configured to be executed at another round that exists in the jackpot. In this case, if a "setting suggestion effect" is selected to be executed at a round other than the round that matches the probability setting value, but that round does not exist, the "setting suggestion effect" may be configured to be executed at another round excluding the round that matches the probability setting value.

In the above embodiment, a "setting suggestion effect" was provided as an effect suggesting a probability setting value that can be set in multiple stages, and the "setting suggestion effect" was configured to suggest this to the player based on the probability setting value and the lottery results. In contrast, the effect may be configured to suggest to the player multiple stages of events that may occur in the pachinko machine 10 based on the lottery results. For example, the effect may suggest which state (stage) of the pachinko machine 10's multiple-stage game state (e.g., "normal game state," "latent probability fluctuation state," "probability fluctuation state," and "time reduction state") it is in, or it may suggest which state (step) of a multiple-stage effect it is in, or it may be configured to suggest which state of multiple stages of jackpot expectation it is in.

In the above embodiment, each command is sent from the main control unit 110 to the voice and lamp control unit 113, which then instructs the display control unit 114 to display. However, commands may also be sent directly from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114. Alternatively, the voice and lamp control unit may be connected to the display control unit, and commands instructing the display control unit to output each sound and turn on the lamps may be sent to the voice and lamp control unit. Furthermore, the voice and lamp control unit and display control unit may be configured as a single control unit. By combining these into a single control unit, the number of parts can be reduced, and increases in the cost of the pachinko machine can be prevented.

In the above embodiment, the command determination process (S911) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 always sets the fluctuation start flag to ON when a stop type command is received. However, the fluctuation start flag may also be set to ON when a fluctuation pattern command is received and then a stop type command is received. This prevents strange fluctuation effects from being executed when a stop type command is received without a fluctuation pattern command.

Also, the fluctuation start flag may be set to ON when the fluctuation pattern command is received. In this case, the fluctuation display process (S910) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 may generate a display fluctuation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern extracted by the fluctuation pattern command based on the fluctuation start flag being turned ON, and send it to the display control device 114. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to cause the display control device 114 to execute a fluctuation performance based on this display fluctuation pattern command, without waiting for the stop type command to be received. Note that in this case, the voice lamp control device 113 may generate a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command when the stop type command is received, and send it to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 may then determine the stop pattern of the fluctuation performance executed by the drum display device 81 based on this display stop type command.

In the above embodiment, the continuous preview performance may be executed on the drum display device 81 where the variable performance is performed, or a fourth pattern display device separate from the drum display device 81 may be provided, and the continuous preview performance may be executed by displaying the fourth pattern on the fourth pattern display device in conjunction with the variable performance executed on the drum display device 81. In this case, the fourth pattern display device may be controlled by the display control device 114 or the sound lamp control device 113. Furthermore, the continuous preview performance may be executed by providing a role device that operates in accordance with various performances in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the role device in a predetermined manner in conjunction with the variable performance. Furthermore, the continuous preview performance may be executed by outputting sound for the continuous preview performance from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the sound lamp control device 113, or by lighting or flashing the illumination units 29-33 of the pachinko machine 10 in conjunction with the variable performance.

More specifically, the fourth pattern display device is provided with a first special pattern lamp which variably displays in response to the variable presentation of the first special pattern, a second special pattern lamp which variably displays in response to the variable presentation of the second special pattern, a first reserved number lamp corresponding to the first special pattern, and a second reserved number lamp corresponding to the second special pattern, and the lighting of the first reserved number lamp is controlled in response to a winning entry into the first starting port 64a (for example, an increase/decrease display in response to the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern), the lighting of the second reserved number lamp is controlled in response to a winning entry into the second starting port 64b (for example, an increase/decrease display in response to the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern), the lighting of the first special pattern lamp is controlled in response to (corresponding to) the execution of the variable presentation of the third pattern corresponding to the first special pattern (for example, a blinking display of the first special pattern lamp), and the lighting of the second special pattern lamp is controlled in response to (corresponding to) the execution of the variable presentation of the third pattern corresponding to the second special pattern (for example, a blinking display of the second special pattern lamp). In this way, the fourth symbol display device can indicate to the player the type of special symbol currently being displayed, thereby suggesting how the variable effect will be performed.

As a result, each time a variable effect is performed on the drum display device 81 (and special symbol display device 37), symbols are successively displayed on the fourth symbol display device, the role device operates in a predetermined manner, a sound is output from the audio output device 226, or the illumination elements 29-33 light up or flash, giving the player a sense of anticipation of a big win. Furthermore, players normally continue playing while gazing intently at the drum display device 81 where the variable effect is performed, but the continuous preview effect is performed by the display of symbols on the fourth symbol display device (separate from the drum display device 81), the activation of the role device, the audio output from the audio output device 226, or the lighting or flashing of the illumination elements 29-33, making it easy for the player to recognize that a different effect than normal has occurred. Furthermore, the continuous preview effect can be easily performed with simple control, such as the display of symbols on the fourth symbol display device, the activation of the role device, the audio output from the audio output device 226, or the lighting or flashing of the illumination elements 29-33.

Furthermore, if the continuous preview performance is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or by lighting or flashing the illumination units 29-33, the control of the continuous preview performance is performed by the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, by having the main control device 110 perform the win/lose judgment at the time of the initial winning and the lottery processing at the start of the fluctuation, having the audio lamp control device 113 perform the continuous preview performance, and having the display control device 114 perform the fluctuation performance, when the continuous preview performance is performed by the pachinko machine 10, each control device can be assigned to each processing. This prevents the load from concentrating on one control device, and allows the performance required of the MPU of each control device to be kept low.

The continuous preview performance may be executed by combining and controlling at least two or more of the following: the display of symbols for the continuous preview performance on the drum display device 81, the display of symbols for the continuous preview performance on the fourth pattern display device, the operation of the role-playing device in a predetermined manner, the audio output from the audio output device 226, and the lighting or flashing of the illumination units 29-33. This allows for a wider variety of continuous preview performances to be executed. Furthermore, by changing the execution method of the continuous preview performance (display by the drum display device 81, display by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the role-playing device, audio output from the audio output device 226, the lighting or flashing of the illumination units 29-33, or a combination thereof), multiple continuous preview performance modes may be prepared that are selected depending on the game status after the continuous preview performance ends (10R special jackpot, 5R special jackpot, 10R regular jackpot, miss).

Furthermore, when a continuous preview effect is performed, an image for the continuous preview effect separate from the variable effect may be displayed on the drum display device 81, or the continuous preview effect may be performed by displaying a predetermined combination of symbols, known as a "chance symbol," as the stopping symbol to be displayed when the variable effect ends. In this case, when the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 27(c)) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 determines that a continuous preview command has been received, the stopping symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the chance symbol may be turned on, and other stopping symbol discrimination flags may be set to off. In the command determination process, processing corresponding to the continuous preview command is executed within other command processing after the stop identification command processing, so the chance symbol is set as the stopping symbol instead of the stopping symbol set by the reception of the display stop identification command. Therefore, the chance symbol can be displayed as a confirmed stopping symbol when the variable effect stops. Furthermore, if the drum display device 81 displays chance symbols consecutively as stopping symbols for each variable effect, the player can feel a sense of anticipation of eventually winning a jackpot.

In the above embodiment, when a ball is won in the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (start winning), the main control unit 110 sends to the voice lamp control unit 113 the reserved ball count command that notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the number of reserved balls increased by "1," including the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 obtained from the counter buffer in response to the start winning. However, the types of counters included in the reserved ball count command may be some of the counters C1 to C3, CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Furthermore, when the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the values of each counter obtained in response to the start winning, rather than including information indicating the values of each counter in the reserved ball count command, information indicating the values of each counter may be included in a command separate from the reserved ball count command, and these values may be notified to the voice lamp control unit 113. The separate command may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in response to a start winning, or the values of each counter acquired in response to a start winning may be added to a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of other information, such as a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. When notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in response to a start winning as a separate command, the command may include information indicating which of the pending number of times the notified counter values relate to the variable effect. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 can store the values of each counter included in the command in one of the first to fourth areas of the look-ahead information corresponding to that pending number, based on the information about the pending number included in the command.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball count command, it may store the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated in the reserved ball count command in RAM 223. Alternatively, when it receives a reserved ball count command (or a command indicating the values of each counter), it may determine whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot, the type of miss if there is a miss, etc. based on the values of each counter indicated in the command, and store these determination results in RAM 223 in place of the values of each counter indicated in the command, or together with some or all of the values of the counters.

Furthermore, for example, a variable effect based on a start winning entry into the second start opening 64b may be given priority over a variable effect based on a start winning entry into the first start opening 64a. Alternatively, a variable effect based on a start winning entry into the first start opening 64a may be given priority over a variable effect based on a start winning entry into the second start opening 64b. This allows players to pay more attention to the start opening that is given priority for the variable effect.

In the above embodiment, we have described a case where two start ports, the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b, are arranged on the game board 13 as start ports through which the jackpot lottery begins when a ball lands. However, this is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of start ports may be one, or three or more. If there are two or more start ports, a corresponding reserved ball counter may be provided in RAM 203 for each start port, and the number of reserved balls that are reserved in response to a win at the corresponding start port may be counted for each start port. Furthermore, a maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved in response to a win at the corresponding start port may be set for each start port.

Furthermore, if there are two or more starting ports, the reserved ball count command sent by the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 to notify that a hold has been made following a win at a starting port may include information indicating which starting port the hold was made at. Furthermore, the variation pattern command sent by the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 when starting a variation may also include information indicating which starting port the variation effect was held at. In this way, the audio lamp control unit 113 has a reserved ball count counter for each starting port, and when a reserved ball count command is received, the reserved ball count counter for the starting port indicated in the reserved ball count command is set to the reserved ball count, and when a variation pattern command is received, the reserved ball count counter for the starting port indicated in the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, thereby allowing the number of reserved balls to be counted for each starting port.

Furthermore, if multiple starting gates are arranged on the game board 13, the counter values acquired in response to a win at each starting gate (starting win) may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113. In this case, the command used by the main control device 110 to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired in response to a starting win may include information indicating which starting gate the value was acquired in response to the starting win. Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern command sent by the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 when starting a fluctuation may also include information indicating which starting gate the fluctuation effect is associated with. Furthermore, a look-ahead information storage area may be prepared for each starting gate in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113, and each counter value sent by the main control device 110 in response to a starting win at the corresponding starting gate may be stored in the corresponding look-ahead information storage area. This allows for a shift process to be performed on the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the starting gate where the starting win that triggered the execution of the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command was detected each time a fluctuation pattern command is received. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending variable effect for each start port can also be stored in the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, when the probability of a jackpot, the probability of allocation of jackpot types, the probability of allocation of miss types, etc. differ depending on the start port that was used for the start entry, the look-ahead process can correctly determine whether or not each variable effect will result in a jackpot, the type of jackpot if a jackpot occurs, and the type of miss if a miss occurs, based on which start port the start entry occurred. Also, when a variable effect based on a start entry in one start port is given priority over variable effects based on start entries in other start ports, the look-ahead process can be performed in order starting from the value of the counter corresponding to the variable effect based on a start entry in one start port, allowing the correct determination of the number of pending variable effects for the most recent jackpot.

In addition, if multiple start ports are provided, the audio/lamp control device 113 may, upon receiving a command from the main control device 110 indicating the value of each counter acquired based on a start winning entry into a start port, decide to start a continuous preview effect. When the audio/lamp control device 113 determines that a continuous preview effect will begin, it may execute the continuous preview effect for all variable effects (reserved balls) currently on hold, regardless of the start port where the start winning entry occurred. In addition, in pachinko machines with multiple start ports that prioritize execution of variable effects for wins into one start port over those for wins into other start ports, the start of the continuous preview effect may be determined solely based on the results of a pre-read of the counter value acquired for the entry into the start port for which the variable effect is prioritized. As a result, whether or not a continuous preview effect is set to be executed for a variable effect corresponding to a win into a lower-priority start port is not determined, and the continuous preview effect is not initiated for that variable effect. If a continuous preview effect begins for a variable effect corresponding to a win into a lower-priority start port, and a variable effect is continually on hold for a higher-priority start port, the continuous preview effect may not end. In contrast, in this modified example, the setting for the execution of a continuous preview effect is not determined for a variable effect corresponding to a win at a starting port with a low priority, and the continuous preview effect is not initiated for this variable effect, thereby preventing such a situation from occurring.

In the above embodiment, winning entries into the first starting gate 64a and the second starting gate 64b and passing through the through gate 67 are each configured to be reserved up to four times. However, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four and may be set to three or fewer, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). Furthermore, the maximum number of reserved balls for winning entries into the first starting gate 64a and the second starting gate 64b may be set separately for each starting gate, and the maximum number of reserved balls for each starting gate may be any number other than four. Furthermore, the maximum number of reserved balls for each starting gate does not necessarily have to be the same value; they may be different values. Furthermore, the number of reserved balls displayed as a variable display based on winning entries into the first starting gate 64a and the second starting gate 64b may be displayed as numbers in part of the drum display device 81, or in four separate areas with different patterns (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls. Alternatively, a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the special pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be indicated by the light-emitting element.

Furthermore, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical rotation of the reels driven by the drum display device 81, but may also be horizontal rotation of the reels driven by the drum display device 81, or may be displayed on the display screen of an LCD display by moving a pattern serving as identification information vertically, horizontally, or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of patterns, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with or separately from the patterns. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern.

The present invention may be implemented in pachinko machines and the like of a different type from the above-described embodiment. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which, once a jackpot is hit, the expected jackpot value increases until multiple jackpot states (e.g., two or three times) occur, including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player after a jackpot symbol is displayed, provided that the ball lands in a predetermined area. It may also be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a prize-winning device with a special area such as a V-zone, and in which the special game state is entered provided that the ball lands in that special area. Furthermore, the present invention may also be implemented in various gaming machines other than pachinko machines, such as arepachi, mahjong ball machines, slot machines, and gaming machines that combine pachinko and slot machines.

Slot machines are well-known devices in which, for example, a coin is inserted to determine a winning symbol line, and then a control lever is operated to change the symbols, and the symbols are stopped and finalized by operating a stop button. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine equipped with a display device that displays a variable sequence of identification information consisting of multiple identification information and then finalizes the display of the identification information; the variable display of the identification information begins upon operation of a start operation means (e.g., a control lever); the variable display of the identification information stops and finalizes upon operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed; and, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is specific, the slot machine generates a special game that awards the player a predetermined game value." In this case, typical examples of gaming media include coins, medals, etc.

Another example of a gaming machine that combines pachinko and slot machines is one that has a display device that displays a fluctuating sequence of multiple symbols and then confirms the symbols, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a predetermined number of balls are inserted based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbols begin to change, for example, due to operation of a control lever. The symbol change is stopped, for example, due to operation of a stop button or after a predetermined period of time has passed. If the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, a special game is triggered, awarding the player a predetermined gaming value, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine were used in place of a slot machine, the amusement hall would be able to treat only balls as gaming value, thereby eliminating problems seen in current amusement halls where pachinko and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities and restrictions on the location of gaming machines, which are caused by the separate handling of medals and balls, which represent gaming value.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as various inventive concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<Group A: Multiple display areas are displayed by lighting one LED through a diffusion lens>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery for winning or the like based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and when a player wins, for example, the game machine pays out predetermined gaming media to the player in response to the fulfillment of predetermined winning conditions.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the gaming machine, and a light-emitting unit that can change from a single color to a different light color. By changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game, etc., it is configured to enhance the presentation effect during play (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP 2018-126296 A)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effects of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group A were made in light of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

A presentation means (for example, a light guide unit 400) is provided to perform a predetermined presentation (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
a light-emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit) having a light-emitting portion (e.g., a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion;
The gaming machine A0 is characterized by comprising a diffusion means (for example, a rear downward diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the light emitting means beyond the width of the light emitting section.

According to gaming machine A0, the presentation means produces predetermined presentations as the game progresses. The light-emitting means provided in the presentation means has a light-emitting section that emits light, and when the light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a predetermined location, predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. The light from the light-emitting means is diffused by the diffusion means beyond the width of the light-emitting section. This makes it possible to accurately view predetermined information that is wider than the width of the light-emitting section of the light-emitting means, and by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

In the gaming machine A0,
The predetermined portion is
a predetermined end of the light guiding means,
The diffusion means is
The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that it is formed integrally with a predetermined end of the light guiding means.

Gaming machine A1 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine A0. That is, the predetermined portion is a predetermined end of the light guiding means, and the diffusion means is formed integrally with the predetermined end of the light guiding means. This has the effect of increasing the design freedom of the presentation means by forming the light guiding means and diffusion means integrally and reducing the number of parts in the presentation means.

In gaming machine A0 or A1,
The diffusion means is
The gaming machine A2 is characterized by being equipped with a multi-directional illumination means (e.g., one recess of the rear downward diffusing lens 425) having at least a first direction illumination section (e.g., leftward diffusion section 425a) that illuminates light from the light-emitting means in a predetermined first direction (e.g., leftward), and a second direction illumination section (e.g., frontward diffusion section 425b) that illuminates light in a second direction different from the first direction (e.g., frontward).

Gaming machine A2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines A0 and A1. That is, the multi-directional illumination means provided in the diffusion means is provided with at least a first-directional illumination section that illuminates light from the light-emitting means in a first direction, and a second-directional illumination section that illuminates light in a second direction. This makes it possible to accurately view predetermined information arranged in multiple directions, and by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

In any one of gaming machines A0 to A2,
Gaming machine A3, characterized in that the first direction and the second direction do not intersect.

Gaming machine A3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines A0 to A2. Specifically, it is configured so that the first direction and the second direction do not intersect. As a result, at least the light emitted from the light-emitting unit is diffused in two directions by the diffusion means, making it possible to accurately view predetermined information that is wider than the width of the light-emitting unit of the light-emitting unit, or multiple predetermined patterns provided in different positions. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine A2 or A3,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it is provided with a plurality of the multi-directional irradiation means at the predetermined end.

Gaming machine A4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines A2 and A3. That is, multiple multi-directional illumination means are provided on the diffusion means at predetermined ends. This allows each multi-directional illumination means to diffuse light in a bundle in the first direction and the second direction, making it possible to accurately view the predetermined information arranged in the first direction and the predetermined information arranged in the second direction. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine A4,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine A5 characterized in that a plurality of the multi-directional irradiation means are formed continuously at the predetermined end.

Gaming machine A5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine A4. That is, at a predetermined end, multiple multi-directional illumination means are formed continuously on the diffusion means. As a result, regardless of where the light-emitting units of the light-emitting means are located on the predetermined end side, the light from the light-emitting units can be continuously diffused in the light-guiding means by the multi-directional illumination means continuously provided at the predetermined end, making it possible to make the predetermined information visible. This has the effect of increasing the design freedom regarding the placement of the light-emitting units of the light-emitting means.

In any of gaming machines A2 to A5,
The multi-directional irradiation means
Gaming machine A6 is characterized by being equipped with a third direction illumination unit (e.g., a right direction diffusion unit 425c) that illuminates light from the light emitting means in a third direction (e.g., a right direction) different from the first direction and the second direction.

Gaming machine A6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines A2 to A5. That is, a third-direction illumination section provided in the multi-directional illumination means illuminates light from the light-emitting means in a third direction different from the first and second directions. This makes it possible to accurately view predetermined information arranged in at least three directions, and by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

In gaming machine A6,
The third direction is
A gaming machine A7 characterized by not intersecting the first direction and the second direction.

Gaming machine A7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine A6. Specifically, the third direction is configured so that it does not intersect with the first direction and the second direction. As a result, light emitted from at least the light-emitting unit is diffused in three directions by the diffusion means, making it possible to accurately view predetermined information that is wider than the width of the light-emitting unit of the light-emitting unit. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A7,
The diffusion means is
The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that it is formed at least at two ends of the light guiding means (for example, the upper end and lower end of the rear light guiding plate 420).

Gaming machine A8 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines A0 to A7. That is, diffusion means are formed on at least two ends of the light-guiding means. This allows light to be diffused from each of the multiple ends, thereby enabling comprehensive diffusion of light across the light-guiding means. This makes it possible to accurately visualize the specified information provided on the light-guiding means, and by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

In gaming machine A8,
The diffusion means is
Gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the light guide means is formed at a predetermined first end (for example, a lower end of the rear light guide plate 420) and a second end (for example, an upper end of the rear light guide plate 420) that pairs with the first end.

Gaming machine A9 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine A8. Specifically, diffusion means are formed at a predetermined first end of the light-guiding means and at a second end paired with the first end. This allows light to be diffused from the first end and its paired end, respectively, thereby diffusing light comprehensively across the light-guiding means. This makes it possible to accurately visualize the predetermined information provided on the light-guiding means, and by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

<Group B: Designs are placed on the light paths, and designs are also placed in the areas where light paths of different colors overlap>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery for winning or the like based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and when a player wins, for example, the game machine pays out predetermined gaming media to the player in response to the fulfillment of predetermined winning conditions.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the machine, and a light-emitting unit that can change from a single color to a different light color. By changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game, etc., the presentation effect during play is enhanced (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP 2018-126296 A)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effects of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group B were made in light of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

A presentation means (for example, a light guide unit 400) is provided to perform a predetermined presentation (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
a light-emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit) having a first light-emitting unit (e.g., one LED of the rear-lower LEDs 424) that emits light, and a second light-emitting unit (e.g., another LED of the rear-lower LEDs 424) different from the first light-emitting unit;
and a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion,
The predetermined information is
A gaming machine B0 characterized in that it is formed at a position that overlaps at least the optical path of the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit or the optical path of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit.

According to gaming machine B0, the presentation means produces predetermined presentations as the game progresses. The light-emitting means provided in the presentation means is equipped with a first light-emitting unit that emits light and a second light-emitting unit that is different from the first light-emitting unit. When light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a predetermined location, predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. The predetermined information is formed at least at a position that overlaps with the optical path of the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit or the optical path of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit. This allows the predetermined information to be accurately visible using the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit of the light-emitting means, enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means and thereby increasing attention to the game.

A presentation means (for example, a light guide unit 400) is provided to perform a predetermined presentation (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
a light-emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit 414) having a first light-emitting portion (e.g., one LED of the rear-lower LEDs 424, or the front-direction diffusing portion 425b of the rear-lower diffusion lens 425) that emits light, and a second light-emitting portion different from the first light-emitting portion (e.g., another LED of the rear-lower LEDs 424, or the left-direction diffusing portion 425a or the right-direction diffusing portion 425c of the rear-lower diffusion lens 425);
and a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that, when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, makes predetermined information related to the game (e.g., a plurality of fish symbols in the first decorative symbol group 421, or one fish symbol in the first decorative symbol group 421) visible from the front side of the gaming machine as the predetermined performance.
The predetermined information is
The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that it is formed at a position that overlaps at least the optical path of the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit or the optical path of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit.

According to gaming machine B1, the presentation means produces predetermined presentations as the game progresses. The light-emitting means provided in the presentation means has a first light-emitting unit that emits light and a second light-emitting unit that is different from the first light-emitting unit. When light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a predetermined location, predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. The predetermined information is formed in a position that overlaps with at least the optical path of the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit or the optical path of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit. This allows the predetermined information to be accurately visible from the front of the gaming machine by either the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means and increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine B1,
The predetermined information is
Gaming machine B2 is characterized in that it is formed to a size within the range of the optical path width of the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit or the optical path width of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit.

Gaming machine B2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine B1. That is, the specified information is formed with a size within the range of the optical path width of the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit or the optical path width of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit. This allows the specified information to be accurately visible from the front of the gaming machine using the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means and increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine B1 or B2,
The predetermined information is
Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that it is formed within the range of the optical path width formed by the optical path of light emitted from the first light-emitting unit and the optical path of light emitted from the second light-emitting unit.

Gaming machine B3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines B1 and B2. That is, the specified information is formed within the range of the optical path width formed by the optical path of light emitted from the first light-emitting unit and the optical path of light emitted from the second light-emitting unit. This allows the specified information to be accurately visible from the front of the gaming machine using the first light-emitting unit and the second light-emitting unit, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means and increasing attention to the game.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B3,
The predetermined information is
Gaming machine B4, characterized in that the optical path of the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit and the optical path of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit are formed at an overlapping position.

Gaming machine B4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines B1 to B3. Specifically, the specified information is formed at a position where the optical path of the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit and the optical path of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit overlap. This allows the specified information to be accurately visible from the front of the gaming machine using the first light-emitting unit and the second light-emitting unit, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means and increasing attention to the game.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B4,
The light emitting means is
Gaming machine B5 is characterized in that it is equipped with a different color light emitting means that, when the first light emitting unit emits light of a predetermined first light color (e.g., "red"), emits light of a second light color (e.g., "blue") different from the first light emitting color from the second light emitting unit.

Gaming machine B5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines B1 to B4. That is, the different color light emitting means provided in the light emitting means is configured so that when the first light emitting section emits light of a predetermined first light color, the second light emitting section emits light of a second light color different from the first light emitting color. This allows predetermined information to be emitted in a variety of display colors, enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light guiding means and increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine B5,
The predetermined information is
The predetermined first predetermined portion and the second predetermined portion different from the first predetermined portion are configured,
The different color light emitting means is
A gaming machine B6 characterized in that light emitted from the first light-emitting unit is irradiated onto the first predetermined portion, and light emitted from the second light-emitting unit is irradiated onto the second predetermined portion.

Gaming machine B6 achieves the same effect as gaming machine B5, but with the following additional benefit: The predetermined information is composed of a first predetermined portion and a second predetermined portion that is different from the first predetermined portion. The different-color light-emitting means then illuminates the first predetermined portion with light emitted from the first light-emitting unit, while illuminating the second predetermined portion with light emitted from the second light-emitting unit. This allows the predetermined information to be illuminated in different colors, enhancing the visual effect of the light-guiding means and drawing more attention to the game.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B6,
Gaming machine B7 is characterized by being equipped with a diffusion means (e.g., a rear downward diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the light-emitting means beyond the width of the first light-emitting section or the second light-emitting section.

Gaming machine B7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines B1 to B6. That is, the light from the light-emitting means is diffused by the diffusion means beyond the width of the first light-emitting section or the second light-emitting section. This makes it possible to accurately view predetermined information that is wider than the width of the first light-emitting section or the second light-emitting section of the light-emitting means, and by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

In gaming machine B7,
The predetermined portion is
a predetermined end of the light guiding means,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine B8 characterized in that it is formed integrally with a predetermined end of the light guiding means.

Gaming machine B8 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine B7. That is, the predetermined portion is a predetermined end of the light guiding means, and the diffusion means is formed integrally with the predetermined end of the light guiding means. This has the effect of increasing the design freedom of the presentation means by forming the light guiding means and diffusion means integrally and reducing the number of parts in the presentation means.

<Group C: Different LEDs light up in sequence for each designated area in a specific direction, providing a moving and colorful display>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery for winning or the like based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and when a player wins, for example, the game machine pays out predetermined gaming media to the player in response to the fulfillment of predetermined winning conditions.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the machine, and a light-emitting unit that can change from a single color to a different light color. By changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game, etc., the presentation effect during play is enhanced (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP 2018-126296 A)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest in the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effects of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group C were made in light of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

A presentation means (for example, a light guide unit 400) is provided to perform a predetermined presentation (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
a light-emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit) having a first light-emitting unit (e.g., the rightmost LED of the rear-lower LEDs 424) that emits light, a second light-emitting unit (e.g., the LED one unit to the left of the rightmost LED of the rear-lower LEDs 424) that is arranged on the predetermined side of the first light-emitting unit, and a third light-emitting unit (e.g., the LED two units to the left of the rightmost LED of the rear-lower LEDs 424) that is arranged further on the predetermined side of the second light-emitting unit;
and a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion,
The gaming machine C0 is characterized by being equipped with a sequential lighting means (for example, a sound lamp control device 113) that lights up the light emitting means sequentially from a predetermined direction side.

According to gaming machine C0, the presentation means produces predetermined presentations as the game progresses. The light-emitting means provided in the presentation means is equipped with a first light-emitting unit that emits light, a second light-emitting unit positioned in a predetermined direction from the first light-emitting unit, and a third light-emitting unit positioned further in a predetermined direction from the second light-emitting unit. When light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a predetermined location, predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. The sequential lighting means sequentially lights up the light-emitting units from the predetermined direction. This makes it possible to sequentially view the predetermined information provided on the light-guiding means from the predetermined direction, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means and thereby increasing attention to the game.

The game machine is provided with a performance means (for example, a light guide unit 400, or a combination of the light guide unit 400 and the game board 13) that performs a predetermined performance (for example, lighting or non-lighting the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
a light-emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit 414 or a game board 13) having at least a first light-emitting unit (e.g., a lower rear LED 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, or a first decorative pattern group 60a on the board surface) that emits light, and a second light-emitting unit (e.g., a lower rear LED 424 corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420, or a rear light guide plate 420) that is arranged in a predetermined direction (e.g., left when viewed from the front) from the first light-emitting unit;
and a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light is emitted from the light emitting means (at least the second light emitting unit),
The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a sequential light-emitting means (for example, lighting control of the first decorative pattern group 421 by the sound lamp control device 113, or lighting control of the first decorative pattern group 421, the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board, and the second decorative pattern group 60b on the board by the sound lamp control device 113) that sequentially emits light from the first light-emitting unit toward the specified direction.

According to gaming machine C1, the presentation means produces predetermined presentations as the game progresses. The light-emitting means provided in the presentation means is provided with a first light-emitting unit that emits light and a second light-emitting unit that is positioned in a predetermined direction from the first light-emitting unit. When light is emitted from the light-emitting unit to the light-guiding means, predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. The sequential light-emitting means causes the light-emitting unit to emit light sequentially from the first light-emitting unit in the predetermined direction. This makes it possible to sequentially view the predetermined information provided in the presentation means in the predetermined direction from the position of the first light-emitting unit, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means with the light-guiding means and thereby increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine C1,
Gaming machine C2 is characterized by being equipped with a sequential light-off means (for example, light-off control by a voice lamp control device 113) that sequentially turns off the light-emitting means that have been sequentially illuminated from the first light-emitting unit in the specified direction by the sequential light-emitting means in the specified direction from the first light-emitting unit.

Gaming machine C2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine C1. That is, the sequential extinguishing means sequentially extinguishes the light-emitting means that have been sequentially illuminated in a predetermined direction from the first light-emitting unit by the sequential light-emitting means in the predetermined direction after the first emission. This makes it possible to sequentially make the predetermined information provided in the presentation means visible in the predetermined direction from the position of the first light-emitting unit, and then sequentially make the predetermined information invisible or difficult to see in the predetermined direction from the first light-emitting unit, thereby creating an impressive presentation in which the predetermined information appears to be moving in the predetermined direction from the position of the first light-emitting unit. As a result, the effect of enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means is that it is possible to increase attention to the game.

In gaming machine C1 or C2,
The sequential light emitting means is
Gaming machine C3 is characterized by having a light color transfer means for causing the second light emitting section to emit light in the color that was emitted by the first light emitting section when the second light emitting section is made to emit light.

Gaming machine C3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C1 or C2. That is, when the second light-emitting unit is illuminated by the light-emitting color transition means provided in the sequential light-emitting means, it illuminates in the light color that was being emitted by the first light-emitting unit. This makes it possible to produce an impressive effect in which the specified information, which was visible in a specified light color, appears to move in a specified direction from the position of the first light-emitting unit. As a result, the enhanced effect of the presentation means has the effect of attracting more attention to the game.

In any one of gaming machines C1 to C3,
The sequential light emitting means is
A gaming machine C4 is characterized by comprising at least a different color light emitting means for making the first light emitting section and the second light emitting section emit light in different colors.

Gaming machine C4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, the different color light emitting means provided in the sequential light emitting means is configured to emit different colors of light from at least the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit. This makes it possible to produce a colorful effect in which predetermined information, visible in multiple colors, appears to move in a predetermined direction from the position of the first light emitting unit. As a result, the enhanced effect of the effect means has the effect of attracting more attention to the game.

In gaming machine C4,
The different color light emitting means is
Gaming machine C5 is characterized in that after the first light-emitting unit emits a predetermined first light-emitting color (e.g., "red"), the second light-emitting unit emits light in the first light-emitting color, and the first light-emitting unit emits light in a second light-emitting color (e.g., "blue") different from the first light-emitting color.

Gaming machine C5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine C4. That is, after the first light-emitting unit emits a predetermined first light color using the different color light-emitting means, the second light-emitting unit emits light in the first light-emitting color, and the first light-emitting unit emits light in a second light-emitting color different from the first light-emitting color. This makes it possible to create a colorful effect in which predetermined information, visible in multiple colors, appears to move in a predetermined direction from the location of the first light-emitting unit. As a result, the effect of enhancing the effect of the effect-producing means is that it is possible to increase attention to the game.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C5,
The production means is
At least a predetermined first presentation means (for example, a first decorative pattern group 60a on the board) provided on a game area forming member (for example, a game board 13) through which game balls can flow down;
a second effect means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) provided on the predetermined direction side of the first effect means and on the front side of the gaming machine of a display means (e.g., a drum display device 81) capable of dynamically displaying identification information;
The sequential light emitting means is
A gaming machine C6 is characterized in that after emitting light to the first effect means, light is emitted to the second effect means.

Gaming machine C6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C1 to C5. Specifically, as a presentation means, at least a predetermined first presentation means is provided in the play area forming member through which game balls can flow, and a second presentation means is provided in a predetermined direction from the first presentation means, on the front side of the game machine of the display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information. Then, the light-emitting means sequentially emits light to the first presentation means, and then emits light to the second presentation means. This allows for an integrated presentation to be performed by the first presentation means in the play area forming member and the second presentation means provided on the front side of the display means that dynamically displays identification information, making it possible to create an impressive presentation that combines the dynamic display of identification information with a predetermined presentation based on the predetermined information. This enhances the presentation effect of the presentation means, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine C6,
A gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the first effect means and the second effect means visibly display the same type of pattern as the predetermined information.

Gaming machine C7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine C6. That is, the same type of pattern is visibly displayed as predetermined information by the first presentation means and the second presentation means. This has the effect of enabling a powerful presentation by performing a series of integrated presentations by the first presentation means and the second presentation means, thereby increasing the presentation effect of the presentation means and thereby increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine C7,
The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the predetermined information is such that one pattern is formed by the first effect means and the second effect means.

Gaming machine C8 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine C7. That is, as predetermined information, a single pattern is formed by the first and second presentation means. This reduces the sense of incongruity that occurs when performing a presentation spanning the first and second presentation means, and by performing a series of integrated presentations, it is possible to create a powerful presentation. By enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C8,
The light guiding means is
Gaming machine C9 is characterized in that when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined end, the predetermined information can be seen from the front side of the gaming machine.

Gaming machine C9 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C1 to C8. That is, when light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident from a specified end, the specified information provided on the light-guiding means becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means and increasing attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C9,
A gaming machine C10 characterized by being equipped with a diffusion means (e.g., a rear downward diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the light-emitting means beyond the width of the first light-emitting section or the second light-emitting section.

Gaming machine C10 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C1 to C9. That is, the light from the light-emitting means is diffused by the diffusion means beyond the width of the first light-emitting section or the second light-emitting section. This makes it possible to accurately view predetermined information that is wider than the width of the first light-emitting section or the second light-emitting section of the light-emitting means, and by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

In gaming machine C9 or C10,
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine C11 characterized in that it is formed integrally with a predetermined end of the light guiding means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C9 and C10, gaming machine C11 offers the following advantage: the diffusion means is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guiding means. This allows the light guiding means and diffusion means to be integrally formed, reducing the number of parts in the presentation means and thereby increasing the design freedom of the presentation means.

<Group D: When multiple effects overlap, one effect takes priority over the other>

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold lotteries to determine whether a player wins or not when certain start conditions are met, and when a player wins, for example, certain gaming media are paid out to the player in accordance with the fulfillment of certain winning conditions.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the machine, and a light-emitting unit that can change from a single color to a different light color. By changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game, etc., the presentation effect during play is enhanced (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP 2018-126296 A)).

The inventions in Group D were made in light of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

a first effect means (for example, the light guide unit 400) that performs a first effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses;
a second effect means (for example, a confirmation lamp 311) for performing a second effect (for example, turning on or off the confirmation lamp 311) that is more important to the game than the first effect as the game progresses;
The first production means
a light-emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit) having a light-emitting portion (e.g., a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
and a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion,
The gaming machine D0 is characterized in that it is equipped with a second performance priority means (for example, turning off the rear upper LED 422c) that executes the second performance in priority to the first performance when the second performance is executed by the second performance means and the first performance is executed by the first performance means.

According to gaming machine D0, the first presentation means produces a first presentation as the game progresses. Furthermore, the second presentation means produces a second presentation, which is more important to the game than the first presentation, as the game progresses. The light-emitting means provided in the first presentation means has a light-emitting unit that emits light, and when the light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a predetermined location, predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. Here, when the second presentation means produces the second presentation and the first presentation means produces the first presentation, the second presentation priority means prioritizes the second presentation over the first presentation. This allows the second presentation, which is more important to the game than the first presentation, to be executed first, even when the first and second presentations overlap, making the second presentation more noticeable than the first presentation. Therefore, the content of the second presentation, which is important to the game, can be clearly produced, accurately suggesting information related to the game to the player, and increasing attention to the game.

a first effect means (for example, the light guide unit 400) that performs a first effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses;
a second effect means (for example, the confirmation lamp 311) for performing a second effect different from the first effect (for example, turning on or off the confirmation lamp 311) as the game progresses;
A gaming machine D1 characterized by being equipped with a first effect reduction means (for example, turning off the rear upper LED 422c) that reduces the scale of the first effect when the second effect can be executed by the second effect means and the first effect can be executed by the first effect means.

According to gaming machine D1, the first effect is produced by the first effect means as the game progresses. Furthermore, the second effect means produces a second effect, different from the first effect, as the game progresses. Here, when the second effect can be produced by the second effect means and the first effect can be produced by the first effect means, the first effect reduction means reduces the scale of the first effect before it is produced. This allows the second effect to stand out relatively by reducing the scale of the first effect, even when the first and second effects are produced in parallel. Therefore, at the very least, the content of the second effect can be clearly produced, accurately suggesting information about the game to the player, and increasing attention to the game.

Note that "reducing the scale of the effect" may mean, for example, shrinking the area in which the effect is performed, reducing or decreasing the size or quantity of the symbols that appear as part of the effect, replacing a highly eye-catching effect (high probability of winning a jackpot) with a less eye-catching effect, lowering the brightness of the effect's light (increasing transparency), lowering the volume of the effect, or making the effect relatively more difficult to see by giving priority to other effects (towards the player).

In the gaming machine D1,
The second performance is
The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the first presentation has a higher expectation of awarding a predetermined gaming value.

The gaming machine D2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1. That is, the second effect is set as an effect with a higher expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded than the first effect.
Even when the first and second effects are executed in parallel, the scale of the first effect, which has a lower expectation of being awarded a predetermined game value than the second effect, is reduced, and the second effect is executed relatively with priority, thereby making the second effect stand out. Thus, the content of the second effect, which is important for the game, can be clearly executed, accurately suggesting information about the game to the player, and increasing the attention to the game.

In gaming machine D1 or D2,
a first effect lottery means (for example, a light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e and a light guide pattern lottery counter 223d) for drawing lots to determine whether or not the first effect is to be executed;
a second effect lottery means (for example, a confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f and a confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e) for lottery-selecting whether or not the second effect is to be executed;
a first effect determination means (for example, a light guiding pattern setting process (S1415)) for determining whether or not to execute the first effect based on the lottery result of the first effect lottery means when the second effect is executed based on the lottery result of the second effect lottery means;
The first effect reduction means
The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, when the first effect determination means determines that the first effect is to be executed, the scale of the first effect is reduced.

Gaming machine D3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines D1 or D2. That is, the first effect lottery means determines whether to execute the first effect, and the second effect lottery means determines whether to execute the second effect. Furthermore, when the second effect is executed based on the result of the lottery by the second effect lottery means, the first effect discrimination means determines whether to execute the first effect based on the result of the lottery by the first effect lottery means. Then, when the first effect discrimination means determines that the first effect will be executed, the first effect reduction means reduces the scale of the first effect. As a result, even when the first and second effects, each of which is executed by separate execution lottery, can be executed in parallel, the scale of the first effect can be reduced depending on whether the first effect is executed, thereby making the second effect stand out relatively. Therefore, at least the effect of clearly executing the content of the second effect accurately suggests information about the game to the player, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3,
The first performance is
A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it can be executed in an area wider than the area of the second performance.

Gaming machine D4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines D1 to D3. That is, the first effect can be executed in an area larger than the area of the second effect. In other words, even if the second effect and the first effect, which has a larger area than the second effect, are executed in parallel, by reducing the scale of the first effect that is executed, the second effect can be made to stand out to the extent that the scale of the first effect is reduced. Therefore, the content of the second effect can be clearly executed, accurately suggesting information about the game to the player, and has the effect of increasing attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4,
The first production means
a light emitting means including a first light emitting unit (e.g., a rear lower LED 424) that emits light and a second light emitting unit (e.g., a rear upper LED 422c) that emits light;
and an irradiated means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420) that makes it easy to see predetermined information related to a game when light is irradiated from at least one of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit as the first effect.
The first effect reduction means
Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that it is equipped with an illumination reduction means that reduces or stops the illumination of light from either the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit to narrow the visible range of the specified information when the second presentation can be executed by the second presentation means and the first presentation can be executed by the first presentation means.

Gaming machine D5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines D1 to D4. Specifically, as a first effect means, light is emitted from a first light-emitting unit provided in the light-emitting means, and light is emitted from a second light-emitting unit also provided in the light-emitting means. Furthermore, when light is emitted from at least either the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit as the first effect, the illuminated means is configured to make the predetermined information related to the game easily visible. Here, when the second effect can be executed by the second effect means and the first effect can be executed by the first effect means, the illumination reduction means provided in the first effect reduction means reduces or stops the illumination of light from either the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit, thereby reducing the visible range of the predetermined information. As a result, even when the first and second effects are executed in parallel, the second effect can be made to stand out relatively by reducing or stopping the illumination of light from either the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit used in the first effect, thereby reducing the visible range of the predetermined information as the first effect. Therefore, at the very least, the effects of the second effect can be clearly executed, accurately suggesting information about the game to the player, and increasing attention to the game.

Note that "reducing or ceasing light irradiation" may mean, for example, reducing the light emission area, reducing the light emission brightness, ceasing or interrupting light emission, reducing the light emission time, or emitting light intermittently.

In gaming machine D5,
The irradiation reducing means is
A gaming machine D6 characterized in that the emission of light from the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit corresponding to the predetermined information on the second performance means side is reduced or stopped.

Gaming machine D6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine D5. That is, the illumination reduction means reduces or stops the illumination of light from the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit corresponding to the predetermined information on the second presentation means side. This reduces the visible range of the predetermined information on the second presentation means side, making it possible to make at least the first presentation executed near the second presentation less noticeable and make the second presentation more noticeable in comparison. Therefore, at least the content of the second presentation can be clearly executed, accurately suggesting information about the game to the player, and increasing the player's attention to the game.

In gaming machine D5 or D6,
The irradiated means is
a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that makes the predetermined information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light is emitted from the light emitting means;
Gaming machine D7 is characterized by being equipped with a diffusion means (e.g., a rear downward diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit beyond the width of the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit.

Gaming machine D7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines D5 and D6. That is, when light is emitted from the light-emitting means, the light-guiding means serving as the illuminated means makes the specified information visible from the front of the gaming machine. The light from the first light-emitting unit or second light-emitting unit is diffused by the diffusion means beyond the width of the first light-emitting unit or second light-emitting unit. This makes it possible to accurately view specified information that is wider than the width of the first light-emitting unit or second light-emitting unit of the light-emitting means, and by enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means having the light-guiding means, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

In the gaming machine D7,
The predetermined portion is
a predetermined end of the light guiding means,
The diffusion means is
Gaming machine D8 characterized in that it is formed integrally with a predetermined end of the light guiding means.

Gaming machine D8 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine D7. That is, the predetermined portion is a predetermined end of the light guiding means, and the diffusion means is formed integrally with the predetermined end of the light guiding means. This has the effect of increasing the design freedom of the presentation means by forming the light guiding means and diffusion means integrally and reducing the number of parts in the presentation means.

<Group E: Weak and medium warnings displayed on one light guide panel, strong warnings displayed on a separate light guide panel>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines that draw a lottery for winning or the like based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and when a player wins, for example, the game machine pays out predetermined gaming media to the player in response to the fulfillment of predetermined winning conditions.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the machine, and a light-emitting unit that can change from a single color to a different light color. By changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game, etc., the presentation effect during play is enhanced (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP 2018-126296 A)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effects of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group E were made in light of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is met;
a determination means (e.g., MPU 201) for making a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means,
a suggestion information lottery means (e.g., MPU 221) for lotterying the execution of one of first suggestion information (e.g., fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting to a player the expected probability of the predetermined game value being awarded based on the determination result of the determination means, second suggestion information (e.g., third decorative symbol group 412) capable of suggesting to a player that the expected probability of the predetermined game value being awarded is higher than the first suggestion information, or third suggestion information (e.g., first decorative symbol group 421) capable of suggesting to a player that the expected probability of the predetermined game value being awarded is higher than the second suggestion information;
a first effect means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that can execute the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information based on a result of the suggestive information lottery means;
A gaming machine E0 characterized by having a second presentation means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that can execute the third suggestive information based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means.

In the gaming machine E0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the judgment means makes a judgment based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Here, the suggestive information lottery means, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, selects one of the following: first suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player the likelihood of the predetermined gaming value being awarded; second suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player that the likelihood of the predetermined gaming value being awarded is higher than the first suggestive information; or third suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player that the likelihood of the predetermined gaming value being awarded is higher than the second suggestive information. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means, the first performance means is configured to execute the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information, and similarly, based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means, the second performance means is configured to execute the third suggestive information. In this way, by executing the third suggestion effect, which can suggest to the player that the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information indicate a high probability of the predetermined game value being awarded, using a different presentation method than the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, which can suggest a low probability of the predetermined game value being awarded, based on the third suggestion information, it is possible to prevent the third suggestion information, which can cause large presentation inconsistencies, from being abnormally executed if it is executed incorrectly due to noise or a malfunction. As a result, it is possible to prevent presentation inconsistencies from occurring, accurately suggest information about the game to the player, and increase attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is met;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means,
A suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) is provided for drawing lots to select whether to execute a suggestion based on suggestion information that can suggest the expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded to a player based on the determination result of the determination means,
The suggestive information includes at least
The game machine has first suggestion information (e.g., fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting to a player a predetermined expectation level for the predetermined game value to be awarded, second suggestion information (e.g., third decorative symbol 412) capable of suggesting to a player that the expectation level for the predetermined game value to be awarded is higher than that of the first suggestion information, and third suggestion information (e.g., first decorative symbol group 421) capable of suggesting to a player that the expectation level for the predetermined game value to be awarded is higher than that of the second suggestion information,
a first effect means (for example, a front light guide plate 410 and each LED 414c) capable of executing the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information based on a result of the suggestive information lottery means;
A gaming machine E1 is characterized by being equipped with a second presentation means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420 and each LED 424, etc.) that can execute the third suggestive information based on the lottery results of the suggestive information lottery means.

According to gaming machine E1, the acquisition means acquires special information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the judgment means makes a judgment based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Furthermore, the suggestion information lottery means draws a lottery to execute a suggestion based on suggestion information that can suggest to the player the expected probability of being awarded the predetermined gaming value, based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Here, the suggestion information includes at least first suggestion information that can suggest to the player the expected probability of being awarded the predetermined gaming value, second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the expected probability of being awarded the predetermined gaming value is higher than the first suggestion information, and third suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the expected probability of being awarded the predetermined gaming value is higher than the second suggestion information. The first suggestive information or the second suggestive information is executable by the first presentation means based on the result of the suggestive information selection means, and the second presentation means is executable based on the result of the suggestive information selection means. This allows the third suggestive presentation, which can suggest to the player that the first suggestive information and the second suggestive information indicate a high probability of the predetermined game value being awarded, to be executed by a presentation means different from the first suggestive presentation and the second suggestive presentation, which can suggest a low probability of the predetermined game value being awarded, based on the third suggestive information. This prevents the third suggestive information, which can cause significant inconsistencies in presentation when erroneously executed due to noise or a malfunction, from being abnormally executed. This effectively prevents inconsistencies in presentation, allows accurate suggestions regarding the game to the player, and increases attention to the game.

In the gaming machine E1,
The first production means
a first light-emitting unit (e.g., a front right LED 415c or a front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (e.g., a left direction or a right direction when viewed from the front);
a second light-emitting unit (e.g., a front downward LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (e.g., an upward direction when viewed from the front) different from the first direction;
a first light guiding means (e.g., a front light guiding plate 410) that makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident from a predetermined first portion, and that makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the second light emitting unit is incident from a second portion different from the first portion;
The first light guiding means is
a first emission section (for example, a vertical groove forming each bubble symbol of the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that emits or easily emits light irradiated in the first direction toward the front side of the gaming machine and does not or does not easily emit light irradiated in the second direction toward the front side of the gaming machine;
Gaming machine E2 is characterized by being equipped with a second emission section (for example, a horizontal groove forming the sunfish pattern of the third decorative pattern 412, or each cherry blossom pattern group of the second decorative pattern group 411) that emits or easily emits light irradiated in the second direction toward the front of the gaming machine, and does not or does not easily emit light irradiated in the first direction toward the front of the gaming machine.

Gaming machine E2 achieves the following effects in addition to those achieved by gaming machine E1. Specifically, a first light-emitting unit provided in the first presentation means emits light in a predetermined first direction, and a second light-emitting unit provided in the first presentation means emits light in a second direction different from the first direction. Furthermore, when light emitted from the first light-emitting unit is incident on the first light-guiding means from a predetermined first location, the first suggestive information becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. When light emitted from the second light-emitting unit is incident on the first light-guiding means from a second location different from the first location, the second suggestive information becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the first light-emitting unit provided in the first light-guiding means is configured so that light irradiated in the first direction is or is easily emitted toward the front of the gaming machine, and light irradiated in the second direction is not or is difficult to emit toward the front of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the second light-emitting section provided in the first light-guiding means is configured so that light emitted in the second direction is or is easily emitted toward the front of the gaming machine, and so that light emitted in the first direction is not or is difficult to emit toward the front of the gaming machine. In other words, in the first presentation means, light from the first direction makes the first suggestive information visible while making the second suggestive information invisible or difficult to see, and light from the second direction makes the second suggestive information visible while making the first suggestive information invisible or difficult to see. This allows multiple pieces of suggestive information to be expressed in the first presentation means. This allows each piece of suggestive information to be distinguishably visible by controlling the light emission of the first light-emitting section or the second light-emitting section, even when multiple pieces of suggestive information are provided in the first presentation means. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect of the first presentation means by enabling the first presentation means to express multiple pieces of suggestive information, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine E2,
The first production means includes at least
Gaming machine E3 is characterized by being equipped with a directivity improving means (for example, a front downward focusing lens 414d, a front right focusing lens 415d, or a front left LED 416c) that increases the directivity of light irradiated from the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit.

Gaming machine E3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines E1 and E2. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from at least the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit is increased by the directivity improvement means provided in the first presentation means. As a result, even when multiple pieces of suggestive information are provided in the first presentation means, only the suggestive information being irradiated can be accurately viewed. Therefore, even when a second suggestive effect that can suggest to the player that the first suggestive information indicates a higher expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded is executed using the same first presentation means as the first suggestive information, by controlling the light emission of the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit, respectively, each piece of suggestive information can be made distinctly visible. As a result, the desired suggestive information can be accurately viewed, and by accurately suggesting information related to the game to the player, attention to the game can be increased.

In any of gaming machines E1 to E3,
The second production means is
a third light-emitting unit (e.g., rear downward LED 424) that emits light;
a second light guiding means (e.g., a rear light guiding plate 420) that allows only the third suggestive information to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the third light emitting unit is incident on a predetermined third portion;
Gaming machine E4 is characterized by being equipped with a diffusion means (e.g., a rear downward diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the third light-emitting unit beyond the width of the third light-emitting unit.

Gaming machine E4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines E1 to E3. That is, as a second effect means, light is emitted from the third light-emitting unit, and when the light emitted from the third light-emitting unit is incident from a predetermined third location, the second light-guiding unit makes the third suggestive information visible from the front of the gaming machine. The diffusion unit then diffuses the light from the third light-emitting unit beyond the width of the third light-emitting unit. As a result, in the second light-guiding unit provided with only one suggestive information, by diffusing the light emitted from the third light-emitting unit beyond the width of the third light-emitting unit, it is possible to irradiate light over a wider area than the layout of the third light-emitting unit. As a result, even if the third suggestive information is provided large in the second light-guiding unit, for example, the third suggestive information can be made accurately visible, and the enhanced effect of the effect means having the light-guiding unit can increase attention to the game.

In gaming machine E4,
The diffusion means is
Gaming machine E5 characterized in that it is formed integrally with the third portion of the second light guiding means.

Gaming machine E5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine E4. Namely, it is formed integrally with the third portion of the second light guiding means. This has the effect of increasing the design freedom of the second performance means by forming the second light guiding means and the diffusion means integrally and reducing the number of parts in the second performance means.

In any of gaming machines E1 to E5,
The first effect means and the second effect means
Gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the gaming machines are arranged in an overlapping manner in the front direction of the gaming machine.

Gaming machine E6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines E1 to E5. That is, the first presentation means and the second presentation means are arranged to overlap in the front direction of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to make multiple pieces of suggestive information visible in one presentation area, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the presentation means and increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine E6,
The first production means
Gaming machine E7 is characterized in that it is arranged closer to the front of the gaming machine than the second presentation means.

Gaming machine E7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine E6. That is, the first presentation means is positioned closer to the front of the gaming machine than the second presentation means. That is, on the front side of the gaming machine of the second presentation means configured to make the third suggestive information visible, a first presentation means configured to make the first suggestive information and second suggestive information visible, which have a lower expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value than the third suggestive information, is positioned. As a result, even if light from the indoor lighting of an amusement hall, for example, is shone from the front of the gaming machine, the first presentation means can reduce the amount of light reaching the second presentation means, thereby having the effect of suppressing erroneous lighting of the third suggestive information, which is more affected by presentation inconsistencies than other suggestive information.

<Group F: Multiple display objects on one light guide plate, different LED light path direction for each display object, few-directional areas (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossoms) and multi-directional areas (two directions, bubbles) within one light guide plate, strong effects in the few directions (weak effects where the light paths overlap)>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery for winning or the like based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and when a player wins, for example, the game machine pays out predetermined gaming media to the player in response to the fulfillment of predetermined winning conditions.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the machine, and a light-emitting unit that can change from a single color to a different light color. By changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game, etc., the presentation effect during play is enhanced (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP 2018-126296 A)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effects of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group F were made in light of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is met;
a determination means (e.g., MPU 201) for making a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means,
a suggestion information lottery means (e.g., MPU 221) for drawing lots to select, based on the determination result by the determination means, at least, first suggestion information (e.g., fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest to the player the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded, or second suggestion information (e.g., third decorative symbol 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded is higher than that of the first suggestion information;
and a performance means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of executing the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information based on a result of the suggestive information selection means,
The production means is
a first light-emitting unit (e.g., a front right LED 415c and a front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (e.g., a left-right direction);
a second light-emitting means (e.g., a front downward LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (e.g., an upward direction) different from the first direction;
a light guide means (e.g., the front light guide plate 410) that makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident on a predetermined first portion (e.g., the left and right end faces of the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410), and that makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident on a second portion different from the first portion (e.g., the lower end face of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410),
At least the second suggestion information is
The gaming machine F0 is characterized in that the presentation means is provided at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap (for example, the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410).

According to the gaming machine F0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the judgment means makes a judgment based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Here, the suggestive information lottery means, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, selects the execution of at least first suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player the likelihood of the predetermined gaming value being awarded, or second suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player that the likelihood of the predetermined gaming value being awarded is higher than the first suggestive information. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means, the performance means is configured to execute the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information. Here, a first light-emitting means provided in the performance means irradiates light in a predetermined first direction, and a second light-emitting means also provided in the performance means irradiates light in a second direction different from the first direction. When light emitted from the first light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a predetermined first location, the first suggestive information becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. When light emitted from the second light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a second location different from the first location, the second suggestive information becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. The effect means provides the second suggestive information at least in a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap. That is, the second suggestive effect, which can suggest to the player that the first suggestive information indicates a higher likelihood of receiving a predetermined gaming value, is provided in a position where the light from the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means do not overlap. This prevents the abnormal execution of the second suggestive information, which can cause significant inconsistencies in the effect if it is erroneously executed due to noise or a malfunction. This reduces inconsistencies in the effect, accurately suggests information about the game to the player, and increases the player's interest in the game.

Acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is met;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means,
A suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) for drawing lots to select whether to execute a suggestion based on suggestion information that can suggest the expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded to a player based on the determination result of the determination means;
and a performance means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of executing a suggestion based on the suggestion information based on a lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
The suggestive information includes at least
The presentation means has first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest to the player a predetermined expectation level that the predetermined game value will be awarded, and second suggestion information (for example, the third decorative symbol 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation level that the predetermined game value will be awarded is higher than the first suggestion information.
a first light-emitting unit (e.g., a front right LED 415c and a front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (e.g., a left-right direction);
a second light-emitting unit (e.g., a front downward LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (e.g., an upward direction) different from the first direction;
a light guide means (e.g., the front light guide plate 410) that makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the first light-emitting unit is incident on a predetermined first portion (e.g., the left and right end faces of the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410), and that makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the second light-emitting unit is incident on a second portion different from the first portion (e.g., the lower end face of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410),
The second suggestion information is
The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the light guiding means is provided at a position (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guiding plate 410) where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect.

According to the gaming machine F1, the acquisition means acquires special information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. A predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Furthermore, the suggestive information lottery means selects the execution of a suggestion based on suggestive information that can suggest to the player the expected probability of the predetermined gaming value being awarded based on the determination result by the determination means. The performance means is configured to execute the suggestive information based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means. The suggestive information includes at least first suggestive information that can suggest to the player the expected probability of the predetermined gaming value being awarded, and second suggestive information that can suggest to the player that the expected probability of the predetermined gaming value being awarded is higher than the first suggestive information. A first light-emitting unit provided in the performance means emits light in a predetermined first direction, and a second light-emitting unit also provided in the performance means emits light in a second direction different from the first direction. Furthermore, the light-guiding means provided in the effect means is configured so that the first suggestive information is visible from the front of the gaming machine when light emitted from the first light-emitting unit is incident from a predetermined first location, and the second suggestive information is visible from the front of the gaming machine when light emitted from the second light-emitting unit is incident from a second location different from the first location. Here, the second suggestive information is provided in the light-guiding means at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect. In other words, the second suggestive information, which can suggest to the player that the first suggestive information indicates a high expectation of receiving a predetermined gaming value, is formed in a position visible only with light irradiated from at least one of the first light-emitting unit or the second light-emitting unit. This makes it possible to prevent the second suggestive information, which causes a large discrepancy in effect, from being visible even if light is erroneously emitted from the first light-emitting unit due to noise or a malfunction. As a result, it is possible to reduce inconsistencies in presentation, accurately suggest information about the game to players, and increase attention to the game.

In the gaming machine F1,
The production means includes at least
Gaming machine F2 is characterized by being equipped with a directivity improving means (for example, a front right focusing lens 415d or a front left focusing lens 416d) that increases the directivity of the light irradiated from the first light-emitting unit.

Gaming machine F2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine F1. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit is at least increased by the directivity improvement means provided in the presentation means. As a result, when multiple pieces of suggestive information are provided in the presentation means, even when the presentation means executes a first suggestive presentation that can at least suggest to the player that the expectation of awarding a predetermined gaming value is lower than the second suggestive information, the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit can be accurately directed to the position where the first suggestive information is provided and does not or makes it difficult for it to reach the position where the second suggestive information is provided, thereby preventing the second suggestive information from becoming visible due to the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit. As a result, the occurrence of presentation inconsistencies can be reduced, information related to the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine F1 or F2,
The first suggestion information is
Gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the light guiding means is provided at a position where the optical path of light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of light emitted in the second direction intersect (for example, the lower flat portion and lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guiding plate 410).

Gaming machine F3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines F1 or F2. That is, the first suggestion information is provided in the light-guiding means at a position where the optical path of light emitted in the first direction intersects with the optical path of light emitted in the second direction. That is, the first suggestion information, which can suggest to the player that the expectation of the predetermined gaming value being awarded is lower than that of the second suggestion information, is formed on the optical path of light emitted from both the first light-emitting unit and the second light-emitting unit. Here, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible due to the light corresponding to the second suggestion information, the light corresponding to the second suggestion information makes visible the second suggestion information, which has a higher expectation of the predetermined gaming value being awarded than that of the first suggestion information. Therefore, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible when the second suggestion information becomes visible, there is little discrepancy in presentation. This has the effect of minimizing inconsistencies in presentation and providing players with a natural game experience, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine at an unintended time, by providing first suggestion information with a lower expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value than the second suggestion information at the intersection of the optical path of the light in the second direction corresponding to the second suggestion information and the optical path of the light in the first direction corresponding to the first suggestion information.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3,
The production means is
Gaming machine F4 is characterized by being equipped with a second directivity improving means (for example, a front downward focusing lens 414d) that increases the directivity of light emitted from the second light-emitting section.

Gaming machine F4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines F1 to F3. That is, the directionality of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit is increased by the second directivity improvement means provided in the presentation means. As a result, when multiple pieces of suggestive information are provided in the presentation means, even if the presentation means executes a second suggestive presentation that can suggest to the player that the expectation of awarding a predetermined gaming value is higher than the first suggestive information, the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit can be accurately directed to the position where the second suggestive information is provided, making the second suggestive information visible from the front of the gaming machine, thereby accurately suggesting information about the game to the player and increasing attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3,
The production means is
Gaming machine F5 is characterized by being equipped with a diffusion means (e.g., a third upward diffusion lens 473) that diffuses the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit beyond the width of the second light-emitting unit.

Gaming machine F5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines F1 to F3. Specifically, the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit is diffused by a diffusion means provided in the presentation means across the width of the second light-emitting unit. Even if the first suggestive information becomes visible due to the light for the second suggestive information emitted from the second light-emitting unit via the diffusion means, the light for the second suggestive information makes visible the second suggestive information, which has a higher probability of being awarded a predetermined gaming value than the first suggestive information. Therefore, even if the first suggestive information becomes visible when the second suggestive information becomes visible, there is little inconsistency in presentation. This allows the second suggestive information to be clearly recognized by diffusing the light from the second light-emitting unit and comprehensively illuminating the second suggestive information with the diffused light. Furthermore, even if the first suggestive information becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine at an unintended time, there is minimal inconsistency in presentation, providing the player with a natural gaming experience.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5,
The light guiding means is
a first emission section (for example, a vertical groove forming each bubble symbol of the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that emits or easily emits light irradiated in the first direction toward the front side of the gaming machine and does not or does not easily emit light irradiated in the second direction toward the front side of the gaming machine;
Gaming machine F6 is characterized by being equipped with a second emission section (for example, a horizontal groove forming the sunfish pattern of the third decorative pattern 412, or each cherry blossom pattern group of the second decorative pattern group 411) that emits or easily emits light irradiated in the second direction toward the front of the gaming machine, and does not or does not easily emit light irradiated in the first direction toward the front of the gaming machine.

Gaming machine F6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines F1 to F5. That is, the first emission section provided in the light-guiding means causes light irradiated in the first direction to be emitted or easily emitted toward the front of the gaming machine, and light irradiated in the second direction does not or is difficult to emit toward the front of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the second emission section provided in the light-guiding means causes light irradiated in the second direction to be emitted or easily emitted toward the front of the gaming machine, and light irradiated in the first direction does not or is difficult to emit toward the front of the gaming machine. That is, in the presentation means, light from the first direction makes the first suggestive information visible while making the second suggestive information invisible or difficult to observe, and light from the second direction makes the second suggestive information visible while making the first suggestive information invisible or difficult to observe, thereby enabling multiple suggestive information to be expressed even with a single presentation means. As a result, even if multiple pieces of suggestive information are provided in the presentation means, by controlling the light emission of the first light-emitting element or the second light-emitting element respectively, each piece of suggestive information can be made distinct and visible. By being able to express multiple pieces of suggestive information in the presentation means, the presentation effect of the presentation means can be enhanced, thereby increasing attention to the game.

<Group G: Multiple display objects on one light guide plate, different LED light path direction for each display object, few-directional areas (one direction, sunfish, cherry blossom) and multi-directional areas (two directions, bubble group) within one light guide plate, few-directional areas located in front of the displays (main display, main drum, main LCD)>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery for winning or the like based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and when a player wins, for example, the game machine pays out predetermined gaming media to the player in response to the fulfillment of predetermined winning conditions.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the machine, and a light-emitting unit that can change from a single color to a different light color. By changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game, etc., the presentation effect during play is enhanced (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP 2018-126296 A)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effects of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group G were made in light of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is met;
a determination means (e.g., MPU 201) for making a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
dynamic execution means (for example, a display control device 114) for dynamically displaying the identification information on a display means (for example, a drum display device 81) based on the determination result of the determination means;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
a suggestion information lottery means (e.g., MPU 221) for drawing lots to select, based on the determination result by the determination means, at least, first suggestion information (e.g., fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest to the player the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded, or second suggestion information (e.g., third decorative symbol 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded is higher than that of the first suggestion information;
and a performance means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) capable of executing the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information based on a result of the suggestive information selection means,
The production means is
a first light-emitting unit (e.g., a front right LED 415c and a front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (e.g., a left-right direction);
a second light-emitting means (e.g., a front downward LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (e.g., an upward direction) different from the first direction;
a light guide means (e.g., the front light guide plate 410) that makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident on a predetermined first portion (e.g., the left and right end faces of the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410), and that makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident on a second portion different from the first portion (e.g., the lower end face of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410),
The display means
The gaming machine G0 is characterized in that the presentation means is arranged on the rear side when viewed from the front, at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap (for example, the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410).

According to the gaming machine G0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays identification information on the display means. Furthermore, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means, the suggestive information lottery means draws a lottery to execute at least first suggestive information that can suggest to the player the expected probability of awarding the predetermined gaming value, or second suggestive information that can suggest to the player that the expected probability of awarding the predetermined gaming value is higher than the first suggestive information. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means, the performance means is configured to execute the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information. Here, a first light-emitting means provided on the presentation means emits light in a predetermined first direction, and a second light-emitting means also provided on the presentation means emits light in a second direction different from the first direction. When the light emitted from the first light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a predetermined first location, the first suggestive information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the light emitted from the second light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a second location different from the first location, the second suggestive information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the presentation means is provided with a display means at least on the rear side, as viewed from the front, at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap. That is, the display means that displays the display result of the dynamic display is provided at a position where the light from the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means do not overlap. This reduces the likelihood that the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information will be displayed due to a malfunction at the position where the display means indicating the game result is provided, even if the first light-emitting means or the second light-emitting means erroneously emits light due to noise or a malfunction. As a result, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, which has the effect of increasing attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is met;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
and a display means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect related to the game based on the determination result by the determination means.
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means,
A suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) for drawing lots to select whether to execute a suggestion based on suggestion information that can suggest the expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded to a player based on the determination result of the determination means;
and a performance means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of executing the suggestive information based on a result of the suggestive information selection means,
The suggestive information includes at least
The presentation means has first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest to the player a predetermined expectation level that the predetermined game value will be awarded, and second suggestion information (for example, the third decorative symbol 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation level that the predetermined game value will be awarded is higher than the first suggestion information.
a first light-emitting unit (e.g., a front right LED 415c and a front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (e.g., a left-right direction);
a second light-emitting unit (e.g., a front downward LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (e.g., an upward direction) different from the first direction;
a light guide means (e.g., the front light guide plate 410) that makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the first light-emitting unit is incident on a predetermined first portion (e.g., the left and right end faces of the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410), and that makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the second light-emitting unit is incident on a second portion different from the first portion (e.g., the lower end face of the lower flat portion of the front light guide plate 410),
The display means
The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the light guide means is arranged on the rear side of the gaming machine when viewed from the front, at a position (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410) where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect.

According to the gaming machine G1, the acquisition means acquires special information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Furthermore, the display means is configured to execute a predetermined presentation related to the game based on the determination result by the determination means. A predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the suggestion information lottery means draws a lottery to execute a suggestion using suggestion information that can suggest to the player the expected probability of awarding the predetermined gaming value, and the presentation means is configured to execute the suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means. The suggestion information includes at least first suggestion information that can suggest to the player the expected probability of awarding the predetermined gaming value, and second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the expected probability of awarding the predetermined gaming value is higher than the first suggestion information. Here, a first light-emitting unit provided on the presentation means irradiates light in a predetermined first direction, and a second presentation means also provided on the presentation means irradiates light in a second direction different from the first direction. Then, a light-guiding means provided on the presentation means makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit is incident from a predetermined first location, and makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit is incident from a second location different from the first location. Here, the display means is disposed on the back side of the gaming machine as viewed from the front, at a position on the light-guiding means where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect. This has the effect of increasing the presentation effects of the display means and presentation means, respectively, by arranging the display means capable of executing predetermined presentations related to the game on the rear side of the gaming machine at a position where the optical path of the light in the first direction and the optical path of the light in the second direction do not intersect, and configuring the predetermined presentation related to the game executed by the display means so as not to interfere with the presentation, while configuring the presentation means to make the predetermined information visible, thereby increasing the presentation effects of the display means and presentation means, and increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine G1,
a dynamic execution means (for example, a display control device 114) that dynamically displays the identification information in a predetermined display area of the display means based on the determination result of the determination means;
and a game value awarding means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that can award the game value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
Equipped with
The display area is
The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the light guide means is arranged on the rear side of the gaming machine when viewed from the front, at a position (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410) where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the gaming machine G2 has the following effects.
The dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in a predetermined display area of the display means based on the determination result of the determination means, and when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, the game value awarding means can award a game value to the player. The display area of the display means is disposed on the back side of the gaming machine, as viewed from the front, at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect in the light guiding means. This arrangement provides the display means, which dynamically displays the identification information indicating whether or not a game value will be awarded, on the back side of the gaming machine, at a position where the optical path of the light in the first direction and the optical path of the light in the second direction do not intersect, so that the dynamic display executed by the display means does not interfere with the presentation, while the predetermined information indicating the expected degree of awarding of a game value is visible in the presentation means, thereby enhancing the presentation effects of the display means and the presentation means, and thereby increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine G1 or G2,
The production means includes at least
A gaming machine G3 characterized by being equipped with a directivity improving means (for example, a front right focusing lens 415d or a front left focusing lens 416d) that increases the directivity of the light irradiated from the first light-emitting unit.

Gaming machine G3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G1 or G2. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit is at least increased by the directivity improvement means provided in the presentation means. As a result, when multiple pieces of suggestive information are provided in the presentation means, even when the presentation means executes a first suggestive presentation that can suggest to the player that the expectation of awarding a predetermined gaming value is lower than the second suggestive information, the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit can be accurately directed to the position where the first suggestive information is provided and cannot or has difficulty reaching the position where the second suggestive information is provided, thereby preventing the second suggestive information from becoming visible due to the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit. As a result, the occurrence of presentation inconsistencies can be reduced, information related to the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and attention to the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3,
The first suggestion information is
The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the light guiding means is provided at a position where the optical path of light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of light emitted in the second direction intersect (for example, the lower flat portion and lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guiding plate 410).

Gaming machine G4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G1 to G3. That is, the first suggestion information is provided in the light-guiding means at a position where the optical path of light emitted in the first direction intersects with the optical path of light emitted in the second direction. That is, the first suggestion information, which can suggest to the player that the expectation of the predetermined gaming value being awarded is lower than that of the second suggestion information, is formed on the optical path of light emitted from both the first light-emitting unit and the second light-emitting unit. Here, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible due to the light corresponding to the second suggestion information, the light corresponding to the second suggestion information makes visible the second suggestion information, which has a higher expectation of the predetermined gaming value being awarded than that of the first suggestion information. Therefore, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible when the second suggestion information becomes visible, there is little discrepancy in presentation. This has the effect of minimizing inconsistencies in presentation and providing players with a natural game experience, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine at an unintended time, by providing first suggestion information with a lower expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value than the second suggestion information at the intersection of the optical path of the light in the second direction corresponding to the second suggestion information and the optical path of the light in the first direction corresponding to the first suggestion information.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4,
The second suggestion information is
Gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the light guide means is provided at a position (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410) where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect, and is provided on the front side of the display means when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

Gaming machine G5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G1 to G4. Specifically, the second suggestive information is provided on the front side of the display means when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, at a position in the light-guiding means where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction does not intersect with the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction. This makes it possible to execute both the display means capable of executing a predetermined effect related to the game and the suggestive information indicating the expected degree of award of a predetermined game value in the part of the rear side of the gaming machine where the optical path of the light in the first direction does not intersect with the optical path of the light in the second direction in the effect means. This makes it possible to configure the predetermined effect and the suggestive information to be visible within the same field of view, thereby enhancing the effect of the display means and effect means, respectively, and increasing attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5,
The production means is
The gaming machine G6 is characterized by being equipped with a second directivity improving means (for example, a front downward focusing lens 414d) that increases the directivity of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit.

Gaming machine G6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G1 to G5. That is, the directionality of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit is increased by the second directivity improvement means provided in the presentation means. As a result, when multiple pieces of suggestive information are provided in the presentation means, even if the presentation means executes a second suggestive presentation that can suggest to the player that the expectation of awarding a predetermined gaming value is higher than the first suggestive information, the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit can be accurately directed to the position where the second suggestive information is provided, making the second suggestive information visible from the front of the gaming machine, thereby accurately suggesting information about the game to the player and increasing attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G6,
The light guiding means is
a first emission section (for example, a vertical groove forming each bubble symbol of the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that emits or easily emits light irradiated in the first direction toward the front side of the gaming machine and does not or does not easily emit light irradiated in the second direction toward the front side of the gaming machine;
Gaming machine G7 is characterized by being equipped with a second emission section (for example, a horizontal groove forming the sunfish pattern of the third decorative pattern 412, or each cherry blossom pattern group of the second decorative pattern group 411) that emits or easily emits light irradiated in the second direction toward the front of the gaming machine, and does not or does not easily emit light irradiated in the first direction toward the front of the gaming machine.

Gaming machine G7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G1 to G6. That is, the first emission section provided in the light-guiding means causes light irradiated in the first direction to be emitted or easily emitted toward the front of the gaming machine, while light irradiated in the second direction does not or is difficult to emit toward the front of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the second emission section provided in the light-guiding means causes light irradiated in the second direction to be emitted or easily emitted toward the front of the gaming machine, while light irradiated in the first direction does not or is difficult to emit toward the front of the gaming machine. That is, in the presentation means, light from the first direction makes the first suggestive information visible while making the second suggestive information invisible or difficult to observe, and light from the second direction makes the second suggestive information visible while making the first suggestive information invisible or difficult to observe, thereby enabling multiple suggestive information to be expressed even with a single presentation means. As a result, even if multiple pieces of suggestive information are provided in the presentation means, by controlling the light emission of the first light-emitting element or the second light-emitting element respectively, each piece of suggestive information can be made distinct and visible. By being able to express multiple pieces of suggestive information in the presentation means, the presentation effect of the presentation means can be enhanced, thereby increasing attention to the game.

<H group: one light guide plate with a flat shape and a curved shape, both shapes guide light from the flat part (do not guide light from the curved part)>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery for winning or the like based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and when a player wins, for example, the game machine pays out predetermined gaming media to the player in response to the fulfillment of predetermined winning conditions.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the machine, and a light-emitting unit that can change from a single color to a different light color. By changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game, etc., the presentation effect during play is enhanced (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP 2018-126296 A)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest in the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effects of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The H group invention was made in light of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

A presentation means (for example, a light guide unit 400) is provided to perform a predetermined presentation (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
a light-emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit) having a light-emitting portion (e.g., a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
and a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion,
The light guiding means is
At least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion),
a bent portion (e.g., an upper inverted R-shaped portion, a normal R-shaped portion, or a lower inverted R-shaped portion) bent in a predetermined direction from the flat plate-shaped portion,
The light emitting means is
A gaming machine H0 characterized in that it is arranged at a position corresponding to the specified portion on the flat plate-shaped portion.

According to the gaming machine H0, the presentation means produces predetermined presentations as the game progresses. The light-emitting means provided in the presentation means has a light-emitting portion that emits light, and when light emitted from the light-emitting means enters the light-guiding means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. The light-guiding means is provided with at least a predetermined flat-plate portion and a bent portion that bends in a predetermined direction from the flat-plate portion, and the light-emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to the predetermined portion of the flat-plate portion. This allows the light-emitting means to input light from a predetermined portion of the flat-plate portion of the light-guiding means into the light-guiding means, making the predetermined information visible. This has the effect of increasing the design freedom for the light-emitting means, accurately suggesting information related to the game to the player, and increasing attention to the game.

a first effect means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a first effect related to a game (for example, a variation effect of a third symbol);
A second performance means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) capable of executing a second performance related to the first performance (e.g., lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421),
The second production means is
a light-emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit 414) having a light-emitting portion (for example, a front lower LED 414c) that emits light;
and a light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that allows predetermined information related to a game (for example, a second decorative pattern group 411) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion,
The light guiding means is
At least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion),
a front side portion (for example, an upper inverted R-shaped portion, a normal R-shaped portion, or a lower inverted R-shaped portion) formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped portion and located on the gaming machine front side relative to the first presentation means;
The light emitting means is
The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that it is arranged at a position corresponding to the predetermined portion of the flat plate-shaped portion.

According to the gaming machine H1, the first presentation means is configured to be able to execute a first presentation related to the game, and the second presentation means is configured to be able to execute a second presentation related to the first presentation. Furthermore, the light-emitting means provided in the second presentation means is provided with a light-emitting section that emits light, and the light-guiding means also provided in the second presentation means is configured to make predetermined information related to the game visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion. Here, the light-guiding means is provided with at least a predetermined flat-plate-shaped portion and a front side portion formed continuously from the flat-plate-shaped portion and located further forward of the gaming machine than the first presentation means. The light-emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to the predetermined portion of the flat-plate-shaped portion. In other words, the light-guiding means is configured to allow light to enter from a predetermined portion of the flat-plate-shaped portion, rather than from a portion corresponding to the front side portion located forward of the first presentation means. This means that if light is directed toward the light-guiding means from the front side, the direction of travel of the incident light may change depending on the front side, making it difficult or impossible to display the desired information. Furthermore, light-emitting elements and other components must be positioned along (corresponding to) the shape of the front side, which may reduce design freedom. Furthermore, the front side is located on the gaming machine's front side of the first presentation means, and if light-emitting elements and other components are positioned to correspond to the front side, this may restrict design freedom for the second presentation means (light-guiding means). Therefore, by directing light toward a portion of the flat-shaped portion other than the front side in a second presentation means having a front side, the above-mentioned issues can be resolved effectively, thereby increasing design freedom for the second presentation means.

In the gaming machine H1,
The front side portion is
A gaming machine H2 characterized in that it is an external shape related part related to the external shape of the first presentation means.

Gaming machine H2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machine H1. Specifically, the front side is formed as an external shape-related portion related to the external shape of the first presentation means. This means that if light is to be incident from the external shape-related portion onto the light-guiding means, the direction of the incident light may be changed by the external shape-related portion, potentially making it difficult or impossible to display the specified information in the desired manner. Furthermore, light-emitting elements, etc., must be positioned along (corresponding to) the shape of the external shape-related portion, potentially reducing design freedom. Furthermore, the external shape-related portion is located on the front side of the first presentation means, and if light-emitting elements, etc., were positioned to correspond to the external shape-related portion, this could restrict the design freedom of the second presentation means (light-guiding means). This effectively solves the above-mentioned problem and increases the design freedom of the second presentation means by illuminating light from a portion of the flat-shaped portion that is not an external shape-related portion in a second presentation means having an external shape-related portion related to the external shape of the first presentation means.

In gaming machine H1 or H2,
The first production means
The gaming machine H3 is characterized by comprising a display means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of dynamically displaying identification information based on the determination result by the determination means.

Gaming machine H3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines H1 or H2. That is, the display means provided in the first effect means is configured to be able to dynamically display the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. As a result, when the outer shape related portion of the second effect means that executes the second effect related to the dynamic display of the identification information is formed in a shape related to the outer shape of the display means capable of executing said dynamic display, the second effect means having the outer shape related portion allows light to be incident from the flat-shaped portion, thereby advantageously resolving the above-mentioned problem and increasing the design freedom of the second effect means.

In gaming machine H3,
The display means
a reel (for example, a left reel LR) on whose circumferential surface a plurality of types of identifiable identification information are arranged;
a cylindrical rotating body (e.g., left reel unit 81a1) that is rotatable around a rotation axis that is concentric with the reel;
A gaming machine H4 characterized by having a driving means capable of rotating the rotating body.

Gaming machine H4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine H3. Specifically, the display means includes a reel with multiple types of identifiable information arranged on its periphery, configured to rotate around a rotation axis concentric with the reel by a cylindrical rotating body, and configured to rotate the rotating body by a drive means. Specifically, since the display means is formed cylindrically around the rotation axis to rotate the reel, the external shape-related portion of the second presentation means is also formed in a shape related to the cylindrical shape (e.g., a curved shape). In this case, if light is to be incident on the light-guiding means from the cylindrical external shape-related portion, the direction of travel of the incident light may be changed by the external shape-related portion, making it difficult or impossible to display the specified information in the desired manner. Therefore, by illuminating light from a flat portion in a second presentation means having a cylindrical external shape-related portion, the above-mentioned problem is preferably resolved, resulting in increased design flexibility for the second presentation means.

In any of gaming machines H1 to H4,
Acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is met;
a determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit,
A gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means,
The outer shape related part is
Gaming machine H5 is characterized in that, as the second presentation, it is configured to be able to execute first suggestion information (e.g., second decorative pattern group 411) as the specified information that can suggest the expectation of a specified gaming value being awarded to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means.

Gaming machine H5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines H1 to H4. Specifically, the acquisition means acquires special information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Furthermore, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Here, the external shape-related section is configured to be able to execute, as a second effect, first suggestion information as predetermined information that can suggest the likelihood of the player being awarded the predetermined gaming value based on the determination result by the determination means. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effects of the first and second presentation means, respectively, and increasing attention to the game, by performing the first presentation in the first presentation means while configuring the external shape-related section of the second presentation means associated with the external shape of the first presentation means to be able to execute first suggestion information as a second presentation indicating the likelihood of the player being awarded the gaming value.

In gaming machine H5,
The flat plate-shaped portion is
Gaming machine H6 is characterized in that, as the second presentation, it is configured to be able to execute second suggestive information (e.g., fourth decorative pattern group 413) that can suggest that the expectation of the player being awarded a predetermined gaming value is higher than the first suggestive information.

Gaming machine H6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine H5. That is, the flat-shaped portion is configured to be able to execute second suggestion information as a second effect, which can suggest that the player has a higher expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value than the first suggestion information. This has the effect of increasing attention to the game by making it possible to express multiple pieces of suggestion information in the second effect means, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect means.

<Group I: R-shape/reverse R-shape, a preview display of 1 is displayed up to the changeover point (decided part of the design display area), and no design is placed at the part where the R-shape changes>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery for winning or the like based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and when a player wins, for example, the game machine pays out predetermined gaming media to the player in response to the fulfillment of predetermined winning conditions.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the machine, and a light-emitting unit that can change from a single color to a different light color. By changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game, etc., the presentation effect during play is enhanced (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP 2018-126296 A)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest in the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effects of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions in Group I were made in light of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

A presentation means (for example, a light guide unit 400) is provided to perform a predetermined presentation (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
a light-emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit) having a light-emitting portion (e.g., a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
and a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion,
The light guiding means is
At least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion),
a first bent portion (e.g., an upper inverted R-shaped portion or a lower inverted R-shaped portion) bent in a predetermined direction from the flat plate-shaped portion;
a second bent portion (for example, a regular R-shaped portion) bent from the first bent portion in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
The predetermined information is
The gaming machine I0 is characterized in that the first bent portion and the second bent portion are arranged at a position that avoids the transition portion between them.

According to the gaming machine I0, the presentation means produces predetermined presentations as the game progresses. The light-emitting means provided in the presentation means has a light-emitting portion that emits light. When light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. The light-guiding means is provided with at least a predetermined flat-shaped portion, a first bent-shaped portion bent from the flat-shaped portion in a predetermined direction, and a second bent-shaped portion bent from the first bent-shaped portion in a direction opposite the predetermined direction. The predetermined information is provided at a position that avoids the transition between the first and second bent-shaped portions. This prevents the predetermined information from being unintentionally visible from the front of the gaming machine by not locating the predetermined information at the transition between the first and second bent-shaped portions, where the reflection of light irradiated into the light-guiding means may change irregularly. As a result, it is possible to appropriately express the specified information and execute effects that do not cause inconsistencies, and by accurately suggesting information about the game to the player, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

A presentation means (for example, a light guide unit 400) is provided to perform a predetermined presentation (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative pattern group 421) as the game progresses,
The production means is
a light-emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit) having a light-emitting portion (e.g., a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
and a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion,
The light guiding means is
At least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion),
a first bent portion (e.g., an upper inverted R-shaped portion or a lower inverted R-shaped portion) formed continuously from the flat plate portion and bent in a predetermined direction (e.g., toward the front of the gaming machine);
a second bent portion (e.g., a regular R-shaped portion) formed continuously from the first bent portion and bent in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (e.g., toward the rear of the gaming machine);
The light guiding means is
A gaming machine I1 characterized in that the predetermined information is positioned at a position that avoids the transition portion (e.g., transition point P) between the first curved shape portion and the second curved shape portion.

According to gaming machine I1, the presentation means produces predetermined presentations as the game progresses. The light-emitting means provided in the presentation means has a light-emitting portion that emits light, and when light emitted from the light-emitting means is incident on the light-guiding means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. The light-guiding means is provided with at least a predetermined flat-plate portion, a first bent portion formed continuously from the flat-plate portion and bent in a predetermined direction, and a second bent portion formed continuously from the first bent portion and bent in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction. The predetermined information is displayed at a position that avoids the transition between the first and second bent portions in the light-guiding means. This is because the reflection angle of light guided within the light guide means is not uniform on either surface of the light guide means at the transition between the first and second bent portions, and the amount of impinging light tends to be sparse. Even if predetermined information is placed at the transition, the predetermined information may not be properly displayed, and the predetermined information may not be visible at the appropriate time from the front of the gaming machine. Furthermore, while the predetermined information is configured to be visible only with light from a specified direction, if the predetermined information is placed at the transition, the predetermined information may be visible from the front of the gaming machine due to irradiation with light from a direction that would not normally be visible. This may result in discrepancies in the presentation content due to the predetermined information being visible at an unintended time. Therefore, by not placing the predetermined information at the transition between the first and second bent portions, where the reflection of light irradiated within the light guide means may change irregularly, but by placing the predetermined information at a position away from the transition, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being unintendedly visible from the front of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to appropriately express the specified information and execute effects that do not cause inconsistencies, and by accurately suggesting information about the game to the player, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

In the gaming machine I1,
The light guiding means is
A gaming machine I2 characterized in that first predetermined information as the predetermined information is arranged across the flat plate-shaped portion and the first bent-shaped portion.

Gaming machine I2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine I1. Specifically, first predetermined information is arranged as predetermined information across the flat plate-shaped portion and first bent portion of the light guiding means. Light guided within the flat plate-shaped portion of the light guiding means tends to have an even reflection angle, and the light guided from the flat plate-shaped portion is also guided relatively evenly at the first bent portion formed continuously from there. As a result, the predetermined information can be appropriately displayed, and information related to the game can be accurately suggested to the player, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine I1 or I2,
The light guiding means is
Second predetermined information (for example, a second decorative pattern group 411) different from the first predetermined information is arranged on the second bent shape portion,
The second predetermined information is
A gaming machine I3 characterized in that it is arranged so as not to straddle the first bent shape portion.

Gaming machine I3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines I1 and I2. Specifically, in the light guiding means, second predetermined information different from the first predetermined information is arranged in the second bent portion, and the second predetermined information is arranged so as not to straddle the first bent portion. Light guided within the second bent portion of the light guiding means tends to have a stable reflection angle, whereas light guided from the continuously formed first bent portion through the transition portion tends to have an uneven reflection angle, resulting in a sparse amount of impinging light, as described above. Therefore, by appropriately displaying the second predetermined information arranged within the range of the second bent portion, where the reflection angle of the guided light is stable, and accurately suggesting information about the game to the player, it is possible to increase attention to the game.

In gaming machine I3,
a predetermined information lottery means (e.g., MPU 221) for drawing a lottery to determine whether to execute a suggestion based on the predetermined information based on the determination result of the determination means;
The light guiding means is
The system is configured to be able to execute a suggestion based on the predetermined information based on the lottery result of the predetermined information lottery means,
The predetermined information is
The second predetermined information is configured to be able to suggest to a player that the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded is higher than that of the first predetermined information,
The light emitting means is
a first light-emitting unit (e.g., a front right LED 415c and a front left LED 416c) that emits light in a predetermined first direction (e.g., a left-right direction);
a second light-emitting unit (e.g., a front downward LED 414c) that emits light in a second direction (e.g., an upward direction) different from the first direction,
The light guiding means is
When the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit is incident on a predetermined first portion (for example, the left and right end faces of the lower flat portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light-guiding plate 410), the first predetermined information is visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit is incident on a second portion different from the first portion (for example, the lower end faces of the lower flat portion of the front light-guiding plate 410), the second predetermined information is visible from the front side of the gaming machine,
The production means includes at least
Gaming machine I4 is characterized by being equipped with a directivity improving means (for example, a front right focusing lens 415d or a front left focusing lens 416d) that increases the directivity of the light irradiated from the first light-emitting unit.

Gaming machine I4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine I3. That is, the predetermined information lottery means draws a lottery to determine whether a suggestion based on the predetermined information will be made based on the determination result of the determination means. Then, the light guiding means is configured to be able to make a suggestion based on the predetermined information based on the lottery result of the predetermined information lottery means. It is also configured to be able to suggest to the player that the second predetermined information has a higher expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value than the first predetermined information. Here, a first light-emitting unit provided in the light-emitting means irradiates light in a predetermined first direction, and a second light-emitting unit also provided in the light-emitting means irradiates light in a second direction different from the first direction. Furthermore, the light guiding means is configured so that when light emitted from the first light-emitting unit is incident from a predetermined first position, the first predetermined information is visible from the front of the gaming machine, and when light emitted from the second light-emitting unit is incident from a second position different from the first position, the second predetermined information is visible from the front of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the directivity improving means provided in the effect means increases the directivity of at least the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit. As a result, when multiple pieces of predetermined information are provided on the light-guiding means, even when the light-guiding means executes a suggestion based on the first predetermined information, which can at least suggest to the player that the expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value is lower than that of the second predetermined information, the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit can be accurately directed to the position where the first predetermined information is provided and not, or is difficult to reach, the position where the second predetermined information is provided, thereby preventing the second predetermined information from becoming visible due to the light emitted from the first light-emitting unit. As a result, the occurrence of inconsistencies in effect can be reduced, information related to the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and attention to the game can be increased.

In any of gaming machines I2 to I4,
The first predetermined information is
Gaming machine I5 is characterized in that the light guiding means is provided at a position where the optical path of light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of light emitted in the second direction intersect (for example, the lower flat portion and lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guiding plate 410).

Gaming machine I5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines I2 to I4. Specifically, the first predetermined information is provided in the light-guiding means at a position where the optical path of light emitted in the first direction intersects with the optical path of light emitted in the second direction. Specifically, the first predetermined information, which can indicate to the player that the likelihood of a predetermined gaming value being awarded is lower than the second predetermined information, is formed on the optical path of light emitted from both the first light-emitting unit and the second light-emitting unit. Even if the first predetermined information becomes visible due to the light corresponding to the second predetermined information, the light corresponding to the second predetermined information makes visible the second predetermined information, which has a higher likelihood of a predetermined gaming value being awarded than the first predetermined information. Therefore, even if the first predetermined information becomes visible when the second predetermined information becomes visible, there is little discrepancy in presentation. This has the effect of minimizing inconsistencies in presentation and providing players with a natural game experience, even if the first predetermined information becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine at an unintended time, by providing first predetermined information at the intersection of the optical path of the second-direction light corresponding to the second predetermined information and the optical path of the first-direction light corresponding to the first predetermined information, which has a lower expectation of awarding a predetermined game value than the second predetermined information.

In gaming machine I4 or I5,
The production means is
Gaming machine I6 is characterized by being equipped with a second directivity improving means (for example, a front downward focusing lens 414d) that increases the directivity of light emitted from the second light-emitting unit.

Gaming machine I6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines I4 or I5. Namely, the directionality of the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit is increased by the second directivity improvement means provided in the presentation means. As a result, when the presentation means is provided with multiple pieces of predetermined information, even if the presentation means executes a second predetermined presentation that can suggest to the player that the expectation of awarding a predetermined gaming value is higher than the first predetermined information, by accurately illuminating the position where the second predetermined information is provided with the light emitted from the second light-emitting unit so that the second predetermined information can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine, information regarding the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and attention to the game can be increased.

In any of gaming machines I4 to I6,
The light guiding means is
a first emission section (for example, a vertical groove forming each bubble symbol of the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that emits or easily emits light irradiated in the first direction toward the front side of the gaming machine and does not or does not easily emit light irradiated in the second direction toward the front side of the gaming machine;
Gaming machine I7 is characterized by having a second emission section (for example, a horizontal groove forming the sunfish pattern of the third decorative pattern 412 or each cherry blossom pattern group of the second decorative pattern group 411) that emits or easily emits light irradiated in the second direction toward the front of the gaming machine, and does not or does not easily emit light irradiated in the first direction toward the front of the gaming machine.

Gaming machine I7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines I4 to I6. Specifically, the first emission section provided in the light-guiding means causes light irradiated in a first direction to be emitted or easily emitted toward the front of the gaming machine, while light irradiated in a second direction does not or is difficult to emit toward the front of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the second emission section provided in the light-guiding means causes light irradiated in the second direction to be emitted or easily emitted toward the front of the gaming machine, while light irradiated in the first direction does not or is difficult to emit toward the front of the gaming machine. In other words, the presentation means makes the first predetermined information visible with light from the first direction while making the second predetermined information invisible or difficult to see, and makes the second predetermined information visible with light from the second direction while making the first predetermined information invisible or difficult to see, thereby enabling multiple predetermined information to be expressed even with a single presentation means. As a result, even if multiple pieces of predetermined information are provided in the presentation means, each piece of predetermined information can be made distinct and visible by controlling the light emission of the first light-emitting element or the second light-emitting element, respectively. By being able to express multiple pieces of predetermined information in the presentation means, the presentation effect of the presentation means can be enhanced, thereby increasing attention to the game.

<J group: Cover to prevent abnormal lighting due to light from the front side of the strong warning light guide plate (sunfish and bubble light guide plate, slit part of the display area forming member)>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery for winning or the like based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and when a player wins, for example, the game machine pays out predetermined gaming media to the player in response to the fulfillment of predetermined winning conditions.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the machine, and a light-emitting unit that can change from a single color to a different light color. By changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game, etc., the presentation effect during play is enhanced (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP 2018-126296 A)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effects of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions of Group J were made in light of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

a first effect means (for example, the light guide unit 400) that performs a first effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses;
a second effect means (for example, a confirmation lamp unit 310) for performing a second effect (for example, turning on or off the confirmation lamp 311) different from the first effect as the game progresses,
The first production means
a first light-emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit 414) having a first light-emitting portion (e.g., a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
and a light guide means (e.g., a rear light guide plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion,
The second production means is
a second light-emitting means (e.g., a confirmation lamp 311) having a second light-emitting unit that emits light (e.g., an LED that lights up the confirmation lamp 311);
A gaming machine J0 characterized in that a cover portion (e.g., lens cut 432) that reduces light from the second light-emitting means to the light-guiding means is provided between the specified information and the second light-emitting means.

According to gaming machine J0, a first presentation means produces a first presentation as the game progresses. A second presentation means produces a second presentation different from the first presentation as the game progresses. The first presentation means has a first light-emitting unit that emits light, and when light emitted from the first light-emitting unit is incident on the light-guiding unit from a predetermined location, predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine. The second presentation means has a second light-emitting unit that emits light. A cover unit provided between the predetermined information and the second light-emitting unit reduces the light from the second light-emitting unit that reaches the light-guiding unit. This prevents malfunction of the predetermined information due to light from the second light-emitting unit being irradiated onto the predetermined information. This prevents inconsistencies in presentation due to abnormal expressions, thereby accurately suggesting information related to the game to the player and increasing attention to the game.

In a gaming machine equipped with a first performance means (e.g., a light guide unit 400) that can execute a first performance (e.g., lighting or non-lighting of a first decorative pattern group 421) as a game progresses,
The first production means
a first light-emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit 414) having a first light-emitting portion (e.g., a rear lower LED 424) that emits light;
a first light guiding means (e.g., a rear light guiding plate 420) that allows predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident on a predetermined portion,
A gaming machine J1 is characterized by having a cover portion (e.g., lens cut 432) that reduces the amount of light at the position where the specified information is arranged in the light guiding means.

According to gaming machine J1, the first presentation means is configured to execute a first presentation as the game progresses. Furthermore, a first light-emitting unit that emits light is provided on a first light-emitting means provided on the first presentation means, and when light emitted from the first light-emitting means is incident from a predetermined location, the first light-guiding means provided on the first presentation means makes predetermined information related to the game visible from the front of the gaming machine. Here, the cover unit reduces the light directed at the position where the predetermined information is located on the first light-guiding means. This prevents malfunction of the predetermined information due to light from sources other than the first light-emitting means being irradiated onto the predetermined information, and by preventing inconsistencies in presentation due to abnormal expressions, information related to the game is accurately suggested to the player, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine J1,
The game device is provided with a second performance means (for example, a confirmation lamp unit 310) that can execute a second performance (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the confirmation lamp 311) that is different from the first performance as the game progresses, and the second performance means is
a second light-emitting means (e.g., a confirmation lamp 311) having a second light-emitting unit that emits light (e.g., an LED that lights up the confirmation lamp 311);
The cover portion is
A gaming machine J2 characterized in that it is arranged between the second light-emitting means and the predetermined information.

Gaming machine J2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine J1. That is, the second effect means is configured to be able to execute a second effect that differs from the first effect as the game progresses. Furthermore, a second light-emitting unit that emits light is provided on the second light-emitting means provided in the second effect means. A cover unit is then disposed between the second light-emitting means and the predetermined information. This prevents the predetermined information from malfunctioning when light from the second light-emitting means is irradiated onto the predetermined information when the first light-emitting means is not emitting light. By preventing the occurrence of inconsistencies in the effects due to abnormal expressions, information related to the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the game can be more closely watched.

In gaming machine J2,
The second light-emitting means emits light with a brightness stronger than that of the first light-emitting means when the second effect is executed.

Gaming machine J3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine J2. That is, when the second effect is executed, the second light-emitting means emits light with a brightness greater than that of the first light-emitting means. That is, when the second light-emitting means emits light, there is a possibility that the specified information in the first effect means will be affected. As a result, when the first light-emitting means is not emitting light, it is possible to prevent the specified information from malfunctioning due to light from the second light-emitting means being irradiated onto the specified information. By preventing the occurrence of inconsistencies in the effect due to abnormal expressions, it is possible to accurately suggest information about the game to the player and increase attention to the game.

In any of gaming machines J1 to J3,
The cover portion is
A gaming machine J4 is characterized in that it is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine relative to the first presentation means.

Gaming machine J4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines J1 to J3. That is, the cover unit is disposed closer to the front of the gaming machine than the first effect means. This reduces light from the front of the gaming machine, which is illuminated by the lighting in the gaming hall or by the effects of other gaming machines, using the cover unit. This prevents malfunction of specified information caused by light from sources other than the first light-emitting means being illuminated onto the specified information. By preventing inconsistencies in the effects caused by abnormal expressions, information related to the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the player's attention can be increased.

In any of gaming machines J1 to J4,
a third light-emitting means (e.g., a lower LED unit 414) having a third light-emitting portion (e.g., a front lower LED 414c) that emits light;
and a second light guiding means (e.g., a front light guiding plate 410) that allows second predetermined information related to a game (e.g., a second decorative pattern group 411) to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the third light emitting means is incident on a predetermined second portion,
The cover portion is the second light guiding means.

Gaming machine J5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines J1 to J4. Specifically, the third light-emitting means is provided with a third light-emitting unit that emits light, and when the light emitted from the third light-emitting means is incident from a predetermined second portion, the second light-guiding means makes second predetermined information related to the game visible from the front of the gaming machine. Here, the second light-guiding means is used as a cover. As a result, the second light-guiding means, which is configured to make the second predetermined information visible, is configured as a cover to reduce light toward the position where the predetermined information is located on the first light-guiding means. As a result, the second light-guiding means, which is provided with the second predetermined information, can prevent malfunction of the predetermined information due to light from sources other than the first light-emitting means being irradiated onto the predetermined information. This has the effect of accurately suggesting information related to the game to the player while executing multiple effects, thereby preventing inconsistencies in the effects due to abnormal expressions, and thereby increasing attention to the game.

<K group: One light guide plate produces strong and weak effects, and at least the weak area illumination is highly anisotropic (good linearity, no diffusion, condensing lens)>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery for winning or the like based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and when a player wins, for example, the game machine pays out predetermined gaming media to the player in response to the fulfillment of predetermined winning conditions.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the machine, and a light-emitting unit that can change from a single color to a different light color. By changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game, etc., the presentation effect during play is enhanced (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP 2018-126296 A)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest in the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effects of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions of Group K were made in light of the above circumstances, and aim to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is met;
a determination means (e.g., MPU 201) for making a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means,
a suggestion information lottery means (e.g., MPU 221) for drawing lots to select, based on the determination result by the determination means, at least, first suggestion information (e.g., fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest to the player the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded, or second suggestion information (e.g., third decorative symbol 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded is higher than that of the first suggestion information;
and a performance means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of executing the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information based on a result of the suggestive information selection means,
The production means is
a first light-emitting means (for example, a front right LED 415c or a front left LED 416c) capable of emitting light in response to the first suggestive information;
a second light-emitting means (for example, a front lower LED 414c) capable of emitting light in response to the second suggestive information;
a light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the second light emitting means emits light;
The gaming machine K0 is characterized by being equipped with at least a focusing means (for example, a front right focusing lens 415d or a front left focusing lens 416d) that focuses the light from the first light-emitting means and irradiates it onto the first suggestive information.

According to the gaming machine K0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the judgment means makes a judgment based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Here, the suggestive information lottery means, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, selects the execution of at least first suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player the expected probability of awarding the predetermined gaming value, or second suggestive information capable of suggesting to the player that the expected probability of awarding the predetermined gaming value is higher than the first suggestive information. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means, the performance means is configured to execute the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information. Here, a first light-emitting means provided in the performance means is configured to irradiate light onto the first suggestive information, and a second light-emitting means also provided in the performance means is configured to irradiate light onto the second suggestive information. The light-guiding means enables the first suggestive information to be visible from the front of the gaming machine when the first light-emitting means emits light, and the second suggestive information to be visible from the front of the gaming machine when the second light-emitting means emits light. The light-collecting means collects at least the light from the first light-emitting means and irradiates it onto the first suggestive information. This allows the light-collecting means to collect the light from the first light-emitting means and irradiate only the first suggestive information without irradiating the second suggestive information on the same light-guiding means, when the first suggestive information is made visible by the light emitted by the first light-emitting means. This prevents malfunction of the second suggestive information when the first suggestive information is made visible, and prevents inconsistencies in presentation due to abnormal expressions, thereby accurately suggesting information about the game to the player and increasing attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is met;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means,
A suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) for drawing lots to select whether to execute a suggestion based on suggestion information that can suggest the expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded to a player based on the determination result of the determination means;
and a performance means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of executing a suggestion based on the suggestion information based on a lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
The suggestive information includes at least
The presentation means has first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest to the player a predetermined expectation level that the predetermined game value will be awarded, and second suggestion information (for example, the third decorative symbol 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation level that the predetermined game value will be awarded is higher than the first suggestion information.
a first light-emitting means (for example, a front right LED 415c or a front left LED 416c) capable of emitting light in response to the first suggestive information;
a second light-emitting means (for example, a front lower LED 414c) capable of emitting light in response to the second suggestive information;
a light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and that makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the second light emitting means emits light;
The gaming machine K1 is configured so that the directivity of the light emitted from the first light-emitting means is higher than the directivity of the light emitted from the second light-emitting means.

According to the gaming machine K1, the acquisition means acquires special information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Furthermore, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the suggestive information lottery means draws a lottery to execute a suggestion using suggestive information that can suggest to the player the expected probability of awarding the predetermined gaming value, and the performance means is configured to execute the suggestion using the suggestive information based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means. The suggestive information includes at least first suggestive information that can suggest to the player the expected probability of awarding the predetermined gaming value, and second suggestive information that can suggest to the player that the expected probability of awarding the predetermined gaming value is higher than the first suggestive information. A first light-emitting means provided in the performance means illuminates the first suggestive information, and a second light-emitting means also provided in the performance means illuminates the second suggestive information. The light guiding means provided in the presentation means makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the second light emitting means emits light. Here, the directionality of the light emitted from the first light emitting means is configured to be higher than the directionality of the light emitted from the second light emitting means. When attempting to make visible the first suggestive information, which indicates a lower expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded than the second suggestive information, if the second suggestive information, which is provided on the same light guiding means and indicates a higher expectation of a predetermined game value being awarded than the first suggestive information, becomes visible, this may cause a discrepancy in the presentation content, and may prevent the realization of gameplay according to the game specifications. Therefore, by increasing the directionality of light at least for the first suggestive information, which has a low probability of being awarded a predetermined gaming value, and configuring the light to be directed toward the first suggestive information without diffusing, it is possible to display only the first suggestive information at the appropriate time, making it less likely that inconsistencies will occur in the presentation content.

In the gaming machine K1,
The gaming machine K2 is characterized by being equipped with at least a first directivity improving means (for example, a front right focusing lens 415d or a front left focusing lens 416d) that increases the directivity of the light emitted from the first light-emitting means and irradiates it onto the first suggestive information.

Gaming machine K2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine K1. That is, the first directivity improving means at least increases the directivity of the light emitted from the first light-emitting means and irradiates the first suggestive information. If an attempt is made to make visible the first suggestive information, which has a lower expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value than the second suggestive information, and if the second suggestive information, which is provided on the same light-guiding means and suggests a higher expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value than the first suggestive information, becomes visible, this could cause inconsistencies in the presentation content and prevent the game from being played according to the game specifications. Therefore, by configuring the light for at least the first suggestive information, which has a lower expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value, to be increased by the first directivity improving means and irradiated toward the first suggestive information without diffusing it, it is possible to display only the first suggestive information at the appropriate time, thereby reducing the likelihood of inconsistencies in the presentation content.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2,
Gaming machine K3 is characterized by being equipped with a second directivity improving means (e.g., a front downward focusing lens 414d) that increases the directivity of the light emitted from the second light-emitting means and irradiates it onto the second suggestive information.

Gaming machine K3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines K1 or K2. That is, the second directivity improving means increases the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting means and irradiates the second suggestive information. As a result, by configuring the light guiding means on which the two suggestive information are provided so that the light for each suggestive information is not diffused by each focusing means, each suggestive information can be displayed at the appropriate time, making it less likely that inconsistencies will occur in the presentation content.

In gaming machines K1 to K3,
a second effect means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect related to a game;
The light guiding means is
At least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion),
a front side portion (for example, an upper inverted R-shaped portion, a normal R-shaped portion, or a lower inverted R-shaped portion) formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped portion and located on the gaming machine front side relative to the second effect means;
The first light emitting means is
the flat plate-shaped portion is disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion,
The second light emitting means is
A gaming machine K4 characterized in that it is arranged at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion on the flat plate-shaped portion.

Gaming machine K4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines K1 to K3. Specifically, the second effect means is configured to enable a predetermined effect related to the game. The light-guiding means is provided with at least a predetermined flat-shaped portion and a front side portion formed continuously from the flat-shaped portion and located further forward of the gaming machine than the second effect means. The first light-emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion of the flat-shaped portion, and the second light-emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion of the flat-shaped portion. In other words, the light-guiding means is configured to allow light to enter from each portion of the flat-shaped portion, rather than from the front side portion. This means that if light is attempted to enter the light-guiding means from a front side portion located further forward of the gaming machine than the second effect means, the direction of the incident light would be changed by the front side portion, making it difficult or impossible to present the predetermined information in the desired manner. Furthermore, the light emitting means and other components must be positioned in accordance with the shape of the front side portion, which may reduce design freedom. Therefore, by directing light from each part of the flat plate-shaped portion in a light guiding means having a front side portion, the above problem can be effectively resolved, and design freedom for the light guiding means can be increased.

In the gaming machine K4,
The front side portion is
A gaming machine K5 characterized in that it is an external shape related part related to the external shape of the second presentation means.

Gaming machine K5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine K4. Specifically, the front side is formed as an external shape-related portion related to the external shape of the second presentation means. This means that if light is to be incident from the external shape-related portion onto the light-guiding means, the direction of the incident light may be changed by the external shape-related portion, which may make it difficult or impossible to present the suggestive information in the desired manner. Furthermore, light-emitting elements, etc., must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the external shape-related portion, which may reduce design freedom. Furthermore, the external shape-related portion is configured in a shape that follows the external shape of the second presentation means, and if light-emitting elements, etc., are arranged to correspond to the external shape-related portion, this may restrict the design freedom of the first presentation means (light-guiding means). This effectively solves the above problem and increases the design freedom of the first presentation means by illuminating light from a portion of the flat-shaped portion that is not an external shape-related portion in a first presentation means having an external shape-related portion related to the external shape of the second presentation means.

<L group: One light guide plate produces strong and weak effects, and at least the strong area illumination is highly isotropic (diffused lens, three-way lens)>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery for winning or the like based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and when a player wins, for example, the game machine pays out predetermined gaming media to the player in response to the fulfillment of predetermined winning conditions.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the machine, and a light-emitting unit that can change from a single color to a different light color. By changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game, etc., the presentation effect during play is enhanced (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP 2018-126296 A)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the interest in the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effects of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of Group L was made in light of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is met;
a determination means (e.g., MPU 201) for making a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means,
a suggestion information lottery means (e.g., MPU 221) for drawing lots to select, based on the determination result by the determination means, at least, first suggestion information (e.g., fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest to the player the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded, or second suggestion information (e.g., third decorative symbol 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation of the predetermined game value being awarded is higher than that of the first suggestion information;
and a performance means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of executing the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information based on a result of the suggestive information selection means,
The production means is
a first light-emitting means (for example, a front right LED 415c or a front left LED 416c) capable of emitting light in response to the first suggestive information;
a second light-emitting means (for example, a front lower LED 414c) capable of emitting light in response to the second suggestive information;
a light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the second light emitting means emits light;
The gaming machine L0 is characterized by being equipped with at least a diffusion means (for example, a rear upper diffusion lens 423 or a rear lower diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the second light-emitting means and irradiates it onto the second suggestive information.

According to gaming machine L0, lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is met, and a judgment means makes a judgment based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. A predetermined gaming value is then awarded to the player based on the judgment result by the judgment means. Here, the suggestive information lottery means, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, draws a lottery to execute at least first suggestive information that can suggest to the player the expected probability of awarding the predetermined gaming value, or second suggestive information that can suggest to the player that the expected probability of awarding the predetermined gaming value is higher than the first suggestive information. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means, the performance means is configured to execute the first suggestive information or the second suggestive information. Here, a first light-emitting means provided in the performance means is configured to irradiate light onto the first suggestive information, and a second light-emitting means also provided in the performance means is configured to irradiate light onto the second suggestive information. The light guide means makes the first suggestive information visible from the front of the gaming machine when the first light-emitting means emits light, and makes the second suggestive information visible from the front of the gaming machine when the second light-emitting means emits light. Here, the diffusion means diffuses at least the light from the second light-emitting means and irradiates it onto the second suggestive information. This ensures that the second suggestive information, which is important for the game, is illuminated with light and made clearly visible, thereby accurately suggesting information related to the game to the player and increasing attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is met;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means,
A suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU 221) for drawing lots to select execution of suggestion information that can suggest the expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded to a player based on the determination result of the determination means;
and a performance means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of executing a suggestion by the suggestion information based on a lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means,
The suggestive information includes at least
The presentation means has first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest to the player a predetermined expectation level that the predetermined game value will be awarded, and second suggestion information (for example, the third decorative symbol 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation level that the predetermined game value will be awarded is higher than the first suggestion information.
a first light-emitting means (for example, a front right LED 415c or a front left LED 416c) capable of emitting light in response to the first suggestive information;
a second light-emitting means (for example, a front lower LED 414c) capable of emitting light in response to the second suggestive information;
a light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and that makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the second light emitting means emits light;
The gaming machine L1 is characterized by being equipped with at least a diffusion means (e.g., a third upward diffusion lens 473) that diffuses the light from the second light-emitting means and irradiates it onto the second suggestive information.

In gaming machine L1, special information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is met, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Furthermore, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the suggestive information lottery means draws a lottery to execute a suggestion based on suggestive information that can suggest to the player the expected probability of being awarded the predetermined gaming value, and the performance means is configured to execute the suggestive information based on the lottery result of the suggestive information lottery means. The suggestive information includes at least first suggestive information that can suggest to the player the expected probability of being awarded the predetermined gaming value, and second suggestive information that can suggest to the player that the expected probability of being awarded the predetermined gaming value is higher than the first suggestive information. A first light-emitting means provided in the performance means irradiates light onto the first suggestive information, and a second light-emitting means also provided in the performance means irradiates light onto the second suggestive information. The light guiding means provided in the effect means makes the first suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the first light emitting means emits light, and makes the second suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the second light emitting means emits light. Here, the diffusion means diffuses at least the light from the second light emitting means and irradiates it onto the second suggestive information. Since the second suggestive information is an effect that has a higher expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value than at least the first suggestive information, it is necessary to comprehensively irradiate light onto the second suggestive information using the diffusion means so that the player can clearly recognize the second suggestive information. Furthermore, when making the first suggestive information visible, if the second suggestive information, which has a higher expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value than the first suggestive information, is also made visible, a discrepancy in presentation will occur. However, when making the second suggestive information visible, even if the first suggestive information, which has a lower expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value than the second suggestive information, becomes visible, the player will focus on the execution of the second suggestive information, which has a higher expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value, and will not pay as much attention to the execution of the first suggestive information, which has a lower expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value, so a discrepancy in presentation is unlikely to occur. Therefore, by using a diffusion means for the second suggestive information, which has a higher expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value, the presentation effect of the light guiding means can be enhanced, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine L1,
Gaming machine L2 is characterized by being equipped with a directivity improving means (e.g., a third right-direction focusing lens 475b and a third left-direction focusing lens 476b) that increases the directivity of the light emitted from the first light-emitting means and irradiates it onto the first suggestive information.

Gaming machine L2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine L1. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the first light-emitting means is increased by the directivity improvement means, and the light is irradiated onto the first suggestive information. When attempting to make visible the first suggestive information, which has a lower expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value than the second suggestive information, if the second suggestive information, which is provided on the same light-guiding means and suggests a higher expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value than the first suggestive information, becomes visible, this could cause inconsistencies in the presentation content, and could prevent the game from being played according to the game specifications. Therefore, by configuring the light for the first suggestive information, which has a lower expectation of being awarded a predetermined gaming value, to be irradiated onto the first suggestive information without being diffused by the directivity improvement means, at least, it is possible to display only the first suggestive information at the appropriate time, thereby reducing the likelihood of inconsistencies in the presentation content.

In gaming machine L1 or L2,
a second effect means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect related to a game;
The light guiding means is
At least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion),
a front side portion (for example, an upper inverted R-shaped portion, a normal R-shaped portion, or a lower inverted R-shaped portion) formed continuously from the flat plate-shaped portion and located on the gaming machine front side relative to the second effect means;
The first light emitting means is
the flat plate-shaped portion is disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion,
The second light emitting means is
A gaming machine L3 characterized in that it is arranged at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion on the flat plate-shaped portion.

Gaming machine L3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines L1 or L2. Specifically, the second effect means is configured to enable a predetermined effect related to the game. The light-guiding means is provided with at least a predetermined flat-shaped portion and a front side portion formed continuously from the flat-shaped portion and located further forward of the gaming machine than the second effect means. The first light-emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion of the flat-shaped portion, and the second light-emitting means is disposed at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion of the flat-shaped portion. Specifically, the light-guiding means is configured to allow light to enter from each portion of the flat-shaped portion, rather than from the front side portion. This means that if light is to be incident on the light-guiding means from a front side portion located further forward of the gaming machine than the second effect means, the direction of the incident light may be changed by the front side portion, making it difficult or impossible to present the predetermined information in the desired manner. Furthermore, the light emitting means and other components must be positioned in accordance with the shape of the front side portion, which may reduce design freedom. Therefore, by directing light from each part of the flat plate-shaped portion in a light guiding means having a front side portion, the above problem can be effectively resolved, and design freedom for the light guiding means can be increased.

In gaming machine L3,
The front side portion is
A gaming machine L4 characterized in that it is an external shape related part related to the external shape of the second presentation means.

Gaming machine L4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine L3. Specifically, the front side is formed as an external shape-related portion related to the external shape of the second presentation means. This means that if light is to be incident from the external shape-related portion onto the light-guiding means, the direction of the incident light may be changed by the external shape-related portion, which may make it difficult or impossible to present the suggestive information in the desired manner. Furthermore, light-emitting elements, etc., must be arranged along (corresponding to) the shape of the external shape-related portion, which may reduce design freedom. Furthermore, the external shape-related portion is configured in a shape that follows the external shape of the second presentation means, and if light-emitting elements, etc., are arranged to correspond to the external shape-related portion, this may restrict the design freedom of the first presentation means (light-guiding means). This effectively solves the above problem and increases the design freedom of the first presentation means by illuminating light from a portion of the flat-shaped portion that is not an external shape-related portion in a first presentation means having an external shape-related portion related to the external shape of the second presentation means.

<M group: multiple light guide plates, at least a separate light guide plate with a diffusion means>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery for winning or the like based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and when a player wins, for example, the game machine pays out predetermined gaming media to the player in response to the fulfillment of predetermined winning conditions.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the machine, and a light-emitting unit that can change from a single color to a different light color. By changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game, etc., the presentation effect during play is enhanced (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP 2018-126296 A)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effects of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The M Group invention was made in light of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

a first effect means (for example, the rear upper LED unit 422) for performing a first effect as the game progresses;
and second performance means (for example, a front right LED unit 415) for performing a second performance different from the first performance as the game progresses,
The first production means
a first light-emitting means (e.g., a rear upper LED 422c) that emits light;
a first light guiding means (e.g., a rear light guiding plate 420) that, when light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident on a predetermined first portion, makes first predetermined information related to the game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) visible from the front side of the gaming machine as the first performance;
The second production means is
a second light-emitting means (for example, a front right LED 415c) that emits light;
and a second light guiding means (for example, a front light guiding plate 410) that, when light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident from a predetermined second portion, makes second predetermined information related to the game (for example, a fourth decorative pattern group 413) visible from the front side of the gaming machine as the second performance,
The gaming machine M0 is characterized by being equipped with at least a diffusion means (e.g., a rear upper diffusion lens 423 or a rear lower diffusion lens 425) that diffuses the light from the second light-emitting means and irradiates it onto the second specified information.

According to the gaming machine M0, the first effect is produced by the first effect means as the game progresses, and the second effect means is used to produce a second effect different from the first effect as the game progresses. Here, light is emitted by the first light-emitting means provided in the first effect means, and when the light emitted from the first light-emitting means is incident on the first light-guiding means from a predetermined first portion, first predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine as the first effect. Furthermore, when light is emitted by the second light-emitting means provided in the second effect means, and when the light emitted from the second light-emitting means is incident on the second light-guiding means from a predetermined second portion, second predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine as the second effect. Here, the diffusion means diffuses at least the light from the second light-emitting means and irradiates it onto the second predetermined information. This has the effect of making the second presentation related to the second predetermined information more spectacular by illuminating the light diffused by the diffusion means, thereby increasing attention to the game.

a first effect means (for example, the front right LED unit 415) capable of executing a first effect as the game progresses;
and second performance means (for example, a rear upper LED unit 422) capable of executing a second performance different from the first performance as the game progresses,
The first production means
a first light-emitting means (for example, a front right LED 415c) that emits light;
a first light guiding means (for example, a front light guiding plate 410) that makes first predetermined information related to the game (for example, a second decorative pattern group 411) visible from the front side of the gaming machine as the first performance when light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident on a predetermined first portion,
The second production means is
a second light-emitting means (e.g., a rear upper LED 422c) that emits light;
and a second light guiding means (e.g., a rear light guiding plate 420) that, when light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident from a predetermined second portion, makes second predetermined information related to the game (e.g., a first decorative pattern group 421) visible from the front side of the gaming machine as the second performance,
The gaming machine M1 is characterized by being equipped with at least a diffusion means (e.g., a rear upward diffusion lens 423) that diffuses the light from the second light-emitting means and irradiates it onto the second predetermined information.

According to gaming machine M1, the first effect means is configured to execute a first effect as the game progresses, and the second effect means is configured to execute a second effect different from the first effect as the game progresses. Here, light is emitted by a first light-emitting means provided in the first effect means, and when the light emitted from the first light-emitting means is incident on the first light-guiding means from a predetermined first portion, first predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine as the first effect. Furthermore, when light is emitted by a second light-emitting means provided in the second effect means, and when the light emitted from the second light-emitting means is incident on the second light-guiding means from a predetermined second portion, second predetermined information related to the game becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine as the second effect. Here, the diffusion means diffuses at least the light emitted by the second light-emitting means and irradiates the second predetermined information. This allows the second presentation related to the second predetermined information to be displayed in a spectacular manner by illuminating the light diffused by the diffusion means, thereby increasing attention to the game.

In gaming machine M1,
The second performance is
The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that the first presentation has a higher expectation of awarding a predetermined gaming value.

Gaming machine M2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine M1. That is, the second effect is set as an effect with a higher expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded than the first effect. As a result, by employing a diffusion means for the second suggestive information with a high expectation of a predetermined gaming value being awarded, the effect of the light guiding means is enhanced, and attention to the game can be increased.

In gaming machine M1 or M2,
The predetermined portion is
a predetermined end of the second light guiding means,
The diffusion means is
Gaming machine M3 characterized in that it is formed integrally with a predetermined end of the second light guiding means.

Gaming machine M3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines M1 and M2. That is, the predetermined portion is a predetermined end of the second light guiding means, and the diffusion means is formed integrally with the predetermined end of the second light guiding means. This has the effect of increasing the design freedom of the second presentation means by forming the second light guiding means and the diffusion means integrally and reducing the number of parts in the second presentation means.

In any one of gaming machines M1 to M3,
As the first performance,
A predetermined first predetermined effect (for example, the fourth decorative pattern group 413),
a first specific effect (for example, a second decorative pattern group 411) that has a higher expectation of being awarded a predetermined game value than the first predetermined effect;
The first production means
Gaming machine M4 is characterized by being equipped with a directivity improving means (for example, a front right focusing lens 415d or a front left focusing lens 416d) that increases the directivity of the light irradiated from the first light-emitting means.

Gaming machine M4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines M1 to M3. Specifically, a predetermined first predetermined effect and a first specific effect that has a higher expectation of awarding a predetermined gaming value than the first predetermined effect are provided as first effects. The directivity of the light emitted from the first light-emitting means is increased by the directivity improvement means provided in the first effect means. As a result, when the first effect means is configured to be able to execute multiple first effects, the light emitted from the first light-emitting means can be accurately directed to the position where the desired first effect is provided and does not or makes it difficult for the light to reach the positions where other first effects are provided, thereby preventing undesired first effects from being visible due to the light emitted from the first light-emitting means. This has the effect of preventing inconsistencies in effects, accurately suggesting information about the game to the player, and increasing attention to the game.

<N group: pseudo stop symbol display control corresponding to symbol arrangement>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery for winning or the like based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and when a player wins, for example, the game machine pays out predetermined gaming media to the player in response to the fulfillment of predetermined winning conditions.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the machine, and a light-emitting unit that can change from a single color to a different light color. By changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game, etc., the presentation effect during play is enhanced (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP 2018-126296 A)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effects of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The N Group invention was made in light of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is met;
a determination means (e.g., MPU 201) for making a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
dynamic execution means (for example, a display control device 114) for dynamically displaying the identification information on a display means (for example, a drum display device 81) based on the determination result of the determination means;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The display means
Three rotating members (e.g., a left reel LR, a center reel CR, and a right reel RR) on each of which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged;
a rotation driving means (e.g., a motor) for driving the rotation members;
a drive control means (for example, an MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The rotating member is
a common rotating member (e.g., a left reel LR and a right reel RR) configured only with the identification information common to the rotating members;
a non-common rotating member (e.g., a center reel CR) including non-common identification information that is not included in the common rotating member;
The drive control means
a step change means for gradually changing the previous stage identification information forming the combination of identification information of the previous stage of the predetermined display result (for example, a "reach display") (for example, changing a reach formation symbol from "5" to "6" to "7");
The step change means
Gaming machine No. 0 is characterized in that when the previous stage identification information is changed in stages, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as not to include the non-common identification information contained in the non-common rotating member.

In gaming machine N0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information upon the fulfillment of a predetermined start condition, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays identification information on the display means. Furthermore, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the display means is provided with three rotating members, each of which has multiple types of identification information arranged thereon. The rotating members are each rotationally driven by the rotation drive means, and the rotation drive means is controlled by the drive control means. The common rotating members of the rotation means are composed only of identification information common to the rotating members, and the non-common rotating members are composed of non-common identification information not included in the common rotating members. Here, the previous-stage identification information that forms the combination of identification information for the previous stage of the predetermined display result is gradually changed by the step change means provided in the drive control means. When the stage-changing means changes the previous-stage identification information in stages, the combination of previous-stage identification information is changed so that the non-shared identification information contained in the non-shared rotating member is not included. This has the effect of creating a natural presentation without any inconsistencies in presentation, thereby increasing attention to the game.

<Na group: Excluding reach formation patterns with non-common identification information>
Acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is met;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
dynamic execution means (for example, a display control device 114) for dynamically displaying the identification information on a performance means (for example, a drum display device 81) based on the determination result of the determination means;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The production means is
At least two or more rotation means (for example, a left reel LR, a center reel CR, and a right reel RR) on which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged;
Rotation drive means (e.g., stepping motor 600) for rotating each of the rotation means;
a drive control means (for example, an MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The rotating means is
a common rotation means (for example, a left reel LR and a right reel RR) on which common identification information, which is the common identification information, is arranged;
a non-common rotation means (for example, a center reel CR) on which the common identification information and non-common identification information not included in the arrangement of the common rotation means are arranged,
The drive control means
a step change means for gradually changing the previous stage identification information forming the combination of the identification information of the previous stage of the predetermined display result (for example, a "reach display") (for example, changing a reach formation symbol from "1" to "2" to "3");
The step change means
A gaming machine Na1 characterized in that when the previous stage identification information is changed in stages, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as not to include the non-common identification information included in the non-common rotation means.

In gaming machine Na1, special information is acquired by an acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is met, and a determination is made by a determination means based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Furthermore, based on the determination result by the determination means, a dynamic execution means dynamically displays identification information in a presentation means, and when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the presentation means is provided with at least two or more rotation means on which multiple types of identification information are arranged, and the rotation means are each rotated by a rotation drive means, and the rotation drive means is controlled by a drive control means. Furthermore, the rotation means is provided with a common rotation means on which common identification information, which is common identification information, is arranged, and a non-common rotation means on which the common identification information and non-common identification information not included in the arrangement of the common rotation means are arranged. Then, a previous-stage revealing means provided in the drive control means reveals previous-stage identification information that forms a combination of previous-stage identification information for a predetermined display result, and a step-changing means also provided in the drive control means changes the previous-stage information in steps. Here, when the step-changing means changes the previous-stage identification information in steps, the combination of previous-stage information is changed so as not to include non-shared identification information included in the non-shared rotation means. This has the effect of preventing inconsistencies in presentation and preventing players from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine Na1, at least the common rotating means is
the identification information is arranged to form a predetermined permutation (e.g., ascending or descending numerical order);
The step change means
The gaming machine Na2 is characterized in that the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine Na1, gaming machine Na2 achieves the following effect. That is, at least the identification information is arranged on the common rotation means to form a predetermined permutation. Then, the step-changing means changes the combination of previous-stage identification information to correspond to the predetermined permutation. As a result, when the previous-stage identification information is gradually changed to correspond to the predetermined permutation, previous-stage identification information based on non-common identification information that can only exist on the non-common rotation means is not revealed. This has the effect of preventing inconsistencies in the presentation and preventing players from feeling uncomfortable and losing interest, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine Na1 or Na2,
The dynamic execution means
Gaming machine Na3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a dynamic continuation means that continues the dynamic display when the non-common identification information appears in the non-common rotation means, regardless of which of the identification information appears in the common rotation means.

Gaming machine Na3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines Na1 and Na2. That is, regardless of which identification information is displayed on the shared rotation means, if non-shared identification information is displayed on the non-shared rotation means, the dynamic display is continued by the dynamic continuation means provided in the dynamic execution means. This creates a gameplay element in which the dynamic display continues depending on whether non-shared identification information is displayed, drawing attention to the rotation pattern of the non-shared rotation means and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine Na3,
The dynamic display means
A predetermined first performance,
A second performance that makes it easier for the predetermined display result to appear than the first performance;
The dynamic continuation means
The gaming machine Na4 is characterized in that when the non-common identification information appears in the non-common rotation means, the second performance is executed.

Gaming machine Na4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine Na3. That is, the dynamic display means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined first effect and a second effect that is more likely to produce a predetermined display result than the first effect, and when non-shared identification information appears on the non-shared rotation means, the dynamic continuation means executes the second effect. This creates a gameplay feature in which the second effect that is more likely to produce a predetermined display result is executed depending on whether or not non-shared identification information appears, and has the effect of drawing attention to whether or not non-shared identification information appears when the non-shared rotation means rotates, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines Na1 to Na4,
The dynamic execution means
In the dynamic display, one of the rotation means is configured to be able to display a plurality of the identification information, and two of the common rotation means are configured to be able to stop earlier than the non-common rotation means,
The common rotating means is
Gaming machine Na5 is characterized in that the order of arrangement of the common identification information in one common rotation means (e.g., descending order) is reversed to the order of arrangement of the common identification information in the other common rotation means (e.g., ascending order).

Gaming machine Na5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines Na1 to Na4. That is, the dynamic execution means allows multiple identification information to appear on one rotation means in the dynamic display, and the second common rotation means is configured to be able to stop before the non-common rotation means, and the common rotation means are arranged so that the order of the common identification information on one common rotation means is reversed from the order of the common identification information on the other common rotation means. This allows multiple previous-stage identification information to be generated on the common rotation means that can stop first, and increases the variety of positions at which one previous-stage identification information appears, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines Na1 to Na5,
The non-common rotation means is
A gaming machine Na6 characterized in that the identification information is arranged in the same order (e.g., ascending order) as the order (e.g., ascending order) of the identification information in at least one of the common rotation means.

Gaming machine Na6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines Na1 to Na5. That is, in the non-shared rotation means, the identification information is arranged in at least the same order as the order of the identification information in the one shared rotation means. This makes it possible to standardize the order in which the identification information appears in the one shared rotation means and the non-shared rotation means, making it easier for players to recognize the order in which the identification information appears.

In any of the gaming machines Na2 to Na6,
The non-shared identification information is
The gaming machine Na7 is characterized in that it is arranged in the middle of the predetermined sequence in the non-common rotating means.

Gaming machine Na7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines Na2 to Na6. Namely, the non-shared identification information is arranged in the middle of a predetermined sequence in the non-shared rotation means. This creates an element of surprise in the predetermined sequence of identification information in the non-shared rotation means when non-shared identification information not included in the shared rotation means appears, thereby increasing the variety of games and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

<Nb group: Excluding reach-forming symbols with identification information that can give a large profit to the player>
Acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is met;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
dynamic execution means (for example, a display control device 114) for dynamically displaying the identification information on a performance means (for example, a drum display device 81) based on the determination result of the determination means;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The production means is
At least two or more rotation means (for example, a left reel LR, a center reel CR, and a right reel RR) on which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged;
Rotation drive means (e.g., stepping motor 600) for rotating each of the rotation means;
a drive control means (for example, an MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means;
The drive control means
a previous stage display means for displaying previous stage identification information forming a combination of the identification information of a previous stage of the predetermined display result (for example, a "reach display");
a step change means for changing the preceding step information step by step (for example, changing the reach formation symbol from "1" to "2" to "3");
The identification information is
a first identification information (for example, a "2" symbol) that can provide a player with a predetermined first benefit when it appears as the predetermined display result;
and second identification information (for example, a "7" symbol) that can award a second advantage greater than the first advantage to the player when the second identification information appears as the predetermined display result,
The step change means
A gaming machine Nb1 characterized in that, while gradually changing the previous stage identification information, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as not to include the previous stage identification information based on the second identification information.

In gaming machine Nb1, special information is acquired by an acquisition means upon the fulfillment of a predetermined start condition, and a determination is made by a determination means based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Furthermore, based on the determination result by the determination means, a dynamic execution means dynamically displays identification information in a presentation means, and when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the presentation means is provided with at least two or more rotation means on which multiple types of identification information are arranged, and the rotation means are each rotated by a rotation drive means, and the rotation drive means is controlled by a drive control means. Furthermore, a previous-stage identification information forming a combination of identification information of a previous stage of the predetermined display result is revealed by a previous-stage revealing means provided in the drive control means, and the previous-stage information is changed in stages by a stage change means also provided in the drive control means. Here, the identification information includes a first identification information that can award a predetermined first benefit to the player when it is displayed as a predetermined display result, and a second identification information that can award a second benefit greater than the first benefit to the player when it is displayed as a predetermined display result. The stage change means changes the combination of previous-stage identification information so that previous-stage information based on the second identification information is not included during the stepwise change of the previous-stage identification information. This has the effect of preventing the player from losing interest in the game due to feeling that the benefit that can be awarded has decreased, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine Nb1, the rotating means is
the identification information is arranged to form a predetermined permutation (e.g., ascending or descending numerical order);
The step change means
A gaming machine Nb2 characterized in that the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation.

Gaming machine Nb2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine Nb1. That is, the identification information is arranged on the rotation means to form a predetermined permutation. Then, the stage change means changes the combination of previous-stage identification information to correspond to the predetermined permutation. As a result, when the previous-stage identification information is changed in stages to correspond to the predetermined permutation, the second identification information, which can award the player a greater benefit than the first identification information, is not displayed as an intermediate stage of the previous-stage identification information, which can change in stages. This has the effect of preventing the player from losing interest in the game due to feeling that the benefit that can be awarded has decreased, and thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In gaming machine Nb1 or Nb2,
The rotating means is
Gaming machine Nb3 is characterized by being equipped with an alternating arrangement means for alternating the first identification information and the second identification information (for example, the ``1'' → ``2'' → ``3'' part, or the ``5'' → ``6'' → ``7'' → ``8'' part).

Gaming machine Nb3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines Nb1 or Nb2. That is, the first identification information and the second identification information are alternately arranged in the alternating arrangement means of the rotation means. This allows the first identification information and the second identification information to appear alternately in the dynamic display, increasing the variety of the game. Furthermore, when the previous-stage identification information is changed in stages, the second identification information, which can provide the player with a greater benefit than the first identification information, is not displayed in the intermediate stages of the previous-stage identification information, which can change in stages. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to a perception that the potential benefit has decreased, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In any one of gaming machines Nb1 to Nb3,
The step change means
at least a predetermined first previous stage identification information, which is the previous stage identification information, is displayed, and then the first previous stage identification information is rotated to display a second previous stage identification information which can constitute a part of the predetermined display result;
The step change means
A gaming machine Nb4 characterized in that the first preliminary stage identification information is not displayed as the preliminary stage identification information using the second identification information.

Gaming machine Nb4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines Nb1 to Nb3. That is, the stage change means is configured to rotate the first previous-stage identification information, which is the previous-stage information, so that the first previous-stage identification information can be rotated to reveal a second previous-stage identification information that can form part of the predetermined display result. The stage change means is also configured to prevent the previous-stage identification information based on the second identification information from appearing as the first previous-stage identification information. This has the effect of preventing the player from losing interest in the game due to a perception by the player that the potential benefit has decreased, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In gaming machine Nb4,
The step change means
A gaming machine Nb5 characterized in that the second preliminary stage identification information can be displayed as the preliminary stage identification information using the second identification information.

Gaming machine Nb5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine Nb4. That is, the stage change means is configured to be able to display previous-stage identification information based on the second identification information as second previous-stage identification information. When the second identification information can be displayed as previous-stage identification information that constitutes part of a predetermined display result, displaying previous-stage identification information based on the second identification information that has a large potential benefit to be awarded to the player has the effect of increasing the variety of games while preventing the player from feeling that the potential benefit has decreased, thereby preventing them from losing interest in the game and increasing their interest in the game.

In any of gaming machines Nb1 to Nb5,
The dynamic execution means
When the determining means determines that the predetermined display result will not appear, the previous stage identification information based on the second identification information is unlikely to appear,
A gaming machine Nb6 characterized in that it is configured so that when the judgment means judges that the predetermined display result will appear, the previous stage identification information is likely to appear using the second identification information.

Gaming machine Nb6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines Nb1 to Nb5. That is, the dynamic execution means is configured to make it difficult for the previous-stage identification information based on the second identification information to appear when the determination means determines that the predetermined display result will not appear, and is configured to make it easy for the previous-stage identification information based on the second identification information to appear when the determination means determines that the predetermined display result will appear. This makes it possible to indicate the degree of expectation for the predetermined display result when the previous-stage identification information appears, thereby increasing the variety of games and, when the previous-stage identification information is changed in stages, by not making the second identification information, which can award the player a greater benefit than the first identification information, appear at intermediate stages of the previous-stage identification information that can change in stages, preventing the player from losing interest in the game due to a perception that the potential benefit has decreased, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

<Nc group: Excluding reach formation patterns based on identification information that triggers development performance>
Acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is met;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
dynamic execution means (for example, a display control device 114) for dynamically displaying the identification information on a performance means (for example, a drum display device 81) based on the determination result of the determination means;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The production means is
At least two or more rotation means (for example, a left reel LR, a center reel CR, and a right reel RR) on which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged;
Rotation drive means (e.g., stepping motor 600) for rotating each of the rotation means;
a drive control means (for example, an MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The drive control means
a previous stage display means for displaying previous stage identification information forming a combination of the identification information of a previous stage of the predetermined display result (for example, a "reach display");
A step change means for changing the preceding step information step by step (for example, changing the reach formation symbol from "1" to "2" to "3");
The identification information is
The game machine includes development identification information (e.g., a "chance" symbol) that can become advance stage information by the advance stage revealing means when it appears on a plurality of the rotation means,
The step change means
The gaming machine Nc1 is characterized in that, in the process of gradually changing the previous stage identification information, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as not to include the previous stage identification information due to the advanced identification information.

In gaming machine Nc1, special information is acquired by an acquisition means upon the fulfillment of a predetermined start condition, and a determination is made by a determination means based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Furthermore, based on the determination result by the determination means, a dynamic execution means dynamically displays identification information in a presentation means. When a predetermined display result is revealed in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the presentation means is provided with at least two or more rotation means on which multiple types of identification information are arranged, and the rotation means are each rotated by a rotation drive means, and the rotation drive means is controlled by a drive control means. Furthermore, a previous-stage manifestation means provided in the drive control means reveals previous-stage identification information that forms a combination of previous-stage identification information of the predetermined display result, and a stage change means also provided in the drive control means gradually changes the previous-stage information. Here, when identification information is revealed by multiple rotation means, the previous-stage manifestation means provides an advanced identification information that can become previous-stage information. The stage change means then changes the combination of previous-stage information so that the previous-stage information resulting from the development identification information is not included during the gradual change of the previous-stage identification information. This has the effect of preventing the development identification information, which is only a part of the previous-stage identification information, from appearing as an intermediate stage of the previous-stage identification information that can change in stages when the previous-stage identification information is changed in stages, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game due to the progress of the presentation becoming unclear when the development identification information appears even though the previous-stage identification information has already appeared, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine Nc1, the rotating means is
the identification information is arranged to form a predetermined permutation (e.g., ascending or descending numerical order);
The step change means
A gaming machine Nc2 characterized in that the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as to correspond to the predetermined permutation.

Gaming machine Nc2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine Nc1. That is, the identification information is arranged on the rotation means to form a predetermined permutation. Then, the stage change means changes the combination of previous-stage identification information to correspond to the predetermined permutation. As a result, when the previous-stage identification information is changed in stages to correspond to the predetermined permutation, the advanced identification information, which is only a part of the previous-stage identification information, does not reveal intermediate stages of the previous-stage identification information that can change in stages. This has the effect of preventing players from losing interest in the game when the progress of the presentation becomes unclear due to the appearance of the advanced identification information even though the stage identification information has been revealed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In gaming machine Nc1 or Nc2,
The step change means
at least a predetermined first previous stage identification information, which is the previous stage identification information, is displayed, and then the first previous stage identification information is rotated to display a second previous stage identification information which can constitute a part of the predetermined display result;
The step change means
A gaming machine Nc3 characterized in that the first preliminary stage identification information is not displayed by the development identification information.

Gaming machine Nc3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines Nc1 or Nc2. That is, the stage change means is configured to at least reveal a predetermined first previous-stage identification, which is previous-stage information, and then rotate the first previous-stage identification to reveal a second previous-stage identification, which may constitute part of a predetermined display result. The stage change means is also configured not to reveal previous-stage identification based on development identification as the first previous-stage identification. This has the effect of preventing development identification, which is only a part of the previous-stage identification, from revealing intermediate stages of the previous-stage identification, which may change in stages, when the previous-stage identification is changed in stages, thereby preventing players from losing interest in the game due to the progress of the presentation becoming unclear when development identification information appears even though the stage identification information has already been revealed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine Nc3,
The step change means
A gaming machine Nc4 characterized in that the stage identification information based on the development identification information is not revealed as the second stage identification information.

Gaming machine Nc4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine Nc3. That is, the stage change means is configured so that previous-stage identification information based on development identification information does not appear as second previous-stage identification information. As a result, when previous-stage identification information is changed in stages, development identification information, which is only a part of the previous-stage identification information, is not made to appear even in the second previous-stage identification information, which is the final stage of previous-stage identification information that can change in stages. This has the effect of preventing players from losing interest in the game due to the progress of the presentation becoming unclear when development identification information appears even when stage identification information has appeared, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In any one of gaming machines Nc1 to Nc4,
The step change means
A gaming machine Nc5 characterized in that when the previous stage identification information is changed in stages, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed in stages by omitting the advanced identification information.

Gaming machine Nc5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines Nc1 to Nc4. That is, when the previous-stage identification information is changed in stages by the stage change means, the combination of previous-stage identification information is changed in stages by omitting the development identification information. As a result, when the previous-stage identification information is changed in stages, the development identification information, which is only a part of the previous-stage identification information, is changed from the previous-stage identification information that can be changed in stages. This has the effect of preventing players from losing interest in the game when the progress of the presentation becomes unclear due to the appearance of the development identification information even though the previous-stage identification information has already appeared, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc5,
The dynamic display means
A predetermined first performance,
A second performance that makes it easier for the predetermined display result to appear than the first performance;
The dynamic execution means
A gaming machine Nc6 characterized in that the second performance is executed when the development identification information appears in all of the rotation means.

Gaming machine Nc6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines Nc1 to Nc5. That is, the dynamic display means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined first effect and a second effect that is more likely to produce a predetermined display result than the first effect, and when development identification information appears on all of the rotation means, the dynamic execution means executes the second effect. This creates a gameplay feature in which the second effect that is more likely to produce a predetermined display result is executed depending on whether development identification information appears on all of the rotation means, and has the effect of drawing attention to whether development identification information appears on all of the rotation means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine Nc6,
The dynamic execution means
Gaming machine Nc7 is characterized in that when the development identification information appears as the previous stage identification information, the game does not progress to the second performance.

Gaming machine Nc7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine Nc6. That is, the dynamic execution means is configured to prevent progression to the second performance when development identification information appears as previous-stage identification information. In other words, the performance is configured not to progress to the second performance unless development identification information appears on all of the rotation means. This creates a gameplay feature in which the second performance, which is likely to produce a predetermined display result, is executed depending on whether development identification information appears on all of the rotation means, and has the effect of drawing attention to whether development identification information appears on all of the rotation means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

<O group: Delay synchronization control of the left pattern row during full rotation and time synchronization with the sound>
Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery for winning or the like based on the fulfillment of predetermined starting conditions, and when a player wins, for example, the game machine pays out predetermined gaming media to the player in response to the fulfillment of predetermined winning conditions.

This gaming machine is equipped with presentation means such as a display unit that can change the patterns visible from the front of the machine, and a light-emitting unit that can change from a single color to a different light color. By changing the display mode of the presentation means according to the progress of the game, etc., the presentation effect during play is enhanced (for example, Patent Document 1 (JP 2018-126296 A)).

For such gaming machines, in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, it is necessary to increase the attention to the game by improving the presentation effects of the above presentation means, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of Group O was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively increase attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is met;
a determination means (e.g., MPU 201) for making a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
dynamic execution means (for example, a display control device 114) for dynamically displaying the identification information on a display means (for example, a drum display device 81) based on the determination result of the determination means;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The display means
Three rotating members (e.g., a left reel LR, a center reel CR, and a right reel RR) on each of which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged;
a rotation driving means (e.g., a motor) for driving the rotation members;
a drive control means (for example, an MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The drive control means
two-member synchronous drive means for driving the rotating members in synchronization with each other while the identification information of at least two of the rotating members is aligned (for example, by aligning the symbols on the center reel CR and the right reel RR and changing them in synchronization);
a three-member synchronous drive means for synchronously driving the rotating members (for example, for synchronously changing the symbols on the reels LR, CR, and RR) in a state in which the identification information of the rotating members that are synchronously driven to rotate by the two-member synchronous drive means is aligned with the identification information of the remaining rotating member;
The gaming machine O0 is characterized by being equipped with a music synchronization means (for example, music output when the rotating member is temporarily stopped after full rotation) that outputs music in accordance with the rotational drive of the rotating member, which is driven synchronously by the three-member synchronization drive means.

In the gaming machine O0, the acquisition means acquires lottery information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the judgment means makes a judgment based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the judgment result by the judgment means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays identification information on the display means. Furthermore, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Here, the display means is provided with three rotating members, each with multiple types of identification information arranged thereon, and the rotating members are rotationally driven by the rotation drive means, and the rotation drive means is controlled by the drive control means. Then, in the drive control means, the two-member synchronization drive means synchronizes the rotation members with the identification information of at least two of the rotating members, and the three-member synchronization drive means synchronizes the rotation members with the identification information of the rotating members rotated synchronously by the two-member synchronization drive means, with the identification information of the remaining rotating member being synchronized. Here, the music synchronization means outputs music in time with the rotation of the rotating members, which are driven synchronously by the three-member synchronization means. This allows for the creation of a rhythmic, fast-paced, and powerful performance, which has the effect of increasing attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, a reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is met;
A determination unit (e.g., MPU 201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition unit;
dynamic execution means (for example, a display control device 114) for dynamically displaying the identification information on a performance means (for example, a drum display device 81) based on the determination result of the determination means;
In a gaming machine that awards a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means,
The production means is
At least two or more rotation means (for example, a left reel LR, a center reel CR, and a right reel RR) on which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged;
Rotation drive means (e.g., stepping motor 600) for rotating each of the rotation means;
a drive control means (for example, an MPU of the display control device 114) for controlling the rotation drive means,
The drive control means
a first rotating means for rotating at least one of the rotating means (for example, rotating the center reel CR and the right reel RR);
a second rotation means (for example, rotating the left reel LR) that rotates one of the rotation means after the first rotation means rotates the other of the rotation means,
The gaming machine O1 is characterized by being equipped with a music output means (for example, music output when the rotation means is temporarily stopped during full rotation) that outputs music in response to the rotation of the rotation means rotated by the first rotation means and the second rotation means.

In the gaming machine O1, the acquisition means acquires special information when a predetermined start condition is met, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays identification information in the presentation means. When a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. The presentation means is provided with at least two or more rotation means on which multiple types of identification information are arranged, and the rotation means are rotated by the rotation drive means, and the rotation drive means are controlled by the drive control means. Furthermore, a first rotation means provided in the drive control means rotates at least one rotation means, and a second rotation means also provided in the drive control means rotates the other rotation means after the first rotation means rotates one rotation means. The music output means outputs music corresponding to the rotation of the rotation means rotated by the first rotation means and the second rotation means. This allows music to be output in response to the rotation of each rotating means, creating a sense of unity between the rotating means and the output music, thereby reducing the sense of incongruity that would otherwise be felt when the rotating means are rotated at different times, and increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine O1,
The first rotation means includes at least a two-means synchronized rotation means for rotating the two rotation means in synchronization with the first identification information of the two rotation means being aligned (for example, for synchronously changing the patterns of the center reel CR and the right reel RR by aligning the patterns of the center reel CR and the right reel RR),
The second rotation means is
a three-means synchronous rotation means (for example, synchronously changing the symbols on the reels LR, CR, and RR) that rotates the first identification information rotated in synchronization by the two-means synchronous rotation means and the first identification information on the other rotation means in an aligned state,
The music output means
The gaming machine O2 is characterized by being equipped with a music synchronization means (for example, music output when the rotation means is temporarily stopped after full rotation) that outputs music in response to the start of rotation of the rotation means that is rotated synchronously by the two-means synchronization rotation means and the three-means synchronization rotation means.

Gaming machine O2 achieves the following effects in addition to those of gaming machine O1. Specifically, the two-means synchronized rotation means provided in the first rotation means synchronizes rotation of at least two of the rotation means, aligning the predetermined first identification information. Furthermore, the three-means synchronized rotation means provided in the second rotation means synchronizes rotation of the first identification information rotated synchronously by the two-means synchronized rotation means with the first identification information of the other rotation means, aligning the first identification information. The music synchronization means provided in the music output means outputs music in response to the start of rotation of the rotation means rotated synchronously by the two-means synchronized rotation means and the three-means synchronized rotation means. This outputs music in response to the rotation of the rotation means rotated synchronously, creating a sense of unity between the synchronously rotated rotation means and the output music, thereby reducing the sense of incongruity that can arise from the rotation of rotation means rotated at different times and increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2,
The first rotation means is
A gaming machine O3 characterized in that at least one of the rotating means is rotated from a state in which all of the rotating means are not rotating.

Gaming machine O3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machines O1 or O2. That is, the first rotation means rotates at least one of the rotation means from a state in which none of the rotation means are rotating. As a result, by outputting music in response to the start of rotation of one rotation means, music is output in response to the rotation of each of the rotation means being rotated, and by creating an effect that creates a sense of unity between the rotating means being rotated and the output music, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity that may arise from the rotation of the rotation means being rotated at different times, and increase attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3,
The music output means
A gaming machine O4 characterized in that a predetermined music piece is continuously output from the time when the first rotation means starts rotating the rotation means until the time when rotation of all the rotation means stops.

Gaming machine O4 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines O1 to O3. That is, the music output means continuously outputs a predetermined piece of music from the time the first rotation means starts rotating the rotation means until the timing when all rotation means stop rotating. This creates a sense of unity between the rotation of the rotation means and the output of the music by outputting the predetermined music in response to the start of rotation of the first rotation means and continuing to output the predetermined music until the timing when all rotation means stop rotating. As a result, this sense of unity reduces the sense of incongruity that can arise from the rotation of the rotation means that are rotated at different times, and has the effect of increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine O4,
The music output means
outputting a first sound constituting the predetermined music piece at a timing when the first rotation means starts to rotate the rotation means;
A gaming machine O5 characterized in that a second sound that constitutes the predetermined music piece and is different from the first sound is output at the timing when the second rotation means starts to rotate the rotation means.

Gaming machine O5 achieves the following effect in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines O1 to O4. That is, the music output means outputs a first sound constituting a predetermined music piece when the first rotation means starts to rotate the rotation means, and a second sound constituting the predetermined music piece, different from the first sound, when the second rotation means starts to rotate the rotation means. This allows the first sound constituting the predetermined music piece to be output in response to the start of rotation of one rotation means, and the second sound constituting the predetermined music piece to be output in response to the start of rotation of the other rotation means, creating a sense of unity as the music is completed in response to the rotation of the rotation means. As a result, this sense of unity reduces the sense of incongruity that can arise from the rotation of rotation means that rotate at different times, and has the effect of increasing attention to the game.

In the gaming machine O5,
The music output means
A gaming machine O6 characterized in that the first sound and the second sound are output in time with the beat (e.g., the first and second beats in one measure) of a predetermined tempo (e.g., 4/4 time signature of BPM 120).

Gaming machine O6 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine O5. That is, the music output means outputs a first sound and a second sound in time with the beat of a predetermined tempo. This allows the first sound constituting the predetermined music to be output in time with the beat of a predetermined tempo in response to the start of rotation of one rotation means, and the second sound constituting the predetermined music to be output in time with the beat of a predetermined tempo in response to the start of rotation of the other rotation means, thereby creating a sense of unity in the music as the music of the predetermined tempo is completed in response to the rotation of the rotation means. As a result, this sense of unity reduces the sense of incongruity that can arise from the rotation of rotation means that rotate at different times, and has the effect of increasing attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines O5,
The music output means
A gaming machine O7 characterized in that the first sound and the second sound form a special sound (for example, a chord) that creates a predetermined harmony.

Gaming machine O7 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine O5. That is, the music output means creates a special sound that creates a predetermined harmony between a first sound and a second sound. This allows the first sound that constitutes the special sound to be output in response to the start of rotation of one rotating means, and the second sound that constitutes the special sound to be output in response to the start of rotation of the other rotating means, creating a sense of unity by completing the special sound with the predetermined harmony in response to the rotation of the rotating means. As a result, this sense of unity reduces the sense of incongruity that can arise from the rotation of rotating means that rotate at different times, and has the effect of increasing attention to the game.

In addition, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, or O0 may be applied to any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A9.

In addition, any of the configurations of the gaming machine B0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0.

In addition, any of the configurations of the gaming machine C0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0.

In addition, any of the configurations of the gaming machine D0 above may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 above.

In addition, any of the configurations of the gaming machine E0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0.

In addition, any of the configurations of the gaming machine F0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0.

In addition, any of the configurations of the gaming machine G0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0.

In addition, any of the configurations of the gaming machine H0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0.

In addition, any of the configurations of the above gaming machine I0 may be limited to any one of the above gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0.

In addition, any of the configurations of the gaming machine J0 above may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, K0, L0, M0, N0, and O0 above.

In addition, any of the configurations of the gaming machine K0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, L0, M0, N0, and O0.

In addition, any of the configurations of the gaming machine L0 above may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, M0, N0, and O0 above.

In addition, any of the configurations of the gaming machine M0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, N0, and O0.

In addition, any of the configurations of the above gaming machine N0 may be limited to any one of the above gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, and O0.

In addition, any of the configurations of the above gaming machine O0 may be limited to any one of the above gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, and N0.

In addition, any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A9 above may be limited to any one of the gaming machines B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7.

In addition, any of the configurations of the gaming machines B0 to B8 above may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7.

In addition, any of the configurations of the gaming machines C0 to C11 above may be configured with a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7.

In addition, any of the configurations of the above gaming machines D0 to D8 may be limited to any one of the above gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7.

In addition, any of the configurations of the gaming machines E0 to E7 above may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines F0 to F6, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may also be applied.

In addition, any of the configurations of the gaming machines G0 to G7 above may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines H0 to H6, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may also be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines I0 to I7, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may also be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines J0 to J5, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may also be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines K0 to K5, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may also be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines L0 to L4, a configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may also be applied.

In addition, any of the configurations of the gaming machines M0 to M4 above may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7.

In addition, any of the configurations of the above gaming machines N0, Na1-Na7, Nb1-Nb6, and Nc1-Nc7 may be limited to any one of the above gaming machines A0-A9, B0-B8, C0-C11, D0-D8, E0-E7, F0-F6, G0-G7, H0-H6, I0-I7, J0-J5, K0-K5, L0-L4, M0-M4, and O0-O7.

In addition, any of the configurations of the gaming machines O0 to O7 above may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, and Nc1 to Nc7.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine A0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine B0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine C0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C11.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine D0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine E0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine F0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine G0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines G1 to G7.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine H0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine I0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine J0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine K0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine L0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine M0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine No. 0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines Na1 to Na7.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine N0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines Nb1 to Nb6.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine N0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc7.

Note that the configuration of the gaming machine O0 may be limited to any one of the gaming machines O1 to O7.

In these cases, applying each configuration can produce even greater benefits.

Gaming machine Z1 is any one of gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7, characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "equipped with variable display means that dynamically displays a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information and then finalizes and displays the identification information, and includes: a start operation means (e.g., a control lever) that starts the dynamic display of the identification information; a stop operation means (a stop button) that stops the dynamic display of the identification information or the lapse of a predetermined time; and a special game state generation means that generates a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of gaming media include coins, medals, etc.

Gaming machine Z2 is any one of gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7, characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operating handle, which launches a ball into a predetermined play area in response to operation of the operating handle, and identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port located at a predetermined position within the play area. Additionally, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize device (big prize opening) located at a predetermined position within the game area opens in a predetermined manner, allowing balls to enter as prizes, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) is awarded according to the number of prizes won.

Gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, O0 to O7, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine equipped with variable display means that dynamically displays a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information and then definitively displays the identification information; variable identification information begins to change when a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever) is operated; the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped when a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) is operated or after a predetermined time has passed; and special gaming state generating means that generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information; the gaming machine uses balls as gaming media, requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
60a: First decorative symbol group on the board 60b: Second decorative symbol group on the board 81: Drum display device (part of the display means, part of the performance means, part of the second performance means)
110 Main control device 113 Audio lamp control device (part of sequential lighting means, part of music output means, part of music synchronization means)
114 Display control device (part of dynamic execution means, part of drive control means, part of previous stage display means, part of stage change means)
201 MPU (part of the determination means)
203f Reserved ball execution area (part of acquisition means)
221 MPU (part of the suggestion information lottery method)
222e Light guide plate lighting pattern table 222f Confirmed lamp lighting pattern table 223d Light guide pattern lottery counter 223e Confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 310 Confirmed lamp unit (part of the second performance means)
311 Confirmation lamp (part of the second effect means, part of the second light-emitting means)
400 Light guide unit (part of the performance means, part of the first performance means)
410 Front light guide plate (part of the first effect means, part of the second light guide means)
411 Second decorative pattern group 412 Third decorative pattern (part of second suggestive information)
413 Fourth decorative pattern group (part of the first suggestive information, part of the second predetermined information)
414 Lower LED unit (part of light emitting means, part of first light emitting means)
414c Front downward LED (part of second light emitting means)
414d Front downward condensing lens 415 Front right LED unit (part of the second effect means)
415c Front right LED (part of the first light-emitting means, part of the second light-emitting means)
415d Front right condenser lens (part of the condenser means)
416c Front left LED (part of the first light emitting means)
416d Front left condenser lens (part of condenser means)
420 Rear light guide plate (part of the light guide means, part of the second performance means, part of the first light guide means)
421 First decorative pattern group (part of predetermined information, part of third suggestive information, part of first predetermined information)
422 Rear upper LED unit (part of the first effect means)
422c Rear upper LED (part of the first light-emitting means)
423 Rear upper diffusion lens (part of diffusion means, part of multi-directional illumination means)
424 Rear lower LED (part of light-emitting part, part of first light-emitting part, part of second light-emitting part, part of third light-emitting part)
425 Rear downward diffusion lens (part of diffusion means, part of multi-directional illumination means)
425a Left direction diffusion section (part of first direction illumination section)
425b Front direction diffusion section (part of second direction illumination section)
425c Right-direction diffusion unit (part of the third-direction illumination unit)
430: Display area forming member 431: Central opening 432: Lens cut (part of cover part)
C1 Jackpot Random Number Counter (part of special information)
CR middle reel (part of the rotation means, part of the common rotation means, part of the second rotation means, part of the three-means synchronized rotation means)
LR Left reel (part of the rotation means, part of the non-common rotation means, part of the first rotation means, part of the two-means synchronized rotation means)
RR Right reel (part of the rotation means, part of the common rotation means, part of the first rotation means, part of the two-means synchronized rotation means)
600 Stepping motor (part of rotation drive means)

Claims (1)

a presentation means for performing a predetermined presentation as the game progresses;
The production means is
a light-emitting means having a light-emitting portion that emits light;
a light guide means for allowing a predetermined aspect of a game to be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine when light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the predetermined portion;
and a diffusion means for diffusing the light from the light emitting means beyond the width of the light emitting portion,
The diffusion means is
a multi-directional illumination means having at least a first direction illumination unit that illuminates light in a first direction when the light emitted from one of the light-emitting units is incident on a predetermined portion, and a second direction illumination unit that illuminates light in a second direction different from the first direction;
The diffusion means is
Two or more of the multi-directional irradiation means are provided for one of the light-emitting means,
The light guiding means is
At least a portion of the surface has a curved surface,
At least the curved surface allows the predetermined aspect to be visually recognized.
A gaming machine characterized by: